\9r^ ^. ^giL^ '^r^. ■♦'■I' »^ ^^, * ^ I-1? ^■"i-; iw4 a ...i*^ (K GIFT or Harold Wheeler I \ a. u^ oOf- ■;>5h_ c Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/firstbool > » J 5 ->,}'*] » ♦ SPANISH LANGUAGE: CONTAININO FULL INSTRUCTIONS IN PRONUNCIATION, A GRAMMAR; EXER CISES ON THE OLLENDORFF METHOD OF CONSTANT IMITATION AND REPETITION; READING LESSONS, AND A VOCABULARY. THE WHOLE ADAPTED FOR THE USB OF PRIVATE LEARNERS, 01 FOR CLASSES UNDER AN INSTRUCTOR. BY JOSEPH SAIHEID, A.M., Author of " A Compendiun^ of Classical Antiquities," etc. NE W y ORK: HARPER & BROTHERS' PUBLISHERS 1865. RESERVATION OPY ADDED Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 184^1, by HARPER & BROTHERS, [n the Clerk's OflBce of the District Court for the Southern District of New York. GIFT OF PREFACE. The Spanish Language has never been so extensively taught or studi- ed in our country, as some other foreign languages : this lack of interest in Spanish cannot be occasioned by any intrinsic defect in the language or literature itself; for whether we regard its metrical or prose romances, its ballads, lyrics, dramatic poetry, or its historical works, there is every inducement to become acquainted with its rich Uterary treasures. There is no other European language which can be so readily acquired by an Anglo- American, as the Spanish. It contains but one sound that has not almost, if not quite, its exact equivalent in English ; and this one can be very easily learned. UnHke English and French, it is not en- cumbered with silent letters (one of the greatest obstacles in acquiring the right pronunciation of those languages) ; nor are its vowels or con- sonants liable to any variation in the quality of their sound. As to the proper syllable of a word to be accented in pronunciation, Spanish pre- sents to the learner no diflficuity whatever; and this renders it far more easy of acquirement than the Itilian. Indeed, we cm hardly conceive of a 1 mguage more simple and philosophical in the principles of its orthoepy. In the departments of etymology and syntax, no modern language is more regular. The exceptions to the general principles are few ; and many of these will be found to correspond to similar exceptions in the grammar of our own language, so that they present, of course, less diffi- culty to the Engl sh learner. Perhaps one chief reason why Spanish has not received as much atten- tion as some other modern tongues, is to be found in the fact that there has been a want of proper inducements in the shape of an elementary instruction-book, to introduce, as it were, the learner to the language. It has hitherto been a fault of most English Grammars of the Spanish lan- guage that they were either close translations of French-Spanish Gram- mars, and, of course, not adapted to the wants of English learners, or written by Spanish instructors, who however well acquainted with the principles of their own language, have not understood critically the pe- culiarities of English idioms and forms of construction.* Grammar, too, has formerly consisted of a dry set of etymological forms and syntactical • We feel bound to remark here that most of these Spanish jjrammarians do not seem, in all respects, acquainted with their own language. To prove this assertion, we need only refer the learned inquirer to the unauthorized manner in which they pronounce the particles jwrywe, atmque, si'no ; and To the practice of sooje nf them of using the coujuoction e before y whea a cojisooaat j thus, tUcya, 968309 IV. PREFACl. rules, a tedious detail of abstract principles, which the pupil wa* expected first ol all to commit to memory. The system, now known as the method of Professsor Ollendorff, in which the language is taught before the grammatical principles, is not only a far more pleasant, but also a far more thorough method of acquiring a practical knowledge of any foreign tongue. We think, however, that Ollendorff adheres too closely to this latter method. To one who wishes merely to learn to converse in a foreign language, " Ollendorff's New Methods" furnish all that is necessary for this end ; but to those who wish to acquire the knowledge of a language both for practical and literary purposes, a work uniting both systems will be found most advantageous.* And such a work, it is hoped, will be found in the " First Book in Spanish," now first presented to the pub- lic. It is divided into six parts : I. . Orthoepy and Orthography ; containing, in a very few pages, full directions for the right pronunciation and syllabication of the words of the language, adapted especially to those who are their own instruct- ors. II. General Principles of Etymology and Syntax, in which are taught the most general and important principles of the language. III. A full exposition of Etymology and Syntax, in which the more minute rules and exceptions are clearly explained. To Part III. there is an Appendix which treats of Spanish Prosody; Gender of Span- ish Nouns; Idiomatic Phrases; Spanish Abbreviations; Money, Weights and Measures ; Spanish Proper Names, etc. IV. Progressive Exercises in translating from Spanish into Eng" lish, and from English into Spanish (according to the Method of " con- stant imitation and repetition"), which the learner commences simulta- neously with Part II. ; thus he gradually, and almost imperceptibly, becomes familiar with the general rules of Etymology and Syntax, being able, after his first and second lessons, to form sentences, and in a limited manner, " to read, write and speak" in the Castilian tongue V. Reading Lessons in Spanish^ beginning with very simple sen- tences and progressively introducing the peculiarities of the idioms and construction, by interesting extracts from the writings of Spaniards. The marginal notes gradually clear away all difl&culties, either by direct explanation, or by reference to some rule or remark in a previous part of the work. VI. A Vocabulary of words used in the Reading Lessons, alphabet! cilly arranged, properly accented, and clearly defined. It will thus be seen that this single volume supplies all that the begin- ner needs : a treatise on pronunciation, a grammar, exercises for transla tion from one language into the other, a reading-book, and dictionary. • The editors of the American edition of Ollendorff's Method seem to have dig- oc^rered this ; as two of them have appended aSynopeis of Grammar to the work. PREFACE. V It is hoped, therefore, that any who have a desire to become acquainted with Spanish may be induced to enter upon the study of this delightful language, especially as any one acquainted with English Grammar, by following the directions, may, in a comparatively short time, be able to speak and read Castilian, without any other instructor than this " First Book in Spanish." After having carefully studied tnis work, he will be prepared, with the aid of a larger dictionary, to enter upon the perusal of any Spanish writer. As the portion of our volume which contains the Grammar of the lan- guage may seem more limited in size than works on grammar in general, we deem it proper to state that not a single established rule (or exception to a rule) of Spanish Etymology or Syntax noticed in other English- Spanish Grammars, is here omitted : on the contrary, much will be found -n the present work that is not contained in any other Spanish Grammar. Let any one compare the full and mmute explanations of the syntax of the verb, (to which about thirty pages are devoted in Part III.,) with what is said of the verb in any other grammar, and he will be able to decide which grammar has been most explicit. The manner of using certain conjunctions (pages 175 — 178), observations on the use of prepositions (pages 178 — 184), the distinction between the verbs ser and estar (pages 163 — 167), and the summary of the rules of gender of Spanish nouns with a list of exceptions (pages 191 — 198), are portions of the work which will be found to be unusually full, and, we trust, satisfactory. The rules we have adopted for distinguishing the gender of Spanish nouns, so far as they regard the terminations le, umbre, and w, have never before, to our know- ledge, appeared in any grammar of the language. In our readings of Spanish authors we long since noticed that nouns terminating in vmbre and ie {except pie and its compounds) are feminine; and from an actual examination of all the nouns ending in w, we find more than two-thirds of these are also feminine. We here saw (what seems to have been overlook- ed by others) how the rules for distinguishing gender might be greatly simplified : accordingly we have stated it as a general rule (see page 191) that " all nouns ending in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, is, or cz, (unless they may be the names of male beings,) are feminine," and that all that do not thus terminate, are masculine. Then follows a complete list of exceptions to these rules. In giving this fist we have not adopted the common plan of grammarians, of copying such exceptions as they could readily remember, and then adding — '^and many others which the pupil will learn by noticing the usage of the best writers ;^^ but we have taken the toilsome course of examining carefully every noun in the "Diccionario de la AcADEMiA EsPANOLA," and placing in the list all such as were not com- prehended in the general rules. If any other similar list has been pub lished, it is unknown to us. The Reading Lessons are chiefly specimens from living Spanish wri- ters. It is doubtless better th' t the learner should at first thus enter upoii 1* VI PREFACE. the reading of modem Spanish, leaving the older Castilian classical wri« ters for a more advanced stage of his course. Extracts from recent " Manifiestos'^ of General Santa-Anna, have been given, as specimens of Mexican-Spanish. In order that the learner may become familiar with the different methods of spelling adopted by different writers, we have in general followed the orthography of the respective authors from whom the extracts are made. It is a matter of regret that former Grammars, and even Scoane's edition of Neuman and Baretti's Spanish Dictionary, have approved of the erro- neous practice of accenting the particles jtJor9ue (when it means " because"), aunque, and sino, on the last syllable. This practice is not sanctioned by any respectable Castilian writer of prose or poetry, nor by any of the late editions of the D ictionary of the Royal Spanish Academy. Porgue has the last syllable long only when it is used as an interrogative adverb or in the sense of " why ;" thus : iPorque (pronounced pore-kay') no bebe V. 7 Porque (pronounced pore-kay) no tengo sed: — " Why do you not drink 7 Because I am not thirsty." Aunque and sino (whatever Spanish Gram- mars and Spanish instructors may say to the contrary) ought never to be written aunque and slno* The present work has been submitted to the examination of native Spanish professors ; and it may not be improper to insert here the opinion of our friend Seiior Molina, for many years an instructor in Spanish. " I have carefully examined the MSS. of the ' First Book in Spanish' which you are about publishing, and it has afforded me extreme pleasure to find that the Spanish language in your country is to have such a valu- able auxiliary. I can with truth say that I have never met with a work professing to teach any foreign language which combines so many excel- lent qualities, and is so well adapted lor all classes of learners. It con- tains all th.it the pupil needs, and in a very convenient compass. The judicious arrangement of your work especially pleases me; it is the pre« cisd manner in which I have been giving instruction to classes of pupils in English, French, and Spanish for many years in the cities of Paris, London, and Madrid, teaching what is most important to know, both of etymology and syntax, first (without separating these departments as is commonly done), and then t iking up the more particular rules, and ex- ceptions to general rules, afterwards. Your first part, on Pronunciation, is so lacid and sim^ple, that even a private learner, by following your directions, could learn to speak Castilian with more elegance than one- hilf dt't.'ie natives of Spain. Your plan of placing the pupil to reading Spanish as he progresses with the grammar, and especially your mode of constant reference ior the application of the rules of grammar, while it is all tlie more agreeable to the pupil, will be the means of thoroughly making him acqu tinted with the rules of Spanish etymology and syntax, without any very laborious effort on his part. " Hitherto there has been but little done in your country to promote * We are glad to learn that Professor Velasquez, of Columbia College, New York, has in course of preparation a new Dictionary of the Spanish Language. From his known scholarship, we are led to expect a dictionary in which the immense num- her of errors of previous lexicographers will be corrected — a dictionary in »M respects worthy of this noble language. PREFACE. Vll the knowledge of the Spanish literature, and this has, without doubt resulted from a want of proper books. There will no longer be any reason for such an excuse. You have provided a book which, for its simplicity, distinctness, and completeness, in that which it professes to teach, could hardly be excelled. You deserve and will receive the warm- est thanks of every admirer of elegant Castilian : a language, in the opinion of the best critics, of more sweetness, music, elegance, and es pression than any other European tongue." To all native Spanish gentlemen who have, in any way, encouraged Ub in our work, we take this opportunity of making our grateful acknow- ledgments. In conclusion, we will say that as we have endeavored to perform our task f tithfully, we trust that our work may contribute towards increas- ing the study of the classic language of Castile. July, 1848. TABLE OF CONIENTS, PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. Pag^ TTie Spanish Alphabet. — Sound of Simple Vowels, - - 13 Sound of the Consonants, - - - - 13 — 16 Different Methods of Spelling Spanish Words, - - 17 Sound of Diphthongs and Triphthongs, - - - 18 List of Diphthongs and Triphthongs, - - - 19 Syllabication, - - - - - - - -20 Accentuation^ ------- 21 — 23 Punctuation, - - - - - - - -23 Lessons for Pronunciation, - - - - 24 — 27 Additional remarks on the Pronunciation of Spanish-Mexi- can — Manner of sounding c, z and U, - - - 27 PART IL GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. Parts of Speech. — Their subdivisions defined, - - - 28—30 Of the Article, definite and indefinite. — Rules for their use, 30 — 33 Of the Noun. — Rules for distinguishing the gender of Nouns, - 33 Rules for forming the plural number of Nouns, - - 34 Cases of Nouns. — The English possessive case, hqw ren- dered in Spanish, •■ - - - - - 35 Of the Adjective. — Formation of the plural and feminine termina- tions, - - - - - - - -36 Adjectives used as Nouns, ----- 37 Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives. — Rules for forming the Comparative and Superlative, . - . 38— 4C Of the Pronoun. — Personal Pronouns. — Use of Usted and its con- tractions, v., Vjn.f etc. — Direct and indirect objective case of Personal Pronouns, - - - _ 40 Declension of Persona) Pronouns. — Rules for their use, 41 — 44 Possessive Pronouns. — Their declension, - - - - 44 Rules for the use of Possessive Pronouns, - - 45 — 47 Relative Pronouns. — Their declension, - - - - 47 Rules for the use of Relative Pronouns, - - - 48, 49 Interrogative Pronouns. — Rules for their use, - - - 49 Demonstrative Pronouns. — Their declension. — Rules for their use, 50—52 Indefinite Pronouns. — Manner of employing them, - - 52 — 54 Of the Verb. — Active-transitive, Active-intransitive, Reflective, Passive, Neuter, - - .- - - - 55 Mood?. — Infinitive, Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, 56 'Tenses. — Present, Imperfect, Perfect- Definite, Perfect-In- X TABLE OP CONTENTS. Page definite, First and Second Pluperfect, First and Second Future, -------57 Participles and Gerunds. — Conjugation. — Regular, Irregu- lar, and Auxiliary Verbs, - - - - - 58 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, J^a6er, - - 59 — 62 Conj ugation of the " Verb, IX. A good Reason for X31 TABLE OF CONTENTS. writing a long Letter. — X. Rewarding a dull writer.— XI. Early Rising, - - - 308 XII. A Singular Edict.— XIII. Periodicals in the Uni- ted States.— XIV. Sagacity of a Dog, - - 309 XV. Thales' Sage Answers.— XVT. Simplicity of a Child, 310 XVII. The Kings of Former Times.— XVIII. An Irish- man's Conjecture, - - - - 311 XIX The Force of Shame. — XX. An Accommodating Wife. — XXI. An Invention of questionable * Utility, - - - - - - 212 Third Section. — Lessons taken from " Deberes de los Hombres," 313 XXII. Filial Affection, 313 ' XXIIl. Respect for Old Age, An Anecdote, - - - 315 XXIV. Friendship.— XXV. Reading and Study, - 316 XXVI. Selecting a Profession, - - - - 317 XXVII. Ambition to be Restrained.— XXVIII. Repenting of our Faults, 318 XXIX. Gratitude, -----. 319 XXX. Pardon to Enemies, - - - - 320 Fourth Section, ---.--- 321 XXXI. No Hereditary Titles in the United States, - 321 XXXII. Increase of Population of the United States, - 322 XXXIII. The Magnetic Telegraph the Invention of a Spaniard, 323 XXXIV. The First Steamboat (at Barcelona, A. D. 1543), 324 XXXV. Washmgton. By E. J. Gomez, - - - 324 XXXVI. Pedro Lopez de Ayala. By M. Galo de Cuendas, 326 XXXVII. Miguel de Cervantes. By M. Galo de Cuendas, 326 XXXVIII. Epitome of the History of Spain. By Jos4 de Cadalso, 328 XXXIX. Critics. By Jos6 de Cadalso, 331 XL. American Independence. By E. J. Gomez, 333 XLL A Visit to the Tomb of Washington. « " 335 Fifth Section, - - - - - - - 337 XLII. The Maiden of Narni. A Tale, - - - 337 XLIII. Extracts from a ^^ Manifiesto" of General Santa- An- na (Sept. 16th, 1847), . - - - 341 XLI V. Extracts from another " Manifiesto" of Santa- Anna (Oct. 22d, 1847), - - - - - 343 XLV. Ingratitude. By Teodoro de Almeyda, - - 346 XL VI. The Bear, Monkey, and Hog.— A Poeti c Fable. By T. de Iriarte, 347 • PART VL VOCABULARY. Abbreviations used in Vocabulary, - - - - - 350 Vocabulary of Words used in the Reading Lessons, - - 351 PART L ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. THE SPANISH ALPHABET. . ; ; ; 1. The Spanish Alphabet conLaiils twenty-eight charai> ters or letters ; a, b, c, cA, d^ -e,/, 0y h, i^^j: k^d^ IiyMt n', i5,.'f^ 2. Of these letters, a, e, i, o, u, are always vowels ; y is also a vowel when it ends a syllable or word, or when it stands alone : the other letters are consonants, as also y when it begins a syllable or word. The consonants are divided into semi-vowels and mutes ; the semi-vowels being, /, A, Z, II J w, 71, n, r, 5, X ; and the mutes, b, c, ck, d, g, y, ^', p, q, t, V, z. SOUND OF THE SIMPLE VOWELS. 3. A, in Spanish, has the sound of a in the English word k far. ^^ This sound it retains in every position, not varying as in the English words, fare, fat, Jar, Jail, swallow, many, courage, mustard, in no two of which the a has precisely the same sound. 4. E, has the sound of a in made or e in they. 5. I, has the sound of ee in see or i in machine. Y, when vowel, has the same sound. 6. 0, has the sound of o in go. 7. U, has the sound of oo in mood or u in ritde. SOUND OF THE CONSONANTS. 8. B, F, K, L, M, N, P, sound as in English. 9 C, before a, o, or w, or before a consonant, sounds like k ; that is, like c, in the English word, cart ; as, carne. pooo, cuTia, creo ; pronounced kar'-ney., po-ko^ koo nah.^ kray o. 2 • (13) 14 SPANISH ALPHABET. 10. C, before g, or i, sounds like th in the English word think ; as, cecina^ cima ; pronounced thay-thee -nah^ thee'-mah. 11. CH, is considered as one letter in Spanish, and is always sounded like ch in the English word church ; as, noch^^ chapa ; pronounced nd-chay^ chah'-pah. 12. D, has not exactly the same sound in Spanish that it has in English. In the latter, it is formed by touching the tongue to the roof of the mouth : in Spanish, the end of the? tongue st^ik^s' ti^e* upper teeth : it has then a sound nearly liie. ..) When twr consonants come between two vowels, the former is spelled with the preceding vowel, and the latter with the succeeling vowel; as, por-tdl^ cuer-po^ es-te, in- vier-no. This rule is subject to the following exception : (c.) If the first of two consonants coming between two vowels be /, or any one of the mutes (see 2), and the second I or r, then both consonants are joined to the vowel by which they are succeeded ; as, si-glo, sue-gro, co-bre^ vi- drie-ro. {d.) When two vowels of the same name come together, or two which do not form a diphthong, they are to be divid- ed ; as, le-er^ co-or-di-ndr, ca-no-a. (e.) Compound words are to be divided into their deriva- tives ; as, pre-po-ner^ ad-jun-io, con-flic-to. (f.) When any one of the letters b, Z, w, 71, or r, is fol- lowed by s and another consonant, or when s is preceded by any consonant, and succeeded by one or more, in com- pound words, the s is to be connected with the consonant which comes before it ; as, Covs-tdn-za, cons-tre-nir, ins-pi- rdr. {g.) In Spanish there are as many syllables in a word as there are vowels or diphthongs ; as, quin-ce^ nor-ie^ pa- rien-te. 1^* In English, the word quince forms only one syllable; in Spanish, it is pronounced keen^-thay. Hom-bre is pronounced om'-brey, and not vm-hur^ as it would be in English. Every letter in Spanish is pro* nounced except the A, and the u in the syllables gue, gui, and que, qui (see 14 and 22). There are no silent vowels or consonants, as in the Enfiflish words thumbs ii rone, psalm. ACCENT. 2 J ACCENT. 55. In Spanish, the voice never rests or prolongs itself on any other letter of a syllable than a vowel. When we speak of an accented syllable^ we always mean thereby the vowel-sound of that syllable. In the case of diphthongs and triphthongs, when in accented syllables, the accent or stress of voice is generally placed on that vowel which we have marked in the list of diphthongs and triphthongs. Thus, tie-ne^ having the accent on the first syllable, has the stress of the voice on the e of the diphthong, though the accent is not written over the vowel. ^^* In words ending in cion, the accent is ou the o and not on the f ol the diphthong, as marked in the list ; as, re-sur-rec-cion. 56. The rules of Spanish accentuation are few and sim- ple, and as follows : (a.) Words that end in a consonant are accented on the last syllable, without any marked accent over it ; as, caliz^ cup ; capaZj able ; virtud, virtue ; jardin, garden ; saber, to know ; comer, to eat ; amoi; to love ; rigor, rigor ; facilidad, facility. These are accented as if written ca-liz. vir-tud, cc-mer, fa-ci-li-ddd, etc. {b.) Words that end in a vowel are accented on the syl- lable next to the last, without any marked accent over it ; as, r astro, track ; hoja, leaf ; buitre, vulture ; temper amento, temperature ; ente, being ; accented as if written rds-tro, bui-tre, iem-pe-ra-men-to, en-te, etc. Remark. — Words that end in two vowels, whether their vowels form a diphthong or two separate syllables, come under the above rule ; as, estudio, study ; odio, hatred ; optdencia^ opulence ; canoa^ canoe ; idea^ idea ; accented as if written 6-dio, o-pu-len-cia, ca-n6-a, i-de-a. ic.) Words that end in a consonant and are accented on any other syllable than the last, or that end in a vowel (or diphthong), and are accented on any other than the syllable next to the last, have the accent marked to show the excep- tion from the general rules {a and b above) ; as, cdrcel, 22 ACCENT. prison ; car deter ^ character ; viernes, Friday ; virgen^ vir- gin ; or cafe^ coffee ; Idstima, pity ; solido, solid : mate' mdtico, mathematician ; clausula, clause ; accented on the syllable marked. Remark. — Words that end in two vowels, which are commonly known as di'. hlhongs, usually have the accent marked if it falls on one of these vowels ; as, fantasia, poesla, senorw, minue. Words which end with y jave the accent on the 1 .st syllable, without being marked. '%j^ In compound words there area few exceptions to the above gene- ral rules. In adverbs of quality or manner endng in mente, some follow the regular rule (56, 6), and others retain the accent on the first part of the word, on the same syllable on which it would be if mente were not affixed ; as, su-cin-ta-men-te, succinctly ; li-be-ral-men'te, liberally ; bas- tdn-te-men-te, sufficiently ; cier-ta-men-te, certainly. (d.) The plurals of words retain the accent on the same syllable (whether marked or not) as in the singular ; as, jardin, jardines ; caliz, calices ; virgen, virgenes ; clausula^ clausulas. There are two exceptions to this remark, car de- ter and regimen ; their plurals being accented caracteres and regimenes. 57. The above rules are applicable to all parts of speech except the persons of verbs ; these are accented according to the following rules: (a.) The persons of verbs, whether they end in a conso- nant or a vowel, whether they are singular or plural, or to whatever mood or tense they belong, are accented on the syllable next to the last, without being marked ; as, hablo^ I speak ; beben. they drink ; hiciera, he would make, In- finitives, having no person, are not included in this rule, but are always accented on the last syllable. (See 56, a.) b.) In the case of the persons of verj)s, whenever the accent does not fall on the syllable next to the last (as ^ mentioned in the preceding rule), it is marked ; as, estd, he is ; hablare, I shall speak ; hablardn. they shall speak ; ame. I loved ; habldbamos^ we were spoaking ; hablariamos^ we would speak. The only exception to this rule is the aecoud person plural of the imperative mood, and words PUNCTUATION. 23 ending in ay or oy, which are always accented on the last 63'llable, without the accent in general being marked ; as, hablad^ speak ye ; haced^ make ye ; estoy, I am. Some writers, however, place the accent over the last syllable, as, habldd^ haced. 58. The accent 'is by many writers marked on certain monosyllables, to distinguish them from others of similar orthography and pronunciation but of different meaning ; as, e/, the, and eZ, he ; se^ himself, and 5e, I know, and sq, be thou ; 5i, if, and si. to himself. The letters a. to ; e, and ; 6, or ; -w, or ; are also generally used with a marked accent, though some writers omit it. 1^" Throughout this work, every word which does not come under the three general rules of accentuation (see 56, a ; 56, 6 ; and 57, a), will have the accent marked over the vowel upon which the stress of voice is to be laid. The learner must therefore keep in mind that every word which has not a marked accent over some vowel in it, is to be accented in pronouncing it, if it end in a consonant, on the last syllable ; if it end in a vowel, on the syllable next the last. If the word be a verb, it is to be accented on the syllable next to the last, whether it end in a conso- nant or a vowel, except when it has a written accent over it, is in the infinitive mood, or in the second person plural of the imperative, or ends my* PUNCTUATION. 59. The comma, semicolon, colon, period, etc., are the same, and are employed in the same manner as those in English. The marks of interrogation and exclamation are placed in Spanish both before and after interrogative and ejaculatory phrases or sentences ;t as, i Este canape no es nuevo ? Is not this sofa new ? / Que ceguedad ! / Fobre Espana ! What blindness ! Poor Spain ! 60. The diaeresis •• is used over the u in the syllable's * The learner will now be able to pronounce the names of the Spanish letters of the alphabet, giving to each letter its true Spanish sound, according to the preceding directions : — », 6e, ce, che^ de^ c, efe, ge, ache, £, Jota^ ka, eZe, elU^ eme^ cnCy ene^ o, pe, cu, crre^ ese^ te^ w, re, equis^ igriega^ zda i The intenQgation or exclamation mark coming first, being inverted. 24 LESSONS x>Ort PIiO^'UNCIAT:ON. gioe, gui^ qtce and qui (see 3 1), when the u is to be sou/ided as agiiero ; and also over the last of two vowels, which usually form a diphthong, to show that they are to be divid- ed into two syllables ; as heroicidad^ pronounced e-ro-ee-tkce' dad. 61. The tilde " is used over the 7i when this letter haa fhe sound of ni in union ; as, dano. 62. The acute accent ' is placed over vowels, not to alter their sound, but to indicate the syllable on which the stress of voice is laid in pronouncing certain words ; as, orden, 63. The circumflex accent " was formerly used over a vowel following a;, when this letter had not its guttural sound ; as, sexo ; and over a vowel following r^, when the latter was pronounced as k ; as, cMlo. But the alterations in orthography no longer require this mark. LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. Remark. — The learner should thoroughly examine the preceding direc- tions in orthography and orthot'py, before attempting to read the follow- ing lessons. He must not forget to pronounce every letter except li* and also u, in certain cases (see 14 and 22). Every vowel especially must be sounded distinctly, even more so than the consonants, if any difference be made. Monosyllables, such as Ze, me, mi, si, se, que, are not to be hurried over, like the, to, me, etc., are in English ; but they must be pronounced fully and clearly. Such words as the learner will be most liable to mispronounce, are, in the first of the following reading lessons, followed by the number of the paragraph which will be found to contain the proper directions for their right pronunciation. I. Words of one sellable : Me (4); mi (5); la (3) ; no; el; su (7); ha (16); mas (24) ; qui (22) ; que (22) ; yo ; cruz (7, 29) ; luz ; cal un (7); ce (10, 4); bol; fil (5); ci (10, 5); cha (11); por ; gran; va (26); muy (48); rey (23, 37); ten (25); voy (45) ; ved (12) ; de ; los (6) ; fin (5) ; mes (24) ; srin . buey * Ck, it must be kspt in mird, is in Spanish a single 1 tter. (S e 11. • LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 25 (53) ; de ; se ; soy ; ser ; vez (29) ; es ; en ; con ; f e ; tu ; ley ; son ; te ; tres ; mil ; hay (34) ; tal ; he ( 1 6) ; ir ; van ; ve; id; di ; ven ; pon ; haz; doy; hoy; sad. II. Words accented on the syllable next to the last : Man-to ; ma-fia (20) ;. a-ro-ma ; ar-ma ; tem-plo ; jo-ya (17); ta-bla; jun-ta (17, 7) ; yu-go ; su-yo ; hi-jo (16, 17) ; gen-te (15) ; cor-to ; co-sa ; ca-lle (19) ; bol-sa ; bo-llo (19) ; su-je-to; za-pa-to (29); lla-ma (19); la-go; lla-nu-ra ; no- ble; sobre ;* fa-ti-ga ; in-vier-no (41) ; hue-so (47) ; do-lo ; don-de; don-ce-Ua (19); no-che (11); o-bra ; cuo-ta (49) ; len-gua (46) ; ma-yo ; e-le-va-do ; fuer-za ; pre-sen-tado ; pe-cho ; j6-ven ; fer-til ; fa-cil ; 6r-den ; ar-bol ; es-te-ril ; mar-gen ; vir-gen ; es-car-la-ta ; ig-no-ran-cia (40) ; mu-da ; mo-zo ; ca-ba-Ue-ro ; ci-vi-li-za-do ; en-sor-de-ci-do ; cer-ni- mien-to ; pun-to ; en-e-mi-go ; mu-cho ; na-tu-ra-lis-ta ; bri- Ua; mo-men-to; tra-ba-jo; her-ma-no. III. Words accented on the last syllable : € Yer-dad ; fru-tal ; vul-gar (7) ; ar-dor ; tro-pel ; to-tal ; ba-jar ; ga-chon ; si-llon ; ho-nor ; ja-mon ; sa-lud ; man- tel ; se-nal ; bal-con ; ra-zon ; mo-ral ; que-ru-bin (22) ; se- ra-fin; te-me-ri-dad ; ne-ce-si-dad ; es-cla-vi-tud ; mo-de-rar; mag-na-ni-mi-dad ; in-ca-paz ; vo-lun-tad ; me-di-tar ; de-bi- li-dad ; co-ra-zon ; hu-ma-ni-dad ; as-pi-rar ; ven-cer ; va-lor ; vir-tud ; juz-gar ; a-qui (22) ; ca-fe ; ca-na-pe ; per-do-na- re ; e-jer-ce-ra ; ri-di-cu-li-za-ra ; ma-yor ; a-si. IV. Words accented on the syllable marked : Las-ti-ma ; es-pi-ri-tu ; nu-me-ro ; ca-ma-ra ; ul-ti-mo ; in-va-li-do ; ge-ne-ra-li-si-mo (15); bar-ba-ro ; pu-ri-si-ma ; ge-ne-ro (15); ter-mi-no ; cre-di-to ; ma-le-vo-lo ; re-pii-bli- ca ; re-gi-men (15); en-er-gi-co (15); di-fi-ci-li-si-ma ; me- ta-fi-si-co ; ma-te-ma-ti-co ; fi-16-so-fo ; 16-gi-ca ; ri-di-cu-la ; cri-ti-co ; a-na-li-sis ; do-mes-ti-ca ; obs-ta-cu-lo. * Noble and sohre are pronounced no-bley^ so-hrey^ and not no-bul^ ro-huTy as in English. 3 26 LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 5^* Wc must again remind the learner to give the vowels and conso- nants their true Spanish sounds, and not those he has been accustomed to give in English words, except in those sounds which are the same in both languages. Thus, vulgar in Spanish is pronounced vool-gdr; es^ ^is ; tres, trace ; siUon^ seel-yon ; nona, non-yah ; cizalla^ thee-thdl-yah. V. All the sounds of Spanish letters : ^^ We give, in the following few words, all the sounds known in pronouncing Spanish : the learner who is able to pronounce them, will therefore be able to utter every consonant, vowel, diphthongal or triph- thongal sound which he will find in the Spanish language : Gente ; iiorio ; cholla ; dijo ; buey ; voy ; muy ; hay ; cuota ; Imea ; julio ; reo ; ciudad ; social ; zuzo ; yugo ; gueta ; aguelo ; qiiesto ; sex 6 ; fixa ; qui ; que ; cuanto ; heroe; puerto ; deuda ; causais ; varieis ; preciais ; santi- guais ; bien ; rey. VI. Lesson for reading :* El hijo sabio es la doctrina del padre : el que es burlador^ no o^e cuando le corrigen. El nombre se saciard de bieiies, fruto de su boca ; mas el alma de los pre varicad ores es inicua. Quien guarda su boca, guarda su alma : mas el que e& inconsiderado para hablar sentird males. Quiere y no quiere el perezoso : mas el alma de los labo- riosos sera engrosada. El jus to detesiard la palabra de mentira ; mas el impio avergiienza^ y serd avergonzado. La justicia guarda el camino del inocente : mas la impi edad echa por tierra al pecador. Hay quien parece rico, no teniendo nada ; y hay quien parece pobre, teniendo muchas riquezas. El rescate de la vida del hombre so7i sus riquezas ; mas el que es pobre, no aguanta la amenaza. La luz de los justos da alegria : mas la lampara de los ipapios se a/pagard, * Prom Proverbs, xiii. 1 — 13. The verbs are in italice. The plurals have the marked accent. LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 27 Entre los soberbios siempre hay contiendas : mas los que todas las cosas hacen con consejo, se rigen per la sabiduria. La riqueza hecha de prisa se menoscabard : mas la que se recoge poco a poco con la mano, se aumentard. La esperanza, que se retarda, ^fflig^ al alma : arbol de vida el deseo, que se cumple. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF SPANISH. Each of the Spanish vowels is invariable in the quality of its sound, there being no other variation than that of quantity^ or length of time required in pronouncing it. In Spanish, the vowel of that syllable of a word on which the accent falls, is called long ; the other vowels of the w%rd, short : thus in the word vices, the former e is long, as it requires the stress of voice or accent, and the latter e is short, as it is pronounced more rapidly. In the English words essence and present, the first and second e of each word have the same sound, but the first being accented, requires more time for pronouncing it ; and in Spanish the e of the first syllable of these words would be called long, and the second e short, ^^ The above observations will serve to explain why e in Spanish often sounds like e in the English word men ; i like i in the English word pin; and a more open, nearly like u in up. The sound of d (see 12) is so nearly like the English sound of the same letter, that it is hardly worth while for the private learner to make any effort to give any different sound to this letter from that which he has been accustomed to give it. The same may be said of the letters t (see 25) and v (see 26). All the consonants are pronounced a little more softly in Spanish than in English — so that h seems to sound almost like V ; and y (when a consonant) almost like j, as this letter is pronounced in English. Sy In certain provinces of Spain, the c before e and i, and the z are sounded Uke s and z in English ; and in the Spanish States of America (originally colonized from those provinces), the same peculiarity of pro- nunciation is quite common. In Mexico, the liquid sound of II is, by the great mass of the people, pronounced like the modern French sound of the same liquid : thus, Saltillo would be pronounced by a Castiliar Scd'teeV-yo; by a Mexican, Sal-tee'-yo. Pure Castilian, however, re quires the c, z, and U to be sounded as we have directed. PART IL GENEEAL PKINCIPLES OF ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. PAETS OF SPEECH. 64. There are in the Spanish language nine dijffereni Parts of Speech, viz., the Article, Noun, Adjective, Pro- noun, Verb, Adve^j Preposition, Conjunction, and Inter- jection. [J^^ The names of these Parts of Speech in Spanish are Arl7culo, Nombre, Adjetivo, Pronombre, Verba, Adverbio, Preposicion, Conjuncion^ Interjeccion. 65. The Article is placed before a noun to enlarge or limit the extent of its signification ; as, cl hombre, the man ; la muger, the woman ; las casas, the houses ; un hijo, a son ; una hija, a daughter. (a.) The Article is generally divided into the definite and indefinite kinds : the word the (and its corresponding words in other languages) being called the definite; and the word a ox an (and its corresponding words in other languages) being called the indefinite. 66. The Noun is the name of a thing ; as, homhrc^ man ; muger, woman ; casa, house ; Jua7i, John ; Londrcs, Lon don. (a.) Nouns are of two kinds, common and proper. A common noun is the name of a whole class of objects : as, drbol, tree ; perro, dog. A proper noun is the individual name applied to a particular person or thing ; as, Juan, John ; Inglaterra, England. (6.) Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the plural. The sin- gular number denotes but one object; as, sombrero, hat. The plural signifies more objects than one ; as, sombreros, hats. (c.) In Spanish nouns have two genders, the masculine and i\\e femin- ine. The masculine includes all nouns that belong to the male kind, and all that take the masculine article before them: as, hombre, man; hijo, (28) PARTS OF SPEECH. 29 son ; el sombrero^ the hat ; un libro, a book. The feminine inchides all nouns of the female kind, and all that take the feminine article before them; as, muger, woman; hija, daughter; lasilla, the chait; una casa- **«, a coat. g^* The distinctions of gender have, tliroiigh imitation, been extended to all nouns in Spanish ; that is, all nouns are considered either mascu- hne or feminine in gender. Thus, as may be seen above, libro, a book, is masculine, and silla, a chair, is feminine. ((/.) The cases of nouns express the different relations of one thing to another. The nomuiative case is the word which is the subject of the verb; as, el dgua hierve, the water boils; el Frances habla, the french- man talks. The objective case is the word which is the object of an action expressed by a verb, or of a relation expressed by a preposition ; as, el muchacho ama la verdad, the boy loves the truth ; nadie esta sin pecado, nobody is without sin. 67. The Adjective is a word that expresses the quality of a noun, or determines its number or signification ; as, buen hombre, good man ; mucJios h ombres, many men ; dos duros, two dollars. g;^* In Spanish, the adjective takes the gender and number of the noun to which it relates. 68. The Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to avoid the too frequent repetition of the latter ; as, Juan esta en casa, ei esta bueno ; John is at home, he is well. (a..) Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons or things ; as, cZ, ella, ello ; he, she, it. ^^^ There are three persons for nouns and pronouns : the Jirst person denoting the person speaking; as, yo, I: the second, the person or thing spoken to ; as, ta, thou : the third, the person or thing spoken of; as, el, he. {b.) Possessive pronouns show the possession of the persons or things which they represent. Some relate to one person, others to more than one ; as, mi libro, mij book ; nuestra casa, our house. (c.) Relative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun or pronoun, called the antecedent ; as, el hombre que enseila, the man who teaches. Here hombre is the antecedent to the relative pronoun que. {d.) Interrogative pronouns are relative pronouns used in asking ques- tions ; they have no antecedent, but relate to the answer of the question for their subsequent ; as, iQuien est^ alll7 Pedro ; Who is there 1 Peter. Here quien is the interrogative pronoun, and the answer, Pedro^ the sub' sequent. ie.) Demonstrative pronouns are those that point out, in a definite 3* 30 OF THE ARTICLE. manner, the persons or things which they represent or to which they belong ; as, este hombre, this man ; aquella mesa, that table. {/.) Indefinite pronouns are those that express, in an indefinite or general manner, the persons or things which they represent ; as, algunos de nosutros, some of us. 69. The Verb is a word that expresses an affirmation of the subject ; as, el hombre es sabio, the man is wise ; ella habla, she speaks, 1^* The different kinds of verbs, their moods, tenses, numbers, per- ssons, participles, and gerunds, will be found explained in a subsequent part of this work. (See 135—156.) 70. The Adverb modifies the meaning of a verb, adjec- tive, or other adverb ; as, Pedro escribe bien^ Peter writes well ; Maria es mui/ amabie, Mary is verT/ amiable ; Juan lee mui/ bien^ John reads ver^ well. 71. The Preposition serves to express the relation of things ; as, el hermano de Diego, the brother of James ; viajo po7' Espana, he traveled through Spain. 72. The Conjunction connects words and sentences ; as, Jose y Maria seran felices, pero no seran ricos, Joseph and Mary will be happy, but they will not be rich. 73. The Interjection expresses passion or emotion ; as, / O hombre ! O man ! 74. The injlection of a word means the changes which it undergoes to express different numbers, persons, cases, moods, tenses, etc. 75. The inflection of articles, nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, is called declension ; as, caballoj horse ; cahallos^ horses. 76. The inflection of verbs is called conjugation ; as, yo amo, I love ; tii amas, thou lovest; el ama, he loves. 77. Of the parts of speech, the article, noun, adjective, pronoun and verb are inflected ; and the adverb, preposition, conjunction, and inter- jection, not inflected. 78. The participle is not regarded as a distinct part of speech in Span- ish, but as belonging to the verb and partaking oi the nature of the. adjective. It is often inflected like the latter. OF THE ARTICLE. 79. The definite article, which in English is always the^ is rendered in Spanish by difierent words, according to OF THE AR77CLE. 3 1 the gender and number of the nouns before which it is used. 80. Before a noun masculine of the singular number, el is used ; as, El hombre, the man. I El hijo, the son. El rey, the king. | El plato, the plate.* 81. Before a noun feminine of the singular number, la is used ; as. La muger, the woman. I La hija, the daughter. La reina, the queen. \ La cuchara, the spoon. 82. Before a noun masculine of the plural number, los u used ; as, Los reyes, the kings. \ Los platos, the plates. 83. Before a noun feminine of the plural number, Z^s is used; as, Las reinas, the queens. \ Las cucharas, the spoons. 84. Before an adjective used as a noun of the singular number, lo is employed when it has the meaning of that which is ; as. Lo justo, that which is just. Lo rojo, the red, or, that whi-ch is red. Lo bueno, the good, or, that which is good. Lo pasado, the vast, or, that which is past. ^^ Lo has no plural. It is called the neuter article. 85. The Spanish indefinite article corresponding to a or an in English is una (always contracted into un), before a noun masculine ; as, Un medico, a physician. j Un sombrero, a hat. 86. Before a noun feminine, una is used ; as, Una hermana, a sister. | Una silla, a chair. (a.) When the plural form of uno and una is used, these words are indefinite pronouns; as, unos hombres or unas mugeres, some men or some women. 87. The masculine articles el and un are always used before feminine singular nouns when they begin with a or * In Spanish, all nouns are either masculine or feminine.. (See 91.) 32 OF THE ARTICLK ha^ accented on the first syllable* (whether the accent u marked or not) ; as^ El ama, the mistress. j El hambre, the hunger Un area, a chest. \ El agua, the water. (a.) In the plural, such nouns take the regular feminine article ; as, Las areas, the chests. j Las aguas, the waters. {b.) If an adjective intervene between the article and feminine noun (even though the adjective begin with a or ha accented), the feminine article is always used ; as, La ancha area, the broad chest. \ Una buena ama, a good mistress. Remark. — There are very few feminine nouns in Spanish which begin with a or ha accented ; so that the exceptions to the general use of la and una (see 87) are very few. 88. When the preposition d (to) or de (of) comes imme- diately before the masculine article d^ a contraction takes place, and both words are united. Thus, instead of a el and de el {to the and of the)., at and del are used ; as, Al padre, to the father. I Del muchacho, of the boy. Al ama, to the mistress. J Del hambre, of the hunger. (a.) Before the other articles, /a, los, las, lo^ un, and una, the preposi tions d and de, as well as the articles, remain unchanged ; as, De los hombres, of the men. De lo futuro, of the future. De una noche, of a night. A' la muger, to the woman. A' las hermanas, to the sisters. De un dia, of the day. (6.) De el is sometimes used before the surnames of persons ; as, De d C^sar, | Of the Caesar. 89. The Spanish articles should not always be translated into English : and sometimes they are not expressed in Spanish when they would be in English ; as, La humilidad y la mansedumbre brillan menos que el orgullo. La vida no es un sueno. Con todos los hombres ten paz. El capitan Smith tiene memCria. Ella tiene marido. Humility and meekness glitter less than pride. Life is not a dream. With all men have peace. Captain Smith has a memory. She has a husband. * Before feminine nouns singular beginning with a or ha, not accented on the first svllable, this rule does not apply ; and, of course, la or una is used. OF THE NOUN. 33 90. Sometimes the Spanish definite article should be rendered by the indefinite in English ; as, El paiio se pueda comprar a tres duros la vara. La harina se vende a seis duros el barril. The cloth can be bought for three dollars a yard. Flour is sold at six dollars a bar rel. ' The learner must now turn to Part IV., and translate and write the Exercises in Section First. OF THE NOUN. Nouns are divided into proper and common, as in Eng- lish ; and to them belong gender, number, person, and case. GENDER. 91. In Spanish Grammar, every noun is considered as either masculine or feminine, whether it really has any gender or not ; thus, pan^ bread ; sombrero^ hat ; plaio^ plate ; papel^ paper ; azucar^ sugar ; are masculine ; while casaca^ coat ; manteca^ butter ; dgua^ water ; mesa^ table ; are feminine. 92. The following are the rules for distinguishing the gender : [a.) Nouns which are the names of males, as well as those which denote the ranks, offices, professions or em- ployments of males, are masculine ; as, homhre^ man ; perro^ dog ; o'ey^ king ; cura^ rector ; pintor^ painter ; zapatero^ shoemaker. [b.) Nouns which are the names of females, as well as those which denote the nanks, offices, professions or em- ployments of females, are feminine ; as, muger^ woman ; vaca^ cow ; reina^ queen ; costurera^ seamstress ; zapatera^ shoemaker's-wife. (c.) Nouns which end in a^ ° Juan dio pan i. la que tiene hambre. J (c.) When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is followed by the preposition of, and refers to a noun already expressed, the definite article is employed in Spanish ; as, * It may be proper to mention again, that quien (whom) is never em- ployed in the objective case, even if governed by a verb, without being preceded by a preposition. 52 OF THE PRONOUN. Por su prud^ncia y por la del juez. I Through his prudence and through 1 that qf-ihe judge. £3^ The Exercises in Part IV., Section Ninth, can now be trans- lated. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. The indefinite pronouns, or more properly, the indefinite adjective pronouns, are cada, each ; uno, one ; todo, every one, all ; nddie^ nobody ; alguien^ somebody ; ninguno, none ; alguno^ some ; algo^ something , nada^ nothing ; otro^ other ; tal^ such ; dmbos, both ; e7itrdmbos, both. 130. Of these, uno* todo, ninguno* alguno* otrOj and talj are declined like adjectives, both in the masculine and feminine. Cada^ nddie, alguien^ olgo^ nada^ are used only in the singular, and do not change. Ambos and entrambos are already in the plural, but have their feminine, ambas and entrambas. (a.) There are also some indefinite relative pronouns, quienquiera, cualquiera^ cualesquiera^ whoever, whosoever, whichever, whichsoever. ' We subjoin a list of these indefinite pronouns, simple and com- bined, with examples of the manner in which they are employed in Spanish. 131. The following are always used as nouns, that is, are never joined to a noun : ' Los cuatro animales, coda uno de ellos tenia seis alas. The four animals, each one of them had six wings. Todos ser^n premiados cada cual segun sus obras. All will-be rewarded, each one according-to his . deeds. r Juan y Diego se aman uno d otro. Uno otro, each other. < John and James love each other (love themselves I one to the-other). * The learner must remember (see 101) that uno, aJguno, and ninguno^ drop the final o when they precede a masculine noun. Cada uno, C every one.^ Cada cual, ( each one ^ OP THE PRONOUN. 53 , , . *u ( Orad los unos por los otros. Unos oiros, one another. 5 „ ^ .l /^i. ^ ^t ^l x ( Pray for one another {the some for the others), 5 '^o^^^y- J ^' nddie ama el avaro. ' c no one. ( The miser loves nobody (to nobody loves the miser). . . c somebody, f j, Le ha vis to alguien ? ° ' ( any body. ( Has any body seen him 1 c one and the other, c Uno y otro son amables. ^ * \ both. \ Both of them are amiable. . c something, c Yo tengo algo que comer. ^ * ) anything. ( I have something which to eat. -- c nothing. c Ni ' ( not anything. ( I have nothing with which to maintain myself. .r] Todo lo que.-^ everything. < This- woman cast-in all that (or every ^ nothing. c Nadu tengo con que mantenerme. t anything. ( I have nothing with which to main {all that which, r Esta echo todo lo que tenia, everything. < This-woman cast- whatever. I. thing) she-had. , f Quienquiera que el sea. Quienquiera que, whoever. I f^^^^^ ^^ may-be. ■^ whosoever s Cualquiera que, ( whichever* I ^^"^^^iera ^we se humillare. ^ * L Whoever may-humble himself. 132, The following are never used alone, but always with ^ ( each. C Coda vez. Each time. I every, c Cada palabra. Every word. Gualquier, J v, * 5 Cualquier criatura. Whatever creature. Cualesquier. \ ' ( Cualesquier criaturas. Whatever creatures. 133. These following may be used alone as nouns, or joined to nouns as adjectives : r everything, f En todo dad gracias. Todos tienen temor. Todo, J all. J In everything give thanks. All were afraid Todos. j everybody, j Todo ^rbol. Tocfos los hombres. L every. [ jE^uery tree. All men. ' Tengo libros : ^tiene vmd. algunos? I-have books : have you any 7 [" any, anybody. Alguno me ha tocado. . , J x. ^ , Somebody has touched me. .4.Z^7W.< some, somebody. <^ ^, ^^ ' ^ Algun fnito. Algunas cosas. f/7W.j jSome fruit. iSome things. Creyeron algunos de ellos. jSome of them believed. Un dia. C/ha de las hermanas. one. ' One day. One of the sisters, a person. | No sabe uno que hacer. [ One (or a persmi) knows not what to do, 5* Unos. ) some. i certain ones. Dio Ningum OF THE PRONOUN. Unos hombres. Some certain men. j,Di6 libros d algunos de estos nifios? libros a unos. Gave-he books to any of these children 1 He gave books to some. Ninguno le vio. A ninguno di& libros. Nobody saw him. To no-one gave-hu books. Ninguna persona. Ningunos de los hijos. ^ No person. None of the sons. Una cosa es prometer y otro cumplir. One thing it-is to promise and another to pei- form. Al fin las otras mugeres vinieron. ^ At length the other women came. c De los tales es el estado. En tal tiempo. ' ^^^ * \ Of such is the state. In such a time. f Ambos me gustan bien. Ambos sexos. Ambos. ^ , .u i t^oth please me well. Both sexes. < both. ^ {nobody, not any one. none, not any. no one. Otro. Otros, ' other, another. [ others, other. Entrambos. . Entrambos caen en el hoyo. [ Both fall into the pit. 134. Alguien and nadie can not be followed by the pre- position dcj of ; but alguno and ninguno must be used ; as, I Some-one of the boys. I No-one of the daughters. Alguno de los muchachos. Ninguna de las hijas. (a.) Alguno is never placed after the noun, except in negative sen- tences, and then it has the same meaning as ninguno placed before the noun ; thus we can say, Yo no hallo en el ninguno causa; or, Yo no hallo en el causa alguna, I find no fault* in him. (b.) Algo and nada can admit of an adjective joined to them, or the preposition de may come between ; thus, it can be said, algo nuevo, or, algo de nuevo, something new ; nada de natural, nothing natural. (c.) When by another's we mean the opposite of one^s own, it is expressed in Spanish, not by otro, but by ageno (or ajeno) ; aS; lo ageno, that which is another's, or that which is the property of another ; los bienes agenos, another's goods or wealth. 1^* The Exercises in Part IV., Section Tenth, may now be trans- lated. * Or rather, " cause of accusation ' tives strengthen the negation. in him In Spanish, two nega- OP THE VERB. 55 OF THE VERB. Verbs are classed, as in English, into active, passive, and neuter ; active-transitive, active-intransitive, reflective, regular, irregular, impersonal, and defective. They are also varied by person and number, mood and tense. 135. An active verb expresses an action affirmed of the agent or nominative ; as Claudio escribe. \ Claudius writes. {a.) When the action is affirmed of the agent as being transmitted to a direct object, the verb is called active- transitive ; as, Claudio escribe una carta. | Claudius writes a letter. (h.) When the verb expresses action, but has no direct object, it is called active-intransitive ; as. El esclamo. \ He exclaimed. El mocito salts, \ The lad jumped. 136. A reflective verb is one which affirms that the actidli is conveyed to the same person or thing which is the agent ; as, Tu te cenes. \ Thou girdest thyself. iVosotros nos alabamos. We commend ourselves. El se tiene por hombre grande. 1 He holds hUnself for a great man. 137. A passive verb affirms that an action* has been received or suffered by the agent ; as, Eilosfueron postrados. \ They were overthrown. 138. A neuter verb affirms merely the condition or state of existence of its agent, without any reference to a direct object ; as, El hombre existe. \ The man exists. Yo vivo. I I live. 139. Verbs have three persons and two numbers, as in English ; that is, they vary their endings to agree with the person and number of their nominative ; as. 56 OF THE VERB. ■I Nosotros hablamos, we speak Vosotros hablais, you speak. Ellos hablan, they speak. First Person. Yo hahlo, I speak. Second Person. TH hablas^Xhow. speakest. Third Person. El habla, he speaks. (a.) In Spanish, it is not necessary to use the personal pronouns of the j nominative case with the verb (unless for the sake of emphasis or pers- j picuity), as the ending of the verb indicates the person of its nomina 1 tive. Thus, hablo means I-speak; hahlas, thou-speakest ; habla, he- speaks or she-speaks ; hablamos, we-speak, etc. MOODS. Mood is the form which the verb takes to show in what manner the action or being is represented. In Spanish there are four moods ; the infinitive, the indicative, the imperative, and the subjunctive. 140. The infinitive mood expresses action or being in an indefinite manner, without reference to person or time ; as, Hablar, to speak. ^ Coiner, to eat. 141. The indicative mood represents the affirmation in a positive manner ; as, Hablamos, we-speak. | Comere, I-shall-eat. 142. The imperative mood expresses an order, entreaty, or command ; as, Uahldd, speak ye. i Coman, let-them-eat, or, raay-they- eat. 143. The subjunctive mood represents the affirmation in a conditional manner ; as, Aunque hahlen, though they-may- I Yo comeria, I would-eat. speak. I TENSES. Tense is the form which the verb takes to show the time of the action, being, or passion which is affirmed. There are properly three tenses, the past, the present, and the future. These are subdivided into eight tenses, one for the present, five for the past, and two for the future : the present ; imperfect, perfect-definite, perfect-indefinite,^ the OP THE VERB. 57 first-pluperfect, second-pluperfect; the first-future, and future-perfect or second-future. 144. The present tense represents whatever is affirmed as taking place at the present time ; as, Hablauy they-speak. | Estdn comiendoy they-are eating. 145. The imperfect tense represents as relatively present something which is affirmed as past, though, for all we know to the contrary, not yet completed ; as, Hablaban cuando los vio. I They were-speaking when he-saw I them. 146. The perfect-definite tense represents what is affirmed as being completely past and finished ; as, Les hablo ayer. | Ke-spoke to them yesterday. 147. The perfect-indefinite tense represents what is affirm- ed ^s having taken place during a time not entirely elapsed ; as, Les he hablado hoy. | I-have spoken to them to-day. 148. The first-pluperfect tense expresses what is past and was finished before another action, also past, took place : that is, an event which occurred prior to some other past event; as, Habm hablado cuando Wego. \ 1-had spoken when he-arrived. 149. The second-pluperfect expresses that what is affirmed had taken place immediately before a time which is past , and is always employed after adverbs of time ; as, Cuando les hvho hablado^ se mar- I When he-had spoken to-them, they- charon. I went away. 150. The first-future tense refers to some action or event which is yet to take place ; as, Hablard esta noche. | He-will-speak to-night. 151. The second-future or future-perfect tense refers to some future action or event that will have taken place at or before some certain future time ; as, HabrS acabado d las ocho. | l-shall-havejinished at eigh* o'clcfck. 58 OF THE VERB. PARTICIPLES AND GERUNDS. 152. Verbs in Spanish have two participles, the f resent and the fast. There are, however, but few present partici- ples in use, and these few are, almost without exception, employed only as adjectives or nouns ; as, semejante, simi- lar ; obedientey obedient ; viajante^ traveler. The ending of the present participle of verbs that have their infinitive in «r, is ante ; of those that have their infinitive in er or ir, it is iente. 153. The past-participle denotes action or being perfected or finished, and when derived from a regular verb, is gen- erally formed by changing the final letters of the infinitive ar into ado, and er or ir into ido ; as, Hablado, spoken. j Comido, eaten. 154. The gerund in Spanish is equivalent to the present participle in English ; and is formed by changing the final letters of the infinitive ar into ando, and er and ir into iendo ; as, HablandOf speaking. j ComiendOf eating. CONJUGATION. 155. In Spanish, the infinitive mood of all Verbs ends in ar, er, or ir, and these terminations serve to distinguish the three conjugations ; the first conjugation comprehend- ing all verbs ending in ar ; the second, those ending in er ; and the third, those ending in ir. (a.) Regular verbs are those which are conjugated through all the moods and tenses without deviating in their orthography from the cor- responding orthography of the model verbs. (6.) Irregular verbs are those which do not conform in every respect to the regular standard or model verbs. (c.) Auxiliary or helping verbs are those by the aid of which others are conjugated in the compound tenses and in the passive voice. Th^ auxiliary verbs are haber^ to have ; ser^ to be ; and estar^ to be. Those tenses of the active voice in which an auxiliary verb is used, are called compound tenses. OF THE VERB. 59 Remark. — ^The learaer must keep in mind the rules for accenting the verb in all its varieties of termination (see 57, a, and b) ; and he will thus know that all persons of the verbs (of whatever mood or tense) which have no accent over some syllable are to be accented on the syllable next to the last.* In some of the first conjugations following, the ac- cent is placed over all the words, in order to aid the learner in pro- nouncing them, 1^* As the auxiliary verbs are required to form the compound tenses of every other verb, we first give the conjugation of them. 156. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, haber. SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. Haber, To have. PAST-PARTICIPLE. PAST-INFINITIVE. Habido, Had. Hab^r habido, To have had. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. Habi^ndo, Having. Habiendo habido, Having had. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. Yo he, . I have. Yo he habido, /Aare had. Tii has, Thou hasst. Tu has habido, TViou hast had. El ha. He has. El ha h ibldo, He has had. Nosutros h^mos. We have. Nosutros hemos habido. We have had. Vosutros hab^is, Ye have. Vosutros habeis habido, Ye have had. Ellos han, They have. Ellos han habido, They have had. IMPERFECT. FIRST-PLUPERFECT. Yohabia, I had. Yo habla hBhido, I had had. Tii habias, Thau hadst. Tii habias habido, Thou hadst had. El habla. He had. El habla habido. He had had. Nosutros habla- Nosutros habla- mos, We had. mos habido. We had had. Vosutros hablais. Ye had. Vosutros hablais habido, Ye had had. Ellos habian, 1 ^hey had. Ellos habian ha- bido, They had had. * Except the second person plural of the imperative mood. 60 OF THE VERB. 1 INDICATIVE MOOD—ConHnued. [ PERFECT-DEFINITE. SECOND-PLUPERFECT. YoMbe, I had. Yo hiibe habido, I had had. Tii hubiste, Thou hadst. Tu hubiste habi- do, Thou hadst had. El hiibo, He had. El hiibo habido, He had had. Nosotros hubi- Nosotros hubl- mos, We had. mos habido, We had had. jVosotros hubls- Vosotros hubis- teis, You had. teis habido, You had had. Ellos hubieron, They had. Ellos hubieron habido, They had had. FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Yo habr^, I shall or will Yo habre habido,/ s^iaZZ or will have have. had. 1 Tii habras, Thau, shall or wilt Tii habras habi- Thm shall ox wilt have. do, have had. Eihabr^ He shaU or wUl El habra habido. He shaU or wiU have. have had. Nosotros habrd- We shall or will Nosotros habr^- We shall or will mos, have. mos habido, have had. Vosotros habr^is, Y(m shall or will Vosotros habr^is You shall or will have. habido, have had. Ellos habr^n, They shaU or wUl Ellos habr^n ha- They shall or vMl have. bido, have had. || IMPERATIVE MOOD. H^ya yo,* Let me have^ or, Tnay I have. Ha tii. Have thou. Hdya el. Let him have, or, m^y he have. Hayamos nosotros, Let us have^ or, may we have. Hab^d vosotros. Have you. H^yan ellos. Let them have, or, may they have. * The first person singular of the imperative mood is not in use in Spanish, and is inserted here only to exhibit the full form of the conju- gation. OF THE VERB. 61 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. Yo haya, / inay have. Tii hdyas, Tfiou mayest have El h^ya, He may have. Nosotros haya- moSj We may have. Vosotros hayais, You may have. EIlos h^yan, They may have. Yo hdya habido, / may have had. Tii h^yas habido, Thou mayest have had. El h^ya habido, He may have had. Nosotros haya- mos habido, We may have had. Vosotros hayais You may have habido, had. Ellos hayan ha- They may have bldo, had. IMPERFECT.* PLUPERFECT. Yo hubiera, ha- / would, should, bria,or hubiese, or might have. Tii hubieras, ha- Thou wouldst, brias, or habie- shouldst, or ses, mightst have. El hubiera, ha- He would, shmdd, bria, or hubiese, or might have. Nosotros hubi^r- We would, should, amos, habria- ox might have. mos, or hubie- semos, Vosotros hubi4- You would, rais, habriais, should, or might or hubieseis, have. Ellos hubi^ran, They would, habrlan, or hu- should,or might, bi^sen, have. Yo hubiera, ha-/ wouhi, should, bria, or hubi- or might have 6se habido, hcd. Tu hubieras, ha- Thou wouldst, brias, or hubie- shouldst, or ses habido, mightst havehad. El hubiera, ha- He would, should, bria, or hubiese or might have habido, ^ had. ! Nosotros hubier- We would, should, ! amos, habria- or might hare \ mos, or hubie- had. semos habido, Vosotros hubie- You would, rais, habriais, should, or might or hubieseis have had. habido, Ellos hubi^ran, TYiey would, habrlan, or hu- should, or migh t bi^sen habido, have had. FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Si yo hubi^re, If J should have. Si tii hubi^res, If thmi shauldst have. Si yo hubiere ha- If I should have bido, had. Si tii hubi^res/^r thou shouldst habido, have had. * The three forms of the imperfect subjunctive (ending in ra, ria, and ae), will be explained in Part III. (See 313—317.) 6 62 OF THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued. FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Si 61 hubi^re, If he should have. Si nosotros hu- If we should have. bi^remos, Si vosotros hubi- If you should ereis, have. Si 6II0S hubi^ieUflf they should have. Si el hubi^re ha- If he should have bido, had. Si nosotros hubi- If we should have ^remos habido, Jiad. Si vosotros hu- If you should have biereis habido, had. Si ellos huhi6- If they should ren habido, have had. 157. By examining the above conjugation, it will be seen that, after having learned the simple tenses, the com- pound ones are also known, as these latter are always formed by placing the past participle after the persons of the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb.* (a.) The personal pronouns of the nominative case are seldom used with the verb (see 139, a), as the ending of the person of each tense gen- erally indicates the person and number of its nominative. Thus, the first person plural of every tense has its ending in mos : when, therefore, the learner sees any tense of a verb having for its final letters mos, he may know that its nominative is to be rendered in English by the pro- noun we. In the conjugations which follow, the pronouns will be omitted in Spanish. ' The distinctions between some of the tenses (distinctions not known in Enghsh Grammar) will be explained in Part III. 158. Conjugation of the verb ser. SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. Ser, To be. PAST-PARTICIPLE. PAST-INFINITIVE. Sido, " Been. Hab^r sido. To have been. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. Si^ndo, Being. Habidndo sido, Having been. * Perhaps one of the easiest methods of learning the conjugations of the verbs is to copy and re-copy each tense till it can be done without referring to the Grammar. OF THE VERB. 68 INDICATIVE MOOD. | PRESENT. PERFECT- INDEFINITE. Soy, lam. He sido. / have been. E'res, T/iou art. Has sido, Thou hast been. Es, He is. Ha sido. He has been. Soraos, We are. H^mos sido, We have been. S6is, You are. Habeis sido. You have been. Son, They are. Han sido, They have been. IMPERFECT. FIRST-PLUPERFECT. | E'ra, I was. Habia sido, I had been. E'ras, Thou wast. Hablas sido, Tliou hadst been. E'ra, He was. Habia sido. He had been. E'ramos, We were. Habiamos sido. We had been. E'rais, You were. Habiais sido. You had been. E'ran, They were. Habian sido. They Jiad been. PERFECT-DEFINITE. SECOND-PLUPERFECT. j Ful, I was. Hiibe sido, I had been. Puiste, Thou wast. Hubiste sido, Thou hadst been. ,Fu^, He was. Hiibo sido. He had been. ] Fuimos, We were. Hubimos sido, We had been. Fulsteis, You were. Hubisteis sido. You had been. Fu6ron, They were. Hubi^ron sido, They had been. FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Ser6, I shall ox will he. Habr6 sido, I shall ox will have been. Seris, Thou shalt or wUt Habr^s sido. ThoushaUoxwUt be. have been. Ser^ HeshaUmvnllbe. Habrd sido, He shall or will have been. Ser^mos, We shall or iciU Habr^mos sido, We shall or vnll be. have been. Serais, You shall or will Habr^is sido. You shall or will be. have been. Serdn, They shall or will Habr^n sido. They shaU ox wiU be. 1 ..,' ! have been. 64 OF THE VERB. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1 S4a, Let me 5e, or may I be. S6, Be thou. Sea, Let him be, or, may he be. || Sedmos Let tis bey or, may we be. Sed, Be you. Sean, Let them be, or, may they be. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. S^a, I may be. Haya sido, / Ttiay have been. S^as, Thou mayest be. Hdyas sido. Thou mayest have been.' Sea, He may be. Haya 'sido, He may have been. Se^mos, We may be. H^yamos sido, We may have been. Seals, You may be. Hdyais sido. You may have been. S4an, They may be. Hdyan sido. They may have been. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Fu^ra, seria, Iwauld, should, or Hubiera, habria, / would, should, or fu^se, might be. or hubi^se si- or might have do, been. Fu^ras, serlas, Thou wouMst, Hubidras, habri- Thou wouldst, or fusses, shovldst, or as, or hubi^ses shouldst, or mightst be. sido, mightst have been. Fu^ra, seria. He would, should, Hubiera, habria. He would, should, or fusses, or might be. or hubi^se or might have sido, been. Fu^ramos, seria- We would, should, Hubi^raraos, ha- We would, should, mos, or fu^se- or might be. briamos, or or might have mos, hubi^semos been. « sido. Fu^rais, serials, You would. Hubi^rais, ha- You would, or fu^seis, should, or might briais, or hubi- shouLd,ox might be. 6seis sido, have been. Fu^ran, serian, They would, Hubi^ran, habri- They would. or fu^sen, should, or might an, or hubi^- should, or might be. sen sido, have been. OF THE VERB. 65 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued, FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Si fu^re, Jf I should be. Si hubiere sido, If I should have been. Si fu^res, If thou shouldst Si hubi^res sido, If thou shouldst he. have been. Si fu^re, If he should he. Si hubiere sido, If he should have been. Si fu^remos, If we should he. Si hubieremos If we should have sido. been. Si fu^reis, If you should he. Si hubi^reis sido, If you should have been. Si fu^ren, If they should he. Si hubieren sido. If they should have been. iated. The Exercises in Part IV., Section Eleventh, can now be trans 159. Conjugation of the verb esiar. -, SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. Estar, To be. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST INFINITIVE. Estddo, Been. Haber estado, To have been. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. Estando, Being. Habi^ndo estado, Having been. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. Estoy, I am. He > I have 1 Thou hast ^been. Est^s, Thou art. Has >est^do, Est^, He is. Ha J He has J Est^mos, We are. H^mos-i Hab^is Ust^do, Han J We have > Estdis, You are. You have >been. Est^n, They are. They have J 66 OP THE VERB. 1 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. ' - ■) IMPERFECT. FIRST-PLUPERFECT. ' Estdba, I was. Habla I had Estdbas, Thou wast. Habias Thou hadst Estdba, Estdbamos, He was. We were. Habia Habiamos [l He had We had 1 Est^bais, You were. Habiais You had Est^ban, They were. Habian They Jmd . PERFECT-DEFINITE.* SECOND-PLUPERFECT. Estiive, I was. Hiibe 1 Ihad Estuviste, Thou wast. Hubiste Thou hadst Estiivo, He was. Hiibo O He had '1 Estuvimos, We were. Hubimos 2? We had Estuvisteis, You were. Hubisteis Qi You had Estuvieroh, They were. Hubieron J They had J FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Estard. I shall or wiU be. Habr^ ] I shall or wUr Estar^s, Thou shalt ox wilt he. He shaU or will he. Habr^s Thou wilt Estar^j Habrd O HewUl s Estar^mos, We shall or wiUhe. Habremos >^ We shall >^ Estar^is, You shall or tmll he They shall or wiU Habr^is You will & 4 Estar^n, Habran They will he. J J IMPERATIVE MOOD. Este, Let me be, or may I he.i Esta, Be thou. Est^, Let him, be, or may he be. Estemos, Let vs be, or may we be. Est^d, Be you. Est^n, Let them he, or may they be. * The persons o.f the perfect-definite and those of the imperfect of the indicative mood, in Spanish, are both rendered by the English imperfect tense, but they can not be used indiscriminately in Spanish. The proper manner of employing them will be found in Part III. (See 302-304.) ^ J ^ \ t See the remark in the margin, at page 60. OF THE VERB. 67 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. Este, Estes, Este, Estemos, Esteis, Esten, / may be. Thmi mayest be. He may be. We may be. You may be. • They may be. Haya Hayas Haya Hayamoa Hayais HjCyan o -a >'2 I may Thou mayest He may We may You may They Tnay IMPERFECT. Estuvi^ra, estaria, estuviese, Estuvi^ras, estarias, estuvieses, Estuvi^ra, estaria, estuviese, Estuvi^ramos, estariamos, estuvi- ^semos, Estuvi^rais, estarias, estuvi^seis, Estuvi^ran, estarian, estuvi^sen. / would, sJwuldy might be. Thou wouldst, shouldst, mightst be. He would, should, might be. We would, should, might be. You would, should, might be. They would, should, might be. PLUPERFECT. Hubiera, habria, hubiese Hubi^ras, habrlas, hubi^ses Hubiera, habria, hubiese Hubieramos, habrlamos, hubi- esemos Hubierais, habrlais, hubi^seis Hubieran, habrian, hubiesen I would, should, might Thou wouldst, shouldst, might ' He would, should, might >"§ We would, should, might • You would, should, might They would, should, might FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Si estuvi^re, If I should be. Si estuvi^res, J f thou shouldst be. Si estuvi^re, If he should be. Si estuvi^remos. If we should be. Si estuvi^reis, If you should be. Si estuvi^ren, If they should be. Si hubiere Si hubieres Si hubiere Sihubieremos Si hubi^reis Si hubi^ren If I should 1 If thou shouldst ^ If he should ! ^ '^If we should j '" If you should] > If they should J The learner will now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section Twelfth. 160. Conjugation of the verb ten^r.* * Tener is seldom used as an auxiliary verb, and haber seldom used as a transitive verb. Thus, "I have money," would be, Tengo dinero: and, " I ha'ye spoken," He hablado. 68 OP THE VERB. SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. Ten^r, To have. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST INFINITIVE. Tenido, Had. Hab^r tenido, To have had. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. Teni^ndo, Having. Habiendo tenido, Having had. 1 INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. T^ngo, I have. He 1 I have Ti^nes, Thou hast. Has Thm hast Ti^ne, Ten^mos, He has. We have. Ha H^mos 1 He has ^ g We have ^1 Tenuis, You have. Hab^is "^ You have Ti^nen, They have. Han They have IMPERFECT. FIRST-PLUPERFECT. Tenia, I had. Habia ■] I had Tenias, • Thau hadst. Habias Thou hadst Tenia, ffeliad. Habia 4 He had t^ Teniamos, We had. Habiamos fa We had Teniais, You had. Habiais ^ You had Tenian, They had. Habian They had J PERFECT-DEFINITE. SECOND-PLUPERFECT. Tiive, I had. Hiibe ^ Ihad -] Tuviste, Thou hadst. Hubiste Thmi hadst Tiivo, He had. Hidbo o He had '^* Tuvlmos, We had. Hubimos f' g We had ^-^ Tuvisteis, You had. Hubiste ^ You had Tuvi^ron, They had. Hubi^ron They had J FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Tendr^, IshaUorwillhave. Habr6 "| / shall or wHl ^ Tendr^s, Uiou vnlt have. Habr^s Thou wilt "?f' Tendr^, He win have. Habr^ o He will ^ c. We shall Tendr^mos, We shall have. Habr^mos ?- Tendrils, . You will have. Habr^is ^ You will -^ Tendr^n, They will have. Habr^n J TheywiU J OF THE VERB. 69 IMPERATIVE MOOD. T^nga, Let me have, or may I have. \ Ten, Have thou. Tenga, Let him have, or may he have. Tengamos, Let us have, or may we have. Tened, Have you. Tengan, Let them have, or may they have. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. Tenga, I may have. Tengas, TTiou may est have. Tenga, He may have. Tengamos, We mxiy have. Teng^is, You may have. Tengan, They may have. Hdya Hayas Hiya Hdyamos Hayais H^yan I may TViou mayest -§ He may g We may You may TheyTnay > ^ IMPERFECT. Tuviera, tendria, tuviese, I would, should, might have. Tuvieras, tendrias, tuvi^ses, Thouwouldst,shouldst,mightsthave. Tuviera, tendria, tuviese. He would, should, might have. Tuvi^ramos, tendriamos, tuvifese- We would, should, might have. Tuvierais, tendriais, tuvi^seis. You would, should, might have. Tuvieran, tendrian, tuviesen, They would, should, might have. PLUPERFECT. Hubiera, habrla, hubi^se ^ Hubieras, habrias, hubi^ses Hubiera, habrla, hubi^se Hubi^ramos, habriamos, hubi- ^semos Hubi^rais, habriais, hubieseis Hubi^ran, habrlan, hubi^sen - I would, should, might n Thouwouldst, shouldst, mightst Q- He would, should, might >S We would, should, might You would, should, might They would, should, might > ^ FIRST-FUTURE. SECOND-FUTURE. Si tuvi^re. If I should have. Si tuvieres, Ifthou shouldst have. Si tuvi^re. If he should have. Si tuvi^remos. If we should have. Si tuvi^reis, ][f you should have. j Si tuvi^ren, If fhey should have. Si hubiere Si hubi^res Sf hubiere Si hubi^remos Si hubi^reis Si hubi^ren If I should ^ Ifthou shouldst 4 If he should ^Ifwe should ** If you should If they should^ 1 70 OF THE VERB. 161. In ordinary conversation, instead of the second person singular and plural, vmd. with the third person sin- gular, and vmds. with the third person plural of the verb, are used (see 110, c ; 123) ; as, Vmd. es, You are. i Vmd. ha tenido, You have had. Vmds. son, Y&ii are. \ Vmds. han tenido, You nave had. [a.) The pronoun you in English is used in both num- bers and both genders * without any change : in Spanish, vmd. (listed) has its plural vmds. (ustedes), but does not undergo any change to distinguish the gender to which it may be applied. Thus, " what say you, sir ?" / que dice vmd., senor ? "what say you, madam?" j^-we dice vmd., senora ? " what say you., sirs ?" i que dicen vmds., senor es ? " what say you, ladies ?" i que dicen vmds., senor as 1 i^* The Exercises in Part IV., Section Thirteenth, can now be translated. OF THE CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 162. It has been already mentioned that there are in Spanish three conjugations : the first comprehending verbs whose infinitive ends in ar ; the second, those ending in er ; and the third, those ending in ir. 163. Every verb consists of two parts — the root and the termination, or the verb-root and the verb-ending. The verb- root consists of those letters which are not changed by inflection ; as, am in am-dr, am-o, am-aba, am-e, am-are. Those letters, which may be changed by inflection, to show the different moods, tenses, persons, and numbers, consti tute the verb-endings. Thus, in the preceding examples, the letters dr, o, aba, e, are, are the verb-endings. 164. The following is a tabular view of the verb-endings of all the conjugations. The figures 1,2, 3. denote the first, second, and third conjugations respectively. CONJUGATION. INFINITIVE MOOlf. PAST PARTICIPLE. GERUND. 1 1. -^r. -^do. -ando. 2. -6r. -Ido. -i^ndo. '■ -Ir. -ido. -i^ndo. OF THE VERB. 71 1 INDICATIVE MOOD.* PRESENT. CONJUGA- TION. Singvlar. Plural. A First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. 1. 2. 3. -0, -0, -0, -as, -es, -es. -a, -e, -e, -dmos, -^mos, -imos, -^is, -eis, -is. -an. -en. -en. IMPERFECT. 1. 2. 3. -^ba, -la, -ia, -abas, -ias, -las, -aba, -ia, -ia, -abamos, -iamos, -iamos. -^bais, -iais, -iais. -aban. -ian. -ian. PERFECT-DEFINITE. 1. 2. 3. -1. -1, -aste, -iste, -iste. -6, -i6, -iu. -amos, -imos, -imos. -^steis, -isteis, -isteis. -^ron. -ieron. -ieron. FIRST-FUTURE. 1. 2. 3. -ar^, -ere, -ire, -ar^s, -eras, -ir^s. -ar^, -er^, -ira. -aremos, -eremos, -iremos. -areis, -er^is, -ireis, -ar^n. -eran. -ir^n. ... . IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1. 2. 3. -e, -a, -a, -a, -e, -e, -a, -a, -6mos, -amos, -^mos. -id, -en. -an. -an. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. 1. 2. 3. ' ;. -a, -a, -es, -as, -as, -a, -a, -^mos, -amos, -amos, -^is, -^is, -en. -an. -an. ♦ The compound tenses, being always formed by the various persons of the tenses of the verb haber (see 156) and the past-participle, are noi of course to be included in this tabular view of the verb-endings. 72 OF THE VERB. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOB— Continued. IMPERFECT. 1 CONJUGA- TION. Singular. Plural. First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. f -^ra, -dras. -^ra, -aramos. -arais. -aran. ''\ -aria, -arias, -aria, -ariamos, -ariais. -arian. I -^se, -ases, -dse, -asemos. -aseis. -asen. f -iera, -ieras. -i^ra. -ieramos. -ierais, -ieran. ^'\ -eria, -erias, -eria. -eriamos. -eriais, erian. I -iese, -ieses, -iese. -iesemos, -ieseis. -iesen. r -iera, -ieras, -i^ra. -ieramos. -ierais, -ieran. 3J -iria, -irias. -iria. -iriamos. -iriais, -irian. I -iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis. -iesen. FIRST-FUTURE. 1. -^re, -ares, -are, -aremos, -dreis. -aren. 2. -iere. -ieres. -i^re. -ieremos. -iereis. -ieren. 3. -iere, -ieres, -iere. -ieremos, -i^reis. -ieren. CHANGES IN THE VERB-ENDING. 165. A change takes place in the first letter of the verb- ending in the gerund, third person singular and plural of the perfect-definite in the indicative, and in all the persons of the first and third forms of the imperfect subjunctive, and in the first-future of the same mood, in the second or third conjugation, when the verb-root ends in ^, g, or u. This change is merely the substitution of y for i ; as, ca-cr^ ca-yendo.^ ca-yo^ ca-yeron^ ca-yere^ ca-yese^ etc. ; cre-er^ ere- yendo, cre-yo, cre-yeron^ cre-yere, cre-yeres, etc. ; argu-ir^ argu-yendo^ argu-yo^ etc. (a.) If the last letter of the verb-root be a silent u (see 14 and 21) the change in the verb-ending does not take place ; as, persegu-tr^ persigu- iendo, etc., and not persigu-yendo. CHANGES IN THE VERB-ROOT. 166. In order that the last letter of the verb-root may retain, in all the tenses, the same sound which it has in the infinitive, a change of letters is sometimes required. This <5P THE VERB. 71 change can only take place when the verb-root ends in c, g. gu, or qu. (a.) In such cases, there is changed, in the first conjugation^ c of the verb-root into qu before e of the verb-ending; as, ioc-dr; ioqu-e. g of the verb-root into gu before e of the verb-ending; &Sjpdg-ari pdgu-es. {b,) In the second conjugation, c of the verb-root into z before a or o; as, venc-er; vinz-as^ venz-o. g into J before a or o; as, converg-er; converj-a, converj-o. (c.) In the third conjugation, c of the verb-root into z before a or o : as, unc-tr; Unz-as, {inz-o. g " '•' j " a or ; as, ung-tr ; : -'-N 3 f" > o V > *> > Li 1 1 > a § o i ^ K H > 1 1 ^ 1 w u o ■^ S w7 E 1 < IJ •s* ,2 s^. ;i s (U cS tf QJ 03 tn > ^ p. ^ s > G o o. o .2 ^ fl ^ V pc: 1? «« vi M 1 s 03 V > ^ 2 E 1 fn p« a> C3 l-t g OP THE VERB. 75 ^ « ;| '^ :§ 1 :i •N •*-! N oT §" . - s-^'^g o ■«- §" d- 1 -s g" x-r 1 rB 1 1 1 O '> '> *> ^> *> >>>>:>:? >>>>;>>: >:>:>:?>:>: 1 Q « 8 1 1 e i ^ •^ H N S •*^ W g 5 PS > (0 Q t-^ H u H H a du U < ou g g o 3 of P4 •> 09 \o s m Qi O (U V ^ ^ ^^ v^ VH 0^ >^ vT .a ;;5 .~ \-H .S HH s s s a a a o o o o o o O O O O O O s a s s s s o o o o o o O O O OOO a a a a a a O O O O O O i O O O O O O ! ^ .' ^^ j I love, thou lovest, he loves, we love, you love, they love. ^ ^ « « § ^ loved. ou lovedst. 1 loved. >u loved, ey loved. S^-^ 8 i.^ i O c3 eU es *ca c3 ste, mos, steis, ron, rt cd cJ Nrf \tJ ca ND CS \0 O Vrf « 1 s a a a s a a a a a a s a a a a a a » cvb~^' ~fr4 ' "^*^ — "^" 'C^*~r^ "r4"cT oo "^ r>} r^ ^— I o^ CT!* 76 OF THE VERB. Q O O o Q 12 '2 ~ O -o O '^ .!h "O t3 -g "O > > -g !S •>: S o -2 •>: to '^ S x> fl O etf B3 03 c3 S WWWWJUW o'B s. e-a {^ lij ;^ t^ ;z; ^ 1 '^'^'S -r o ^ c e o -o o c S -a i S c » <» £ 1 rt B o ;- «a * ao * S S c V 03 e) (u e^ S ffi ffi ffi ffi tl^ ffi ^ c< CO i-< e-j CO o" -5 o" -E 3 '2 rs *> s > > .>: I .>: § > V > a> > B3 G Cl3 C5 cS ^ C3 cd IS S S 2 S S CO c3 cd cd cd A (3^ S iU n A K I is ^ ^ jD ^ .Q ja c jS 2 S cO 03 n CO cO si UJ S S ffi ffi UJ t-H ccf er? .-? c^' CO ' '^ 12 *^ > *> o .S O .S r'iS .2:^ ^ ^ ^ XI rO ^ 3 3 S3 3 SJ 3 s s ;ij Dh ffl n 6 :2 8 s 2 s «n .! 8 2 *S 2 o .2 o .S v2 .2S ^ ^ ^ U3 XJ .o p ;3 si ?3 1:1 3 K ffi K ffi ffi ffi '«* -^ "§ 1 i I J "I •§ -^ ?-§ •« -< ^ 1 ^ -^i -^ If! i ^ rri ra CO CO O"! 0~ S S S Ta g 'O eO eO CO fi «* e m .2 C S 03 = O 3> O CO ■J-i eo e ♦^ »-i dj .2 o .5 n2 .2i X> ^ ^ X> J3 JD S3 S 3 S3 3 S3 Ph M Pk M M HH ^ cj po -H cj CO OF THE VERB. 77 ■s •^ V » i ^ :§ 1 1 S •*^ o i S . «- . 1 .2" c vivid 8 vivi vivid mos V is vivi n vivi §1 § <«« ve vd 5 ^ vj NU Va ^5J CD ^(D rt ^ -^ ^ a ^ c ca 03 ca § 3 § >>>>>> *> '> *> *> *?^ *> Xi Xi X> Xi Xi .J=i a d a a a d Hi !ij S ffi S ffi , •S "3 1 1 i 1 Q O o 1 1 Q § 1 ^ § O O 53 N CO > "^ > EH m § s o o-'S o-l Jl 3 •§ 2 s a a 5 Pi 1.- § 1 » Q ^ "m "^S 2 '^ IS QJ 0) 05 ill §S8 « «) « a .2 d va >cd vd < CO ^ (M* CO .-I (>» CO -^* Ci CO — 4 c^ c< »-i c^ CO 78 OF THE VERB. Q O O > cd cd 03 cd Vlj !d s s s s s s o o o o o o O O O O O O *^ j3 » « i 5* •-s ^ ^ 8 i,^ o ^ ^ cD^ ^ S .2 c © «J © O) *0 QJ S £ S S £ S <- <5 -i © ©i» © ©M ©^^i-*©K>»-i*© •^ •> •> •> '^ •>: •> '^ •> •> •> *> •> •> •> o o o „ £ £ £ .2 2 .2 cj c3 © *3 'rt 'o „ >-■ \-H en >- \-< M3 © ■»© ^^ *© VI) »- 2 © 2^ .2^ © .2i .S "© J ^ ^© rs rss © :2 £££££££££££££££ ooooooooooooooo OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ^^; £ £ £ £ << <^ ^ <- ■ £ £ £ ^ <1 -^ £ £ III ^ I £ '3 -^ ! <1 <1 <1 <1 OP THE VERB. 79 I Q O O > c PQ 1: s s s o o o o o o Iff s i i o 4" o I I I -g 'g ^3 > > '^ " S !> S .2 e cS ca cd cd c3 cj >>>.>, t»^ >. >> c3 c3 e3 Nk! \d cd Ph Mh W W W W § § § S 8 g o o o o '-' o " 03 "^ S .2 c cd cd cd ed cd CO cd cd cd ^cd \d cd rc ffi hi} til ffi hi^ J '^ "^ ill -2 ^ >. g § 2 -^ -< >. ^ 1^ § s g § ^ i>^ o -a o S ^ -a -g ed 'O cd 2 2 fl S g 2 I S S Cd S O '^ Cd ^ 03 =3 S .S2 fl ed cd cd cd cd cd >, 5>> >^ >. >. >> cd cd cd ^cd m:3 cd ffi ffi tU ffl ffi W »— I C? CO 2 -S d^-S •S: I .^ I t I -^ I -^ >-icdoa^cd°3>-'cdOQ .2 "'>^ .2h .S ^'^ .2^ .2 ^ .2h ^ X! 3 3 ^" 3 S ^ 3 ?5cd?33cd:33ed3 lcd!=i3ed3;3cdS I M ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi •ppao/ 'p9ao] 'p9aoj 9avti gavy gavy o « o -5 o "5 s g s I s ^ Cd -a S 2 Cd B Cd ^ 03 . cd 02 -icd'»»-'E5 ^jd33^33^ 3cd3s3cd33rt w ' 80 OF THE VERB. I Q O O > E- O "^ P m u '^ .>; |3 o'l^'o^ ^ > :2 > -s: 2 '^ § > >. S .2 ^ <3 1^ c I -s >s I -s s Q *o O) > *> *> 'g *g *> P V '> '> '> "> xri m m xn m in w ffi 33 Dh w "pddoi 'pdooi -pdaoi 9avy davy 9avy O O O gi g^ QJ 03 O) 03 >Ci ^O 03 s B s a s s o o o o o o o o o o o u ?» j» CO j» ;» ^ g o g o o; o cd ed c3 >«3 vd ee S § S S S E cd ca cB cd cS cc OT J» J^ ro M i» >-4 c^' ro .-4 (TJ CO 5 t3 3 ^ o -c o -c: 3 'o ^ - ^ ^ >: > ,^ O > > ^ S .2 c 03 <1J Qi ?^ ?^ -<' (N CO OF THE VERB 81 ' The learner must now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section Fourteenth. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 169. Those verbs are called reflective or reciprocal which reflect the action they express, on their nominative (see 136); as, Yo me desmodo, or me desnudo,^'! undress my- self ;" El se ahorcoj or se ahorco, " he hung himself;" nosotros nos amamosj " we love ourselves," " or " we love each other." (a.) The reflective verbs are inflected in the same man- ner as the verb would be conjugated if it were employed without the reflective pronouns. The verb ahorcar is thus conjugated reflectively : INFINITIVE MOOD. Ahorcdrse, to hang one^s self. PAST-PARTICIPLE. PAST-INFINITIVE. Ahorcado, hung one's self. Haberse ahorca- to have hung one^s do, self. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. Ahorcdndose, hanging oner's self. Habi^ndose ahor- having hung one's cado, self. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 1 . Me ahorco, / hang myself. Me he ahorcado, I have hung my- self. 2. Te ahorcas, thou hangest thy- Te has ahorcado, thou hast hung self. thyself. 3. Se ahorca, he hangs himself. Se ha ahorcado, he has hung him- self. 1 . Nos ahorca- we hang ourselves. Nos hemos ahor- we have hung our- mos, cado, selves. 2. Os ahorciis, j ow hang your- Os hab^is ahor- you have hung selves. cado, yourselves. 3. Se ahorcan, they hang them- Se han ahorcado, <^ey have hung 11 selves. themselves. 1 And thus through all the moods and tenses. i 82 OF THE VERB. (6.) It must not be forgotten that the reflective pronouns are always in the objective case, and governed by the verb which comes after them or to which they are joined (for they are always joined to infinitives, gerunds, and imperatives. See 116; IIG, a; 116, bj also 113, a.) The nominative personal pronouns are not generally used. OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 170. A passive verb is conjugated by adding to the auxiliary verb ser, through all its moods and tenses (see 158), the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. The participle in such a case is inflected by gender and number like an adjective ; thus to say " he is loved ;" " she is loved ;" " the^ are loved " (masc.) ; '' they are loved^^ (fern.) ; would be, El es amado. j EUos son amados. Ella es amada. 1 Ellas son amados. (a.) The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in the present and imperfect tenses of the indicative mood only when a mental act or state of the emotions is spoken of : thus we can say ella es amada^ " she is loved," but we can not say ella es hallada^ " she is found," since in the latter case no state of the mind or feelings is described, and the perfect-indefinite tense must be employed ; * thus, ella ha sido hallada, " she has been found." For the im- perfect tense of the indicative, when no state or act of the mind is spoken of, the perfect-definite must be used, as la casa fue (not era) quemada^ " the house was burnt." 171. Conjugation of the passive verb, ser hallado: INFINITIVE MOOD. Ser hallado, to he found. PAST PARTICIPLE. PAST INFINITIVE. Sido hallado,* been found. Haber sido halla- to have been do, found. GERUND OF THE PRESENT. GERUND OF THE PAST. ., Siendo hallado, being found. Habiendo sido having been hallado, found. * Hallado means " been founds" as well as ^^found,^^ so that sido is not used in forming the passive past participle. (See 300, c.) OF THE VERB. 83 ' o I o ! > , Eh < o Q L S U O =3 s 1 3 r "~* 03 Si x: (u d w «4-l c CQ 5=1 ^0 fl) O c -4-3 S3 •»— » Q > > o OS CJ xi 2 c d c cd ^ 1 a o p w U o — — 6 'O 1 fl o O Q sz; u « O g 1 ' : Pi r > pj 1 >' — 1 - t- w H PU O S g t-H H- ( p Q •-» ^ n ^ qT gif ••-> "5 fl c a> (D 0) 4 ^ :3 « u o a iz c O O H ^ tk O H PS 4f 1" ■oj "S F3 P4 o ••-> ■JS c C! c; QJ. (D 0) la 3 d 1 o_ o O 88 OP THE VERB. •Si 1) O O i =1 II 'o -3 "^ — — o TS s: eS Q S ■«-» ^ CO ^ OQ ^o ^o >o o '-B'-B i g 1 00^ O S T II W — > i -3 > p 'S 'o 5 1 03 o cS D h hH ►-* Q PQ ^ P i-t >2' W d 'd X) 'O ^ Q pT •-) P4 u H s. ^ _ ^ si" o s 2 OQ ^ :sg -S ^ if ^ 2^ o ^P^ CD O OQ o :a o 00 ^ tf P g t 1 1^' Eh 1— I > Pi r1 g ^ H-l U) Q 5 r/J §> ^ 1 OF THE VERB. 89 5s^ (3 H QQ ^; (U w JH H ^ c *^ o O k 2 g -s ;3 > &0 OJ o ^ d •»» .2 1 ctf B tlf) s f! •^ fl j^ o 03 O ^ H g d f -2 c< a ja •S •s ~~" — — 6 13 C cs ■*-» a (U H cT § M H O . g N QQ H P4 W T 1 W — < >- }> ^ 1 P 5 qT M oT ■1^ t^ d S CI C! xJ 2i QJ t >> ^ — ^ d c> > 03 O) 1 H » § 03 c W Pi Pk ^ *}* ^ 1 yj •S 1 Eh w . w tf ►ri 03 CO t— I t3 S S ^ 1 1 d >> >. m ^ ^ ^ s c3 § pT W O 2 -• g4 ^. cT of 00 fea OJ o S '"'s , >!. ^^ >L =^ 8* 90 OF THE VERB. o o d o o ^ ^ Pi O O o CO 00 d . d d S3 1 cr 1 P rt :3 000 •0 A 0> 2 A I ^ f or ■•s Oh 111 « P* OJ E.^ p< 'S, H 53 rt S rt S :i 0* 000 CO S S' OQ i oT 1 1 i 2 w >• 1 P4 1 » 1 Ek Oi ^ H- 1 5i 1 H 0,^ a. i cu 1 H s KJ H ^ 1 R S3 eS P3 s w Q 5 cr- w o* W u >- ■" h pti > —^ pj u< § M i Eh g CO Q S s ^ 5 b ^ cq HH 3 1 .2 \H .2h ;3 ea ;3 3 1 o* 0* 000 3 ea h" 2 .2 i of- Iff VH a> of o« Xi oT 'q,S 'B. "S, 53 ei :3 s g § P V 0* P4 bT ^ 'S-i cT cx, oT ^ a Ci4 .2 T3 '2 .S a, ^ 'S,^ 'S, *o. 3 3 Id 3 3 «J P p !l Of ___ Of (^ u 1 OF THE VERB. 91 cu -s 2 a .S .> o (i1 s Oi ?n ^ a t«H •53 o CQ O ^ (D ■5 S o 2 ""^ J3 ^3 00 L*^ c s> i) 1 § — — 6 >* as Q £ ^ v3 t3 bO s 1 h g ^ H » «- 03 9 W S S s P4 1 >; S) LI _ ^1 H-l 1 1— ( t3 t3 CO ^ s S) 6 # *3 1 pf •J pj 5 H S bT ^ ed ^ fcfl S 1 S d cT cs" .5? .SP ,hp *3 'c3 *3 c 2 *^ -§ a o *■§ •5* o 00 g c d ^ ^ S) « 2 rf: ^ — — — — 6 -« *o w oT cT •s m Sq •*s •S ^ 1 2 rf: g s ^ « ^ H mT .s II §1 >i 1 fa .2^ Q M %l {> I P<4 (^ i (6 Q P4 g 1 1 f d 2 X ,c ^ Q) HJ pf •J 04 i 3 S M ^ oo' < (D \ri P4 CO 1 .a 1 2 a oT iT g C3 eS a ffl S a ffi 92 OP THE VERB, ^ . fl g 2 c S p 1 hicie harfa hicie 'B oT w 4" ^0) CS -su .2h K) S !§ s :s :« ^ AAA A , ro tn m 1 §" If! o s 2 g " Eh (3 > — Pi Eq — t-l H 5 § |3 5 13 cT qT « ^ QQ 1 hicier harfa, hicies 1 5S •c* "^ 55 T ii xS m oT ^ hiciera harias, hiciese A o fl o "i bo ? E= 2" _^ S £ 6 Hicie Harfa Hicie = •i •3 to ^ A ^' «T> 1 C3 A ^ s 1 ^ 2 t«H 0> O 0} . Q 2 ^ a C! >- n S a ^ 'a" D. M > o ^H S d a H O g 1 CO H § K ■ Pi ? > 1 1. S w M > — s <1 - <1 o l-H S P •^ 2^ cf 02 ef Kt > > a O) a> S s :3 n3 ; S s S V o § w" •-) tu u H QQ OD s (^ s 3 H CO S s s << s o bT ci > > O OQ . Eh o w ;3 2|o " o > 9t f E-< ft Pi w o W ft I— I Eh o p s. CO g ft 8 g 94 OP THE VERB. ;s o a< ei § u 1-1 0« o p. H Cf-I « O < a o g -i^ «< ci fii bO P •^ a o O Ci 00 a . fl c« C o *^ ed CQ .2 ^ .S ^ -O ^ P O 3 P. O. O. .s •I ft* m" rrT 2 •S vu ^ ^ -13 T> TJ S O 3 A P, D. 1=3 fa w t> 1 H- ( H w <1 _ _ t> ^ tr< O f^ I?; ►H P •-4 n t3 cf 02 O oq" O s § s 2 I S 3 ^ rs -3 -a ^ .2 ^ .2 -S -a -3 S S f 4f a I P4 .a 3 3 PL, »-• 0} n .2 \2 .^ '•B -a ^ 3 O 3 fi. Pk Pl. s 3 OP THE VERB. 95 s ^ ^ ^ *S s o 3 p o* o. a. o* O 1-4 Q 12; *2 I *§ ^ ^ ^ 3 O !3 p< p< 04 o 2 2 s § s g mT i O d o o O o 2 OB PL4 .S "S .2 PJ o 3 Q. O. CU ^ f 11 § f 1 I 12 2^2 S 96 OF THE VEEB. •3 •53 5 •5J P3 ^ •3 O" & o^ i O 3 ^a> VJ ^ pq ■l if a CO P4 o O •3 I t Gf •3 Gf •3 Of etf S2 I— I Eh o a QQ o rn* s g O H a> n .n a. «r -r s*" I I" 2 cs" « cT cT S ^ cu S,^ & o< gT 3 cJ S s CO CO CO'WJ* y> 98 OF THE VERB. •^ ^ S o p CO Ci a c « a nd T3 'a C C c .2 .§ S .— 1 •t^ — — d -a c OJ ^ a 03 H Q ^ O Pi » : o — 1 1 1 w g > P4 f^ hH 1 H 1 > 5 S o 5 p 5 1:2 i-i qT oT T3 '■a 02 'O c 55 (D O) a> 1 •- -a •^ ^ fi 0) H W~ »4 0, 5 < ro no" o a> 73 'a a a Pk a> o V H **3 *^ OQ • o 1 P P E^ ^ ^ •5" O 2 I ^ g^'g* £ 4- +j tJ -H* t- ♦* ^ J5 E^ ^ «r w - t«r oT bT m CO so o o Pi 1 H ^ gamo —PRE gamo H 11 > SI Q — 1 1 trai UNCTIVE.- 1 trai O 1 1 O Q a ^ P) ;?^ Pk *-i HH pq O &"S Eg" 2 1' 1 1 ■e"E" *£* s CD t oT S) S o o «S e p Li:! H OF THE VERB. 99 'O tUD tJJD ^ > s c o w o - " S I W "^ Eh O > a o WD O O Ci bo 100 OP THE VERB. a .2 '•+3 o O -£3 o O S ^ or o d .2 e3 S3 O O 00 ■5 .s o OS ^■1 > ed P" Eh o Q OP THE VERB. 10, c» n c^ c Pi o rt H ;3 fl fcin s m m «+-( o o •a o 3 n^ o t>0 PJ •""> •b fl o 3 O ^ C^ * 05 h ;,^ \ i '". ,> d » '''^^^S >\^->c-/^ '3 1 •T3 ■' -3 J. '2 c C s:] J3 c c: fi cu Da j el 2 i :S» 'O '3 "o T3 C fi C O Q) 03 i ,jQ ^ Xi ^ -^ — "~~ "" oT oT m g • ^ f o o o B B o S H h o Cfi S 1 a o ^ I- Pi j Q l-H i .o i .1 it 2 ^ 'O '§ 'a T3 '2 Ei: c fl J=! C c o v o 03 CD 03 -a .Q ^ ^ ^ ^ -Q ^ '3 (U ta Cl •.ST- ' c; 'O -o -a 'O ! ••(J c C G ou 03 03 03 03 pO pO ^ ^ Xi XI »Q H •< Pk 1 •sC 1 . 03 03 2" , _Q3 na ^ T3 TS tJ "O c c C C c c « o a» (D H :3 s S a TS 73 13 t3 73 ^3 TS Q .2 § 00* oT bT Q «n* "SI •g Q* v3 >a) ^o :§ s s g M S 0$ a s s s (4 •a T3 73 73 o ^ m m «* H 2 o O » 2" of B B g o o ri q3 a' e4 i 1 ^ >s vX> C — > P3 3 ,T3 P4 1 1 13 ERFECT. durm dunn §1 1 1 e Eh g S b PL4 H-l qT vcT cT t3 CO* C3 qT .2h ?ii o S 1 s CQ s 1 1 1 § a> Si ^ d C3 ?j S 3 s •^ TS -a T3 •o 73 73 73 c> o "*^ o ^ § 3 o 3 oT oT m g 2 fe f qT a> 1 1 'b C3 S 3 3 3 s 3 .2 <5 T3 73 73 73 -a 73 pu ■^ to P5 "— » a o C? O « ef ff O O o g s 1 g O) QJ c 1— • i*» S *"• 8 s fe 1 gar 1 i ^ •S ^i s^ v» 1 ^ .t; 3 Q> B t<» ' ^ pT •m g Is- P4 : 0* o 1 fl P< o .2^ o fc 2 ■fi %J cc c3 P4 5P o" rt d bo t>0 ••~» ^ § 1 I ^ O S ^'^ o g i CM o -< Sb .2^ .2i .2 •^ bD bo ^ Ph HH I— I I— I a c S 2 2^ 03 O) 3 1— 1 H C3 _ o W .S S .5 .S g .S > — Pi h — P s ^ K „ CO o ^ ,5 ,5 !=! =* S 2 2 y "o 13 "^ .S .S .S ^ ^ ^ OP THE VERB. 105 ^ a -f •S3 I > i-i o I— I i i i-i § (4 T s a 1 eiT 02 >• ^ b ►. Q %^ NO) t> Nfl) «sa .2 §D a I c3 "a" O O o I 80* c 0) (U fcj^ o c JO s 106 OF THE VERB. B S cd ^ s « N N 3 ^ o T3 a S *o ;3 8 i — § 1 f g W s « s r 1 luzca IVE.—] 1 luzca o » ^ Pn O S ^ 1—4 & Q ^ S 1 s luzc luzc •f^ •rs «c o o 1-3 a H 13 O Pi S 5 ■ 2^ o t .2 1 '■*s < — » — — — ei 9k bO P3 ••— » P O »o ^. rT cb" o » >> Dd >ri M ' w wT H wT H H > o P4 o 1 . HH bn > - o H-l o 5 o 1 & >-< CQ s s r: fcH 03 goo o o oq' m CO « >> >> >> o o o o o bo bD o o OP THE VERB. 107 1 o p o si o O o p= — 1 • 1 d g. c c S ( P 1* 1 2 1 •| •a ^3 73 -a t3 2 2 2 2 2 p* o< &< P, Q. ft o — — — — — •3 :3 f i" 2 g f >© *a> r* Q* ■S" '- cj •5* '5* '5* S 1 ft ft 1 a — i i g' o 1 ^ 1 ii "5**5* 1 S 'S 73 H 'O TJ « 13 ^ M o H-l 1. u 00 tj 1 > — H (X 1 - i S. g ft ft H ^ « g 12; •^ S ' o H HH t3 •— 1 CU »-» Q o s g f fi a> i-< 1* GQ S3 73 ■§■¥ •5* 73 6 o ij 1-, M v^ ^4 3 cu &i P* ft ft ft o 3 •a 2 • Oh 1 s" i .a 1 ff l\ H •g» 9 •l-l '5* 1 0. 1 I 11 ft ft H — — ^_ — •< j e« 3 .. ^ •s'-s* 73 TS "O 13 -a -a •a ' O o o >-• b. ii >-• fl. £ _a^ £ fl. 0. 0^ ! 108 OP THE VERB. ^ 2 "•♦3 '5* O O 4 m d d ^ i i ^ 5lD -Tl "S 1 1 1 — — — ■ ^ § ^ CQ 9i ..- f salgaj saldri ~ ^ i CO • 1 p4| PRESE mos, amos, 1 IVE.- 1 saiga ERFECT. 1 saldri i OS UNCT IMP] »-t Q J3 pq t3 1 ^ \^ 1 6 s g 1 1 "2 ;d cd 02 K >A P4 M o H tn" 1 t < fii 1 f 1 alga, aldrfa. Wy= ■ {» CQ t» W OQ il O g Q \2 >o ^ •^ 6 o OF THE VERB. 109 _ ^ d .2 .2 .2 •»-» —> o a c a •cJ ..^ .p^M CQ OQ OQ 'm m m aT oT g g *§ v3 :2:2 :2 ♦J •«-» ■j2 1 •i -i •i ~ m m m" ^ § o « S g g • 2 rt s 3 ^ w>S ^i3 tH* tf-^ ti O s .s g CJ 1 — H H wJl i *m '53 > H Pi P U* g o e: 12; P ►-» pq "1 2"S" .2 .2 ^ *5q 'oq •S3 — — ,5$ 1 1 ar fi" •g- a a .s 0 1 ? fl ••§ O 1 s s d j» M M W •B b Pi .2 ¥ O o C 13 § .2 .2 I I *S I S S w H £ > S 1 [ t-H 'C '. H *53 w • S E3^ H £ i fe e £ w"2 I II 10 no DF THE VERB. S c ^ ««r od" ? 2 r, TO 3 •S > >• >• •? «3 G .2 to 3 1 :il >■ > ► > >^ if -^8 sf > > > OP THE VERB. Ill DEFECTIVE VERBS. 212. Defective verbs are those which are not employed in all the tenses or persons. 213. SoLER, to be accustomed^ is irregular, and seldom used except in the following tenses : INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. Suelo, I sueles, ] suele, j solemos, 1 soleis, | suelen. IMPERFECT. Sella, I solias, | solla, | soliamos, | soliais, | solian. 214. Yacer, to lie^ is not often used in any other persons than the third persons singular and plural of the present indicative, chiefly at the beginning of epitaphs. INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. Yags, I I yace, ] | | yacen. 215. PoDRiR, to rotj is seldom used except in the following tenses and persons : IMPERATIVE. I I [podrid. I SUBJUNCTIVE.— IMPERFECT. I podriria. j | | (a.) When podrir is figuratively used in any other moods or tenses, It is to be conjugated irregularly in the same tenses and persons as servir (see 210), by changing o of the verb-root into u ; as, pudriendOy rotting. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 216. Impersonal verbs (or unipersonal verbs) are those which are employed only in the third person singular, and having no subject, take it or there with them in English ; as, lliieve, it rains ; tronard, it will thunder ; nieve, let it snow ; ha7/j tl.ere is, or there are ; habrd, there will be. 112 OP THE VERB. 217. Llover, to rain, is thus conjugated impersonally. PAST PARTICIPLE, Llovido. GERUND, Lloviendo. INDICATIVE. PRESENT, Uueve, it rains. IMPERFECT, llovla. it was raining. PERFECT-DEFINITE, Ilovio, it rained. FIRST-FUTURE, llover^, IMPERATIVE. it loill rain. llueva, let it rain. SUBJUNCTIVE. 1! PRESENT, Uueva, it may rain. r lloviera, C would rain. IMPERFECT, < lloveria, it} should rain. t Uoviese, I miglit rain. FIRST-FUTURE, si lloviere, if it should rain. (a.) All the impersonal verbs are conjugated like some of the verbs whose conjugation has been already given : thus, Uover^ it will be seen, is irregular, and is conjugated like mover (see 186) in the third person singu- lar of each tense. 218. Haher and hacer are often used as impersonal verbs, and are, in such cases, to be rendered in English by the tenses of the verb to he ; as, hay^ there is, or there are ; hace^ it is. (a.) Conjugation of haber, to 6e, as used impersonally. PAST PARTICIPLE, Habido. gerund. Habiendo, there being. INDICATIVE. PRESENT, hay, or, ha, there is, or there are. IMPERFECT, habia. there was, or there were. PERFECT-DEFINITE, hubo. there was, or there were. FIRST-FUTURE, habr^ IMPERATIVE. there wUl be. haya, let there be. SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT, haya, there may be. r hubiera. r would be. IMPERFECT, < habria, there'l should be. || L hubiese, I might be. FIRST-FUTURE, si hubiere. if there should be. (6.) Hay, habia, and hubo are rendered in English sometimes in the uingular and sometimes in the plural, according a% a singular or plural OF THE VERB. 113 noun follows ; thus, hay una muger que ttene ccdentura^ there is a woman who has a fever ; hay mugeres que no la tienen, there are women who have it not. (c.) Hacer, when employed impersonally, is to be rendered in English by the verb to be ; as, hace^ it is ; hacta^ it was ; hizo, it was ; hard, it will be ; haga, it may be, etc. ; thus, hace Jrto, it is cold ; hace mucho aire, there is much wind ; hace luna, there is a moon ; hace buen iiempo, it is good weather; Jiace diez meses que ella murio, it is ten months since she died. 219. Placer, to please, is used impersonally in the following tenses only : INDICATIVE. 1 PHESENT, place, it pleases. IMPERFECT, placia. it was pleasing. PERFECT-INDEFINITE , plugo, SUBJUNCTIVE. it pleased. PRESENT, plegue, it may please. c plugiera, it would please. IMPERFECT, ( plugiese, it might please. FIRST-FUTURE, si plugiere, if it should please. {a.) The persons of placer in the subjunctive, are used only in these ex pressions — plegue, plugiere, or plugiese d Dwsj may it, should it, or might it please God ; si me plugiere, if it should please me. 220. There are some verbs that can be used in all the persons of the tenses, and also, at times, impersonally ; as, es muy tarde, it is very late ; es preciso, it is necessary; es Tnenester, there is necessity; parece, it seems ; conviene, it suits ; basta, it is suflScient. LIST OF IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. 221. The following list contains all the irregular verbs in the Spanish language. Each verb is to be conjugated in its irregular tenses like the verb to which reference is made in the last column ; that is, each one is ' irregular in the same tenses and persons, and in the same manner, as the verb which is opposite to it. In the tenses and persons which are not ir- regular, each verb is to be conjugated like the regular verb of the same conjugation ; those ending in ar like amar (168, a), those in er like co- mer (168, b), and those in ir like vivir (168, c). The figures indicate the number of the paragraph in which either the verb itself or a verb similar in its irregularities is conjugated. The verbs marked § are impersonal, and, of course, to be\ised only in the third person singular of each mood and tense. g^* Every verb not included in this list is regular and must be conju- gated like the model- verbs amar, comer, or vivir, accord*«ig as it ends in ar, rr, or ir. 10* 114 (a.) A. Acertar, Acordar, Acostar, Acrecentar, Adestrar, Agorar, Alentar, Almorzar, Amolar, Andar, Apacentar, Aporcar, Aportar, Apostar, . Apretar, Aprobar, Arrendar, Asentar, Aserrar, Asestar, Asolar, Asoldar, Asonar, Atentar, Aterrar, Atestar,* Atravesar, Atronar, Aventar, OP THE VERB. (First Conjugation.) like teniarj " contary " contary " tentary " tenfary " contary " tentary " contary " contar, " tentary " contary " contary " contary " tentary " contar, " tentary " tentary " tentary " tentary " contary " contary " contar, " tentary " tentary " tentary " tentary " contary " tentary Avergonzarse, " contar, A. (Second Conjugation.) "^Abastecer, Aborrecer, Absolver, Abstraer, Acaecer, Acontecer, A-doIecer, Adormecerse, Agradecer, Amanecer, ZiA:e parecer, " parecer y " mover, " parecery " parecer, " parecer, " parecer, " parecer, " parecery 94 88 138 IBS 190 196 188 188 193 193 160 194 Amortecerse, Zifce pcrrecer, Anochecer, '•' parecer, Anteponer, " poner, Antever, " rer, Aparecer, " parecer, Apetecer, " parecer, Ascender, *' tender, Atender, " tender, Atenerse, " ^ener, Atraer, " ^racr, A. (Third Conjugation.) Adherir, /iA:e sentir, 209 Adquerir, " senfir, 209 Adquirir, " 197 Advertir, " sentir, 209 Apercibir, " serviry 210 Arguir, " incluiry 203 Arrecirse, " serviry 210 Arrepentirse, " sentir, 209 Asentir, " sentir, 209 Asir, " 198 Aterirse, *' sentir, 209 Atribuir, " incluir, 210 Avenirse, " renir, 211 B. (First Conjugation.) Bregar, like tentar, 181 B. (Second Conjugation.) Bermejecer like parecer, 183 B. (Third Conjugation.) Bendecir, like C. (First Conjugation.) like tentar, 199 Calentar, Cegar, Cerrar, Cimentar, Colar, Colgar, Comenzar, Comprobar, Concertar, ^( tentar, tentar, tentar, contar, contar, tentar, contar, tentar. 181 181 181 181 178 178 181 178 181 * Whor atestar means tofUl, to cram, it is irregular ; when to attest, it i9 •i'/r*^ OF THE VERB. 115 Concordar, Confesar, Consolar, Consonar, Constar,§ Contar, Costar, liJce contaVj " tentar^ " contar J " contar f " amar, contar, Caber, Caer, Canecer, Carecer, Cerner, Cocer, C. (Second Conjugation.) er, like 178 181 178 178 168, a 178 178 parecer, parecer, tender, Tnover, parecer, Compadecerse, " parecer, Comparecer, " parecer, Complacer, " parecer, Componer, Condescender, Condoler, Conmover^ Conocer, Contender, Contener, Contraer, Contrahacer, Convalecer, Crecer, parecer^ " poner, " tender, " mover, " mover, " parecer, " tender, " tener, " traer, " hacer, " parecer, .., " parecer, C. (Third Conjugation.) <• like servir, " servir, " servir, '• servir, " servir, vivir, Cenir, Colegir, Oomedirse, Competir, Concebir, Concernir,§ Concluir, Conducir, Conferir, Conseguir,. Consentir, Constituir, Constreiiir, Construir, Contradecir, Contravenir, 183 184 188 188 193 186 188 188 188 190 193 186 186 188 193 160 194 185 188 188 210 210 210 210 210 168, " incluir, 2Cij " producir, 207 " sentir, '^^^ " sermr, " sentir, " incluir , " seTnnr, " incluir " decir, '' venir, 209 210 209 203 210 203 200, a 211 Contribuir, like incluir, 2(13 Controvertir, C( sentir. 209 Corregir, " servir. 210 D. (First Conjugation.) Dar, like 179 Decentar, cc tentar, 181 Decimentar, (( tentar. 181 Degollar, (C contar, 178 Demostrar, (C contar, 178 Denegar, i( tentar, 181 Denostar, c< contar, 178 Derrengar, (C tentar. 181 Desacertar, (( tentar. 181 Desacordar, c< contar, 178 Desalentar, (( tentar, 181 Desapretar, (C tentar. 181 Desaprobar, C( contar. 178 Desasosegar, (( tentar, 181 Desatentar, (C tentar, 181 Descolgar, (( contar, 178 Descollar, (( contar. 178 Desconcertar, (( tentar, 181 Desconsolar, " contar, 178 Descontar, (( contar. 178 Desempedrar, (( tentar. 181 Desencerrar, (( tentar, 181 Desengrosar, (( contar. 178 Desenterrar, (C tentar. 181 Desflocar, (( contar. 178 Desforgarse, " contar. 178 Deshelar, (( tentar. 181 Desherrar, (( tentar, 181 Desmembrar, (( tentar. 181 De solar. (C contar, 178 DesoUar, (( contar. 178 Desovar, (( contar, 178 Despedrar, (( tentar, 181 Despernar, (( tentar, 181 Despertar, u tentar, 181 Desplegar, (( tentar. 181 Despoblar, C( contar. 178 Desterrar, « tentar, 181 Destrocar, cc contar, 178 Desvergonzarse," contar, 178 Dezmar, cc tentar, 181 116 OF THE VERB. D, (Second Conjugation.) Decae/', like caer, 184 Defender, " tender, 193 Demoler, " mover, 186 Deponer, " poner, 190 '^ ' " parecer, 188 " parecer, 188 " parecer, " tender, " traer. Desabastecer, Desadormecer, Desaparecer, Desa tender, Desatraer, Descaecer, " parecer, Descender, " tender, Deseomponer, " poner, Desconocer, " parecer, Desentenderse, " tender, Desentorpecer, " parecer, Desenvolver, " mover, Desfallecer, " parecer, Desflaquecerse, " parecer, Desguarnecer, " parecer, Deshacer, " hacer, Desobedecer, " parecer, Desplacer, " parecer, Destorcer, " mover, Desvanecerse, " parecer, Detener, " tener, Detraer, " traer, Devolver, " mover, Disolver, " mover, Disponer, " poner, Distraer, " traer, Doler, " mover, D. (Third Conjugation.) ^ like 188 193 194 188 193 190 188 193 188 186 188 188 188 185 188 188 186 188 160 194 186 186 190 194 186 Decir, Deducir, Deferir, Derretir, Desavenir, Desceiiir, ,iKe 200 " producir, 207 " seniir, *''^° " servir, " venir, " servir. Descomedirse, " servir, Desconsentir, " sentir, Desdecirse, " decir, Deservir, " servir, Desleir, " servir, Deslucir, " Ittdr, 209 210 211 210 210 209 200, a 210 210 205 D(;smentir, Despedir, Desteiiir, Destruir, Diferir, Digerir, Disminuir, Distribuir, Diverter, Dormir, like sentir, " servir, " servir, " incluir, " sentir, " sentir, " incluir, " incluir, " sentir. 209 210 210 203 209 209 203 203 209 201 E. (First Conjugation.) Emendar, like tentar, 181 Empedrar, " tentar, 181 Empezar, " tentar, 181 Emporcar, " contar, 178 Encensar, " tentar, 181 Encerrar, " tentar, 181 Encomendar, " tentar, 181 Encontrar, '• contar, 178 Encordar, " contar, 178 Encubertar, " tentar, 181 Engrosar, " contar, 178 Enrodar, " contar, 178 Ensangrentar, " tentar, 181 Enterrar, " tentar, 181 Errar, " 182 Escalentar, " tentar, 181 Escarchar,§ " amar, 168, a Escarmentar, " tentar, 181 Esforzarse, " contar, 178 Espresar, " tentar, 181 Estar, " 159 Estercolar, " contar, 178 Estregar, " tentar, 181 E. (Second Conjugation.) Embebecerse, like parecer, 188 Embravecerse, " parecer, 188 Embrutecerse, " parecer, 188 Emplumecer, " parecer, 188 Empobrecer, " parecer, ISS Encabellecer, " parecer, ItS Encalvecer, " parecer, 188 Encallecer, " parecer, 188 Encanecer, " parecer, 188 Encarecer, " parecer, 138 OP THE VEEB. Encender, like tender^ Encrudecerse, " parecer^ Encruelecer, ** parecer, Endentecer, " parecer^ Endurecer, " pareccr, Enflaquecer, " parecer^ Enfurecerse, " parecer^ Engrandecer, " parcccr, Enloquecer, " pareccr, Enmocecer, " pareccr ^ Enmohecerse, " parecer, Enmudecer, " parec&r, Ennegrecer, " pareccr^ Ennoblecer, " parecer, Enrarecer, " parecer, Enriquecer, " parecer^ Ensoberbecerse," parccer^ Entallecer, " parecer^ Entender, " tender^ Enternecer, " parecer^ Entomecer, " pareccr^ Entontecerse, " parecer^ Entorpecerse, " parecer, Entretener, " tenerf Entristecerse, " parecer^ EntuUecer, " parecer^ Entumecer, " parccer^ Envejecer, " parecer^ Enverdecer, " parecer, Envolver, " movers Equivaler, " vcder, Escamecer, * " parccer, Esclarecer, " parecer^ Escocer, " mover^ Espavorecer, " pareccr^ Esponer, " poner^ Establecer, " parecer^ Estender, " tender^ Estraer, " traer^ Estremecerse, " parecer^ E. (Third Conjugation. Elegir, like servir^ Ertibestir, " scrvir^ Engreirse, ** seroir^ Knlucir, " &tt»r, 193 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 188. 188 188 188 188 193 188 188 188 188 160 188 188 188 188 188 186 195 188 188 186 188 190 188 193 194 188 210 210 '210 205 117 Entrelucir, \iJce Iticir, 205 Entreoir, " oir, 206 Envestir, " sentirj 209 Erguir, " 202 Estrenir, " servir, 210 Escluir, " incluir^ 203 Espedir, " servir^ 210 F. (First Conjugation.) Forzar, like contar^ Fregar, " tentar^ Frezar, " tentary F. (Second Conjugation.) Fallecer, like parecer^ Favorecer, " parecer^ Fenecer, " parecer, Fortalecer, " parecer^ 178 181 181 188 188 188 F. (Third Conjugation.) Fluir, like incluir^ 203 Freir, " servir^ 210 G. (First Conjugation.) Gobernar, like tentar^ 181 Granizarj§ " aTnar, 158, a G. (Second Conjugation,) Guarnecer, like parecer, 188 G. (Third Conjugation.) Gemir, like servir, 210 H. (First Conjugation.) Helar, like temtar, 181 Herrar, " tentar, 181 Holgar, " contar, 178 Hollar, " contar, 178 H. (Second Conjugation. Haber, like 156 Hacer, 185 Heder, " tender, 193 Render, " tender, 193 Humedecer, " parecer. 188 H. (Third Conjugation.) Herir, ike sentir, 209 Hervir, " sentir, 209 Huir, " indvir, 203 118 or THE VERB. I. (First Conjugation.) lmportar,§ like amar, 163, a Infernar, " tentar^ 181 Insertar, " tentar^ 181 Invemar, " tentar^ 181 I. (Second Conjugation.) Imponer, like ponery 190 Indisponer, " porter, 190 I. (Third Conjugation.) Imbuir, like incluir, 203 Impedir, " servir, 210 Inadvertir, " sentir, 209 Incluir, " 203 Inducir, " producir, 207 Inferir, " sentir, 209 Ingerir, " sentir, 209 Instituir, " incluir , 203 Instruir, " incluir , 203 Intervenir, " venir, 211 Introducir, " producir, 207 Invertir, " sentlr, 209 Investir, " sentir, 209 Ir, " 204 J. (First Conjugation.) Jugar, 180 L. (Third Conjugation.) Lucir, like lucir, 205 Luir, " incluir y 203 LL. (First Conjugation.) Lloviznar,§ like amar, 168, a LL. (Second Conjugation.) Llover,§ 217 M. (First Conjugation.) Manifestar, like tentar, 181 Mentar, " tentar, 181 Merendar, " tentar, 181 Mostrar, " contar, 178 M. (Second Conjugation.) Magrecer, like parecer, 188 Mantener, " tener, 160 Mecer, like parecer^ Merecer, " parecer, Mohecerse, ^[ parecer, Molar, " mover y Mollecer, " parecer, Morder, " mover, Mover, " M. (Third Conjugation.) Maldecir, like hendecir, .86 .88 [86 86 servir, " sentir, " dormir, " incluir, 199 210 209 201 203 Medir, Mentir, Morir, Muir, N. (First Conjugation.) Negar, like tentar, 181 Nevar,§ " tentar, 181 N. (Second Conjugation.) Nacer, like parecer, 188 Negrecer, " parecer, 188 O. (Second Conjugation.) Obedecer, like parecer, 188 " parecer, " tener, " parecer. Obscurecer, Obtener, Ofrecer, Oler, Oponer, 188 160 188 187 190 " poner, O. (Third Conjugation.) Obstruir, like incluir, 20i> Oir, '' 206 P. (First Conjugation.) Pensar, like tentar, 181 Pemiquebrar, " tentar, 181 Plegar, " tmtar, 181 Poblar, '* contar, 178 Probar, " contar, 178 P. (Second Conjugation.) Pacer, like parecer, 188 Padecer, " parecer, 138 Parecer, " 188 Perder, " tender, 193 Perecer, " parecer, '83 4 OF THE VERB. 119 Pertenecer, like parecer, 188 Resollar, like contar. 179 Placer, u 219 Resonar, « contar. 179 Poder, (( 189 Retemblar, (( tentar. 181 Poner, C( 190 Retentar, (( tentar, 181 Preponer, {( poneTy 190 Reventar, tentar. 181 Presuponer, u poner^ 190 Revolar, (( contar. 179 Prevalecer, (( parecery 188 Revolcarse, (( contar. 179 Prever, (( very 196 Rodar, " contar. 179 Promover, " mover, 186 Rogar, C( contar, 179 Proponer, (( poner, 190 R. (Second Conjugation.) P. (Third Conjugation .) Recaer, like caer. 184 Pedir, like servir. 210 Recocer, (( mover. 186 Perseguir, (( servir, 210 Reconocer, (( parecer. 188 Pervertir, (C sentir. 209 Reconvalecer, t( parecer. 188 Podrir, ti 215 Recrecer, « parecer. 188 Predecir, a decir. 200, a Reflorecer, « parecer. 188 Preferir, (( sentir, 209 Rehacer, (( hacer. 185 Presentir, (( sentir, 209 Remanecer, (( parecer. 188 Prevenir, (( renir. 211 Remecer, (( parecer, 188 Producir, (C 207 Rem order, C( mx/ver. 186 Proferir, (( sentir. 209 Remover, (( mover, 186 Proseguir, {( servir, 210 Renacer, (( parecer. 188 Prostituir, (( incluir. 203 Reponer, (( poner. 190 Provenir, ( venir. 211 Resolver, C( mover. 186 a. (First Conjugation ) Restablecer, Retener, (( parecer, tener, 188 160 Q,uebrar, like tentar. 181 Retorcer, (( mover. 186 Q,. (Second Conjugation.) Retraer, (( traer. 194 Ctuerer, 191 Retrotraer, " traer, 194 R. (First Conjugation ) Rever, Reverdecer,^ (( (C ver, parecer. 196 188 Recomendar, like tentar. 181 Reverter, (( tender. 193 Recordar, contar. 178 Revolver, (( mover, 186 Recostar, contar. 178 Reforzar, contar. 178 R. (Third Conjugation.) Regar, tentar. 181 Recluir, like incluir, 203 Regoldar, contar. 178 Reducir, " producir. 207 Relampaguear§ " amar. 168, a Referir, " sentir. 209 Remendar, (( tentar. 181 Regir, (( servir, 210 Renegar, " tentar. 181 Reir, (( servir, 210 Renovar, «^ contar. 178 Relucir, (( luar, 205 Replegar, (( tentar. 181 Rendir, (( servir. 210 Reprobar, (( contar. 178 Renir, (( servir. 210 Requebrar, u tentar. 181 Repetir, " servir, 210 ^scontrar, c< coTnJtar, 179 Requerir, tc sentir. 209 120 OP THE VERB. Resentirse, like sentir^ 209 Restituir, " induir^ 203 Retenir, " sermr^ 210 Retribuir, " incluir^ 203 Revenir, " venir, 211 Revestir, " servir, 210 S. (First Conjugation.) Segar, like tentar, 181 Sembrar, " tentar, 181 Sentarse, " tentaVf 181 Serrar, « tentar, 181 Solar, " coniar, 178 Soldar, « contar, 178 Soltar, " contar, 178 Sonar, " contar, 178 Sonar, " contar, 178 Sosegarse, " ^en^ar, 181 Soterrar, " tentar, 181 S. (Second Conjugation.) Saber, like 192 Satisfacer, " hacer, 185, a Ser, « 158 Sobreponer, " poner, 190 Soler, « 213 Solver, " mover, 186 Sostener, *' tener, 160 Sustraer, " traer, 194 Suponer, " poner, 190 S. (Third Conjugation.) Salir, like 208 Seducir, " producir, 207 Seguir, " servir, 210 Sentir, « 209 Servir, «' 210 Sobresalir, " «aZir, 208 Sobrevenir, " v'enir, 211 Sonreirse, " servir, 210 Sustituir, " incluir, 203 Sugcrir, " sentir, 209 T. (First Conjugation.) Temblar, like tentar, 181 Tentar, " 181 Tostar, " contor, 178 Trascolar, " contar, 178 Trascordarse, " contar, 178 Trasegar, " tentar, 181 Trasoiiar, " contar, 178 Trocar, " contar, 178 Tronar, " contar, 178 Tropezar, " tentar, 181 T. (Second Conjugation.) Tender, ZiAre 193 Tener, " 160 Torcer, " mover, 186 Traer, " 194 Trascender, " tender, 193 Trasponer, *' poner, 190 T. (Third Conjugation.) Teiiir, like servir, 210 Traducir, " producir, 207 V. (First Conjugation.) Volar, like contar, 178 Volcar, " contar, 178 V. (Second Conjugation.) Valer, like 195 Ver, (C 196 Verter, (( tender, 193 Volver, C( mover, 186 V. (Third Conjugation.) Venir, like 211 Vestir, " servir, 210 Y. (Second Conjugation.) Yacer, 214 Z. (Third Conjugation.) Zaherir, like sentir, 209 OF THE VERB. 121 LIST OF VERBS WITH IRREGULAR PAST-PARTICIPLES. 222. Some verbs of those in the preceding list of irregular verbs, and some which are otherwise regular, have the past participle irregularly -formed. The following list contains all these verbs with the irregular participle. " Those marked R have also their past participle regularly formed. Thus ingerir, has both ingerto and ingerido. (a.) Abrir, ahierto. Ingerir, R. ingerto. Absolver, absuelto. Morir, muerto. Anteponer, antepuesto. Oprimir, R. opreso. Antever, antevisto. Poner, puesto. Componer, compuesto. Predecir, predicho. Contradecir, contradicho. PrenderrR. preso. Contrahacer, contrahecho. Preponer, prepuesto. Cubrir, cubierto. Presuponer presupuesto. Decir, dicho. Prever, previsto. Deponer, depuesto. Proponer, propuesto. Descomponer, descompuesto. Proscribir, proscrito. Descubrir, descubierto. Proveer, R. provisto. Desdecirse, desdicho. Rehacer, rehecho. Desenvolver, desenvuelto. Reponer, repuesto. Deshacer, deshecho. Resolver, Tesuelto. Disolver, disuelto. Rever, revisto. Disponer, dispuesto. Revolver, revuelto. Elegir, eligido. Romper, R. roto. Encubrir, encubierto. Satisfacer, satisfecho. Envolver, envuelto. Sobreponer, sobrepuesto. Escribir, escrito. Suponer, supuesto. Esponer, espuesto. Suprimir, R. supreso. Hacer, hecho. Trasponer, traspuesto. Imponer, impuesto. Ver, visto. Imprimer, impreso. Volver, vuelto. Indisponer, indispuesto. 223. Some participles are used sometimes as verbal adjectives ; thus mirado means, as a participle, beheld^ and as an adjectiye, considerate ; leido means, as a participle, read, and as an adjective, book-learned; partido means divided, and liber cd ; sabido means known, and well-inform- ed. In all such cases, the learner will find the word in his Spanish dic- tionary, defined as an adjective. He will be able, from the sense of the context, to determine whether to employ it as a participle or adjective, just as in English he would know which is the adjective and which the participle in the sentences " a known event," and " a person whom he has known.^^ 11 122 OF THE ADVERB THE CONJUNCTION. 224. Some changes have taken place in the verb-ending of the second person plural in all the tenses and conjugations. This anciently had its termination in des ; as, amades^ amdbades, amdstedes, amaredcs^ amedes, etc., for amais, amdbais. amdsteis, amareis, ameis. (a.) Soy, doy, voy, sois, caigOy oigo, valgo, cupo, hubo, jmso^ etc., were formerly so, do, vo, sodes, cayo, oyo, valo, copo, ovo, poso. (6.) With all modem Spanish writers the guttural x is changed into j ; as, dijo, dijeron, dijera, produjo, produjeron, instead of dixo, dixeron, dixera, produxo, produxeron. The pronunciation is the same in both cases. More specific rules concerning the verb will be found in Part III. OF THE ADYERB. 225. Adverbs are either primitive or derivative: the primitive being those which are simple or uncompounded of any other word, such as no, not ; ya, already ; hoy, to- day ; alia, yonder ; and the derivative, those that are form- ed from other words (chiefly adjectives, participles, or other adverbs) by the addition of mente ; as, hreveme?ite, confusa- mente, ciertamente, (a.) The Spanish language, like the English, contains numerous terms composed of more than one word, and used adverbially, hence called adverbial phrases ; as, par cierto, for certain ; por lo comun, in general ; de un mode, in such manner. ^^ A list of some of the different classes of adverbs will be found in Part III. OF THE CONJUNCTION. 226. Conjunctions are simple ; as, y, and ; 6, or ; qy£^ that ; si, if ; ni, nor ; jporque, because ; como, as ; mas, but ; pero, but : or conjunctive phrases ; as, con tal de que, provided that ; pues que, since ; para que, in order that ; djin de que, to the end that. (a.) The conjunction y is changed into ^ when it comes before a word beginning with i or hi; as, las leiiguas Espanola i Inglesa, the Sparish and English languages : madre S hija, mother and daughter. OP THE INTERJECTION. 123 (6.) The conjunction 6 is changed into take care ! atop ! PART m. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX MORE FULLY EXPLAINED. OF THE ARTICLE. 229. The articles are not always employed in Spanish in the same manner as they are in English. The following rules will illustrate this observation. USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 230. The definite article is to be used before all common nouns taken in a general sense, and in the whole extent of their signification ; as, El odio levanta rencillas. La caridad es paciente. Los hombres son mortales. Hatred excites strifes. Charity is patient. Men are mortal. ' Here odio, caridad, and hombres are taken in a general sense, meaning all hatred, all charity, all men. (a.) If the nounJ)e not taken in a general sense, that is, if the whole of it be not meant, the article is not used ; as, Hace buen tiempo. I It-is good weather. Tiene envidia. ' He-has envy. * Here tiempo and envtdia are designed to express only some portion of weather and envy, meaning some good weather, some envy. (Sec 264.) 231. The definite article is used before proper names of countries, states, and days of the week ; as, La Frdncia es un hermoso pais. I France is a beautiful country. Juan volverd el M^rtes. I John will-return Tuesday. (a.) If the name of the country, state, or region be preceded by a pre- position, or take its name from its capital city, the article Is generally omitted; as, Venecia daba leyes i, los monarcae ( Venice gave laws to the monarchs de Europa. I of Europe. OF THE ARTICLE. 125 232. The definite article is to be used before numerals indicating the day of the month or the hour of the day; as, Tlie sixth (six) of January. At three o'clock in (of) the after- noon. 233. The definite article is used before nouns indicating the rank, office, profession, or titles of persons when they are spoken of (but not when they are addressed) ; as, El seis de Enero. A' las tres de la tarde. El General Taylor es valiente. El Senor De Forest tiene dos hijas. La Sefiora Tranor no es prudente. General Taylor is brave. Mr. De Forest has two daughters. Mrs. Tranor is not prudent. 234. The definite article (and not the indefinite, as in English) is used before nouns signifying a certain weight, measure, size, quantity or number, when preceded by the price ; as, A tres duros la libra. A dos pesos la vara. A razon de diez duros el mes. A siete pesos el tomo. A tres reales la pieza. A cuatro pesos el par. At three dollars a (the) pound. At two dollars a (the) yard. At {the) rate of ten dollars a (the) month. At seven dollars a (the) volume. At three reals a (the) piece. At four dollars a (the) pair. (a.) Instead of the definite article, the preposition par may be used after the price ; thus we can say, d tres duros la libra, " at three dollars the yard," or d tres duros por libra, " at three dollars per yard." OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 235. The definite article is omitted sometimes in Spanish where it would not be omitted in English, as in the follow- ing cases. 236. The definite article is not used before a noun which denotes relationship or kindred of another noun, when a verb comes between them ; as, Maria es hermana de Juana. Pablo es hijo del juez. 11* I Mary is the sister Of Jane. I Paul is the son of-the judge. 126 OP THE ARTICLE. 237. The definite article is not used before nouns in apposition ; as, Pablo, apostol de los Gentiles. EUos pecaron al Seiior, esperanza de sus padres. Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles. They sinned against-the Lord, the hope of their fathers. (a.) Sometimes the article is used before nouns in apposition, when employed in a definite or determinative sense ; as, En tiempo de Herodes el rey. El autor del " Espiritu de las Leyes," el celebre Montesquieu, dice. In time of Herod the king. The author of the "Spirit of Laws," the celebrated Montes- quieu, says. 238. The definite article is not used before numerical adjectives when they denote order or succession ; as, Tomo segundo, p^gina sexto. I Volume the second, page the sixth. Enrique octavo. | Henry the Eighth. (a.) The cardinal numbers (and not the ordinal) are generally used when the number expressing the order or succession exceeds nine ; thus, Carlos doce, "Charles the Tenth" (literally "Charles Ten''), and not Carlos diwdedmo; tomo trece, "volume thirteen," and not tomo decimo- tercio, " volume thirteenth." 239. The titles of books, essays, chapters or extracts, and the names of periodicals^ do not generally take the definite article before them (except when spoken of ) ; as, Historia de Espana. 1 The History of Spain. Gaceta de Londres. | The London Gazette. 240. The definite article is not used before the word casa (house) when it means home, nor before nouns or adjectives employed adverbially ; as, Estd en casa. I He is at home (or in the house). En verdad. En oculto. | Truly. Secretly. OMISSION OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 241. The indefinite article is omitted in some cases in Spanish in which it would not be in English, as in the fol- lowing cases. 242. When some portion of a thing only is meant, and when the adverb no is used in the sense of " not a " (that is, " not any^^^ or " no "), the indefinite article is not gener- ally used ; as, OF THE ARTICLE. 127 Tiene calentura. £lla tiene id^a de comer. Juan hace mido. El es de g^nio benigno. Ella no tiene marido. Jorge no tiene flauto. No tenemos cochero. No tengo piano. He has a fever. \ She has an idea of eating (to eat). John makes a noise. He is of a benign disposition, She has not a husband. George has not a flute. We-have not a coachman. I-have not a (tio) piano. ' In these cases is meant some fever, some idea, some noise, and some portion of a. benign disposition ; and the article is not used in Span- ish. 243. The indefinite article is not used before two nouns, one of which, being connected by a verb to the other, shows the nation, relationship, rank, office, profession or vocation of the latter ; as, Juan es Frances. Senor Kent es juez. Carlos ee impresor. Hallo en ^1 padre y madre. John is a Frenchman. Mr. Kent is a judge. Charles is a printer. He-found in him a father and a mother. 244. The indefinite article is not used before a noun in apposition with another ; as, Esteban, hombre Ueno de fe. ' | Stephen, a man full of faith. 245. The indefinite article is not used in the title of a book, chapter, or essay ; as, Coleccion de los mejores Autores I A Selection of the best Spanish Espaiioles. I Authors. 246. The indefinite article is not used before a noun in an ejaculatory phrase ; as, \ Que idea ! i Q,ue desgrdcia ! | What an idea ! What a misfortune ! 247. The indefinite article is not used between an ad.- , jective and its noun ; as. Medio peso. Tan hermosa hija. En tal tiempo. Half a dollar. So beautiful a daughter. In such a time. 248. The indefinite article is not used before the words medio, a half; rt*^ or ciento, a hundred ; and mil, a thousand ; as, (28 OF THE ARTICLE. Tres tiios y m^dio. Cien hombres. Dia y m^dio. Three years and a half. A hundred men. A day and a half. 249. The indefinite article is not used after algo, something, or nada^ nothing, followed by the preposition de ; as, Pedro tiene algo de poeta. | Peter is something of a poet. OTHER USES AND OMISSIONS OF ARTICLES. 250. The indefinite article can be used before (but not after) tal^ '•' such ;" aSj Tenemoswn tal Pontifice. | We-have a such High-Priest. 25L The infinitive mood, being used in Spanish as a noun or with a preposition before it, in the same manner that the present participle is in English, can take the masculine definite article before it ; as, El murmurar de las fuentes, I The murmuring of the fountains. Al ver el arbol. I On seeing the tree. 252. The definite article is used before the adverbs Tnas^ " more," and menos, "less," to express the superlative degree of comparison (see 109) ; as, Maria es la mas hermosa de las I Mary is the most beautiful of the mugeres. I women. 253. The article is generally to be repeated before nouns which imme- diately follow each other, especially if they do not agree in gender ; as, La prud^ncia y el valor del rey. I The prudence and the valor of-the I king, (a.) The learner will find many exceptions to the above rule in the best Spanish writers. The article must always be repeated in such cases when each noun is designed to be emphatic. When the word todo, " all," sums up the several nouns, the article is not generally used before any of the nouns ; as, Espanoles, Franceses, Ingleses, y America- ncs^ todos son mortales^ " Spaniards, Frenchmen, Englishmen, and Americans, all are mortal." 254. The article is omitted in Spanish, as in English, before nouns taken in a partitive sense ; as. El carpintero tiene dinero. j The carpenter has money. (a.) In the above example, it is meant that " the carpenter has a por- tion of money," or some money. When the word some is to be expressed, alguno in the singular, and cdgunos or unos in the plural, is use«i ; as, algun idia. " some idea ;" alguna caverna, " some cavern ;" algunos libros, " some books ;" unos senoras, " some ladies." OF THE NOUN. l^J (6.) Before a singular noun, denoting something to eat or drink, the word some is expressed in Spanish by un poco de, "a little of;" as, dime unpoco de leche^ "give me some milk." (c.) When in English some or any is used before a singular noun in an interrogative or negative sentence, in Spanish it is usually omitted, especially before nouns meaning something to eat or drink ; as, i toma vmd. aziicar? " do you take any sugar? itiene vmd. iazasi "have you any cups 7" i time vmd. algunos platillos ? " have you any saucers ?" no iengo JlaiUat "I-havenot any flute;" no iiene hacha^ "he-has not any axe." OF THE NOUN. AUGMENT ATI VES, DIMINUTIVES, AND COMMON TITLES OP RESPECT. 255. Augmentative nouns are such as are increased, in the extent of their signification, by the terminations on, ona, azo^ aza^ ote ; thus the words daga^ dagger ; cuchara^ spoon ; fraile^ friar ; gato^ cat ; manga^ sleeve ; muger^ wo- man ; frente^ forehead ; can be rendered augmentative ; as, dagon^ large dagger ; cucharon^ large spoon, i, e. a ladle ; frailorij large friar ; gatazo^ large cat ; mangote^ large sleeve ; mugerona^ large woman ; frentaza^ broad forehead. 256. Diminutive nouns are such as are decreased, in the signification of their primitives, by the terminations ico. ica^ ejo, eja, ito, ita, eto, eta^ illo, illa^ uelo, uela ; thus, fraile^ friar ; capillaj chapel ; cuchara, spoon ; batel, boat ; can be rendered diminutive ; a.s, frailecico, frailecito^ frailezuelo, a little friar ; capilleja, capillila^ capiUeta^ small chapel ; cu- charica, cucharita, cuchareta, cucharillo, small spoon ; bateli- CO, batelejoj hatelito, hatelillo, little boat. The terminations uelo generally, and illo also sometimes, express contempt ; as hombre, man ; hombrezuelo or hombrecillo^ an insignificant or contemptible little fellow. (a.) Adjectives are also frequently found used in a diminutive sense ; as, poco^ little ; poquUlo, poquitico, poquito, very little. 257. There is also a kind of nouns composed of the name of some Instrument or object, and one of the terminations ojzo, aza, ada^ the 130 OF THE NOUN. compound word including in its meaning both the instrument and some effect produced by it ; as, dardo, a dart ; dardada, a blow given with a dart ; cuchara, a spoon, cucharazo, a blow with a spoon ; pluma, a pen, plumada, a dash or stroke with a pen ; mano, the hand, manotazo or majiotada, a blow with the hand ; aldaba, a knocker, aldabada, a rap with the knocker, and alddbazo, a violent rap with the knocker. 258. When a noun with a singular termination denotes several persons or things, it is called a collective noun, or noun of multitude ; as, turba, a crowd ; vacada, a drove of cows. 259. The ordinary titles of respect con-esponding to Mr. or Esq. in English, are in Spanish Senor and Don ; and those corresponding to Madam and Mrs.^ are Senora and Dona; and Miss^ Senorita. Don and Dona never take the article before them, and can be used before Chris- tian names only. Senor and Don are often used together before the Christian name. The following examples will show the manner in which these words are used : El Senor Blake es Americano. Don Diego Ticknor, me alegro mu- cho de verle. El Senor Ray. La Senora Ray. El Senor Carlos Mason. La Senorita Mason. Al Seiior Don Diego Harper. Al Senor Juan Harper. Los Senores Don Juan Millon y Don Pablo Surret. Los Senores Riggs y Tiggs. Da una silla i. Dona Sara Ray. Mr. Blake is an American. Mr. James Ticknor, I am very glad to see you. Mr. Ray. Mrs. Ray. Master Charles Mason. Miss Mason. To James Harper, Esq. To Mr. John Harper. Messrs. John Millon and Paul Sur- ret. Messrs. Riggs and Tiggs. Give a chair to Mrs. Sarah Ray. (a.) The article is never used before these titles except when the per- sons are spoken of; of course, when persons are addressed, the proper title only is used ; as, Buenas tardes tenga vmd., Senorita | I wish you a good evening, Miss Wilson. I Wilson. (6.) Senor, senora, senorita, senores, senoras, senoritas, also are used for sir, madam, miss, gentlemen, ladies, young ladies, respectively ; as, Buenos dias, seiior. I Good morning, sir. Buenas noches, senores. I Good night, gentlemen. (c.) Senor and senora are used as an additional mark of respect before the name of a relative in such cases as the following : I Como est^ su senor hermano 1 I How is your brother ? I C6mo esti su senora madre ? I How is your mother ? OF THE ADJECTIVE. 131 ' A list of nouns which form an exception to the general rules of gender will be found in the Appendix, Number II. The wise man. The wise woman. The wise men. The wise women. The deluded king. The deluded queen. The deluded female-servants. OF THE- ADJECTIVE. AGREEMENT AND POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 260. The adjective always must agree in gender and number with the noun to which it belongs ; as, El hombre s^bio. La muger sabia. Los hombres sibios. Las mugeres s^bias. (a.) Participles used as adjectives agree in gender and number with the noun to which they belong ; as, El enganado rey. La engaiiada reina. Las enganadas criadas. (6.) An adjective does not agree with the gender of the title of a per son, but with the gender of the person to whom it is applied ; as, Su majestad est^ enfermo. | His majesty is ill. Su majestad estd eriferma. 1 Her majesty is ill. (c.) Nada, " nothing," requires a masculine adjective ; as, Nada hay llmpio. 1 There-is nothing pure. {d.) Two or more nouns in the singular require the adjective which belongs to them to be in the plural, and if the nouns are of different genders, the adjective must be in the masculine ; as, Juana y Maria est^n calladas. | Jane and Mary are silent. Lucia y Carlos est^n cansados. I Lucy and Charles are tired. (e.) When an adjective comes before or after two or more plural nouns of different genders, it must agree in gender with the noun nearest to it; as, Buenos diccionirios y gram^ticas. I Good dictionaries and grammars. Diccionarios y gramaticas buenas. 1 Good dictionaries and grammars. g^" The Spanish Academy recommends that, in cases in which an adjective is to be used with two or more nouns differing in gender and number, it would be better to use a different adjective of similar mean- ing for every noun, or an adjective which does not clange its ending to form its feminine (see 100) for the plural. 132 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 261. The material of which a thing is made, as well as the country in which it is made or produced, are seldom used as adjectives, but as a noun preceded by the preposi- tion de ; thus. Hoja de plata. Paiio de laiia. Cueros de M^jico. Cerveza de L6ndres. Silver leaf. Woolen cloth. Mexican hides. London beer. 262. The profession or dignity of a person may be qualified by an adjective derived from the name of a nation, or by the name of the nation preceded by the pre- position, as above ; thus, General Mejicano. I Mexican General. General de Espaiia. I Spanish General (general of Spain). (a.) The title of the chief ruler of a country is not qualified by an ad- jective expressing the nation, but by the name of the country, preceded by the preposition j as, El rey de Espafia. The king of Spain. La reina de Inglaterra. The queen of England. El presidente de los Estados-Unidos. The president of the United States. 263. Adjectives of both numbers and genders are often used as nouns, being in such cases preceded by the arti- cle ; as. Un rico. Una rica. Los ricos. Las ricas. Los doctos. A rich (man). A rich (woman). This rich (men). The rich (women). The learned. (a.) The neuter article (as it is called) Zo, precedes adjec- tives in the singular number, used as nouns, when taken in a general sense, without reference to either gender ; as, Lo escrito. The written, i. e. that which is written. Lo malo. The bad, i. e, that which is bad. Lo siguente. The following, i. e. that which fol- lows. 264, Adjectives and participial adjectives are much oftener placed after the noun to which they belong than before it ; as, OF THE ADJECTIVE. 133 Hombre s^bio. A wise man. Furor portico. " Poetical fury. Gu^rdia avanzada. Advanced guard. (a.) In many cases it is left entirely to the taste of the writer to place the adjective before or after the noun to which it belongs. But cardinal numbers, adjectives expressing some inherent or peculiar quality, habit, or practice of the noun to which they belong, and adjectives employed as particular epithets with a proper name, are generally placed before the noun : so likewise adjectives accented on the antepenult ; as, A pleasant coolness. Crystaline water. The white snow. The timid sheep. The ambitious Jefferson. Una dulce frescura. Cristalina ^gua. La blanca nieve. La tlmida oveja. El ambicioso Jefferson. ^p* The above rule is liable to many exceptions. Indeed, no certain rules can be given for the position of adjectives. Attention on the part of the pupil to the practice of the best Castilian writers will prove the best means of teaching him the most proper arrangement for adjec- tives.* (6.) Tanio^ as much; cuanto, so much; mucho, much; todOj all; pocOy little ; are always placed before the noun. (c.) In some few cases the same adjective has a different meaning, according as it is placed before or after the noun ; as, Cierta seiiora. I A certain lady. Cuenta cit^ta. 1 A true (certain) narrative. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES, ETC. 265. There are some irregular comparatives ; as, mayor^ greatei , mejorj better ; tnenor, smaller ; peor^ worse. (a.) As the superlative-relative is formed by placing the article before the comparative, of course el mayor means " the greatest ;" el mejor, " the best ;" el menor, " the least ;" elpeor, '• the worst." 266. There are some irregular superlatives; as, mdximo, greatest; Optimo, best ; minima, least ; pesimo, worst ; injimo, lowest. (a.) There are some superlatives in tsimo not regularly formed ; as, hontsimo, very good ; 7iocisimx>, very new ; fortisimo, very strong ; Jidel~ tsimo, very faithful ; sapienttsimo, very wise ; these being the superlatives of the adjectives 6i4cno, nuevo,fuerte,Jlel, sdbio. (b.) There are a few superlatives otherwise irregular ; as, pauperrimo, * The adjective is sometimes used after the noun in English ; as, an account current; the tie matrimonial; life everlasting; a noun common • a verb active ; page thirtieth. 12 134 OF THE ADJECTIVE. very poor; miserrimo, very miserable; integerrimo, very honest; cele- berrimOy very celebrated; saluberrimo, very salubrious; liberrimo, very free. (c.) The superlative of the above adjectives can also be formed with muy ; as, muy grande, very great ; muy pobre^ very poor ; muy bueno, very good, etc. And such as do not already end in tsimo or errimo, can have their regular form in tsimo ; as, maltsimoy very bad ; poqmsimOy very small, etc. 267. With poLtical or other titles of dignity, muy before an adjective expresses somewhat less than the termination zsiTTw affixed to it ; thus, muy ilustrey very illustrious, is less than ilustrisimo^ most illustrious. 268. When a superlative relative follows the noun to which it refers It is sufficient that the article be used before the noun, and not repeated before the superlative ; as, Los Catalanes son los pueblos mas I The Catalanians are the people industriosos de Espana. I most industrious of Spain. 1^* In English we should render the latter clause of the above exam- ple, "the most industrious people in Spain." 269. One noun can be compared with another in the same manner as adjectives; as, Juan es mas niiio que su nieto. I John is more {of a) child than his I grandson. 270. In forming a comparison, in affirmative sentences, de is used instead of que before an adjective of quantity or number, or before the pronouns what or that whichy expressed or understood ; as. Mi hijo tiene mas de seis anos. I My son is more than six years old. Juan tiene mas de lo que necesita. I John has more than what he needs. 1^* These sentences rendered literally would be, " my son has more of six years ;" and "John has more of what he needs." (a.) If the sentence be negative, de or que may either of them be used before an adjective of quantity or number, or the pronouns what or that which; as. Mi hijo no tiene ma& que (or de) \ My son is not more than six years seis anos. I old. 271. When the adjective is placed after a proper name, as a distin- guishing epithet, such as " Tarquin the Proud" the article precedes it in Spanish as in English ; as, Alexandro el Magno. I Alexander the Great. Guzman el Bueno. I Guzman the Good. (a.) Numeral adjectives of order form an exception to the above rule; as, Carlos Doce. | Charles the twelfth. Francisco Primero. I Francis the first OP THE ADJECTIVE. 135 *272. The preposition de is generally used after an adjective or partici- ple which is followed by a noun expressive of the cause, manner, means, or instrument, and also after adjectives denoting distance ; as. Agudo de ingenio. Apurado de medios. Ageno de verdad. Bajo de cuerpo. Boto de punto. Curtido del sol. Dotado de ci^ncia. Escaso de medios. Impelido de la necessidad. Molido de andar. Sordo de un oido. Palido de miedo. Defectos comunes de su juventud. Ancho de boca. Angosto de manga. Blanco de cutis. Palido de semblante. Aprobado de cirujano. Sharp in intellect. Exhausted in means. Foreign to truth. Low in stature. Blunt at the point. Tanned hy the sun. Endowed with learning. Limited in means. Impelled hy necessity. Fatigued with walking. Deaf with one ear. Pale with fear. Faults common to his youth. Wide in the mouth (wide-mouthed). Narrow in the sleeve (narrow- sleeved). White in skin (white-complexion- ed). Pale in the face (pale-faced). Approved as a surgeon. (a.) The preposition in after a superlative is to be rendered into Span- ish by de / as, Los mas s^bios hombres del mun- J The wisest men in the world, do. I 273. TantOf and not tan^ is used before a noun in comparisons of equality (see 104) j as, Maria tiene tanta prud^ncia como I Mary has as much prudence as Juana. Jane. 1^" For the idiomatic use of some prepositions after certain adjec tives, see Appendix, Number III. LIST OF NUMERALS. 274. The numeral adjectives are divided into cardinal and ordinal. The cardinal numerals express numbers ; as, one J two^ three ; and the ordinal numerals express order or rank ; SiS^ first, second, third. (a.) There are also some numeral nouns, such as the collective nuin bers, una docena, a dozen ; una veintena^ a score ; and the fractional numbers, la mitadj the half; un cuartoy a fourth. 136 OP THE ADJECTIVE. 275. The following is a list of the cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives : CARDINAL NUMBERS. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Uno, una, One. Primero, First. Dos, Two. Segundo, Second. Tres, Three. Tercero, Third. Cuatro, Four. Cuarto, Fourth. Cinco, mve. auinto. Fifth. Seis, Six. Sexto, or, sesto, Sixth. Siete, Seven. Septimo, Seventh. jOcho, Eight. Octavo, Eighth. .Nueve, Nine. Noveno, or, Nono^Ninth. ' Diez, Ten. D^cimo, Tenth. \ Once, Eleven. Undecimo, Eleventh. Doce, Twelve. Duodecimo, Twelfth. Trece, Thirteen. Decimo t^rcio. Thirteenth. Catorce, Fourteen. Decimo cuarto. Fourteenth. 1 Gluince, Fifteen. Decimo quinto. Fifteenth. Diez y seis. Sixteen. Decimo sesto, Sixteenth. It Diez y siete, Seventeen. Decimo septimo. Seventeenth. | Diez y ocho, Eighteen. Decimo octavo. Eighteenth. J Diez y nueve, Nineteen. Decimo nono. Nineteenth. Veinte, Twenty. Vig^simo, Twentieth. ij Veinte y uno,.* Twenty-one. Vig^simo primo, Tweniy-first. i' Veinte y dos. Twenty-two. Vig^simo segundo Twenty- second. Veinte y tres. Twenty-three. Vigesimo t^rcio. Twenty-third. Veinte y cuatro , Twenty-four. Vig^simo cuarto. Twenty-fourth. . Veinte y cinco. Twenty-Jive. Vigesimo quinto, Twenty-fifth. Veinte y seis. Twenty-six. Vigesimo sesto, Twenty-sixth. ; Veinte y siete, Twenty-seven. Vigesimo septimo Twenty-seventh. Veinte y ocho. Twenty-eight. Vigesimo octavo, Twenty-eighth. Veinte y nueve, Twenty-nine. Vigesimo nono. Twenty-ninth. Treinta, Thirty. Trigesimo, Thirtieth. Cuarenta, Forty. Cuadrag^simo, Fortieth. i Cincuenta, Fifty. Q,uincuagesimo, Fiftieth. Sesenta, Sixty. Sexagesimo, Sixtieth. Setenta, Seventy. Septuagesimo, Seventieth. Ochenta, Eighty. Octogesimo, Eightieth. \ Noventa, Ninety. Nonagesimo, Ninetieth. 'i Ciento, ===== A hundred. Cent^simo, . Hundredth. || ♦ Sometimes found written as one word, as veintiuno^ veintidos, etc. OF THE ADJECTHE. 137 p — : CARD^^fAL NUMBERS. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Docientos, Two hundred. Docent^simo, Tiro hundredth. Trecientos, Three hundred. Trecentesimo, Three hundredth Cuatrocientos, Four hundred. Cuadrag^ntesimo, i^oitr hundredth. Q.uinientos, Five hundred. Quingentesimo, Five hundredth. ! Seiscientos, Six hundred. Sexentesimo, Six hundredth. Setecientos, Seven hundred. Septengentesimo, Seven hundredth. Ochocientos, Eight hundred. Octogentesimo, Eight hundredth. Novecientos, Nine hundred. Nonagentesimo, Nine hundredth. Mil, A Thousand. Milesimo, Thousandth. 276. The cardinal numbers for eleven hundred, twelve hundred, two thousand, three thousand, etc., are mil y ciento, mil y docientos^ dos mil^ tres mil; for a hundred thousand, two hundred thousand, etc., den mil, docientos mil; for a million, two millions, etc., un millon, dos millones. Millon is not an adjective, but a noun. 277. Una is declinable, changing the final o into a whenever it refers to a feminine noun. All of the cardinal numbers ending in ientos form their feminine in as ; as, docientas mugeres, two hundred women. The rest are undeclinable. (a.) All the ordinal numbers change the last o into a to form their feminine. (6.) Uno drops the last letter when it comes before a noun. (See 101.) (c.) Ciento drops its last syllable when it comes immediately before a noun (see 101, a), but not when any other word comes between it and the noun ; thus, cien soldados, a hundred soldiers ; and ciento y tres sol- dados, a hundred and three soldiers. (d.) Primero and tercero, among the ordinals, drop the final o before a noun. (See 101.) 278. The cardinal numbers (and not the ordinal) are generally used in Spanish to express order or rank, when the number exceeds nine ; when under nine, the ordinals are employed ; thus. Enrique Octavo. Carlos Doce. Tomo diez y ocho. P^gina septima. Henry Eighth (the Eighth). Charles Twelve (the Twelfth). Volume eighteen (the eighteenth). Page seventh (the seventh). 279. In mentioning the days of the month, the Spanish use the cardi- nal adjectives and not the ordinal, as in English, except in the first day, in which primero and not un is used ; thus. El primero de Enero. El dos de Febrero. El tres de Marzo. El diez y seis de Mayo. 12 The first of January. The two (second) of February. The three (third) of March. The sixteen (sixteenth) of May OF THE PRONOUN. (a.) In dates where figures are used, the article is omitted, and except the first day of a month, the cardinal numbers are used ; as, Madrid, June 1st, 1845. Madrid, 1° de Jiinio de 1845. Paris, 4 de Julio de 1846. L6ndi\3s, 27 de Agosto de 1847. Paris, July 4th, 1846. London, August 27th, 1847. 280. The hour of the day is expressed by the ordinal numbers preced- ed by the definite article, which must in such a case agree with horas^ hours, understood (unless the hour be one, when it agrees with the sin- gular hora) ; thus, What o'clock is it 7 It is one o'clock. It is two o'clock. It is ten. It is ten minutes before three. It is twenty minutes after eight. 1^" Literally, the above expressions mean, " What hour is it 7" "It is the one" — " they are the two "—" they are the ten" — "they are the three less ten minutes" — " they are the eight and twenty minutes." 281. In speaking of the age of persons or things, the verb tener is em- ployed in Spanish ; as, I Q,ue hora es 1 Es la una. Son las dos. Son las diez. Son las tres menos diez minutos. Son las ocho y veinte minutos. Charles is twelve years old. Mr. Tournay is not fifty years of Carlos tiene doce anos. El Seiior Tournay no tiene cin- cuenta anos. 1^* Literally, "Charles has twelve years," and "Mr. Tournay has not fifty years." 282. In Spanish it is not said, in expressing measurement, " twenty feet high," or " ten feet long ;" but " twenty feet of high," or " of height," " ten feet of long," or " of length ;" as. La casa tenia sesenta codos de i The house was (had) sixty cubits largo, y veinte codos de ancho, y long, and twenty cubits wide, and treinta codos de altura. 1 thirty cubits in height. (a.) In comparative sentences, to express difference, in English it may be said, "she is taller than her sister hy the whole head." In Spanish, this sentence would be, " ella es mas alta que su hermana de toda la ca- beza" i. e. " she is more tall than her sister of all tha head." OF THE PRONOUN. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 283. The personal pronouns of the nominative case, when used, may come either before or after the verb, OF THE PRONOUN. 139 except the latter be in the imperative mood, or the sen- tence be interrogative, in which cases the nominative gen- erally follows the verb ; as, viva ella, " may she live ;" iha hablado el ? " has he spoken ?" (a.) As the verb-ending generally indicates of itself the person and number that its nominative must be, the nominative personal pronouns are seldom expressed in Spanish, unless when necessary to distinguish the persons or genders, or to be emphatic, or when a relative pronoun is to follow ; as. El y ella son prudentes. Nosotros seramos castigados, y no vosotros. El que tiene dinero, tiene cuidados. He and she are prudent. We shall-be punished, and not you. He who has money, has cares. 284. The pronoun se " oneself," is sometimes used with a reflective or reciprocal verb (see 136 and 169), and then it is to be rendered in English by himself, herself, itself, themselves, or one another, as the sense may require; as, Ellas se aman. I They love themselves (or, they love I one another). (a.) The first objective case of all the personal pronouns is also em- ployed with reflective or reciprocal verbs ; as. Nosotros nos aman. Yo me alabo. Yo no quero alabarme. We love ourselves (or, each other), I praise myself I wish not to-praise myself. (b.) The pronoun se is also frequently used with a verb in the active voice, of the third person singular or plural, to express the passive voice (see 173) ; as, La casa se quemo. I The house was burned (the house I burnt itself). (c.) The first- objective case of all the personal pronouns is sometimes used with a reflective verb in a passive sense ; as, Yo me admiro. I am surprised (I surprise myself). Vosotros OS alegrais. You are rejoiced (you rejoice your' selves). (d.) Strictly speaking, se can not be used in the nominative case, and should therefore always be considered as governed by a verb. Thus, in such sentences as se dice, se cree, sepiensa, the literal rendering is, "it- says itself," " it-beli'='ves itself," "it-thinks itself" or (see 284, b) "it is said," "it is believed," "it is thought." Still, in translating, it is often more conv 'niert to imagine se as an indefinite pronoun of rii nomina* 140 OF THE PRONOUN, live case, used in the sense of they ; as, se dice, " they say," that is, ^*peo pie say;" sejnensa, "they think." (c.) Se and other pronouns of the first-objective case are often used in opanish with neuter and active-intransitive verbs reflectively, and in .juch cases seem redundant in English ; as, Thence he-passed {himself) to the city. De alii se paso i la ciudad. Yo me arrepiento. Se arrepiente. I repent (myself). He-repents {him- self). {/,) Se is sometimes used in the sense of to-him, to-her, to-them, to-you {L c. to your worship). This use of se takes place only when another personal pronoun of the objective case and of the third person immedi- ately follows it ; as, Tengo una cuchara ; 6-eladar^.* I I-have a spoon; I-will-give it to- I him. {g.) When, in cases coming under the above rule, the pronoun se does not denote with clearness the number or gender of the noun for which it is employed, the second-objective is also used ; as. Se lo dare d ella, d ellos, d vmd. Se la mando dar d ellos. I-will-give it to-her, to-them, to-you. He-commanded it to-be-given to- them,. 285. The first-objective case of the Spanish personal pronouns is very often to be rendered in English by the preposition '•' to " and the pronoun ; as, to-me, to-you, lo-him, to-her, to-them, etc. (see 114, and 114, Z>), and it is then equivalent to the second-objective, a mi, a vosotros, a el, a ella, a ellos, etc. ; and in some cases some other preposition than "^o" is used in rendering the first-objective into English ; as, John said to-me. I-ask it of 'thee {or, from-thee). Juan me dijo. Te lo pido. Se lo agradezco. Nos lo suplica. I-thank him for-it. He-beseeches us for-it. (a.) The second-objective with the preposition d is not used, except when the same verb governs two or more pronouns in the objective case, or when it is designed to be distinct or particularly emphatic ; as, Juan di6 dinero d ^1, d ella, y ^ ti. Yo vl ^ vosotros y i, ellos. Juan viva, dijeron ellos i. ella. John gave money to him, to her and to thee. I saw you and them. John lives, said they to her. * We can not say le Ic darS, " I-will-give it to-him," but se la dari. OF THE PRONOUN. 141 (6.) To add more clearness or strength to a sentence, both objective cases of pronouns are often employed ; the second-objective case then being placed either before the first-objective or else after the verb, except the first objective comes after the verb (as in the case of infinitives, gerunds, and imperatives; see 116), when the second-objective must come after the first ; as. A mi me dijeron, > I a tni. 5 They told me. Me dijeron i Decirme d mt. To-tell me. Diciendole d eUa, Telling her. Dime d mi. Tell me. (c.) When the sentence may contain a noun in the objective case gov- erned by the preposition ^, a pronoun of the second-objective case is often used in Spanish, and is not to be translated in English ; as, A Dios n^die U vio jamas. I God no-man saw Qiim) ever ; i. e. I po-one ever saw God. 286. MismOj meaning same or self, is often used with the nominative personal pronouns ; thus, yo mismOy I myself ; nosotros mismosy we ourselves, etc. ; and also with the second-objective ; and must always agree in gender and number with the noun to which the pronoun refers ; as, I Q,ue dices de tl mismo 7 I What sayest-thou of thyself 7 La muger hablara por si misma. I The woman will speak for herself. (a.) Mismo is often used with nouns also ; as, la misma Maria, " Mary herself;" los mismos soldados, "the very soldiers," or, "the soldiers themselves." 287. When by the pronoun it is meant any thing to which we can not apply a gender, ello is used. Its first- objective lo is employed by the same rule ; thus if it be said, "he has been told to love his enemies, and he does itj^ the pronoun it refers to the clause of the sentence, " to love his encmieSj^ and of course has no gender. In such a case, lo (not lc nor la) would be used. (a.) Lo is tised in Spanish for so in English, when the latter means U; as, Vmd. piensa que elld es rica, pero no lo es. Si h eg). Diego lo hace. You think that she is rich, but she- is not so. If it-be so. James docs so* 142 OF THE VERB. (6.) Lio is often used for Ze when the latter refers to a masculine noun and is immediately governed by a verb (though this use of lo is not grammatically correct) ; as, Espero que lo v^o en pcrfecta salud. I I hope that I see him in perfect I health. THE PECULIAR USE OF OTHER PRONOUNS. 288. The demonstrative pronouns este and aqvA are often used without any noun, and in such a case they have the sense of " this-onCj^ and '^ ihat-one^'^ or " the-one ;" as, r This-one is the-one of whom I Este es aquel de quien yo dije. < said ; or, I This is he of whom I said, (a.) Todo aquel jue is used in the sense of ^^ every one who;" as, Todo aquel que bebe de esta agua. [ Every one who drinks of this water 289. Quien often means he-who, she-who one-who ; and quienes, they-who ; as, Quien calla otorga. Maria fue quien lo dijo. Porque los ensenaba, como quien tiene aiitoridad. He-who is silent, consents. Mary was she-who said it. For he-taught them as one-who has authority. 290. Such expressions as, "i^ is/," "i7 is thoUj" "it is he," "it is she" "it is we" etc., are rendered in Spanish by "/ am" "thou art" "he is" "she is" "we are" etc.; as, Yo soy. Ella es. I It is I. It is she. Ellos son. I Es vmd. 1 I It is they. Is it you 7 291. De el, de eUa^ de eUo, de este, etc., were anciently written del^ deUa^ dello, deste. (a.) De and el, and d and il, are contracted into del and al when serv- ing as the antecedent of the relative pronoun que ; as, Del que sigue. Pedro di6 el libro al que vimos. Of-that which follows. Peter gave the book to-him whom we saw. OF THE VEKB. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 292. The verb agrees, in number and person, with its subject or nominativ b, expressed or understood ; as, OF THE VERB. 143 Sol/ general. Ella ama la verdad. Los Americanos aman las riquezas. I-am a general. She loves the truth. The Americans love riches. 293. When a verb has two or more subjects, eact in the singular, it is put in the plural ; as, Mi padre y mi madre me aman. 1 My father and my mother love me. Pedro 6 Diego vendran.* I Peter or James will-come. 294. When a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it is put in the plural, and agrees with the first person in preference to the other two ; as, Mi hermano y yo estamos malos. I My brother and I {i. e. we) are ill. Tii y yo estamos buenos. I Thou and I (i. e. we) are well. (a.) If the second person should be used with the third, without any first person, the verb must be in the second person plural ; as, Td y ella estais buenas. | Thou and she (i. e. you) are well. 295. When a relative pronoun is the subject of the verb, the latter must agree, in person and number, with the noun or pronoun to which the relative relates ; as, Yo soy que hablo contigo. I It is I who speak with- thee. Vosotros que sois s^bios. I Ye who arc wise. 296. A collective noun, taken in a general sense, that is, a noun representing the whole of the persons or things mentioned, requires the verb to be of the singular num- ber ; as. El ejercito de los Caldeos pcr^^id 1 The army of the Chaldeans pi/rswerf al rey. I the king. (a.) A subject which is a collective noun, taken in a par- titive sense, that is, representing a part of the whole of the collective noun, and conveying plurality of idea, requires the verb to be in the plural ; as, Parte creian lo que las decla, y parte I Part belie^edwhat he-told them, and no lo Cretan. I part believed it not. * This is different, as will be perceived, from the ru/fe in English syn tax, which requires two singular nouns connected by a disjunctive con junction, to have the verb agree with them in the s/ngalar form. 144 OF THE VERB. ' This last rule is not always followed even by the best Spanish authors. ' 297. In cases in which a verb appears to have two subjects, it must agree with that noun to which it seems more particularly to belong ; as, Los gages del pecado son muerte. | The wages of sin are (is) death. USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS. OF THE INFINITIVE, GERUND, AND PARTICIPLE 298. The present tense of the infinitive expresses affir- mation in an indefinite manner, without reference to number or person ; as, decir, to say ; dar, to give. (a.) The infinitive is used in Spanish when in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as, Vengo de comer. En derramar torrentes de sangre. Trabaja sin cesar. I-come from dining (to-dine) i. e. from dinner. In spilling (to-spill) torrents of blood. He-labors without ceasing (to- cease). (b.) The infinitive is frequently used as a verbal noun or present participle, by placing the masculine definite article before it (see 25 1 ) ; as. The murmuring (the to-murmur) of the fountains. At-the fall (at-the to-fall) of-the day. El leer me gusta. ' Reading (the to-read) pleases me. (c.) The infinitive is often rendered in English by the present partici- ple, when in Spanish it is governed by another verb ; as, La oimos cantar. I We-heard her singing (to- sing). Le vi correr. I 1-saw him run, or running (to-run). 299. In . Spanish, the gerund is employed in the sense of the present participle in English ; as, Estando enfermo el presidente. The president being sick. Habicndo conspirado unos caballe- Some cavaliers hxvoing conspired, ros. El murTnurar de las fuentes. Al caer del dia. OP THE VERB. 145 Queriendo seguir dispensdndolos^* Desiring to-continue dispensing- planto ^rboles frutales. them, he-planted fruitful trees. Maria esti. hablando. Mary is speaking. (a.) In sentences such as, " charity is increased by cultivating it," it is aUowed in Spanish to use either the gerund without the preposition, or the infinitive mood preceded by the preposition conj as, Nuestros deberes se hacen agrada- > bles cumpliendolos ; or, 1 Our duties are rendered agreeable Nuestros deberes se hacen agrada- [ by performing them. bles con cumplirlos.f J (6.) Instead of the gerund of the past, the gerund of the present is sometimes employed, preceded by the preposition en; as, En oycTido esto, sali6 para Boston. On hearing this, he set-out for Bos- (Or) ton. Habiendo oido esto, sali6 para B6s- Having heard this, he set-out for ton. Boston. (c.) The gerund in Spanish is often employed in a manner that requires the adverb while to be used in translating it into English ; as, El que vive en deleites, viviendo I He who lives in pleasures, while est^ muerte. 1 living is dead. 300. The past participle is indeclinable when used to form the compound tenses (see 167) with the auxiliary verb haber ; as, Ella ha hablado, 1 She has spoken. Las mugeres han hablado. I The women have spoken, (a.) When the past participle is used with any other verb than haber, it is declinable ; as, Ella ha sido seducida. Mis caballos estan lastimados. Mis hijas se hallan molestadas. Mis hermanas quedan satisfechas. Ellas van saiisfechas. Ella SLuda. pasmada de mis p^abras. Tiene eseritas tres cartas. Lleva eseritas tres cartas. She has been deceived. My horses are injured. My daughters find themselves mo- lested. My sisters remain satisjied. They go satisfied. She Wjalks enraptured with my words. He-has three letters vrritten. He-carries written three letters. (6.) These last two examples, it will be perceived, require the partici- '* See 116. 13 t See 116. 146 OF THE VERB. pie to agree with the noun governed (cartas). Tener and lltvaroxe^ ae above, sometimes used as a kind of auxiliary verbs, and can always be rendered by "have;" thus each of these examples may be translated " he-has written three letters." (c.) The past participle is in Spanish used with a noun or pronoun in the case absolute ; thus, hallado means "found" and absolutely, " being found;" enviado means "sent" and absolutely, "being sent;" recibido means "received" and "being received." In general the participle is placed before the noun of the case absolute, with which it agrees (though the rules of Spanish construction admit of its being placed after the noun) ; as, Toniada Vera-Cruz, el General I Vera Cruz being taken, General Scott saliu para Jalapa. I Scott set-out for Jalapa. OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 301. The present tense expresses an existing state or an action occurring at the time in which we are speaking ; as, Mi hermano escribe. I My brother writes. Estas doncellas son amadas. I These maidens are beloved. (a.) The verb estar can be used with the gerund in Spanish, as In English the verb to be with the present participle ; as, Juan estd leyendo. | John is reading. Ellos estdn cantando, I They are singing. (6.) The verbs ir (to go) and venir (to come) do not admit of the verb tatar coming before their gerund as in the above rule. Thus we can not say in Spanish yo estoy yendo and yo estoy tdniendo, but yo voy and yo vengo {"I go" and "I come"), "I am-going" and "I am-coming." 302. The imperfect tense is used to express what is past, and, at the same time, present, with regard to some- thing else which is past ; that is, it is a past tense which was still present at the time spokeii of. It may always be employed in Spanish when in English the word " was " can be used with the present participle, or " used to " can be employed with the verb, or when we speak of habitual actions ; as. Ella escribta entonces. Seneca razonaba bien. Cervintes era un escritor elegante. She was-writiig then. Seneca reasoricd well. Cervantes vjos an elegant writer. OP THE VERB. 147 Neron era un lirano. Cuando ful niiio, hablaba como niiio. Ellos marchaban por las calles cuando los vimos. Nero teas a tyrant. When I-was a child, l-spokt as a child. They were-marching through the streets when we-saw them. ' It is evident that " Seneca reasoned well" means " Seneca used to reason (or was accustomed to reason) well." So " they walked rapidly while she looked," means " they were-walking rapidly while she icas- looking" and of course, with this meaning, walked and lookea would be put in the imperfect tense in Spanish. So " I went to the opera three times a week last summer; i. e. ^^Iwas in the habit of going," etc. 303. The perfect-definite tense shows the action or being affirmed by the verb, to be completed^ at a time of which nothing more remains, often specified by an ad- verb or some other circumstance expressed or under- stood ; as, EscribiS una carta ayer. Recibio dos cartas la semana pasa- da. El presidente no le perdono. Diego vivia cuando le vi. Luego que Juan se lo dijo^ llora- ron. He-wrote a letter yesterday. He-received two letters last week. The president pardoned him not. James was-living when I-saw him. As soon as John told it to-them, they xcept. (a.) As both the imperfect and perfect-definite in Spanish are included in English in what is called the imperfect tense, it is important that the learner should be able to distinguish the use of each in Spanish. When an action or event is entirely past and finished, the perfect-definite is used ; but when it is meant to say that the action or event was taking place at a certain time, and that it is or may be still continued, the im- perfect must be used. Thus, "Zos soldados marchaban porlaciudad" means " the soldiers were-marching through the city," and so far as the word marchaban is concerned, they may be marching still; but " los sol- dados marcharon por la dudad " means " the soldiers marched through the city," and from the tense employed are marching no longer. (See^ also 302.) 304. The perfect-indefinite is used to express an action or event, which, though entirely past, has taken place dur- ing a period of time (expressed or understood) of which the present forms a part, or at a time designated in an indeterminate manner ; as, 148 OF THE VERB. Hi hablado a Rodrigo esta semana. Han coinido pan hoy. Vmd. ha estado muy enfermo. I-have spoken to Roderick this wecfc They-^re eaten bread to-day. You have been very sick (a.) The past actions of persons or things still in existence, if no par- ticular time be mentioned, are expressed in this tense ; as, El General ha tornado varias ciuda- 1 The General has taken several des. 1 cities. (b.) The only cases in which the English perfect tense and the Spanish perfect-indefinite do not correspond are such as the following : "ItAoa been snowing these three hours ;" " he has been in Mexico for these ten years;" which in Spanish would be, " hace tres haras que nieva" (see 218, c) ; " hace diez anos que estoy en Mejico" which mean literally " it- is (see 218) three hours that (since) it-snows;" "it-is ten years that (since) I-am in Mexico." If the sentence be negative, the perfect-inde- finite is employed; as, ^' hace ocho dias que no la hemos visto," "it-is eight days that we-have not seen her," that is, " we have not seen her for eight days." If the action or event be completed, the perfect-definite must be used ; as, "hace diez anas que el rey le perdono," " it-is ten years that (since) the king pardoned him." (c.) Hay (or ha) is sometimes used instead of hace in cases like the examples in the last paragraph ; as " hay pocos dias que entrc en el cuarto de mi amigo" "it has few days that (since) I-entered into the room of my friend," that is, " a few days ago, I-entered ray friend's room." Hay is used at the beginning and ha at the end of a phrase; as, " hay pocos dias," or, "pocas dias ha" {d.) In some instances we may, both in Spanish and English, use either the perfect-indefinite, or if we are sure that the action is com- pleted, the perfect-definite ; &s, comz pan hoy, " I-ate bread to-day," or he comidopan hoy, " I have eaten bread to-day." 305. The first-pluperfect is used to express an affirma- tion of what is past and took place before some other past action or event or time, expressed or understood ; as, Juan ya habta comido cuando llego I John already had dined when Rich- Ricardo. I ard arrived. (a.) Whenever the former action or event is mentioned as still con- tinuing when the latter occurred, the imperfect tense is employed in Spanish to denote the former ; as, Habia (218) tres horas que ella es- \ It-was three hours that she was taba pintando cuando UegG Pedro. I painting when Peter arrived. B^* This last example means in English " she had been paintmg three hours when Peter arrived ;" and the use of the imperfect tense OF THE VERB. 149 shows that she was employed in painting (that is, had not finished) at the lime of Peter's arrival. 306. The second-pluperfect is used to express a past action or event that took place immediately before another action or event also past. It is never used except after some of the adverbs of time; cuando, "when;" asi que, " as soon as ;" no bien, " no sooner," " but just ;" apenas, " scarcely ;" luego que, " immediately after ;" despues qtie, " soon after ;" as, Cuando hube visto al muger, dije. Apenas hubo salido cuando se cayo la casa. No bicn lo hubimos hallado, cuando loperdimos. When I-had seen the woman, I said. Scarcely had-he gone-out when the house fell. No sooner had-we found it, when (than) we-lost it. 307. The first-future tense affirms what is yet to be or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as, Sere presidente. I I-shall-be president. Lucia vendrd manana. I Lucy will-come to-morrow. 308. The second-future tense affirms something future that will have taken place before or at the time of some other future action or event, or determinate time ; as, Hahre esorito esta carta antes que Juan llegue. Habrd acabado i. las tres. I shall-have written this letter before John may-arrive. He-wUl-have finished at three o'clock. {a.) Sometimes in Spanish the first-future is used instead of the pre- sent, and the second-future instead of the perfect-indefinite, when some- thing present or past is mentioned of which the speaker is not entirely certain ; as, " ahara nos dir^ lo que habr^ visto," " now he-will-tell us that which he-shall-have seen" meaning " now he perhaps tells us what he perhaps has seen." When, however, the speaker is certain, then he would express himself thus : ^^ahora nos dice lo que ha visto," " now he- tells us what he-has-seen." (6.) The second-future in English is sometimes rendered in Spanish by the present tense in a sentence like the following : " manana hard diez anos que vivo en Nueva-York," "to-morrow it-will-be ten years that 1-live in New York," meaning " I shall have lived in New York ten years to-morrow. 13* 150 OF THE VERB. OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 309. The imperative is that mood which commands, exhorts, or entreats ; as, HacedXo (116). VeamosXos. Trdigameios vmd. Do-it. Let-US- see-them. Bring-i\ieva-\.o-me. (a.) The imperative mood is not used in the first person singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding^ that is, it is not employed with a negative adverb^ but the persons of the present subjunctive are used when a negative com- mand or a prohibition is expressed ; as, No temas. Fear not {i. e. mayest thou not fear). No temais. Fear not {i. e. may ye not fear). (6.) The s of the first person plural and the d of the second are sup- pressed before nos and os; as, Congratidemonos. I Let us congratulate ourselves. Ccmgratuldos. I Congratulate yourselves. (c.) The s of the first person plural of the tenses of the indicative mood is suppressed when the reflective pronoun comes after it (see 113, a) ; as, Atnamonos. \ We-love ourselves. {d.) When the imperative is negative in English, as the subjunctive is employed in Spanish, the pronouns of the first-objective case (see 116) are not joined to it, but come before it ; as, Do (thou) it not. Bring (ye) it not to-me. Let her not do it. No lo hagas No me lo traigais. No lo ha^a ella. (c.) Que is sometimes used before the persons of the imperative mood; as. Que uno de nosotros vaya. 1 Let one of us go (that one of us I may -go), (/.) The persons of the imperative, except the second persons, singu- lar and plural, are to be rendered into English by "may" or "let;" as, "bendiganos el Senar," "may the Lord bless us;" " vaya Juan," ''let John go." But vmd.j with its objective cases, although of the third person, is to be rendered as t le second person ; as, " venga vmd. conmu OF THE VERB. 151 ^0," " come with-me " {let your- worship come with-me) 5 " alibese vmd.y" "praise yourself" {let your- worship praise himself).* OF THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 310. The tenses of the subjunctive mood differ in signi- fioation from those of the indicative only in expressing what they affirm in a conditional or doubtful manner, while the tenses of the indicative express certainty. Whenever, therefore, there is no doubt about what we affirm, we must use the tenses of the indicative. Thus, if we say " aunque Roderigo habla," " though Roderick speaks" by using the indicative mood we show that there is no uncertainty about Roderick's speaking. But if we say ^^ aunque Roderigo hable," " though Roderick may-speak^" we show, by using the subjunctive mood, that it is not certain that Roderick will speak. 311. The present tense of the subjunctive affirms some doubtful action or event that may take place, and is gener- ally preceded by some conjunction or conjunctive phrase ; as. Though it-may-be so. Remain there until I may-tell it to thee. Do this m order that they -may-see your good works. Whether we-may-live or whethei we-may-die, we are the Lord's. Aunque sea asi. Estate alii hasta que yo te lo diga. Haced esto para que vean vuestras buenas obras. Que vivamos 6 que muramos, del Seiior somos. (a.) As futurity is implied in the present tense of the subjunctive, the first-future of the subjunctive may be used in its place ; thus we may say, ^^ aunque lloremos,'' "though we-may-weep ;^^ or ^^ aunque llorare- mos" "though we-should-weep.^' The present may, therefore, be used instead of the future, and the future instead of the present, unless the conjunction si (if) be employed, in which case the present subjunctive can not be used. (6.) The relative pronouns are generally followed by the present or some other tense of the subjunctive, when the sentence is interrogative or negative, or expresses a doubt, icish, or condition ; as, * In both Spanish and English the future is sometimes used as a com- mand ; as, 1 mafards, " thou shalt not kill," i. e. " do not kill," or " do not commit lurder." 152 OP THE VERB. No conozco una sola muger, cuya alma sea mas sensible que la de la Seiiora Loader. I-know not a single woman whose soul {is) may-be more sensible than that of Mrs. Loader. (c.) Words which in English are compounds of ever, such as ^ien- quiera, "whoever;" cualquiera, "whosoever," "whichsoever;" siempre que, "whenever;" por masque, "however;" par mucJio que, "what- ever ;" in Spanish generally require the present or some of the tenses of the subjunctive ; as, Cualquier cosa que vea vmd. Por grande que sea tu merito. Whatever thing that you may-see. However great that thy merit may- be. 3 1 2. The imperfect tense of the subjunctive affirms an action or event of a doubtful or contingent kind as having to be, or to be done, or as conceived by the mind as having taken place at some time under certain conditions; as, Juan leeria, si tuviera libros, or, > John would-read, if-he-should-have Juan leerta, si iuviese libros. 5 (if he had) books. Quisiera que mi madre lo comiese. I-would-like (I-wish) that my mo- ther would-eat-it. 313. There are in Spanish three forms of the imperfect subjunctive, one ending with ra (in the first person singu- lar), another with Ha, and the third with se. Each of these forms is generally to be rendered in English by some one of the auxiliaries should, would, might or could, as the sense may require. These forms of the imperfect are thus used : 314. The form ending with se is employed only when a conditional conjunction, or an ejaculatofy expression of desire, or a verb of command or permission (see also 3 1 4, b), comes before it ; as. If I should-have books, I-would read. 0-that he-woidd-risk not thus his life! It-was necessary that 1-should-ex- plain my reasons. I-told him that he-might-ta^e those books. Si yo tuviese libros, leeria. J Ojald no arriesgase asi su vida ! Era preciso que espitsiese mis ra- zones. Le dije que tomase esos libros. OP THE VERB. 153 (a.) Sometimes the conjunction que is not expressed, but understood ; as, ^ncargo le enviasen mayor canti- I He ordered (that) ihey'shcvld-send dad. I him a greater quantity. (6.) The form ending with se can be employed after the relative pro- nouns, and after cuanto, " as much as," cuantos, " as many as," when they are preceded by a verb expressive of an action which the other part of the sentence shows to depend on choice or mere contingency ; as. Prometio que me darla todo lo que le pidiese. He-promised me that he-would- give me everything which I- might-ask of-him. 315. The form ending with ria is employed (generally to express a wish or condition, or what would be or might be done) when no conditional conjunction comes immediately before the imperfect tense ; as, Which of the two would you pre- fer? If she should come, they-woidd-go. I Cual de los dos preferirm vmd. 1 Si ella viniese (314), irian. (a.) This form can likewise be used when the imperfect is preceded by a verb that expresses a beliefs trust, or promise; and also when the conjunction si (if) is used in the sense of " whether;" as. He-promised that he-would-givc me two books. He-asked him if (whether) his son Prometio que me darm dos libros. Le pregunto si su hijo irta alM. would-go there. 316. The form of the imperfect ending with ra may in general be used for either the form in se or that in ria ; and is especially to be preferred to the form in ria, when interrogative pronouns come before the imperfect ; as. If I should-havc (if I had) money, I- would buy books. 0-that I-could-Jind myself with her. I-should-like that they would-come. Who wouM'believe it 7 Si^o tuviera dinero, comprarfa li- bros (314). Ojala me haUara con ella (314). * Yo quisiera que viniesen (315). I Q,uien lo creyera ? (a.) It will be seen from the foregoing rules that the form in ra can generally be used instead of the forms in se and rta, for we can say, si yo amara, or, si yo amase, " if I shouJd-love ;" and we can say, el amara, or, el amaria, " I woidd-love" But we can not use the form in ria and that in se, the one for the other. 154 OF THE VERB. {b.) In English there are various forms of speaking of a contingent action or event ; thus we can say, ^^ if she were to see it" — " were she to seeity" — ^'should she see it" — ^* if she see it" — "could she see it " — "if she should see it;" but in Spanish these forms must all be rendered as the last example, "if she should see it ;" thus, " si ella lo viese." And so with all the tenses of the subjunctive mood. (c.) Sometimes the English auxiliaries could^ might, should, and would, are expressed in Spanish by a separate verb, followed by the infinitive ; No podia ver. He-could not see {was not able to- see). Debta hacerlo. He-should do-it {ought to-do-it). No querza entrar. He-would not enter {was not willing to-enter). 317. The perfect-indefinite tense of the subjunctive mentions a doubtful or contingent action or event as being completed, or that it would have been done in past time under certain conditions ; as, I-am-surprised that he-may not have arrived. Fearest-thou that he-may not hxive won in fair play ? It-concerns me little whether he- may-have-heard it spoken or not. Me admiro que no haya llegado. [,Temes que no haya ganado en juego limpio 7 Poco me importa que lo haya oido decir 6 no. 318. The pluperfect tense of the subjunctive mentions a doubtful or contingent action or event that would or might have been completed under certain conditions ; and is also used in Spanish whenever in English a conditional conjunction or expression of fear, doubt, or wish, precedes the pluperfect indicative ; as, Ella habrta ido ayer a la catedral, si hubiese estado buena. I Ojala hubiese yo sido estudioso ! No era creible que hubiese vmd. abandonado a unos amigos an- tiguos como nosotros. She would-have gone yesterday to the cathedral, if she-^arf been well. 0-that I had been studious ! It- was not credible that you would- have abandoned such old friends as we. (a.) This compound tense of the subjunctive is used with the endings in ra, rta^ and se of the auxiliary verb haher {hubiera, habria, and hubi- ese), under the same conditions and in the same manner as these end- ligs are employed in the imperfect tense ; (see 314, 315, 316) ; os, OF THE VERB. 155 If he-shauld not have (if he-had not) paid thee, I would-have lent thee money. iSi nG e huhiera pagado, yo te ha- hrtu prestado dinero : or, Si no ve hubiese pagado^ yo te ha- bria prestado dinero ; or^ Si no te hubiese pagado, yo te hu- biera prestado dinero : or, Si no te huhiera pagado, yo te hu- biera prestado dinero. ly The form of the last example, though permitted, is not to be recommended, since the ending ra occurs in the conditional preposition (si no te huhiera pagado), and also in the principal preposition (yo te hu- hiera prestado dinero). Nor could we change in any case the principal proposition of the sentence, by substituting " hubiese prestado," since the form in se can be employed only with conditional conjunctions or exclamations, etc. (see 314 ; 314, h). (6.) There is in Spanish a peculiar method sometimes employed for expressing such a contingency of an action as is implied in the pluperfect tense : this consists in prefixing the preposition d before the infinitive haher, and afl&xing the past participle of the verb to be used ; thus, " d haber venido" is to be rendered the same as "si huhiera (or hubiese) veni- do," "if he-shotdd-have come," or, as it is generally expressed in Eng- lish, "if he-7iad come," or "Aad-he come." So "^ haber hablado" is to be rendered the same as "si hubiese hahlado" "if he-had spoken." 319. The first-future tense of the subjunctive mentions a doubtful or contingent action or event as to take place at a future time ; as, Si asl fuere, mis deseos quedardn satisfechos. Si yo hahlare lenguas de hombres y de Angeles, y no tuviera cari- dad, nada soy. If thus it-should-he, my desires will- remain satisfied. If I should-speak languages of men and of angels, and should not have charity, I-am nothing. (a.) The imperfect and first-future of the subjunctive can not be used indiscriminately for each other. The contingency implied in the imper- fect refers to time past ; and that implied in the first-future refers to future time, reckoning from the moment in which it is said. Thus if we say, " John said that the boys should remain at home," there is contin- gency and even futurity denoted, but it does not necessarily go beyond the present moment, for the boys ma)'' have already complied with John's request. In such a case the imperfect must be used. But if we say, " John says that if the boys should (or shall) not remain at home, he will not reward them," then it is evident that the event of staying at home is not yet supposed to have taken place, and of course the first- ftiture subjunctive is used. So, " if I have (i. e. shaU have) money, they 156 OF THE VERB. will-rob me of it," would be expressed by the first-future, and " if I had {should have) money, I would be generous," would be expressed by the imperfect. (See 311, a). 320. The second-future of the subjunctive mentions a doubtful or contingent action or event as having taken place at a future time at or before some other future action or event shall occur ; as, Si Pedro no hubiere llegado ^ntes de amanecer, le escribir^ una carta. If Peter shall not have arrived be- fore daybreak, I-shall-write him a letter. 321. A verb is not necessarily in the subjunctive mood because a conjunction may precede it; for an action or event, which is known to be certain^ requires the verb to be in the indicative mood, even though a conjunction pre- cede it ; as, " though John was-speaking low, I heard him distinctly," " aunque Juan hahlaha^^^ etc. If, however, there is uncertainty or doubt expressed, the subjunctive mood is required ; as, " though John were-speakingj I would not lis- ten," " aunqtce Juan hablara" etc. ' On account of the irregular and elliptical manner of using tne tenses in English, it is sometimes diflBcult for the learner to know which to use in Spanish. But he must learn to distinguish the meaning of the English tense, whether certainty or uncertainty is expressed (see 310 ; 311, 6; 311, c; 316, 6). {a,) After the relative pronouns or the adjective cuanto, " how much," or the adverb cuando, " when," if these pronouns or this adjective or adverb are themselves preceded by a verb expressive of an action which the other part of the sentence shows to depend on mere choice or con- tingency, the subjunctive mood is used (though in English in such cases the indicative is generally employed) ; as. Choose, then, from these oranges Elige, pues, de estas naranjas la que mas te agrade (or agradare ; see 311, a). Ser6 rico, cuando quiera (or quisi- ere^ la.fortuna (see 311, a). Prometio darme el dinero que yo necesUara (see 314, b). that which most pleases thee {may-please or sJiall-please thee). I-shall-be rich when fortune wUls, (t. e. when fortune may-will or shaU-wiU). He-promised to-give me the money that I'toanted {Tnight'Vxmt). (6.) Verbs expressing iritt, desire^ command^ permission^ promise^ fear^ OF THE VERB. 157 doubtf probability, Jitness, or necessity, followed by the conjunction que (or any other conditional conjunction), generally require the verb which follows the conjunction to be in the subjunctive mood (and not in the indicative, as in English) ; as, Dudo que tengas aciete. No creo que tenga peras. Temo cue no tengan dinero. Es posible que tengan uvas. Es precise que me vaya. 1-doubt whether thon-hast {mayest- have) oil. I-do not think that Yie-lms {may- have) pears. I-fear that they-icill not have {may not h^ve) money. It-is possible that they-^re {may- have) grapes. It-is necessary that I-go {may-go). (c.) There are some conjunctive phrases, which, as they imply a con- dition or doubt in themselves, are always followed by the subjunctive mood : these are, para que, " in order that ;" dado que, " granted that ;" no sea que, "lest;" d menos que, "unless;" djinde que, " to the end that ;" con tal que, " provided that ;" dntes que, " before that ;" supuesto que, "suppose that;" en caso de que, *'in case that;" bien que, "al- though ;" sin que, "without or unless that ;" como quiera que, " notwith- standing that;" por mas que, "however;" siempre que, "whenever that;" ojald, "would that," or, "would to God that;" as, hablo para que puedas juzcar, "I-speak in order that thou-mayest be able to judge." {d.) The conjunction ought always to be expressed in Spanish ; as, "he promised us [that] he would-come," nos promeiio que vendrta.* OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 322. The passive verb is generally rendered in Spanish by ser (see 170), and always when the subject of the verb is acted upon by an agent, that is, when in English it would be accompanied with the preposition by ; as, Este discurso^we escrito por Diego. I This discourse was written by 1 James. (a.) The passive verb must be rendered in Spanish by estar (see 174) when the past participle is used adjectively, that is, when the subject of the verb does not seem so * The verb prometir is generally followed by the infinitive in such a case; thras, jyrometi6 darme el dinero, "he«promi6ed to-give me the money.* U 158 OF THE VERB. much to be acted upon by an agent as to have its state or condition described ; as, El discurso estuvo bien escrito. I The discourse was well written. El libro estd correjido. I The book is corrected. 323. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only when it is designed to express a mental act or a state of the emotions; as, Maria es amada de Carlos. | Mary is loved by Charles. (a.) When a mental act or a state of the emotions is not expressed, the passive verb, if it be used, must not be in the present or imperfect of the indicative mood : thus we can not say, " el libro es escrito por un Espanol" " the book is written by a Spaniard," but el libro ha sido escrito "por un Espanol, " the book has been written by a Spaniard." (6.) When a mental act or state of the emotions is expressed, the pre- positions de or por may be used after the passive verb before the agent ; but when a mental act or state of the emotions is not expressed, por only can be used ; as, Maria es amada de {or por) Carlos. Todas las cosas fueron hechas por Dios. Mary is beloved br/ Charles. All things were made by God. (c.) The reflective pronoun se is often used with verbs of the active voice, which are required to be rendered in English by the passive. (See 173.) OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. ' 324. The object or regimen of the verb is either direct or indirect. The direct regimen is that on which the action immediately falls without the aid of any preposi- tion ; as, Doy un& pluma, \ I give a pen. (a.) The indirect regimen is that on which the action of the verb can not fall without the aid of a preposition ; as, Dijo d la muger. \ He-said to the woman. (b.) Sometimes both regimens are required after the verb ; as, Pio una pluria i. la muger. \ He-gave a pen to thi^ woman, 325. When the object of an active verb is a person or OP THE VERB. 159 inanimate tiling personified, it must be preceded by the prepostion a ;* as, James saw the mother of John. God will-reward the good. The woman whom we saw is not Diego viC» d la madre de Juan. Dios reconipensara d los buenos. La muger d quien vimos no es rica. Vio d la que me dio dinero. El sol alumbra d la tierra. rich. He-saw her who gave me money. The sun enlightens the earth. (a.) Sometimes the-^harmony of the sentence requires the d to be sup- pressed, especially after the persons of the verb tencr, " to have," or " to possess ;" as, Teiigo un hijo y tres hijas. | I-have one son and three daughters. 326. One verb governs another in the infinitive mood ; as, Q,uieren imitarle. \ They- want to-imitate him. (a.) Some verbs, as a general rule, require the preposition a before the infinitive which they govern; such are those which mean to attempt^ to come, to gOj to begin, to devote, to offer, to dare, to serve, to invite, to learn, to teach, to urge, to assist, to call, to advise, to submit, to prepare, to compel, to decide, to remain, and to accustom one's self; as, Probu d levantarse. 1 He-attempted to raise himself. Voy d rerla. I I-am-going to see her. (6.) Some verbs generally require the preposition de before the infini- tive which they govern ; such as those which mean to cease, to be glad, to be ashamed, to resolve, to deprive, to Jail, to finish, to abstain, to pity ; as, Dejo de estudiar. I He-ceased to-siudy. No faltare de hacerlo. I I-will-fail not to do it. (c.) When the preposition to in English is used before the infinitive in the sense "in order to" (as, "he labors to acquire fame," meaning "he labors in order to acquire fame "), the preposition para is used in Spanish before the iafinitive : as, El hombre fue criado j)ara aspirar I Man was created in-order-to aspire i. la felicidad. I to felicity. {d.) When the preposition to in English is used in the sense "/or the sake of," the preposition por is used in Spanish before the infinitive ; as, Juan lo dice, par decirlo. I John says it for-the-sake-of saying I it. * See No. 670, Part IV. TVis is a very important rule of Spanish 160 OF THE VERB. {e.) Sometimes que precedes the infinitive instead of par or para / as, Tiene algo que decirte. I He-has something (which) tc-tell 1 thee. {f.) The infinitive is often used without any preposition before it, especially when it is governed by verbs which mean to be able, to permit, to wish, to endeavor, to make, to feign, to owe, to seem, to be wont, to know, to avail, to see, to hear, to succeed, to hope, to be necessary, to think, to be- lieve, to promise, to deign, to be the duty, to pretend, to judge, to prescribe, to require, to suffice ; as, ^ No puede hacerio. I He-is not able to-do it. Deseo aprender. I I-wish to-leam. 327. The infinitive in Spanish, when used as a present participle in English, may take any preposition before it (see 298, a) ; as. Sintio la necesidad de ponerle en manos de la juventud. Es constante en amarla. He-felt the necessity of-placing it in the hands of the youth. He-is constant in-loving her. (a.) The verbs to sec and to hear never govern the gerund in Span ish, but always the infinitive ; thus we can not say, le vio viendo, " I-saw him coming," but le vio venir, "I saw him come." (6.) *' To know how " is expressed in Spanish by " to know ;" as, Yd no se nadar. | I know not {how) to swim. (c.) The infinitive, when governed by another verb in Spanish, is sometimes required to be rendered by another mood in English ; as, He-thinks to-die (that he will die) of joy. Piensa morir de alegria. Creo ver d mi padre. Sabe deber su m^rito d Dios solo. I-believe to-see (that I see) my fa- ther. He-knows to-owe his merit (that his merit is owing) to God alone. {d.) When in English a reflective verb, or a verb implying command, governs an infinitive in the passive voice, in Spanish this infinitive must be in the active voice ; as, The king ordered it to-be-given to- him. Suffer not thyself to-be-overcome of evil. 0^" The above examples literally would be rendered, " the king to- him it ordered forgive," and " not thyself suffer to wercome of that which is evil." El rey se lo mand6 dar. No te dejes verwer de lo malo. OP THE VERB. 161 328. When a verb is governed by another in Engheh, and can be ren- dered In another mood by using the conjunction that^ this latter mood should be employed in Spanish ; thus, instead of saying " I think him 10 be learned," we can say, " I think that he is (or may be) learned ;" and instead of "I requested him to go," we can say, "I requested thai he should go ;" which latter form of construction should generally be adopted in Spanish ; as, Espei^> que tendre el gusto de verle I I-hope to have (that I-shall-have) the en breve. 1 pleasure of seeing him soon. OF VERBS FOLLOW^ED BY CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 829. Verbs which signify to compare, to give, to yield, to resist, to concern, to belong, to refuse, to ask, generally require the preposition a before the noun to which the action of the verb passes over ; as, Ell». se parece d su madre. I She resembles her mother. Demanda sabiduria al Senor. I He asks wisdom/rom (to-the) Lord. ( 1.) Sometimes verbs having the sense to remace or to take away, re- quire the preposition d before the noun to which the action of the verb passes over ; as, Cortaron la cabeza d Saul. Cain quito la vida d su herniano Abel. They-cut-off the head of {to) Saul. Cain took-away the life of (to) hia brother Abel. 330. Verbs denoting to be abundant, to lack, to be aston- ished, to blame, to repent, to pity, to make use, to absolve, tc make sport, to remember, to forget, indirectly govern a noun by means of the preposition de ; as, Los valles abundan de trigo. Llenaron la casa de perros. Los discipulos se asombraron de sus palabras. The valleys abound with {of) wheat. They-filled the house with {of) dogs. The disciples were astonished at {of) his words. (a.) Olvidar^ to forget, is followed by de only when it is used as a re- flective verb ; as, Olvidarse de lo pasado,* or, I To-forget the past. Olvidar su nombre. I To forget his name. * Literally, '* to-forget oneself of the past." 14* 162 OF THE VERB. (6.) The verb ser, when used to imply property or possession, requires the noun denoting the possessor to be preceded by the preposition de ; as, El libro es de mi padre. I The book belongs to (is of) my fa- I ther. (c.) De generally precedes nouns which denote the causes of which the verb explains the effect ; as, Tiembla de miedo. He-trembles with (from) fear. Tirita de frio. He- shivers with (of) cold. Sus ojos se banaron de Mgrimas. His eyes were wet with (of) tears. 331. When a noun refers to the instrument with which the action of the verb is effected, it requires the preposi- tion con before it ; when the noun is the name of the blow and the object with which it is effected (see 257), it requires the preposition de or con before it, when it is employed in the singular number, and the preposition a when employed in the plural ; as, Los soldados le mataron con un dardo. Kilos le mataron de (or con) una dardada. Le mataron d dardadas. The soldiers killed him with a dart. They slew him with a blow-of-a- dart. They slew him by blows-of-a-dart. (a.) Sometimes the preposition d is found preceding the name of the instrument in the singular ; as, Q,uien d hierro mata, d hierro I He-who with steel* kills, by steel muere. I dies. (6.) When the reflective verb meterse is used to signify to meddle, to interfere, it requires the preposition con before the noun to which it refers as its object, if such noun be the name of a person, and en if it be the name of any thing inanimate : as, No te metas con estas detractores. No te metas en los negocios age- nos. Meddle not thyself with those slan- derers. Meddle not thyself in the affairs of- others. 332. The preposition d (to) should not be used in Spanish when we speak of motion merely directed towards a place, but hdcia and para; as, ...I ..^ .11 — — — ,-,_. ♦ Literally, iron, meaning the sword. OF THE VERB. 163 Esta caminanio hdcia Tolosa. ! He-is journeying towards Tolosa. Mi padre salio para Madrid. 1 My fatlier set-outybr Madrid. (a.) Gerunds require the same prepositions as the verbs from which they are derived ; as, Acord^ndose de (330) sus oJbras. | Remembering his works. ' The idiomatic use of many verbs followed by certain preposi- tions will be found in the Appendix, Number III. OF THE USE OF THE VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 333. The different parts of the verbs ser and estar are generally to be rendered in English alike ; but in Spanish these verbs are not used indiscriminately for each other. Euch predicates the existence of some property or quality in an object ; but ser predicates absolute, and estar a rela- tive existence. When the property or quality is essential, natural, or inherent in the object, ser is to be used. When the quality is not natural (that is, not produced by nature), or when it is expressive of a transient state, estar is to be used. Ser, then, is used to affirm what a thing is naturally or by nature, or to express any permanent state or charac- teristic quality or property of an object ; while estar is used to affirm how a thing exists at any period of time, or where any thing is or exists. Ser affirms what a thing is ; estar expresses how or where a thing is. Thus, el cuarto es ^5;?^- cioso, " the room is spacious ;" with ser, because it tells what the room is ; and el cuarto esta limpio, " the room is clean ;" with estar, because it tells how the room is. Juan esta en el campo, " John is in the country ;" with estar, because it tells where John is. '' Mary is beautiful," affirms what Mary is ; '* Mary is glad," affirms how Mary is : and of course es would be used in the former sentence, and esta in the latter. " Peter is sick," affirms hoiv or in what state Peter exists at a certain period of time, and estar must be used ; thus, Pedro esta enfermd ; but " Peter is sickly," expresses what Peter is, namely, of a sickly or unhealthy A 64 or THE VERB, constitution, and ser must be used ; thus, Pedro es enfer mizo. (a.) In Spanish it may be said, Cdrlos es ciego, or Cdrlos esta dcgo^ and each sentence would be rendered in English, " Charles is blind." But in Spanish, the former would mean that Charles is blind by nature, or permanently hMndi'i and the latter that Charles is in a state of blind- ness for the time being only, which might be the case from temporary illness, or from dust thrown into his eyes. Esta muger es loca, means " this woman is insane," that is, permanently destitute of reason ; and esta muger esta loca, means " this woman is frantic ;" that is, in a tem- porary fit or phrenzy, acting like a madman. In this latter case, cstd might be rendered ^^ seems" or "appears" as, "this woman seevis (or acts like one) mad." So of a man of a generous disposition, it would be said, "he is (es) generous;" but of a notorious miser, who might happen on a certain occasion to exhibit a little generosity, it would be said, "he is {esta) generous ;" that is, he shows himself generous for the time being, though generosity is no real trait in his character. Marm esjoveUy means " Mary is young," that is, "Mary is a young woonan;" youthfulness being at her period of life a natural (though not permanent) state. We can also say, el viejo est^ j6ven, " the old-man is young," that is, " the old-man seems young," " has a youthful appearance," or *' acts like a youth ;" estar being used because youthfulness is not natu- ral to his years. 1^* The right manner of using the verbs ser and estar being of great importance, and yet attended with some difficulty to learners, we will give a few more explicit rules, the substance of all, however, being con- tained in the foregoing remarks. 334. Ser is used to affirm the existence of essential, natural, permanent, or characteristic states or qualities of the mind, persons or things, and to affirm what, or of what a person or thing is, was, or will be ; as. El yelo es frio. El plomo es pesado. Juan es bueno y sdbio. Soy soberbio. Lundres no es pequena. La miel es dulce. El hombre es polvo. Vmd. es rico. Es tarde. Perdonar las injiirias es obrar como Cristianos. « Pedro era capitan, ahora es mayor, y serd coronel. Ice is cold. Lead is heavy. John is good and wise. 1-am proud. London is not small. Honey is sweet. Man is dust. You are rich. It is late. To-forgive injuries is to act like Christians. Peter was captain, now is majoi, and will-be colonel. OP THE VERB. 165 (a.) The natural beauties of the body, and its defects when regarded as permanent, are affirmed with ser; as, Lucia €s hermosa. I Lucy is beautiful. Ella es corcobada y ciega.* I She is hump-backed and blind. (6.) The materials of whicK any thing is made are affirmed by ser ; also the possession or destination of any thing ; as, La taza es de oro. La mesa es de cedro. La corona es de la reina. El libro es mio. Cervantes es de Alcala. Este vino es de Espafia. Esta flor es para Maria. La carta era para ^I. Es de dia. Es de noche. The cup is of gold. The table is of cedar. The crown is the queen's. The book is mine. Cervantes is from Alcala. This wine is from Spain. This flower is for Mary. The letter was for him. It-is day. It-is night. 335. Estar is used to affirm the temporary, non-natural, accidental, or contingent condition or location of persons or things, transient emotions of the mind ; that is, to affirm how or where a thing exists, existed, or will exist, at any period of time ; as. Estoy alegre. Estd enfadado. Yo estdba ciego.t El tiempo esfard nublado. El mar estd airado. I-am merry. He- is angry. 1-was blind. V The weather will-be cloudy. The sea is raging. (a.) The physical changes, and state of the health of the animal body, as also the chemical and mechanical changes of substances, are affirmed by estar ; as. Ella estd enferma. Estojf bueno. Yo estaba cojo. La leche estd dgria. El agua estd caliente. Vmd. estd despierto. La came estaba asada. She is unwell. I-am well, l-was lame. The milk is sour. The water is hot. You are awake. The meat was roasted. (6.) In affirming any manner, situation, position, or location of per- sons or things, estar is used ; as. Juan estd de moda. Estd de rodillas. Estoy de prisa. Estoy de tu parecer. John is in the fashion. He-is on (his) knees. I-am in haste. I-am of thy opinion. • That is, " permaneHtly Wine?." f That is, " transiently blind." 166 OF THE VERB. Clara estd en la igl^sia Estaba en la calle. Estan i. la puerta. La comida estd en la mesa. I Donde estd mi padre 7 Estd en la cama. Estos quisantes ya estdn en flor. Estd entre -dos soldados. Estaba en Paris. Clara is in the church lUe-was in the street. They-are at the door. The dinner is on the ta. ile. Where is my father 7 He-i5 in bed. These peas are already in blossom. He-i5 between two soldiers. Hq-wos in Paris. (c.) Estar (and not ser) is always employed before the gerund, since this serves to show the manner of being occupied ; as, Jorge estd silbando. Ella estard reganando. EIlos estdn leyendo. Estoy escribiendo. George is whittling. She will-be scolding. They are reading. 1-am writing. id.) Estar is sometimes used with a preposition to form a particular idiomatic phrase ; thus estar sin means " to be destitute of;" estar d^ "to understand ;" estar en, " to be resolved on," " to know." (See 338 388, a.) (c.) Ser and estar may sometimes be used with the same adjective, but in such cases the meaning of the adjective can not remain the same, since ser affirms what a person or thing is, and estar affirms how it is for the time being ; as. Es bueno. Estd bueno. Es malo. Estd malo. Es callado. Estd callado. Es cansado. Estd cansado. Es vivo. Estd vivo. Esta naranja es ^gria. Esta naranja estd ^gria. He-is good. He-is well. He-is wicked. He-is ill. He-is tacituTm. He-is silent. He-is tiresome. He-is tired. He-is lively. He-is alive. This orange is sour {of a sour kincS). This orange is sour {unripe). g^p* The manner of using ser and estar in forming the passive voice, has already been explained (see 322 and 322, a). IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS. 336. Volver d, "to return," "to repeat," is used before an infinitive when it is required to repeat the action denoted by the infinitive, in which case the adverb *' again ^' would be used in English, and the infinitive be rendered in the same tense as volver; as, VoM d verle. I-saw him again (literally, I-re turned to see him). OF THE VERB. 167 Volvio d escribir la carta.* I He-re-tDrotc (oi tarote again) the I letter. 337. Acaber de, " to finish from," is used before an infinitive in the sense of " to have jttst" and the infinitive is rendered in English as a past participle ; as, Juan acaba de Uegar. I John has just arrived. Acabo de verle. I 1-havejust seen him. 338. Estar para, *' to be towards," is used before an infinitive in the sense of *'fo be ready" or, "to be about to ;" as, Estaban para acabar sus estiidios. I They-tcere about to finish their I studies. (a.) Estar por, " to be for," is used before an infinitive to show that the action implied in this infinitive is not yet performed, but that there is a disposition to accomplish it ; that is, in the sense of " to be not yet," or, " to have a mind to;" as, La casa estd por acabar. The house is to finish, i. e. the house is not yet finished. Estoy por ir i. verle. l-amfor going (or have a mind to go) to see him. (6.) Quedarpor, " to remam tor," is used before an infinitive in the same manner as estar por, in the sense of " to remain yet;" as, La carta quedapor escribir. I The letter reTtiains yet to write (rc- 1 mains to be written). 339. Hdber de, " to have of," is used before an infinitive in the sense of *' to be to" or **must;" as, No han de hacer uso de ellos. He de trabajar. They-are not to {must not) make use of them. I am to (I mitst) work (or, I have to work). 340. Tener que, " to have what," is used before an infin dve in the sense of '*/o have to," or *•* must;" as, Tiene que levantarse al romper del I Tie-has to rise by break t " day. dia. nit ' 341. Llegar d, " to arrive at," is used before an infinitive in the sense of " /o com,e to," or " to succeed in ;" as, ♦ Literally, " he returned (or repeated) to write the letter." It must be kept in mind that this is the usual mode in Spanish for expressing the repetition of an action, instead of using a word corresponding to "oj^at/i" in Eno^lish. 168 OP THE VERB. Cuando el hombre Uega d gustar los encantos de la virtud, la pre- fiere al Ticio. When man cjmes to taste the de- lights of virtue, he-prefers it to vice. (a.) Veiir d, " to come to," is used as Uegar d, in the sense of ** to zome to;^' as, Los dones vienen d ser perjuiciales. | Gifts come to be injurious. 342. Tener is used with the noun in such expressions as to be hot^ told, hungry, thirsty, afraid^ ashamed ; thus, to have heat, to have hunger, to have fear, etc. ; which in English must be rendered by the verb to be and the corresponding adjectives ; as, 7\*ene hambre. TVenc temor. \ He-is hungry. He-is afraid. (a.) Hacer is used impersonally before nouns referring to the weatner, and is to be rendered by the verb to be, and sometimes with the adjec- tive; as, Hace calor. Hace buen tiempo. ) It-is hot. It-is fair weather. 343. Tener is used in the sense of " to 6e," before nouns of measure ment, with the preposition de in the sense of " in;^' as, Goliath tenia de altura seis codos | Goliath was in height six cubits y un palmo. ! and a span. 344. Gustar, when it is to be rendered in English by " to like,^' has for Its nominative case in Spanish what is the objective in English, and its objective in Spanish is the nominative in English, preceded by the pre- position d, the sentence generally containing what in English would be regarded as a redundant pronoun (see 285, b ; 285, c) ; as, I he gustan i. vmd. patatas 7 I Do you like potatoes ? Ella me gusta i. mi. I I like her. 1^* These sentences, rendered more literally, mean, ** do potatoea Tplea^e (or suit) youl" " she pleases me." 345. FaUar, when it is to be rendered in English by " to want," or "to have need qf," requires the same idiomatic construction of the sen- tence as gustar (see 344) ; as, hefaltan tres vasos. | He wants (or needs) three tumblers. A Pedro no \ejalta dinero. I l^ter wants (or rueds) not money. g^F* Rendered more literally, these examples mean, " three tumblers are wanting to (or needed by) him ;" " to Peter money is not wanting." (a.) Hacer falta, " to make need," is used in the sanie manner as gus- tar and faltar (see 344, 345), in the sense of " to have need of," " to stand in need of;" as, Me hace mucha falta el consq'o de | I stand in much need of your ud- vmd. I vice. OP THE ADVERB. 169 More literally rendered, this example would be, " the advice of your-ivorship makes much need to {is much needed by) me." 346. PesaVy when it is to be rendered in English by " to repent of" " to be sorry for" is subject to the same pecuharity of construction as gustar and/altar (see 344, 345), except that it is used before an infini- tive with the preposition de, which infinitive would in English be used as a participle ; as, A Dies le pesa de haber hecho rey I God repents of having made Saul i, Saul. I king. E^" " It-repents God for having made Saul a king," would be a more literal rendering of this last example. OF THE ADVEKB. 347. Adverbs are either derivative (or primitive), or ad- verbial phrases. (See 225 ; 225, a.) 348. The simple adverb, when it qualifies a. verb, gener- ally comes after the verb ; as, La religion exprcsa aitblimemenU I Religion expresses this truth sub esta verdad. I limely. (a.) There can be no regular rules given for the position of the adverb ; in most instances it may vary according to the taste of the writer Some adverbs generally precede the verb; such are, cuandOy when; luego, immediately ; apenaSy scarcely ; cuanto, as much ; donde, where ; and negative and interrogative adverbs. 349. The adverb, when it qualifies an adjective or another adverb generally comes before the word it qualifies ; as, Ella es muy ignorante. I She is very ignorant. He obrado muy neciamente. I I-have acted very foolishly. 350. Adverbs, like adjectives, admit of comparison ; as, They-praise more the dead than the living. They-receive more gladly than they-give. (a.) The adverb Ho is sometimes used in comparisons in a manner that does not imply a negation, in which case it would be re secretly. A escondidillas, J stealthily. a sudden. De aqul para alii, to and fro; here Albuenpunto, pointedly ; oppor- and there. tunely. De dntes, of old ; of yore. OP THE ADVERB. 175 Iadverbial locu- MEANING IN ADVERBIAL LOCU- MEANING IN 1 TIONS. 1 ENGLISH. TIONS. ENGLISH. 1 _De continue, conHnitallt/. La semana pasada, last week. | De intento, purposely/. La aemana que • De proposito, on purpose. viene, next week. jDe hecho, in fact; actually. Mucho tiempo ha,/on£^ time ago. \ JDe noche, by night. Manana a la i IDe dia, by day. noche, to-morrow night. j D e salto, suddenly. No bien, no sooner; scarcely, \ De por si, by one's self; apart. No mucho ha, 5 not long since ; a De silla d silla, face to face. short time ago. I De tropel, in corifusion ; pell- Por atras, \ behind. \ mell. Poco ha. of late; lately. De lance, cheaply ; second- Poco i. poco, by degrees. hand. Por el tanto, < on that ground; De repente, suddenly. for the reason. De rodillas, on one's knees. Por entonces, < it that time. j De consiguiente, consequently. Por supuesto, of course. | De veras ; de verdad, tridy. Por puntos, from one moment\ En conciencia, in good earnest. to another. ' En especial, especially. Por salto, on a sudden. \\ En seguida, afterward. Por lo largo. along. i En tanto, > in the mean time ; Entre tanto, ) whilst. Por razon, consequently. Por fin, finally. En alguna parte, somewhere. Por instantes, incessantly. !En ninguna parte,noic/ierc. Por poco, but little ; nearly. lEn otra parte, elsewhere. Poraca6poralM,/j,ere or there. 'En alguna otra parte,somczc/iere else. Por encima. superficially. il En ninguna otra Pocas veces. ieldom. ! parte, nowhere else. Rara vez, not often ; seldom. \ En cualquiera parte, any where. Rato ha, 9hort time ago. \\ En adelante, forward ; in the Sin suelo, without bounds ;\ future. to excess. , En lo sucesivo, afterward ; here- Sobre seguro, confidently : se-j after. curely. Ij El afio que viene,nea:^ year. Sin ton y sin son,tri//Km/ rhyme or\\ En derechura,5y the most direct way. reason. j En piernas, bare-legged. Sobre manera, excessively. || En resumen, in short; briefly. Sobre si, separately; «cZ-j| Hasta no mas, to the highest pitch. fishly. Hasta que, as far as. Tal vez, perhaps ; once at | ^^y^\ I now-a-days. Hoy en dia, ) a time. 1 Una vez, < jnce. • iHoy por hoy, i ^his very day. \ Ya ha rato, some time ago. \. 174 OF THE CONJUNCTION. ^^ Very few adverbial phrases can be literally translated ironi one language to another so as to give a correct idea of their meaning : thusu of those in the above list, d mas correr literally means, *' to more to run ;" algun tiempo hace^ '* some time it makes ;" d mas no poder^ " to more not to be able ;" de cuando en cuando, "of when in when;" en lo mcesivOf " in that which is successive." Occasionally such a phrase may be found of which a literal translation will furnish a suflBcient expla- nation of its meaning; as, en ulguna otra partem "in some other part;" en ningtma parte^ " in no part ;" la semana pasada, " the week past ;" la semana que viene^ " the week which comes;" pocas veces, "few times." 357. Adverbs are variously classified according to their signification, as follows : I. Adverbs of time ; present, past, future, and indefinite, (a.) Adverbs of time present ; as, ahora, now ; hoy, to-day. (6.) Adverbs of time past ; as, ayer, yesterday ; entonces, then, (c.) Adverbs of time future ; as, manana, to-morrow. {d.) Adverbs of time indefinite ; as, cuando, when ; siempre, always ; lemprano, early. II. Adverbs of place ; in a place, to a place, toward a place, and from ji place. (a.) In a place; as, donde, where; aqui, here; alld, yonder; dent? a, witliin. (6.) To a place; as, ladonde? whither? acd, hither, (c.) Toward a place ; as, i hacia donde ? whitherward 7 (d.) From a place ; as, de alii, thence ; de donde, whence. III. Adverbs of order ; as, primero, first; fnalmente, finally. IV. Adverbs of quality ; as, confvsamente, confusedly ; bien, well. V. Adverbs of quantity; as, poco, little; bastdntemente, sufficiently. VI. Adverbs of affirmation and certainty; as, si, yes; ciertamente, certainly. VII. Adverbs of negation and uncertainty ; as, no, no ; dudosamente, doubtfully ; acaso, quizd, perhaps. OF THE CONJUNCTION. 358. Conjunctions are simple, that is, such as consist of a single word, or conjimctive phrases, such as consist of more than one word. They may be divided according to their meaning into the following classes : I. Copulative, which simply unite words or sentences together; as, y, and (see 226, a) ; iambien, also. OP THE CONJUNCTION. 175 II. Disjunctive, which connect words or sentences at the same time that they disjoin the sense ; as, 6, or (see 226, b). III. Adversative, which express opposition of meaning while they con- nect ; as, mas, but ; pero, but ; sin embargo, notwithstanding. IV. Comparative, which serve to compare words or propositions ; as, coma, as ; ast, so ; como si, as if. V. Conditional, which express a condition j as, si, if; con tal que, provided that. VI. Concessive, which serve to express something g^ran^ed; as, aunque^ even if; dado que, granted that. VII. Conclusive, which express a. conclusion or inference; as, de'aqui, hence ; por esto, therefore. VIII. Casual, which express a cause or reason / as, porque, because ; pucs que, since. IX. Temporal, which serve to express a relation of time ; -as, dntea que, before ; despues que, after. X. Final, which express an end or purpose; as, para que, that, in order that ; dfn de que, to the end that. MANNER OF USING CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 359. Sino, meaning "but," is used after a negative, unless the verb be repeated ; and pero or mas, also meaning " but," is used when no nega- tive precedes ; as. El reino de Dios no esta en pala- bras, sino en virtud. Ella es hermosa, pero (or mas) no es prudente. The kingdom of God is not in words, but in power. She is beautiful, but she is not pru dent. (a.) If after a negative the verb be repeated, pero or mas is to be used instead of sino ; as, Ella nolo dijo i. Juan, pero (or mas) I She did not tell it to John, bui she lo dijo a Pedro. I told it to Peter. 360. Sino, meaning " except," is used after an interrogation or after a negative ; and menos, also meaning " except," is used when no interro- gation or negative precedes ; both words being rendered in English by "6w//" as. Who did it but the carpenter 7 There-is no one good, but God alone. I Q,uien lo hizo sino el carpintero 1 Ninguno hay bueno, sino solo Dios. Vinieron todos menos el juez. They all came but the judge. 361. The conjunction "but" is used in English with such a variety of meanings that it is necessary, before rendering it into Spanish, to find what other word or words it really represents, as this latter word or phrase is generally tha which is used to represent it in Spanish ; thus, 176 OF THE CONJUNCTION. (a.) I am-distant from death but [only] one step. {b.) We have but [no more than"] five loaves and two fishes, (c.) He-arrived but [not till] yester- day. (/^.) I can not but [do less than] go. ^e.) He has but [done no more than] gone (i. e. he has but just gone). (./.) But [if it were not] for me, he- woiild-perish. {g.) There-is no-one of them but [who is not] is a general. {h.) He- went no day to-the village but [that not] he-returned drunk. Un solo paso disto yo de la muerte. No tenemos mas de (270, a) cinco panes y dos peces. No UegO hasta ayer. Yo no puedo minos de ir. El no ha hecho mas que irse. Si nofuese por ml, ^1 perecerla. No hay ninguno de ellos que no sea general. Ningun dia fue al lugar que no vol- vi6 borracho. ' It will at once be perceived that the irregularity in the use of the word " but " is chargeable to the English, not the Spanish language. In the latter, "but" is not used with ten different meanings as in English. 362. The conjunction "unless" is to be rendered in Spanish hy d menos de que, or by the word or words which it really represents ; as, Nada har^ d menos de que vmd. le hable Ninguno puede hacer estos mila gros, si Dios no estuviqre con ^1. (a.) He- will-do nothing unless you speak (may-speak) to him. {b.) No-one can do these miracles unless [if not] Gred be (should-be) with him. 363. The conjunction "except," when it means the same as "unless," is rendered in Spanish in the same manner (362) ; and when it means privation, as, for instance, in the sentence, "I bought all his books except the histories," it is rendered hy menos, "less," "minus." (See 360.) 364. The conjunction " whether " is to be rendered in Spanish by si or que, and sometimes by the subjunctive of the verb ser : as, (a.) I doubt whether [that] thou- hast any oil. {b.) I asked him whether [if] his Dudo que tengas aceite. Le pregunte si su. madre vendria mother would come, (c.) Whether he-may have grapes or not, is nothing to me. id.) Whether it rains, or whether it rains not. (c.) Whether or not we-may-be {let us be or not) worthy of such an honor. 365. The conjunction "as" is rendered by "eomoy" when used by way Que tenga uvas 6 no, nada me im- porta. Que llueva u que no llueva. Seamos 6 no dignos de tal honra. OP THE CONJUNCTION. 177 of comparison ; by asi como^ when followed by " w ;" by cuando^ when it means " when;" and after mismo by que ; as, (a.) John is as* strong as a lion. (6.) As modesty attracts, so disso- luteness repels. (c.) He-saw her cw [wheri] he-was- going home. (rf.) It-is not the same to-promise as to-fulfil. Juan es tan fuerte como un leon. Asi como la modestia atrae, asi huye la disolucion. La viu cuando iba i casa. No es lo mismo prometer que cum- plir. 366. The conjunction " neither^" followed by " iior," is rendered in Spanish by ni; and " nor" also by the same word ; as, Swear not, neither by heaven, nor I No jureis, ni por el cielo, ni por la by the earth, nor any other oath. I tierra, ni otro juramento alguno. (a.) At the end of a sentence, ^^ neither" and also ^'either" if preceded by a negative, are rendered by tampoco; as. She will not do it, nor he either (or I Ella no quiero hacerlo, ni ^1 tam- neither). 1 poco. 367. The conjunction " either" followed by ^'or^" is rendered in both cases by 6 (see 226, b) ; as, Either he-is a knave or he-is a fool. | O' es picaro 6 es tonto. 368. The conjunction " both" followed by '* and" is rendered by asi or tonfo, and the " and" by como; as. (a.) Both John and James will-be here. (6.) Both in time of peace and in time of war. Asi Juan como Diego estaran aqul. Tanto en tiempo de paz, coTno en tiempo de guerra. ' These examples might be rendered by " as well as;" thus, "John as well as James will be here ;" "in time of peace as well as in time of war." 369. The conjunction ^Hest" when it means ^^ for fear that" is ren- dered by 710 ser que; when it means *' in order that not" by para que no; and when it means simply "that not" by que no; as, (a.) Thou wilt-accompany him to Jiis house directly, lest any acci- dent may-happen to-him. yb.) Love not sleep, lest want may- oppress thee. (c.) We were-careful lest you should awake. Til le acompaiiar^s a su casa aJ instante, no sea que le suceda algun fracaso. No ames el sueiio, para que no te oprima la indig^ncia. Cuiddbamos de que nt se desper- tase vmd. * The first "as" is here an adverb, qualifying the adjective ' atrong.** 178 OP THE PREPOSITION. 370. The conjunction " rather" when used in the sense of " 6u^," is rendered by drdes or drites bien / as, I do not owe him «inything ; rather I Yo no le debe nada, dntes bien 41 he owes me something. I me debe algo. ^^^ The manner of using other conjunctions will be found in other ' ins of the work. OF THE PREPOSITION. 371. The prepositions are employed in such a variety of ways in Spanish and in English, especially in the latter language, that each one is not always to be rendered from one language to the other by the same word. Thus de is not always to be translated into English by of; nor of into Spanish always by de. The following observations will gerve to show the manner in which the prepositions are to be used. 372. About, when it means " through," is rendered by por ; when it means "on," by sobre; when it means "within," by en; when it means " of," by de ; as, Ella iba cantando par el lugar. Locke escribio sobre el Cristian- ismo. EUos estdn en el pal^cio. No habla de politica en piiblico. (a.) She went singing about the village. (6.) Locke wrote about Christian- ity. • (c.) They are about the palace. {d.) He does not talk about poli- tics in public. 373. Above is rendered by soh':; as. The bird flies above the earth. | El ave vuela sobre la tierra. 374. Against, meaning "in opposition to," or ^^ contrary to," is render- ed by contra; as, (a.) They fought against the Mexi- Ellos pelearon coTdra los Mejicanos. cans. (b.) Against the law. Contra la ley. 375. After, meaning " later in time," is rendered by despues de ; when it means " according to," by d, or segun ; and when it means " immedi- ately behind," \>y tras ; ^s, (a.) After six o'clock. | Despues de las seis. OF THE PREPOSITION. 179 {b.) After the French fashion. A^ la moda francesa. (c.) After this manner. Segun este modo. {d.) He throws the rope after the Echa la soga tras el caldero. bucket. 376. According to is ytiidered hy^segun^ and sometimes by -para ton; as, (a.) According to the ordera of your- worship. (6.) According to him it-is- worth nothing. 377. Among, when it means " of the number of" is rendered by entre or T^ara entre; when it moans "m the midst of" by c?i medio de; and when it means "i/i," by en ; as, Segun los ordenes de vmd. Para con ^1 no vale nada. (a.) Among the men tneje-is not one that is upright. [b.) Among friends compliments are unnecessary. (c.) I send 70 u as iambs among wolves. {d.) Among many inations there- was not a king like him. Entre los hombres no hay uno, que sea recto. Para entre amigos los cumplimien- tos son escusados. Yo OS envio como corderos en medio de lobos. En muchas naciones no habla rey seraejante i. ^l. ?J8. Aty when it denotes "in" or ^^on" is rendered by en; when it denotes proximity, precedes the price of any thing or the time of day, or means "in readiness for " it is rendered by d; as, (a.) They are at home. They are at peace. (6.) John is at Rome, (c.) They are at sea. {d.) At the bridge. At hand, (c.) At six dollars a bushel. At four o'clock. if.) He-is at my command. At work. EUos estin en casa. Ellos estan en paz. Juan esta en Roma. Ellos est^n en la mar. At puente. A la mano A seis pesos la fanega. A las cuatro. Esti unced la-amiga-a venido; Santa-Anna^ pronounced SanV-Anna. OF VOWELS FORMING OR NOT FORMING DIPHTHONGS OR TRIPHTHONGS. 412. When two or three vowels come together in the Bame word, sometimes thej form a diphthong (that is, a single syllable), and at other times two syllables. 413. The diphthongs and triphthongs in Spanish are di (or dy)^ du, ea, ei (or e^/), eo, eu, ia, ie, io, iu, oe, 6i (or 6y), (?w.,t ^^j ^^, ui (or ui/)y uo ; idi, iei, udi (or udy)^ uei (or uey). Some of these are always, and others not always diphthongs, as will be seen from the following rules : (a.) ule, ao, and oa are never diphthongs, but always form two sylla- bles ; as, aecho^ nao, canoa, pronounced a-e-cho, nd-o, ca-no-a. {p.) Au, ay, ew, cy, iu, ou, oy, uy,X are always to be considered as diph- thongs ; so also uay and uey as triphthongs. Thus, pdu-sa, cam-brdy, deu-da, vi-rey, mu-da, triun-fo, es-toy, Pa-ra-gudy.% (c.) Aif eiy oiy and ia, ie, io are diphthongs in all cases except when the i is accented; thus, es-tdis, rei-na, sois, no-tt-da, tie-ne, ne-ce-sd-rio^ When the i is accented (whether marked or not) these vowels do not form a diphthong ; thus, tra-z-do, o-t-do, por-fi-a, na-vi-o, fri-o. If io terminate a verb, and either letter have the marked accent over it, a diphthong is not formed ; thus, co-mi-6, te-mi-6. {d.) Ea, eoj oe, when they are the final letters of a word, and the accent (whether marked or not) is upon the preceding syllable, form a diphthong; but in all other cases, two syllables; thus, Bo-reas, vir-gi- neo, he-roe i and se-a, a-fe-dr, i-de-a, tro-Je-o, po-e-ta. (e.) Ua, ue, ui, ilo, uie are diphthongs when the accent is not on the u; as, Ic-gua, hue-vo, rut-do, rwC-tuo, guien. But when the accent is on the u, they do not form a diphthong ; as, e-fec-t^i-an, gan-zH-a, e-fec-iH-e, trii-e-no, e-fec-tu-o. (/.) la are not a diphthong when they occur in the terminations of the imperfect tenses of the indicative and subjunctive, because the i is always * H being a silent letter, of course its intervention between two vowels does not prevent their union of sound, as required by the above rule. t The diphthong ou is seldom found in Spanish writings ; never, in fact, except in foreign proper names. X This list can be readily remembered, as it comprehends all the diph- thongs ending with u or y. § All words ending with y, preceded by a vowel, it must be kept in mind, are accented on the last syllable. OP PROSODY. 187 to be accented in these tenses, whether marked or not ; as, ha-bt-a, ha- bt-a-mos^ a-ma-ri-a, a-ma-ri-ais. {g.) The above rules are general ; yet in Spanish poetry, as in Eng- lish, vowels which ought to form a diphthong are sometimes found forming two syllables ; as, rii-t-do, sii-d-ve, instead of rut-do, sua-ve. So likewise two vowels which ought to form two syllables, are often found united into one ; as, poe-ta, instead of po-e-ta. g^^ Thus also in English poetry, two vowels which properly form two syllables are often united into one ; as in the words potrer, period, injluence. OF VERSE AND RHYME. 414. A verse is a line containing a certain number of poetic feet^ or syllables arranged according to certain rules of prosody. There are many kinds of verse distinguished by the number of syllables they contain ; this constitutes the metre or measure. This measured division of sylla- bles, with the musical cadence of the voice in repeating them, is called rhythm. 415. Rhyme consists in the similarity of sounds at the end of two or more verses. This similarity of sound may exist between one, two, or three syllables of different words ; sls, pinior and jprimor ; vido and vesiido ; utiliddd and habiliddd. Yerses without rhyme are called versos sueltos. or blank verses. (a.) Rhyme in Spanish poetry is of two kinds ; that of consonance {consondncia), and that of assonance (asondncia). By consondncia is meant the sameness or similarity of sound between certain vowels and consonants : as, canto and ianto. By asondncia is meant the rhyming of the vowels alone ; thus, senorx, espanola, otra, toda, coma, all rhyme by asondncia^ since the accented vowel and final vowel are alike. 416. A verse terminated with a word that is accented on the last syllable is called verso agudo (see 409) ; with a word accented on the penultimate, is called verso llano ; and with a word accented on the antepenultimate, is called verso esdrujulo. 188 OP PROSODY. (a.) In the versos llanos, the number of syllables is precisely equal to that determined by the metre ; in versos agudos, the number of syllables is one less than that indicated by the metre ; and in versos esdricjulos, the number of syllables is one more than that belonging to the metre ; tlms, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Verso llano. Ha- | cien- | do | del | lo- j ro | mC- | fa. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Verso agudo. La \ car- | ca- j ja- j da | sol- | to. 1 2 3456789 Verso esdrHjulo. De j to- | dos | los | es- | pe- I ci- | fi- j cos. ^^ In these examples the metre belongs to that consisting of eight syllables, and every verse is accented on the seventh syllable ; but, as will be perceived, only the verse llano contains the number denoted by the measure. Versos llanos are in most common use in Spanish, 417. When in a verse a word ends with a vowel and the following word begins with a vowel or an A, the final vowel forms a diphthong with the other, and both are reckoned only as one syllable ; and three vowels coming together in the same manner, are reckoned as one syllable, the sounds of each being made to glide into one sound ; as due un j tor- j do en | a- | ques- j te en- \ gi.- \ no. E' hi- j cie- | se a- j HI j su | ra- \ pi- j na. Di- I jo ^ u- I na ( mo- | na | tai- | m^- | da. Sa- I lio- I se j del | cor- j ro, y* | dl- | jo. (a.) This union of all the vowels sometimes does not take place ; thus when the second word begins with an h, or when there is a natura pause, or when the conjunction y comes between two vowels. Gran- | de 3s, j si es | bue- | na, \u- | na 6- | bra. Die- I tan- | la el j cie- | go | y el | m^n- j co EXAMPLES FOR SCANNING. Y si caigo, 4. I Q,u6 es la vida 7 4. For perdida 4. Yaladi, 3. Cuando el yugo 4. Del esclavo, 4. Como un bravo 4. Sacudi. 3. g^* The figures at the close of each verse indicate the number of * y, when a consonant, that is, when it begins a word, can not tima form a diphthong with another vowel. OF PROSODY. IW •yllables whith that verse contains, when scanned according lo the di- rection* fn ihe |>receding rules. Pescadorcita mia, 7. Desciende i. la ribera, 7. Y escucha placentera, 7. Mi c^ntico de amor ; 6. Sentado en su barquilla, 7. Te canta su cuidado, 7. Cual nunca enamorado 7. Tu tiemo pescador. 6. J. DE ESPBONCEDA. Todos suave reposo 8. En tu calma i oh noche ! buscan, 8. Y aun las ligrimas tus suenos 8. Al desventurado enjugan. 8. J. DE EsraONCEDA. Si querer entender de todo 9. Es ridicula presuncion, 8. Servir solo para una cosa 9. Suele ser falta no menor. 8. T. DB Iriabts, De sus hijos la torpe avutarda 10. El pesado volar conocia, 10. Deseando sacar una crla 10. Mas lijera, aunque fuese bastarda. 10. T. DE Ibiabtk. Hubo un rico en Madrid (y aun dicen que era 11 Mas n^cio que rico), 6. Cuya casa magnifica adomaban 11. Muebles esquisitos. 6. i Ldstima que en vivienda tan preciosa, 11, Le dijo un amigo. 6. Falte una libreria! bello adomo, 11. U'til y preciso. 6. T. DE Ibiabtb. Cuando veo yo algunos que de otros escritores 14. A la sombra se arriman, y piensan ser autores 14. Con poner cuatro notas 6 hacer un proloquillo, 14. Estoy per aplicarles lo que dijo el tomillo. 14. T. DE Ibiabtb *90 OF PRUSODY. Remark. — These vowel-sounds at the end of one word and beginning of the succeeding word, glide into one diphthongal sound, just as in the fol- lowing distich in English the vowels e and u of the words " the-un- broken" run into one sound, the syllables "^/ic" and "un" forming in the metre but a single syllable : " With naked feelings and with aching pride, He hears the unbroken blast on every side." S. T. Coleridge. 418. The rhyme must always begin at that vowel upon which the accent is placed (whether marked or not) ; thus in versos agudos, the rhyme is to begin at the vowel of the ultimate syllable ; in versos llanos, at the vowel of the penultimate ; and in versos esdriijulos, at the vown'* of thr antepenultimate ; as, Agudo. i Cuan presto se va el placer, Llano. Como despues de acordado, Agudo. Da dolor ! Agudo. i Como ^. nuestro paracer Llano. Cualquiera tiempo pasado, Agudo. Fu6 mejor ! Jorge Manriqite. IEllo es que hay animales muy cientificos En curarse con varios especificos, Y en conservar su construccion org^nica Como hibiles que son en la bot^nica. T. DE Ibiabte. APPENDIX TO PART III. NUMBER IL A SUMMAKY OF THE RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 419. In Spanish, as in English, all nouns which from their signification refer to male beings are masculine ; as un homhre^ a man ; un sombrerero, a hatter ; un juez^ b. judge ; un leon^ a lion : and all nouns which from their significa- tion refer to female beings are feminine ; as, una muger^ a woman ; una lavandera^ a laundress ; una actriz^ an actress ; una leona^ a lioness. Such nouns are said to be masculine or feminine from their signification. 420. As all nouns in Spanish (including those which in English are said to be of the neuter gender) are considered as either masculine or feminine, it is important to know how to distinguish the gender of such nouns as are properly neither masculine nor feminine from their signifi- cation. The following simple rules will show that the gender of such nouns depends with but few exceptions on their terminations : 421. Nouns that terminate in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, is, or ez (unless they may be masculine from their signification ; see 419), 2iiQ feminine ; as, una casa^ a house; la. pared, the wall : la especia, the species ; una costumbre, a custom ; una ocupacion, an occupation ; una tesis, a thesis ; la tez, the complexion. (a.) Nouns that terminate in ii (that is, such as are accented on the last syllable) form an exception to the above rule, being always mascu- line. The only nouns which come under this class are pie and all its compounds; as, elpie, the foot ; el aguapie. the small-wine j unpunta- piSf a kick. So huscapie^ hincapie, paspie, ncUipie^ sobrepie, traspie, etc. 422. Nouns that do not terminate in a, d, ie, umbre, ion^ 15, or ez (unless feminine from their signification; see 419). 192 RULES OP GENDER OE SPANISH NOUNS. are masculine ; as, un camino, a road ; un buque^ a ship ; el oleli^ the gillifiower ; el jabon^ the ^ro-;? ; el caliz^ the chalice , un clariuj a clarion ; un ^i^^iZ, a ^?t ; un ^^5, a ^^5 ; un huracan^ a hurricane ; un convoy^ a convoy. EXCEPTIONS TO THE GENERAL RULES OF GENDER. 423. The nouns in the following list B.Te feminine^ though they do not terminate in a, d, ie^ umbre, ion^ is, or ez : Aguachirle, sviaU-wine. Cargazon, cargo. Aguamiel, hydromel. Cariatide, cariatydes. Anagalide, pimpernel. Caries, cariosity. Anemone, anemone. Came, Jlesh. Anime, a kind of resin. Carraspique, candy-tuft. Apocope, apocope. Castrazon, the gelding-season Apofise, apophysis. Catanance, > Catananque, S the plant lion^s Apomeli, apomel. foot. Apostrofe, apostrophe. Castastrofe, catastrophe. Armazon, carcase. Catedral, cathedral-church. Ave, a bird. Cerachates (plu ),wax-stones. Base, base. Cerrazon, cloudy weather. Beladin, i Beram, J Cerviz, nape. a sort of muslin. Champan, a kind of sloop. Bezar, ^ Bezoar, \ Chile, a sort of pepper. bezoar. Chinche, a bug. Binazon, second ploughing. Chochaperdiz, a wood-cock. Bocacalle, end or opening of Cicatriz, a scar. a street. CiclOide, cycloid. Cachunde, a kind of paste. Clase, class; rank. Cal, lime. Clavazon, a set of nails. Caladre, a species of lark. Clave, a key-stone f key. Calicut, a sort of sUk goods. Clem^tide, clematis. CaUe, street. Clin, mane. Camedafne, spurge-olive. Codomiz, a quail. Caniqui, a sort of muslin. Cohechazon, last ploughing. Capital,* capital-city. Col, cabbage. Car, end of the mizen- Coliflor, cauliflower. yard. Colzal, colewort-seed. Caramel, a kind ofpUckard. ConcSide, conchoid. Cdrcel, prison. Conuide, conoid. i Cardamouri, a kind of drug-dye Consonante, a consonant. * Capital^ ivhen it means " a sum of TJWTTiey," is masculine RULES OF GENDER OP SPANISH NOUNS. 193 Central uz, counterUghf. Faringe, pharynx. Conventual, convent-church. Fasces (plural) fasces. Corambre, hides of animals. Fase, phase. Corriente, current. Fauces (plural), fauces. \\ Corte, court. Faz, face. {Cose, a kind of measure. F^, faith. Cotangente, cotangent. Fiebre, fever. 1 Coz, a kick. Fleme, fleam. 1 Creciente, a rise of waters. Flor, flower. Credencialj credential. Erase, phrase. Criazon, breed of animals. Frente, forehead. Crin, mane. Fretes (plural), frets. Cruz, cross. Fronte, front. Cuspide, cuspis. Fuente, fountain. Dendrite, dendrites. F'ustan, fustian. Desazon, disquietness. Galactite fuller's earth. Diucesi, diocese. Geitte, people. Diplas, a species of serpent Goguerin, afrill. Doral, fy-catcher. Granazon, seeding. Egllope, a sort of wild oats. Grey, flock. Eglantine, smooth speedwell. Hambre, hunger. Elipse, ell'psis. Haz, surface. Enjambrazon, swarming of bees. Helice, helix. Entrecanal, space between the Hemionite, liarV s-tongue. Jiutings of a Kiel, gall. column. Higiene, hygiene. EpiciclGide, epicycloid. Hinchazon swelling. Epigrafe, epigraph. Hiperbole, hyperbole. Epipactide, epipcLctis. Hojaldre, a sort of pan-cake. Eringe, fe.ld-eringo. Hoz, sickle. Escorpiode caterpillar. Hueste, host. Esferoide, spheroid. Imogen, image. Espicanarde, spikenard. Indole, temper. • Estirpe, • a race. Ingle, groin. Estriga, screech-owl. Isagoge, introduction Etiopide, clary. 1 Labor, labor. Etites, eagle-stone. |Lande, acorn. Extravagante, a kind of papal Landre, swelling of the constitution. glands. Falange, phalanx. Lapade, acorn shell-fish. Falaride, canary-grass. Lapislazuli, lapis lazuli. Falce, sickle. Laringe, larynx. Paldetes (plu.), tassels. Laude, a tombstone with j Fame, i- ^ hunger. an epitaph. 17 i94 RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. Lee he, mUk. Peplide, peplis. Lente, lens. Perdiz, partridge. 1 Ley, law. Perifrase, periphrasis. Liebre, hare. Piel, skin. Liendre, nit. Pir^mide, pyramid. Ligazon, contexture. Pixide, pyx. Lite, law-suit. Plebe, common people. Loche, loach. Podre, pus. Lornbriz, a sort of worm. Portapaz, portapax. Loor, praise. Prole, offspring. Luz, light. Prostaferide, prostqferis. Llave, key. Puches (plural) a sort of fritters. Madriz, place of a qiiaiVs Raigambre, collection of roots. i nest. Raiz, root. Mano, hand. Rascazon, an incitement to Matriz, matrix. scratch. Melindre, sort of fritters. Razon, reason. Menguante, ebb-tide. Res, head of cattle. Meninge, meninges. Sal, saU. Merey, cashew-tree. Salazon, seasoning. MetrCpoli, metropolis. Sangre, blood. Miel, honey. Sardoniz, sardonyx. Mies, harvest ; crop. Sarten, frying-pan. Mole, massiveness. Sazon, seasoning. Moral, ethics. Sebe, enclosure of high Muerte, death. pales. Nariz, nose. Sede, a see. Nave, nave; ship. Segazon, harvest-season. Nicle, a species of agate. Segur, axa. Nieve, snow. Selenites, selenites. Noche, night. Seleiicide, a species of bird. Nube, cloud. Seniles, seHnites. Oenate, fallow-finch. Serpiente, serpent. Palmachristi, palmachrist. Sien, temple of the head. Palude, lake. Sierpe, young serpent. Panace, all-heal. Simiente, seed. Pardfrase, paraphrase. Slncope, a syncope. Paragoge, paragoge. Sinrazon, injustice. Panlije, parallax. Sirte, quicksand. Pareselene, mock-moon. Sistole, systole. Parroquial, parochial-church. Sobrefaz, superficies. Parte, part. Sobrehaz, surface. jPatente, patent. SobrellPive, double key. ;|Paz, peace. Sobrepelliz, surplice. RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 195 Sobretarde, close of evening. Suerte, chance ; fate. Tarde, afternoon. Teamide, a stone repelling iron. Tilde, the character ("") over n. Tingle, an instrumentfor glaziers. Torre, tower. Tos, cough. Trabazon. juncture. Trabe, beam. Tragaluz, Tragazon, Trireme, sky-light, gluttony. tHreme. Troj, ^ Troje, J' Ubre, a granary, udder. Urdiembre, Varice, warp, varix. Vocal, vowel. Voragine, Voz, vortex, voice. 424. The following nouns are masculine^ although they have the terminations which belong in all other cases to feminine nouns : Agrion, a species of tumor Argiritas (plu. ), marcasites of sil- Agropila, German bezoar. ver mines. Ajedrez, chess. Aroma, odorant principle Ajimez, an arched window of plants. Alarguez, dog-rose. Artritis, arthrniis. Alcion, a king-fisher. Aspid, a species of ser- 1 Alcribis, a tube for bellows. pent. ' Alefris, a mortise. Asturion, pony. Alerta, a watchword. Ataud, coffin. Aljez, gypsum. Avion, martin. Almez, lote-tree. Axioma, axiom. Almirez, a mortar Bastion, bastion. Almud, a dry measure. Berberis, barberry. Alguez, a wine measure. Biribis, ^ Bribis, I Alumbre, alum. a sort of game. Amaiiris, a kind of linen, " Brandis, a kind of great- Anagrama. anagram. coai. Anilasis, analysis. Budion, peacock-fi^h. Anfion, opium. Busilis, the point of diffi- Anis, anise. culty. Antlpodas (plu .),antipodes. Calamis, j Calanis, Antuvion, a sudden stroke. sweet-flag. Apocallpsis, apocalypse. Cam^dris, wild germander. Aporisma, echymosis. Carpion, a kind offish. Apotegma, apothegm. Cazumbre, a sort of cord. ArchMaud, a kind of lute. Cencris, a kind of serpent. Ardid, stratagem. Cercion, a species of mock" Argema, anulcerofthe eye ing bird 196 RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. Gasped, sod. Lacris, fruit of rosemary. Chirrion, a sort of cart. Laud, a lute. Cicion, intermittent fever. Lema, lemma. Clarion, crayon. Lid, conflict. Clima, climate'. Man^, manna. Col-pez, isinglass. Mapa, map. Cometa, comet. Morrion, murrion. Corion, chorion. Ndo, ship. Crisma, chrism. Pais, country. Cuatemion, union of four Paradigma, paradigm. things. Par^ntesis, parenthesis. Dia, day. Pariilis, gum-bile. Diafragma, diaphragm. Pez, fish. Diagrama, diagram. Planeta, planet. Dilema, dilemma. Poema, poem. Diploma, diploma. Postema, aposteme. Dogma, dogma. Prisma, prism. Drama, drama. Problem a. problem. E'nfasis, emphasis. Progimnasma, essay. Enigma, enigma. Prois, ship-rope. Entimema, enthymeme. Relumbre, coppery taste. Epigrama, . epigram. Rondis, ) face of a precious Escorpion, scorpion. Rondiz, S stone. Esperma, sperm. Sarampion, measles. E'stasis, ecstacy. Sintoma, symptom. Estilion, a species of lizard. Sirascusis, syssarcosis. Prontis, frontispiece. Sistema, system. Gabion, ^ Gavion, \ Softt, sofa. gabion. Sofion, a hoot. Genesis, genesis. Sofisma, sophism. Gis, crayon. Solivion, a sudden lifting Gldcis, glacis. up. Gorbion, a kind of edging. Sud, south wind. Gris, gray. Tapaboca, slap on the mouth. Guion, standard. Tema, theme. Gurbion, gum-spurge. Teorema, theorem. Historion, a tedious story. Torticolis, torticollis. Idioma, idiom; language. Tris, noise of breaking Jamis, a kind of cotton glass. goods. Turbion, . hurricane Jibion, cuttle-fish hone. Viva, a huzza. 425. The nouns in the following list are of both gen- ders, and of course may be used with the masculine and RULES OP GENDER OF SPANISH NOtTNS. 197 the feminine article; thus, el puente or la puente, the bridge. AlbaM, a certificate. Mar, sea. *~ Anatema, anathema. Margen, margin. Arte, art. Nema, seal. Canal, canal. O'rden, order. Cisma. schism. Puente, bridge. Cutis, skin. Reuma, rheum. Dote, dowry. Tribii, tHbe. Emblema, emblem. 426. Some nouns are applied to male or female beings, and the article in such cases will serve to distinguish the gender ; thus, el cliente, the male client; la cliente, the female client. 427. Some nouns, the names of both male and female beings are always used as if belonging only to one gender; thus, un caracol, a snail ; una serpiente, a serpent ; un salmon, a salmon ; una trucha, a trout. 428. The proper names of cities, towns, villages, and islands, etc., generally take the gender of the common nouns ciudad (city), villa (town), lugar, (village), isla (island), mes (month), to which they refer. Thus Parts is feminine, because villa is understood ; and Fuencarrdl is masculine, because lugar is understood. But it must also be mentioned that many proper names of countries, cities, etc., follow the rule cf their termination. Thus Cairo is masculine, and Habana, feminine. (a.) The names of the letters of the alphabet are feminin.; the months of the year and days of the week are masculine. 17* APPENDIX TO PART III. NUMBER III. IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 429. The idiomatic use of some adjectives and verbs accompanied by prepositions will be exhibited in the fol- lowing list, selected chiefly from a table in the Grammar of the Spanish Academy : Abocarse con alguno, to confer with any one. Aborrecido de todos. hated by all. Abrasarse en deseos, to be injlamed with desires. Abundar deo en riquez is, to abound with or in Tic\cs, Abusar de la amistad, to abuse friendship. Acabar de venir. to have just come. Acordarse de lo pasado, to remember the past. Acre de genio. sour in disposition. Acreditarse de n^cio, to show one's self a fool. Acreedor d la confianza, worthy of confidence. Afirmarse en Jo dicho, to affirm what has been said. Ageno de verdad, foreign to truth. Agradecido a los benef Icios, grateful for benefits. Agudo de ingenio, acute in intellect. Ahorrar de razones, to be sparing of arguments. Alabarse de valiente, to brag of one^s own bravery. Alto de cuerpo, tall in stature. Ancho de boca, wide-mouthed. Andar de capa, to go with a cloak on. Andar d cuerpo, to go without a cloak. Andar d gatas, to go on all fours. Andar for tierra, to go humbled to the earth. Angosto de manga, tight-sleeved. Apasionarse 4 d^i ^ por alguno, to be enamored with any one. Apearse de su opinion, to alter one^s opinion. Apercibirse de armas, to prepare one's self with arms. OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 199 Apercibirse &, 6 para la batalla, (0 prepare for battle. Apetecible 61 gusto, desirable to the taste. Apetecido rfe, 6 por todos, desired by all. Apiadarse de los pobres, to pity the poor. Apostar 6, correr, to bet on running. Apresurarse a venir, to hasten to come. Aprobado de. cirujano, approved as a surgeon. Aprovecharse de la ocasion, to improve the occasion. Apurado de medios, destitute of means. Arder en des^os, to burn with desires. Arderse en quimeras, to abound in quarrels. Arriniarse a la pared, to lean against the wall. Atento con sus mayores, attentive to one^s betters. Aventajarse a otros, to gain the advantage over others. Bajo dt cuerpo, low in stature. Ben^fico o, o ipara la salud, good for the health. Blanco de cutis, white-complexioned. Blando de corteza, soft-skinned. Blasfemar de la vlrtud, ^ to blaspheme against virtue. Bordar aZ tambor, to embroider on a tambour frame. Bordar de pasados, to embroider on both sides. Boto de punto, blunt at the point. Bramar de corage, to roar from passion. Brear & chasco, to vex with joking. Bueno de, 6 ipara comer good to eat. Caber de pies. to have room to stand on one^s feet. Calificar de docto, to qualify one as learned. Calzarse a alguno, to manage any one.* Caminar & pi^, to journey on foot. [I'obas. Capaz de cien arrobas, capable of containing a hundred ar- Cargarse de razon, to maintain one^s own opinion Chico c?e cuerpo, small in body. Comerse de invidia, to pine away from envy. Complacerse ' de^ 6 en alguna cosa , to be pleased with any thing. Concebir por bueno, to conceive as good. Conceptuar a alguno de,6 por sabio , to regard any one as wise. Concurrir d alguna parte, to meet at some place. Conferir con^ u entre los amigos, to confer "wiih friends. Confesarse con alguno. to confess to any one. Confesarse de sus culpas, to confess one^s faults. Conformarse con el tiempo to conform to the times. Congratularse de alguna cosa, to rejoice in any thing. * Literally, " to put on the shoes to any one ;" meaning, " to lead any one by the n "^se." 200 OF ADJECTIVES AND VEPwBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. Consentir en algo. to consent to any thing. Constar por escrito, to appear in writing. Contrapuntearse de palabras, to revile one another. Contravenir d la ley, to violate the law. Contribuir con dinero, to contribute money. Correrse de vergiienza, to be ashamed. [benejits. Corresponder d los benef icios, to make return, to be grateful foi Crecido de cuerpo, increased, or, large in stature. Creerse de alguna cosa, to be convinced of anything. Cumplir con alguno, to discharge one^s duty to any one. Cumplir con su obligation, to discharge one's duty. Cumplir de palabra. to perform by word only. Cutirse al aire, to be tanned by the air. Dar a alguno de palos, to strike any one with sticks. Dar en el bianco, to hit the mark. Dar en manias, to be foolish. Dar o reir. to set to laughing. Dar con la entretenida, to put off with words and excuses. Dar con uno. to meet a person sought for. Dar tras uno, to persecute one. Dar por visto, to suppose as seen. Dar sobre la calle, to overlook the street. D arse porven cido. to own one^s self as conquered. Delante de alguno, before any body. Dentro de casa. within the house. Desagradecido d alguno beneflcio , ungrateful for any benefit. Desconfiar de alguno, to distrust any one. Descono*cido a los beneficios, ungrat^ul for benefits. Dividir poi- mitad. to divide into halves. Dotado de ci^ncia. endowed with learning. Dudar de alguna cosa, to be doubtful concerning any thing. Echar ^ alguno a patadas. to force any one out with kicks. Echar de manga, to make a cat's pg,w of one. Empaparse en agua, to be soaked with icater. Emparentar con alguno, to be related to any one. Empenarse en algo. to take a fancy to a thing. [part. Empenarse por alguno. to recommend any one, or take his Enamorarse de alguna. to be enamored with any one. Encaramarse en,por,6«o6r« la pared, to climb up or over the wall. \ Encenderse en ira. to be enkindled with anger. Enfermar del pecho. to be weak in the breast. En tender de alguna cosa. to understand about a thing. Escaso de m^dios, limited in means. Espantarse de algo, to be frightened at any thing. OF ADJECTIVES, AND VERBS Vl^lTH PREPOSITIONS. 201 Estar d la orden de otro, Estar de buen humor, Estar de viage, Estar c?e, 6 en pid, Estar de por m^dio, Estar en ^nimo c?e, Estar en lo que se dice, Estar 'para salir, Estar por aJguno, Estar (algo) por suceder, Escusarse coti alguno, F^cil de digerer, Faltar d la palabra, Paltar de algo, Fastidiarse de manjares, Fatigarse de, en, u por alguna cosa, i^'iarse de^ o en alguno, Fuerie en condicion, Gordo de talle, Gozar de alguna cosa, Guiado dc alguno, Guiarse por alguno, Gustar de alguna cosa, Hacer a todo, Hacer de valiente, Hacer de escribano, Hacer para^ u por salvarse, Hacerse con algo, Hincarse de rodillas, Holgarse con^ 6 de alguna cosa, Inapeable de su opinion, Inductivo de error, Infecto de heregias, Ingrato a los beneficios, Ingrato con los amigos, Ir con alguno, Jugar d tal juego. Largo de manos, Lastimarse de alguno, Leer los pensamientos d alguno, Limitado de talentos, Malquistarse con alguno, Mantenerse de yerbas, Maravillarse de alguna cosa, to he at the service of another. to be in a good humor, to be on a journey. to be on foot; to stand. to interpose. to have an inclination to. to understand what is said. to be ready to start. to be in favor of any one. to be (something) near happening. to apologize to any one. easy to digest. to fail in one^s word. to be wanting in any thing. to loathe victuals. to worry one's self about any thing. to confde in any one. strong in temper, large at the waist ; thick set. to enjoy any thing. guided by any one. to guide one^s self by any one. to like any thing. to be ready at doing any thing. to act as if valiant. to act as a scribe. to endeavor to save one^s self. to provide one's self with any thing. to kneel down. to delight in any thing. stubborn in one's opinion. leading to error. infected with heresies. ungrateful for benefits. ungrateful to friends. to agree with any one. to play at such a game. with a liberal hand. to have compassion on any one. to read the thoughts of any one. limited as to talents. to incur the haired ot any one. to Zirc upon herbs. to marvel at any thing. 202 OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH , PREPOSITIONS. Mas dc cien ducados, Matarse en trabajar, Mediano de cuerpo, Mejorar de empl^o, Menor de edad, Meterse d s^bio, Meterse con alguno, Meterse en todo, ^ Meterse en los peligros, Mirar par alguno, Molido de andar, Montar d caballo, Montar en mula, Montar en colera, Morir de poca edad, Morirse de frlo, Mudar de intento. Murmurar de alguno, Nacer con fortuna, Nacer ^ara trabajos, Notar d alguno de hablador, Oblividarse de lo pasado, Optar d los empleos, Ordenarse de sacerdote, Pagarse de buenas razones, Partir por mitad, Pasar d cuchillo, Pasar de Sevilla, Pasar por cobarde, Pasarse con poco, Pasarse de bueno, Peear de ignorante, Pedir algo d alguno, Pedir de justicia, Pedir en justicia, Perecer de hambre, Persuadirse d alguna cosa, Precedido de otro, Preciarse de valiente, Presumir de docto, Quedar de asiento, Quedar de pi4s, Q^uedar en casa, Q,uedar por andar, Tiiore than a hundred ducats, to kUl one's self with labor. of middling stature, to better one's employment, under age ; minor, to affect the sage, to pick a quarrel with any one. to he jack of all trades, to expose one's self to dangers, to look after any one's interest, fatigued with walking, to Tnount a horse. to mount a mule, to fly into a passion, to die at an early age, to he dying with cold, to alter one^s mind, to murmur against any one. to he 6or7i to a fortune, bom to labor, to fnd fault with any one as a talker, to forget the past, to seek for an office. to be ordained as a priest, to he satisfied with good reasons. to divide into halves. to put to the sword. to go beyond Seville. to pass for a coward. to he satisfied with a little. to he too good. to sin through ignorance, to ask any thing of any one. to claim in law. to sue at law. to perish with hunger, to be persuaded of any thing, preceded by another, to boast of one^s self as courageous, to make pretensions for a man of to remain in a spot. [learning. to remain on font, to remain at home. to have to go farther. OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. •203 Quedar j>or valiente, Qiuedarpar alguno, Recebirse de abogado, Redundar en beneficio, Revolver hdciay o sobre el Saber a vino, Saber d trabajos, Sacar en limpio, Salir d alguna cosa, Salir con la pretension, Salir por fiador, Servir de mayor-domo, Sordo de un oido, Suplicar de la sentencia, Suspirar^Jor el mando, Tenir de azul, Triunfar de los enemigos, Utilizarse en 6 con alguna Vecino al trono, Vencerse d alguna cosa, Vengarse de otro. Verse con alguno, Vestir d la moda, Verstirse de paiio, Volver por la verdad, VAlver en si, to be reputed as a valiant man, to go surety for any one. to be admitted as a counsellor. to redound to the benefit. enemigo, to return to the enemy. to taste like wine. to be acquainted with labor. to clear up all doubts. to co-operate in any thing, to obtain one's end. to act as surety. to serve as major-domo. deaf with one ear. to supplicate against the smtence. to aspire after the command. to dye in blue. to triwmph over the enemy. L, to reap benefit from any thing. near the throne. to conquer one's self in any thing. to revenge one's self on another. to meet any one (for settling differences). to dress according to the fashion. to be dressed in cloth. to stand out for the truth. to come to one's self. APPENDIX TO PART III. NUMBER IV. A LIST OF THE MOST COMMON IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 430. The general laws of the Spanish and English languages are the same ; yet there are many forms of expression peculiar to each, which can not be translated from one language into the other by an exactly literal combination of words : such words or phrases are termed idioms, (a.) In English we speak of "playing on a flute," while in Spainish the same idea is expressed by " tocando la flauta," which literally means *' touching the flute." One form of expression is as good as the other, since those who speak either language know what is meant. In Eng- lish, " what o^clock is it 7" is a very common colloquial idiom, which in Spanish is expressed by %q\i4 hora es7" ("what hour is-it?") In English we say, " I am afraid" " I am hungry ;" while according to the Spanish idiom it would be said, "I have fear," "I huve hunger." " Hacer gran papel" (which rendered literally would be, " to make ^rca^ paper "), is a Spanish idiomatic term, meaning " to make a great dis- play" or as it is often, though not very elegantly, said in English, " to make a figure," or " to cut a dash." These two latter phrases rendered literally into Spanish, " hacer una figure" or " cortar un choque" would be as little understood as " to make a great paper " would be in English. Some of the most common Spanish idioms will be given in the follow- ing Ust : 431. A. — When in English the indefinite article a is used after the price or rate of any thing, as " ten dollars a yard," in Spanish the defi- nite article eZ or la, or the preposition por is employed; as, "at fifteen crowns a volume," a quince escudos el tomo (or, por toTno). (a.) When a, used as above, comes before a noun implying time, the preposition d is used with the definite article ; as, " six hundred francs a y^ear," seiscientos francos al ano. 432. Above. — In such phrases as " abate mentioned," this word is ren- dered by ya ; as, "the author above cited," el auior ya dtado. IDIOMATIC PHRASES. .205 433. Account. — " On no account," de ninguna manera ; " on your ojc- count" (that is, "for your soAre "), por amor rfe vd. — "to yoMX account** (that is, "to your charge" or " debt"), d cargo de vd. 434. Act — " To act as" is rendered by hacer de; as, ^^ he-acted as porter," hizo de portero. 435. After. — This word in such phrases as " ten minutes after three," is rendered by y ; as, it is twenty minutes after eight, son las ocho y viente minutes. 436. Ago. — This word is generally rendered by the verb hace or ha (see 304, c) ; as, a few days ago, pocos dias ha, or, hace pocos dias ; — how long ago 7 i cuanto tiempo ha 7 — long ago, mucho tiempo ha ; — some time ago, hace algun tiempo ; a while ago, hace ya mucho tiempo. 437. Agree. — " To agree," when referring to a climate, is rendered by vrohar; as, the country agreed well with me, me probo bien el pais. (a.) " To agree," when referring to food, is rendered by sentar Hen; as, coffee does not agree with me ; el cafe no me sienta bien. 438. AU. — " To ail " is rendered by tener or doler ; as, what ails you? c que tiene vd. 7 or, i que le duele d vd. 7 — nothing ails me, nada tengo, or nada me duele. 439. Amiss. — "It would not be amiss if," is rendered by no ser malo que, or by no serfuera del caso que ; as, it would not be amiss if you should go there, no seria malo que vd.fuese alia, or, no serta fuera del caso que vd.fuese alld. (a.) "Tb take amiss," is rendered by llecar d mat; as, do not take it aniss, no lo Ueve vd. i. mal. 440. And. — Such sentences as "go and see who it is," " go and open the door," etc., would be rendered in Spanish, " go to see who it is," " go to open the door; as, vaya vd. i. ver quien es ; vaya vd. i. abrir la puerta. 441. Answer. — "Tb answer" when meaning "to correspond to," is rendered hy corresponder d ; as, this year's crop does not answer our expectations, la cosecha de este ano no corresponde i. nuestras espe- ranzas. 442. As. — When a* is used after such in the sense of who, in Span'sh, the relative pronoun is employed ; as, all such as went there, todos las que Jueron altt. 443. Aware. — "Tb be aware of," is rendered by saber; as, you are not aware of such a thing, vd. no sabe tal cosa. 444. Become. — " To become," when referring to entering upon some ofl&ce or profession, is rendered by hacerse or meterse d ; as, he became a carpenter, se hizo carpintero ; he became a knight, se meti5 i, caballero. (a.) Before an adjective, " to become is rendered by hacerse ; as, he be- came poor, se hizo ^obre. (b.) " To become," meaning " to suit " or " to be suitable to," is rendered by sentar, or caer, or vcir bien; as, this hat becomes you n^^rfectly, este 18 206 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. sornbrtro le sienta d vd. perfectamente ; that suit becomes you well, ese vestido le cae d vd. bien; this coat becomes you well, este frac le va d vd, bien. (c.) " To become of^^ is rendered byscr rfd and ^occr^c de in the phrase, " what has become ofi^ as, what vMl become of my brother ? ^ que serd de mi hermano ? what ^x«s become of my shoes 7 y necesitar ; as, what do you want 7 i que es la que vd. quiere 7 — do you want nothing else 7 I nada mas necesita vd. 7 (a.) "To be wanted," in such sentences as, "you are wanted," and " he is wanted,"mdiy be rendered by le llaman a vd.^ and Ze buscan. 545. Wind. — "To wind up a watch or clock," by dar cuerda at reloj. 546. Wonder. — ''To wonder " is not rendered in Spanish in such sen- tences as, " 1 wonder whether she will sing to-night? isi ella cantard esta noche 7 547. Worth. — "Tb be worth" (speaking of persons), is rendered by poseer, or by tener ; as, he is worth a house, el tiene unu casa. (a.) "To be worth " (speaking of the value of things), is rendered by valer ; as, how much is this watch worth 7 i cuanto vale este reloj 7 (6.) "To be worth while," by merecer or valer la pena de, or by haber para que; as, it is worth tchile to do it, vale la pena de hacerlo ; — :t is not worth while, no hay para que. 548. Wrong. — "To be wrong," or "to be in the wrong," hy no tinei' razon; as, he is wrong, no tiene razon. 549. In English, a negative interrogative is frequently added tc an IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 2 5 affirmative, and an affirmative to a negative sentence, to render them more expressive; thus, "she is here, is she not?" — "they will come, will they not?" — "you have studied Spanish, have you not?" — or, "she is not here, is she?" — " they will not come, will they?" — "you have not studied Spanish, have you?" In Spanish, this sort of interrogatory is rendered after affirmative sentences by i, no es verdad ? (" is it not true ?") and after negative sentences by les verdad? ("is it true?") as, "you will do me the pleasure to dine with me, will you not?" me hard vd. el gusto de coiner conmigo, i no es verdad 7 — " you have not eaten any fish, have you ?" no ha comido vd. pescado, i,es verdad 7 — " the traitor would have disclosed every thing, wouldnH he ?" todo lo hubiera declarado el traidor, i no es verdad 7 550. The particle " i/," followed by a relative pronoun, is frequently used in English in sentences like these : " it was John who did that ;" — " it is the king who is to be, blamed ;" — " it was the French who first dis- covered it." In Spanish, the word "i7" is not rendered, and the verb which in English agrees in the singular number with " it," is in Span- ish in the number of the noun to which it refers ; as, fue Juan el que lo hizo i—fueron los Espanoles los que conquistaron a Mejico ; that is, John was he who did it, — the Spaniards were they who conquered Mexico. 551. In translating English phrases into Spanish, it will generally be found necessary to resolve them into their most obvious meaning; thus, " he stood up for the robbers," means, " he defended (or took the part of) the robbers," and can be rendered, defendiO d los ladrones. '* He stood {stands) godfather to the child," means, "he is godfather to the child," and may be rendered, es padrino del nino. "John takes after his father," may mean, " John imitates his father," or " John resembles his father," and may be rendered, Juan imita d su padre, or Juan se parece a su padre. " The judge took up with this bed-room," means, " the judge contented himself (or was contented) with this room," and may be ren- dered, eljuez se contenta con esta alcoba. " To coin words," means " to invent words," and is rendered, inventar palabras; — "to coin a lie," is rendered, forjar una mentira. " He keeps up his usual retinue," is ren- dered, mantiene su tren acostumbrado. *'He eats nothing but what comes up" means, "he vomits whatever he eats," and is rendered, vomita cuanto come. 552. The word "^ue" in Spanish, like the word *^that" in English, is employed with* various meanings, as is shown by the following exam- ples: (a.) La muger que vimos. The woman whom (that) we-saw. (6.) El hombre que habla. The man who {that) is-speaking. (c.) Lo que es propio en uno, es What {that which) is proper in one^ imprCpio en otro. is improper in another. (d.) No s6 que hacer. I know not what to do. (e.) No s^ gtie pluma tomar. I know which pen to take. 216 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. {f.) Ofrecimientos es la moneda que corre en este siglo. {g.) ;Qu^ desgracia! Qi.) Le mandu que viniese. (i.) El pintor es mas docto que el cirujano. {j.) No es lo mismo prometer que cumplir. {k.) ,'Que enfadoso es vd. ! (Z.) AUi no es licito que las lagri- mas lleguen a los ojos, que eso es flagueza. (m.) Que Uueva, que no Uueva. (n.) Tarde que temprano. (o.) iQue es del libro 1 (p.) Sentiria que fuesen rehusados. (q.) Esperala que yo tuviese ver- duras. 553. Sometimes que is employed dant in English ; as, Cualquier cerveza que yo tuviese. Estate alll hasta que yo te lo diga. Antes de que estuviesen de vuelta. Que sus tesoros sean cojidos. Que no se engaiie. 554. Que is sometimes preceded lated in English ; as, A fin de que yo sea rico. Espera d que yo este necesitado. En caso de que seals enganados. Cuidabamos de que no se despar- tas3 vd. Promises are the con w/iich is cnr rent in this age. What a misfortune ! I ordered that he should come. The painter is more learned than the surgeon. It is not the same to promise as to perform. Hoic tedious you are ! Here it is not proper that tears should-come to the eyes, /or (or because) this is a weakness. Whether it may-rain, or not rain. Late or early. Where is the book 7 I-should-be-sorry if they-should- be refused. He-was- waiting till I should- have vegetables. in Spanish when it would be redun- Whatever beer I might have. Remain-thou there until I tell it thee. Before they-were returned. Let his treasures be seized. Let him not deceive himself. by a preposition which is not trans- In order that I may-be ricn. He-is-waiting till I may-be needy. In case that you should-be deceive 1. We-were-careful tha^ you shoui 1 not awake. OTHER IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. Es de dia. Es de noche. El sol sile. El sol se pone. Hace calor. Hace mucho frlo. Corre mucho viento. Hace os:uro. Hace luna, Hace un tiempo hiimido. ' I Q,ue tal tiem K> hace 'i It is day. It is night. The sun rises. The sun sets. It is hot. It is very cold. The wind blo^ s hard. It is dark. It is moonlight. The weather is damp. How is the voatherl IDIOMATIC PHRASES. •217 I Cuantos anos tiene vd. 7 i Q,u6 edad tiene vd. 1 Tengo quince anos cumplidos. Acabo de cumplir veinte aiios. lQiu6 edad le eciiaria vd. i, mi padre 1 Ya debe haber pasado de los cin- cuenta. I Q,uiere vd. hacerme un favor 1 I Puedo pedirle d vd. un favor 1 Cuento con vd. i no es verdad 7 Llaman i, la campanilla. Oigo llamar. Es el senor S . Vd. come dentro de m^dia hora corta. Yo estoy hecho a todo. Ese fuego est^ bien muerto. Ya empieza ^ hacer llama. I Que dia del mes tenemos 7 Enseneme vd. betas. Aqul tiene vd. un par. No tenga vd. cuidado. El tiempo estd tan cubierto que ap^nas se ve. Quisiera un sombrero i, la moda. I Se siguen haciendo sombreros altos de forma 7 Algunos se ven. Aqui tiene vd. uno. *, Cuanto vale 1 I Cuando estara corriente 7 Me duele mucho la cabeza. Veamos la lengua. Todas los dias doy un pas^o de tres o cuatro horas. ; Tiene vd. habitaciones que alqui- lar7 I Da el cuarto sobre la calle 7 No senor, da sobre el jardin. I Monta vd. a caballo 7 Pronto van d acabar los encantos del otono. Ya estamos en invierno. tCOrao se pUcde gustar del invierno 7 19 How old are. you 7 What is your age 7 I am past fifteen. I am just twenty years old. How old do you think my fathet is 7 He must be above fifty years old. Will you do me a favor 7 May I ask you a favor 7 I can rely upon you, can't 1 7 Some one rings the door-bell. I hear a knock, a ring. It is JMr. S . You dine in less than half an hour. I am used to every thing. This fire is almost out. It just begins to blaze. What day of the month is it 7 Show me some boots. Here is a pair. Make yourself easy. The weather is so cloudy that we can scarcely see each other. I want a fashionable hat. Are high crowned hats still made 7 Some are still seen. Here is one (Here you have one). What is the price of it 7 (how much is It worth 7) When will it be ready 7 My head aches very much. Let me see your tongue. I walk three or four hours every day. Have you any apartments to let 7 Does the room look into the street 7 No, sir, it looks into the garden. Do you ride on horseback 7 The pleasures of autumn are about to dsappear. It is winter. (We are in winter. How can any one like winter 7 218 IDIOMATIC FHRASES. Andar^ el camino ^ caballo. I Se duerme en el camino 1 Es cerca de las dos. Han dado las tres. I Cuanto tiempo hace que est^ vd. en los Estados Unidos 1 Hace mas de un ano. Le tuve por un Ingles. I Qiu6 noticias tenemos 7 I Q,u6 noticias corren 1 I Qu6 se dice en la ciudad 1 I No ha oido vd. hablar de la guer- ra'J No se dice nada de ella. Se habla de un sltio. Todos necesitan de la paz. I Q,u6 le parece a vd. de mi som- brero 7 Buenos dias tenga vd. Le diremos & vd. nuestro parecer. Pues, iqii6 tell Buenas noches. I vfc^ill perform the journey on horse back. Do we sleep on the road 1 It is nearly two o'clock. It has struck three. How long have you been in the United States? It is more than a year. I took him for an Englishman. What is the news 7 (What news have we 7) What news is current 7 What do they say in the. city 7 Have you not heard the war spoken of 7 Nothing is said of it. They talk of a siege. Every body wishes for peace. How does my hat appear to yuul Good morning to you. We will give you our opinio^ Well, how do you like it 7 Good night. APPENDIX TO PART III. NUMBER V. A LIST OF THE MOST COMMON ABBRE- VIATIONS. 556. The following list comprehends the most common abbreviations employed by Spanish writers: A, Arroha^ Twenty-five pounds weight. AA. Autoresj Authors. A. C. Ano CristianOf Christian year. Agto. Agosto, August. Art. 6 Artie ArticulOf Article. B, BeatOy BachUUr^ Blessed, Bachelor of Afi*. B. L. M. [ BesOj 6 besa la mano^ o las i manoSj ' 1 1 kiss the hands. B, L. P. BesOy o besa los jnes^ I kiss the feet. Bmo. P. Beatisimo Padre^ Most blessed Father. C. 6 Cap. 6 Capit. CapUulo, Chapter. C. M. B. Cuyas manos beso^ 6 besoy Whose hands I kiss. Col. ColUTUlj Column. Conocito. Conocimienfo, Bill of lading. Corte. CorrienUy Current. C. P. B. Cuyos pies beso^ & besa^ Whose feet I kiss. eta. CuenMf Account. D. 6 Dn. Don, Mr. Da. Dona, Mrs. DD. DoctoreSi DQCtors Dha, Dicha^ Ditto or said. Dho. Dicho, Ditto or said. Dicw- Diciembre^ December. Dr. Doctor, Doctor. E. g. 6 E. gr. \ \ Exempli gratia (por ejem- I plo), I^Fdr example. Eno- Enero, January. Egnoo. ^ £^scin» EscelenMsimOi Most excelleai. Peb<». Febrero^ February. Pha. Fecha, Dated. 220 ABBREVIATIONS. Fho. Fol. Fr. lb. ine,Illmo,IUma | J.C. L. Lib. Lin. M. P. S. Mr. 6 Mr. M^- as- MS. MSS. N. N. B. N. S. N. S"- N. S. J. C Novb«- No- 6 niim Nro. Octe Onz. Om. 0ms, P. 6 P^. pa. Pdr. P. D. po. P'^ Q.iV. B.L.M. R.P.M.6Mtro. Ri Rie«. Rw- Rdo. Rev™o- S. Sto.. Sto, St- S. A. S. A.A S. M. Sr. S«- FechOi FollOf Fray, (tfrey, Ibidem, Mustre, Jlustrtsimo, llus- trtsima, JesucridOy Libro, Linea, Mvy poderoso senor, Monsieur, & mister, Mudws arx}s, Manuscrito, ManuscritoSj Fulano, Nota bene, Nuestro Senor, Nuestrd Senora, Nuestro Senor Jesucristo, NoviembrCf NUmero, Nuestro, Octubre^ Onza, Orden, Ordenes, Pdgina, Para, Pdrrafo, PostdatOj Pero, Por, Que d usted besa la mono, Que, • Reoerendo padre maestro, Real, Reales, Reabt, Reverendo, Reverendtsimo, San, 6 santo, Su alteza, Su afecto amigo, Su magestad, ScfUyTi Dated. Folio. Friar, Brother. Same. > Illustrious, Most lUustri* i ous. Jesus Christ. Law. Book. Line. Most powerful Lord. Mr. Many years. Manuscript. Manuscripts. Such a one. Take notice. Our Lord. Our Lady. Our Lord Jesus Christ November. Number. Our. October. Ounce. Order. Orders. Page. For. Paragraph. Postscript. But. For or By. Who kisses your haud. That. Reverend fether. Royal. I received. Reverend. Most reverend. Saint. His highness. Your affectionate friend. His majesty. Sir, Lord. ABBREVIATIONS. 221 s. s«. Su Senoria, His lordship. S. Sd. Su Santidad, His holiness. Setbre. Setiemhre^ September. Sego- seror- Seguro servidoTf Obedient servant. Spre. Siempre^ Always. SS. 6 Sres. Senores, Sirs, Messrs. SS'no. Santisimo padre^ Most holy father. SS. pp. Santos padres. Holy fathers. s. s. s. Su seguro servidor^ Your obedient servant. Sumate- Sumamente^ Totally. T. 6 torn. Tomo, Volume. Tpo. 7\empo, Time. V. VeasCf See. y. Ve- OVen.- Venerable, Venerable. V.,Vd.,Vm.,Jj Vmd. > Usted 6 vuesa merced, Your worship; you. VV.,Vs.,Vms., CVds. i Ustedes, 6 vuesas mercedes, Your worships -, vou. V. A. Vuestra alteza, Your highness. V.E.,6V. Esc a- Vuecelencia, Your excellency. V. G., 6 V. gr. Verbi grdcia, For example. Verso- Verstculo, Versicle. V.M. Vuestra magestad, Your majesty. Vol. VoMmen, • Volume. V. P. Vuestra patemidad, Your paternity. V. S. Vuesenorm, 6 u^ia, Your lordship. V. S. Vuestra santidad, Your holiness. V. S. S. Vuesenorias, Your lordships. V. S. I. Vuesenorta ilustrtsima, Your grace. Vro. Vra. Vuestro, vuestra, Your. Xmo. Diezmo, Tithe. Xptno. Cristiano, Christian. I9« APPENDIX TO PART HI. NUMBER VI. SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 557. The following table contains the names of Spanish coins, with their value in Spanish and approximate value in United States currency : NAMES. SPANISH VALUE. U. STATES VALUE. j Copper. R.* m. $ cfs. m. ' Maravedi, 1 i.47 2.94 2 Maravedises make one Ochavo, 2 2 Ochavos •' Guar to, 4 5.83 2 Cuartos (C Pobie Guar to, 8 1 1.76 SUver. 8J Cuartos Ct Real de vellon, 34 5 U Reales (C Cuarto de Peseta, 1 8h 6 2.5 2i Reales u M^dia Peseta, 2 17 12 5. 5 Reales (( Peseta,t 5 25 0. 2 Pesetas (( Escudo de vellon, 10 50 0. 2 Escudos, or } 20 Reales, 3 (( Peso Duro, 20 1 00 0. Gold. 20 Reales (C Peso de oro. 20 1 00 0. 2 Pesos (C Escudo de oro, 40 2 00 0. 2 Escudos de oro (( Doblon, 80 4 00 0. 2 Doblones (( M^dia Onza, 160 8 00 0. 4 Doblones (( Onza, 320 16 00 0. 1 1^^ The value in United States currency, given in the preceding ta- ble, is determined by estimating the real at its true value, five cents. * R here is an abbreviation for reales, and m for maravedi. t In some parts of Spain, the peseta is the name for the pistareen or twenty-cent piece o " money, and then the piece of five reales is called peseta columndria. SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 223 The ansa has a relative value in exchanges of a little more than sixteen dollars. The cuarto de peseta has long been in circulation in the United States, and valued at six and a quarter cents, and the media peseta valued at twelve and a half cents. ^^ In the Spanish States of America, money is reckoned by the peso, real, and medio real. The peso, or dollar, is divided into cuatro pesetas, four quarters of a dollar; ihepesdn into dos reales,' two twelve and a half cent coins ; and the real into dos medios, two six and a quar- ter cent coins, which last is the coin of lowest value used in those States. Copper coin is not known there. 558. Table of Spanish weights with their equivalent in Avoirdupois and Troy weight in English : NAMES. SPANISH VALUE. AVOIRDUPOIS. TROY. lb. oz. dr. gr. lb. OZ. pwt. gr. Quintal, - - - 4 arrobas, - - 101 7 19 123 3 4 19 Arroba, - - - 25 libras, - - - 25 5 12 4.8 30 9 16 4.8 Libra, - - - - 2 marcos, - - 1 3 20 1 2 15 20 Marco, - - - - 8 onzas, - - - 8 1 25 7 7 22 Onza, - - - - 8 ochaves, - - 1 7 18 12 Ochava, - - - 2 adarmes, - - 2 1 2 7 Adarme, - - - 3 tomines, - - 1 1 3 Tomin, - - - 12 granos, - - - 10 9 Grano, - - - - — 0.83 0.75 ' The quintal de CastUla is equivalent to 6 arrobas, or 152 lbs. 2 ozs. 8 drs. 29 grs. avoirdupois. 559. Tables of Spanish measures with their equivalents in English measure : (a.) LONG MEASURE.* | NAMES. SPAN. EQUIVALENT. ENGL. EQUIVALENT. ', Estado, - Pi^, Pulgado, ------ Linea, 6pi^s, - . - - 12 pulgados, - - - 12 lineas, - - - - ft. in. I. 5 6 9.9 11 1.66 11.14 0.92 1 * The legiuL or league, of Spain, contains 8,000 varas or Spanish yards, equivalent to 3.797 English miles, that is, somewhat more than 3| English miles. Sometimes the Spaniards reckon by a legua of 5,000 varas, or 2 J English miles. 224 SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES (b.) CLOTH MEASURE. NAMES. SPAN. EQUIVALENT. ENGL. EQUIVALENT. Vara, Palmo, -.----- Dedo, Linea, 4 palmos, - - - 12 dados, - - - - 12 lineas, - - - - ft. in. I. 2 9 4.3 8 4.1 8.3 0.7 ! (c.) DRY MEASURE. Cahiz, Fanega, ------ Celemin, - - - - - Cuartillo, 12 fanegas, - - - 12 celemines, - - 4 cuartillos, - - - bu. pks. qts. 18 3 6.53 1 2 2.54 4.21 1.05 (d.) LiaUID MEASURE. Moyo, ------ Pipa, Bota, Cantaro, or ? . _ . Arroba mayor, 5 Azumbre, Cuartillo, 16 cantaros, - - - 27 cantaros, - - - 30 cantaros, - - • 8 azumbres, - - 4 cuartillos, - - gals. qts. pts. 56 1 1.04 95 1.1 105 2 1.7 3 2 0.19 1 1.52 .88 (e.) In Spanish land measure, the fanegada contains about 5.500 English square yards, or la^ English acres. APPENDIX TO PART III. NUMBER VIL SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 560. Many proper names are spelled alike both in Span- ish and in English ; as, America, America; Arabia, Ara- bia : many differ slightly in the orthography ; as, Europa, Europe ; Frdncia, France ; Corcega^ Corsica ; Vizcaya, Biscay : and some names differ entirely in their orthogra- phy ; as, Alemdnia, Germany. 561. SOME COMMON GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES.* Alejandria, Alexandria. Brasil, BazU. Alemdnia, Germany. Brema, Bremen. Amberes, Antwerp. Bretana, Great Britain, or Antioqula, Antioch. Brittany. Antuerpia, Antwerp. Brujas, Bruges. Argel, Algiers. Burd^os, Bourdeaux. Asiria, Assyria. Cabo de Buena Cape of Good Atenas, Athens. Esperanza, Hope. Avinon, Avignon. Cabo de Homos, Cape Horn. Ayacio, Ajaccio. Cald^a, Chaldea. Babilonia, Babylon. Cal^s, Calais. Bahia Botanica, Botany Bay. Canal de la Man- English Channel. Bajo Rin, Lower Rhine. cha. Barbada, Barhadoes. Cantorberi, Canterbury. Berberia, Barbary. Cartagena, Carthagena. Bizdncio, Byzantium. Cartago, Carthage. Bolonia, Bologna. Castilla la INuevajA'ew? Castile. Boloiia, Boulogne. Castilla la Vieja, Old Castile. Bona, Bonn. Ceilan, Ceylon. Borgona, Burgundy. Cerdena, Sardinia. Bosforo, Bosphorus. Chipre, Cyprus. * In general, those proper names which do not differ, or but slightly, in the two languages, are not giveri, as they present no diflSculty to the reader. 226 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. (Jolonia, Cologne. Habana, Havanna. Constanza, Constance. Habra de Grdcia, flarre Argelino, > Algerine. Berberisco, native of Barhary, Brasileno, Brazilian. Americano, American. Breton, Briton. Andaluz, Andalusian. Castellano, CastUian. Arabe, Arabian. Catalan, Catalonian, Asiatico, Asiatic. Chileiio, Chilian. Ateniense, Athenian. Chino, Chinese. Austriaco, Austrian* Chipreno, Cyprian, 228 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. Gipayo, Sepoy. Malayo, Malay. Corso, Corsican. Malagueiio, native of Malaga. Criollo, Creole. Manchego, native of La Man- Dinamarqu^s, Dane. Mejicano, Mexican, [cha. Escoses, Scotchman. Montanes, Highlander. Espaiiol, Spaniard. Moro, Moor. Europco, European. Napolitano, Neapolitan. Estrameiio, Estramadurian. Noruego, Norwegian. Flamenco, Fleming. Persa, Persian. Prances, Frenchman. Peruano, Peruvian. Prison, Erieslander. Polaco, Pole. Gaditano, native of Cadiz. Portugu^s, Portuguese. Gallego, Galician. Porteiio, native of Port St. Gales, Wekhman. Prusiano, ) Pruso, ) Prussian, t^^^' Ginebr^s, Genevese. Genoves, Genoese. Ruso, Russian. Griego, Greek. Sardo, Sardinian. Groenlandes, Greerdandtr. Sajon, Saxon. Heses, Hessian. Sueco, Swede. Holand^s, Dutchman. Suizo, Swiss. Indio, Hindoo; Indian. Sirio, Syrian. Ingles, Englishman. Tejano, Texan. Irland^s, Irishman. Toscano, Tuscan. Islandes, Icelander Tuned, Tunisian, Isleiio, Islander. Turco, Turk. Japon, Japanese. V^laco, Wallachian. Jerezano, native of Xeres. Valon, Walloon, Judio, Jew. Vizcaino, Blscayan. Lapon, Laplander. Zeland^s, [ Celand^s, • Zealander, Madrileno, native of Madrid. 564. CHRISTIAN ^A MES OF MEN. Adan, Adam. Balduino, Haldwin. Adolfo, Adolphus, Baltas^r, Balthasar. Alano, Alany or Alien. Bernab^, Bamahy. Alberto, Alberto. Bartolomd, Bartholomew. Alejandro, Alexander. Basilio, Basil. Alfredo, Alfred. Benito, Benedict. Alfonso, Alphonsus. Benjamin, Benjamin. Andres, Andrew. Bernardo, Bernard. Anton, Antonio Anthony. Beltran, Bertram. Archibaldo, Archibald. Bonifacio, Boniface. Arldro, Arthur. Cdsar, CcBsar. August©, Augustus. Carlos, Charles. Agustin, Augustin or Aus- Christobal, Christopher. Anibal, HannibaL [tin. Chrisostomo, Chrysostom. SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 229 Cl^udio, Claudius, Hor^cio, Horace. Clem^nte, Clement. Hiigo, Hugh. Conrado, Conrad. Humfr^do Humphrey, Constantino, Constantine. Ign^cio, Ignatius. Const^ncio, Constantius, Ireneo, Ireneus. Corn^lio, Cornelius. Isaac, Isaac. Cipridn, Cyprian. JacCb, Jacob. CirUo, Cyril. Jay'me, Jacobo, ^ Daniel, Daniel. Diego, or San - > James. David, David. tiago, 3 Donstdna, Dunsian. Jeremias, Jeremy. EdmCndo, Edmund. Job, Job, Eduardo, Edward. Juan, John. Ele^zaro, Eleazar. Jonat^s, Jonathan. Elias, Elias. Jorge, George. Elis^o, Elisha. Jos4, Joseph. Enrique, Henry. Josu^, Joshua. Est^ban, Stephen. Josias, Josiah. Ethelredo, Ethelred. Jiidas, Judas. Eug^nio, Eugene. Jdlio, Julius. Eus^bio, Eusebius. Lorenzo, Laurence. Eust^quio, Eustace. Lazaro, Lazarus. Ezequias, Ezechias. LeopoldO; Leopold. Ezequi^l, Ezekiel. Lucas, Luke. Felipe, Philip. Luis, Lewis. Felix, Felix. Lucio, Lucius. Fernando, Ferdinand. Malaquias, Malachy. Francisco, Francis. Manuel, Emanuel. Frederico, Frederick. Marco, Mark. Gabriel, Gabriel. Martin, Martin. Geofredo, Geffery. Mateo, Matthew. Gedonio, Gideon. Matias, Matthias. Gerunimo, Jerome. Mauricio, Maurice. Gilb^rto, Gilbert. Maximiliano, Maximilian Gil, GUes. Miguel, Michael. Godefr^dO; Godfrey. Moists. Moses. Gedevino, Goodwin. Natan, Nathan. Gregurio, Gregory. Natanael, Nathaniel. Guido, Guy. Nehemias, Nehemiah, Guillermo, William. Nicolas, Nicholas. Gualt^rio, Walter. Oct^vio, Octavius. Hector, Hector. Oliv^rio, Oliver. Henrique, Henry. Oton, Otho. Heb^rto, Herbert. Patricio, Patrick. HiMrio, Hilary. Pdblo, Paul. Hubdrto, Hubert. 2 P^dro. PeUr. '^30 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. Phiie^s, Phineas. Silvestre, Silvester, Rodolfo, Ralph or Rolph, Salomon, Solomon. Rafael, Raphael. Tad^o, Phaddeus, Raimunde, Raymond. Theob^ldo, Theobald. Reinaldo, Reynold. Theodoro, Theodore. Ricardo, Ricliard. Theodorico, Theodoric. Roberto, Robert or Rupert. Theodosio, Theodosius.' Rodrigo, Roderic. TheOfilo, Theophilus. Rog^rio, Roger. Tom^s, Thomas. Rolando, Rowland. Timot^o, Timothy. Sanson, Sampson. Tito, Titus, Samuel, Samuel. Tobias, Toby. Sebastian, Sebastian. Urbano, Urban. Sigismundo Sigismund. Valentin, Valentine. Simeon, Simeon. Vicente, Vincent, Simon, Simon. Zacarias, Zachary, Silvano, Silvan, 565. CHRISTIAN NAM ES OP WOMEJN r. Abigail, Abigail. Flora, Flora, Agatha, Agatha. Flor^ncia, Florence. AdeMida, Alice. Francisca, Frances. Ali.t^a, Alithea. Gertrudis, Gertrude. Amelia, Amelia. Isabel, Isabel or Eliza' Ana, Ann or Anne. Juana, Jane. \beth Antoneta, Antonette. Judit, Judith. Barbara, Barbara. Juliana, Julia. Bealriz, Beatrix^ Beatrice. Leanor, Eleanor. Benita, Benedicta. Luisa, Louisa. Bona, Bona. Lucia, Lnicy. Brigida, Bridget. Lucrecia, Lmcretia. Carolina, Caroline. Magdalena, Magdalen. Casandra, Cassandra. Margarita, Margaret. Catalina, Catharine. Maria, Mary. Cecilia, Cecily. Matilde, Maud or Matilda. Carlota, Charlotte. Paula, Paulina. Cristina, Christiana. Penelope, Penelope. Clara, Clara. Prud^ncia, Prudence. Claudina, Claudia. Raqu^l, Rachael. Clotilde, ClotUda. Rebeca, Rebecca. Constanza, Constance. Rosa, Rose. Dionlsia, Diona. Sabina, Sabina. Dorot^a, Dorothy, Sara, Sarah. Elena or Helena , Ellen or Helen. Sofia, Sophia. Sngricia, Grace. Susana, Susan. Est^r, Hester, Esther. Teresa, Theresa. Eva, Eve, Ursula, Ursula. PART IV. SPANISH AND ENGLISH EXERCISES FOK TRANSLATION. SECTION FIRST. Remark. — The exercises which follow consist of Spanish phrases and sentences to be translated into English, and of English phrases and sen- tences to be translated into Spanish. Such exercises, on the method of " constant imitation and repetition," will be found highly useful to the learner. By means of the definitions, the model sentences, the explana- tions, and the references to rules and remarks, the English exercises can be readily rendered into Spanish. 566. The abbreviations employed in the following exercises are those generally used in grammatical works ; — thus, masc., for masculine ; fern., ior feminine; sing.y for singular; plur.^ for plural. Other abbreviations will be explained as they occur. 567. When two or more words in English are connected by a hyphen, they are to be rendered by one word in Spanish ; thus, " a thrust-wifJi-a- sword" is rendered by una estocada; " thou-shouldst-speak" by the sin- gle word hablaras; "the poor-man" by el pobre; ^^ he-is hlind-of-ont- eye" by es tuerto. 568. A word, abbreviation, or number, in Roman characters, inclosed in a parenthesis, is designed to give some direction or reference to assist the learner ; thus, " the brother of the (87 ; 88) housekeeper." Here the figures 87 and 88^are designed to call attention to those respective para- graphs, which will be found on pages 31 and 32. 569. A word or phrase in Italics, inclosed in a parenthesis, shows that the preceding word is to be translated by the italicised word or words. Thus, in the sentence, "he-is {estd) in Spain," the words '^ he-is" are to be rendered by estd. So in the sentences, " you (vmd.) are rich," and, " you (vms.) are poor," the word " you " in the former case is to be ren- dered by rmd.^and in the lattet by vms. , 570. A word or phrase inclosed in brackets must not be expressed in the language in which the sentence is to be translated. Thus, la virtud de [la] fortaleza, is to be rendered in English by, " the virtue of fortitude ;" and, " [he] has [aj fever," in Spanish, by tiene calentura. 1^^ The learner must endeavor to retain the meaning of the words and their manner of arrangement, as well as the rules and remarks to which refeience is made, as he will thus be the better enabled to proceed 232 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. with each succeeding exercise, and when no such aids are furnished ; for after a few examples and references to any particular rule, we shall give him no further directions in the exercises which come under that rule, except where there may be expected to be cases of considerable doubt on his part. The vocabulary should be carefully read before attempting to translate the exercises. EXERCISE I. 571. Vocabulary. Hombre, man. Mugei; woTnarij wife, Marido, husband. Hermano, brother. Hermana, sister. Hijo, son. Hija, daughter, Juez, judge. Bello, beautiful. Pasado, pa^t. 572. Model Phrases. (a.) El marido de la Francesa. (6.) Al hermano del medico, (c.) A un Americano. id.) Lo bello. (e.) Los maridos de las Francesas. Medico, physician. Criado, male-servant. Criada, JenuUe-servant. Americano, American. Francesa, French-woman. Alma, sold. Ama, mistress^ housekeeper Hambre, hunger, famine. Cierto, true. Futuio,fuiure. The husband of the French-wo- man. To-the brother of-the physician. To an American. The beautiful, or, that-which-is beautiful (84). The husbands of the French-wo 573. Spanish to be translated into English. < El juez. El medico. La criada. IJna Francesa. La muger. El hermano. Un criado. El alma. Un ama. El alma del (88) hombre. La hermana del Americano. La hija de la Francesa. La criada de la muger. Lo (84) cierto. Lo bello. Un criado del juez. Una hija del medico. Lo futaro. Al (88) marido de la Francesa. A la muger de juez. Al alma del ama. El hambre del criado. El hijo del hermano del medico. El criado de la muger. Al hermano del juez. A la hermana del Ameri cano. Al hijo de la Francesa. A una hija del America- no. Lo pasado. A lo (84) bello. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLAIlON. 233 \^^ The plural of such words in the above vocabulary as end with a vowel, is formed by adding s to the singular ; as, hombrt, man ; hcmi- hre^ty men. Los hombres. Los maridos. Las criadas. Las her- manas de la Francesa. Los hijos del medico. A las hijas de la muger. A los hermanos del juez. Las almas (84, a) de las FraDcesas. Las hijas del Americano/ Las criadas de los medicos. Los hermanos del marido de la Francesa. Las hijas de los Americanos. Los hermanos de las cria- das. 574. English to be translated into Spanish. The (80) man. The (81) woman. The (87) soul. The (82) men. The physician. The (83) daughters. A (86) woman. A (85) judge. A (87) famine. A (87) mistress. The brother of-the (88) physician. The son of the (88, a) French-woman. The husband of the woman. The male- servant of-the American. The sister of-the judge. The female-servant of the woman. The wife of-the physician. The son of-the American. To-the (88) brother of the female-servant. To the (88, a) sister of the French- woman. To-the (87; 88) soul of-the (87; 88) housekeeper. The (84) beautiful. To (88, a) that-which-is (84) beauti- ful. The past. That-which-is true. The future. To the future. The brothers. The sisters. The sons of the American. To the (88, a) brothers of-the physician. To the (87, a) souls of the female-servants. The daughters of the French-woman. The sisters of-the judge. The male- servants of the sons of-the physician. The sons of the sisters of-the American. The husbands of the daughters of-the judge. The brothers of the female-servants. SECTION SECOND. Remark.— That the learner may be able to translate and to form com- plete sentences, a few verbs will be placed in the vocabulary. As he !» 20* !2^4 EXERCISES TOR TRANSLATION. not yet supposed to be acquainted with the form of conjugating verbs in Spanish, it is necessary to mention that of the few verbs for the present given in the vDcabulary, those ending with n are in the third person plural, and of course are to be used when plural nouns are nominative to them : those in the vocabulary not ending with n are in the third per- son singular. In English we say, " the man wrote" and '* the men wrote " (the verb being spelled alike in both the third persons singular and plural) ; out in Spanish we would say, el hombre escribio, " the man wrote" and, los horobres escribieron, " the men wrote." 575. In Spanish, the general rule of constructing sentences is to pro- duce clearness and harmony. Hence it is by no means important to place the nominative before the verb, as is usually the case in English. Thus in Spanish we can say, Pedro dio el libra d Maria^ " Peter gave the book to Mary ;" or, Pedro dio a Maria el libro^ " Peter gave to Mary the book ;" or, Pedro d Maria dio el libro, " Peter to Mary gave the book ;" or, Pedro d Maria el libro dio, " Peter to Mary the book gave ;" or, a Maria dio Pedro el libro, " to Mary gave Peter the book ;" or, dio Pedro d Maria el libro, " gave Peter to Mary the book ;" and each of these positions of the words is allowed by the rules of Spanish construction, that form which is most clears forcible, and harmonious being always preferred. 576. The learner will be able to distinguish the gender of nouns, either from their sex, or from their termination (see 92, c ; and 92, d). Any noun forming an exception to the general rules of gender, will have its gender specified in the vocabulary, and should be remembered by the learner. EXERCISE II. 577. Vocabulary. Tadre, father. Madre, mother. Impresor, printer, Pintor, painter, Carpintero, carpenter. Caballo, horse. Navio, ship. Buey, ox. Hambre (fem.), hunger. El pintor tiene, the painter has. El pintor fu6, the painter went. El pintor di6, the painter gave. El pintor escribio, the painter wrote. Libro, book. Carta, letter. Dinero, money. Oro, gold, Plata, silver. Hoja, leaf. Casa, house. Cuchara, spoon. Sed, thirst. Los pintores tienen, the painters have. Los pintores fueron, the painters went. Los pintores dieron, the painters gave. Los pintores escribieron, the paint- ers wrote. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 235 578. Model sentences. (a.) El pintor escribi6 una carta al hijodeljuez. (6.) Las mugeres escribieron cartas al carpintero de navlo. (c.) El juez fu6 i. casa del mddico. {d.) El Americano tiene dinero. (e.) La muger tiene hambre. The painter wrote a letter to the judge's son (97). The woman wrote letters to the ship carpenter (97, a). The judge went to the doctor's (97, a). The American has money. The woman has hunger, i. c. the woman is hungry. 579. The Spanish for ^^ship carpenter^'^ ^s seen above (578, b), is car- pintero de navio, "carpenter of ship." So ^^ ship surgeon" ^^ coach horses" would be " surgeon of ship" *' horses of coach." 580. It can not be said in Spanish, " I am hungry " "Iain thirsty,'' " I am afraid " but, "/ have hunger" "/ have thirst," "/ have fear." El impresor tiene hambre, should be translated in English, "the printer is hungry" and not " the printer Jias hunger." So " John is thirsty," should be translated in Spanish, Juan tiene sed, "John has thirst." 581. Spanish to be translated into English. Los impresores (93) tienen dinero. Las mugeres (93) tioHen hambre (580). Los pintores tienen libros (94). Los jueces (95, a) tienen sed. Las mugeres dieron libros al padre de la Francesa. Los hombres dieron dinero a la madre del Americano. Los carpinteros fueron a casa* del pintor. Los medicos fueron a casa del juez. Los criados del' juez escribieron cartas a las criadas de la Francesa. Los jueces escribieron cartas a la madre del pintor. Los carpinteros de navio (579) tienen dinero. La hermana del impresor escribio una carta al padre del carpintero. El marido de la Francesa escribio una carta a la madre del juez. El hermano de la Francesa fue a easa del Americano. El pintor escribio al medico una carta. El medico fue a casa del impresor. La hija del carpintero tiene dinero. La hermana del medico tiene una cuchara de plata (97, a). El libro tiene hojas de oro (97, a). El caballo tiene hambre. Los bueyes (93) tienen * Casa, when it means a house, as a place of residence, or home^ does not take the artir 'e before it, as in English. 236 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. sed. El carpintero de navio tiene hojas de plata (97, a). El Jiermano del impresor dio al pintor una cuchara de oro (97, a). El hijo del carpintero dio un libro a la hermana del Americano. Al medico dio el Americano (575) una cuchara de plata. Al juez la Francesa escribio una carta. A los criados dio la muger (575) libros. Escribio la madre de la Francesa cartas a las hijas del medico. Dio el Lermano del impre- sor al pintor una cuchara de oro. A las mugeres dieron los jueces cucharas de plata. * 582. English to be translated into Spanish. The painters (93) have money. The printers (93) have books. The women have husbands (94). The carpenters gave a (85) book to the son of the judge. The sons of the American gave money to the male-servants of the physician. The daughters of the French-woman wrote letters to the sons of the judges (95, a). The physician wrote letters to the mother of the painter. The male-servants of the phy- sician wrote letters to the female-servants of the French- woman. The printers went to [the] house of the judge. The horses are (580) hungry. The men are (580) thirsty. The oxen (93) are thirsty. The ship carpenter (97, a) went to the physician's* (97. a). The judge's son (97) went to the painter's (97, a). The French-woman's daughter gave to the carpenter a sil- ver spoon (97, a). The printer's brother gave to the painter a gold spoon. The carpenter's son has money. The physician's sister wrote a letter to the judge's daugh- ter. The male-servant is hungry (580). The woman is thirsty (580). The painter is hungry. The American is thirsty. The judge's daughter wrote a letter to the phy- sician's sister. To the judge the French-woman wrote a letter. * That is, " to [the] house of the physician," EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 237 SECTION THIRD. 583. In cases in which the position of adjectives would present any difficulty to the learner, the order of the words will be numbered : thus, los hombres^ magndnimos^ son bienhechores del genero^ humano^. The figures here indicate that in translating into English, " magndnimos " is to come before ^^hombres," and ^'humano" before ^^genero;" as, " the magnanimous men are benefactors of the human race." The order in which English words must be placed in Spanish, will be indicated in the same manner when deemed necessary; thus, "the^ openS rebuke^ is2 better^ than [the] secret2 love^" Here the figures show the order in which the words should be arranged in translating into Spanish ; as, mejor es la correccion Ttianifiesta^ que el amor escondidoj that is, "better is the rebuke open, than the alfection hidden." 584. A sentence is rendered negative in Spanish by placing the adverb no {not) before the verb ; as, Juan no es sdbw, " John is not wise ;" Pedro no tiene dinero, "Peter has not money;" Marza no tiene sed, " Mary is not thirsty ;" Diego no escribio cartas," James wrote not let- ters " (or, *' James did not write letters "). EXERCISE III. 585. Vocabulary, Sibio, wise. Ignorante, ignorant. Impio, impioiiSj wicked. Falaz, deceitful-, false. Rico, rich. Pobre, poor. Bueno, good. Malo, bad, evil. Nuevo, new. Ingles, English. Espanol, Spanish. Frances, French. Amigo, friend. Lingua, tongue, language. General, general. Es, is. El Espaiiol ama, the Spaniard loves. Y, and. 586. Model sentences. (a.) El Espaiiol no tiene libros2 franceses.i Teriebroso, dark, gloomy, Fuerte, strong. Robusto, robust. Estrecho, narrow, close. Sob^rbio, proud. Viejo, old. Espacioso, spacious, wide. Hermosa, beautiful, handsome. Grande, great. Lindo, pretty. Dos, two. Tres, three. Camino, road, way. Verdad, trvih. Ej^rcito, army. Son, are. Los Espanoles aman, the Spaniards love. E', and (before i). The Spaniard (100) has not (SS-l) French books. ?38 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. (6.) La Espanola tiene una 16ngua2 falaz.i (c.) El general es fuerte y robusto. (rf.) El viejo es s^bio. (c.) Las hijas son sob^rbias 6 igno- rantes/ The Spanish- woman (IJO, a) has a deceitful tongue. The general is strong and robust. The old-man (102) is wise. The daughters are proud (100, a) and (587) ignorant. 587. yis used for the conjunction "a7i/f," except before words begin ning with i or hi, when e is used ; as, el hombre y la muger, " the man and the woman ;" viejo ^ impw" old and impious ;" hijos e hijas, " sona and daughters." 588. Spanish to be translated into English. El camino es estrecho. La casa es espaciosa (100, a). Las mugeres son soberbias (99, and 100, b). Los Ingleses (102) no (584) tierien dinero. Las Inglesas (100, b) nc tienen hambre. Los Espanoles (99 and 100, b) no tienen sed. Las Americanas (100, b, and 102) son hermosas. Los libros son nuev^s. Un buen (101) general es el (87) alma de un ejercito. El Frances (102) es pobre y sober- bio. El amigo del medico es ignorante. El juez es sabio y rico. La lengua^ falaz^ no ama la verdad. Los Ameri- canos aman dinero. Los hijos del pintor son fuertes y robustos. Los pobres tienen hambre. El camino de los impios (102) es tenebroso. El her- mano del carpintero dio un libro* francos^ a la hermana del Ingles. El padre de la Francesa es viejo y pobre. El criado del pintor tiene dos libros^ malos^ Las hijas del impresor tienen tres cucharas^ nuevas^ Los jueces escri- bieron cartas^ inglesas' a las hermanas del general. El caballo es fuerte. Los hijos del medico son males e igno- rantes. Las mugeres^ falaces' (95, a) no aman la verdad. Las hijas del amigo del impresor dieron al criado tres libros nuevas y hermosas. El general del ejercito es un gran (101, a) hombre. Los grandes generales del ejer- cito son amigos del juez. Los caminos de los impios son males. Las Francesas no son lindas. Los pobres y loa ricos son soberbios. La hija del Espanol es linda y rica. El Americano es soberbio e ignorante. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 239 589, English to he translated into Spanish. The Frenchman (100) wrote letters to the Spanish- woman (100). The Americans are friends of the English (Ingleses), The way of the wicked (102) is dark. The daughters of the Spaniard (Espanol) are pretty. The books are new. The house of the physician is spacious. The horses of the Englishman are strong. The sons of the judge are poor and proud. The daughter of the French-woman is proud and (587) ignorant. The sisters of the painter are rich and handsome. A good (101) man loves the truth. A false^ tongue* loves not (584) the truth. The Spaniards and the Americans love money. The silver spoons (cucharas de plata) are new. The road is narrow. The judge's son (97) is bad and (587) igno- rant. The printers are rich. The physician's male-ser vant is robust. The physician's horse is old. The poor-man (102) wrote a letter to the rich-man's (102) sons. The carpen- ter gave three books to the friend of the painter. The father of the French-woman gave two French^ books' to the mother of the printer. The judge's father gave three English^ books* to the general's mother. The sisters of the American are not (584) wise. The house is not (584) spacious. The general of the army wrote net letters to the father of the judge. The Frenchmen are hungry (tienen hamhre). The Englishmen are thirsty. The judge is not hungry. The women are not thirsty. The general gave a great (101, a) sum (sumo) of money fco the poor- men. The road is wide. The road is not narrow. The sisters of the Englishman are not beautiful. The male- servant has not money. The American is proud and ignorant. The Spaniard's father is old and poor. 590. In Spanish, proper names employed as adjectives are not gener- ally written with a capital initial letter ; thus we write, libros espanolea^ " Spanish books," and not Ubros Espanoles. 240 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. SECTION FOURTH. EXERCISE IV. 591. Voccbbulary, Alto, hight hfly. *^ulpable, culpable. 4Lmable, amiable, Belio, Jine, elegant, Escrupuloso, scrupulous. Todo, every, all Sol, sun. Luna, moon. Estrella, star. Plane ta (masc), planet. Prud^ncia, prudence. Tesoro, treasure. El medico hallo, the doctor found. 592. Model sentences. (a.) El medico hallo un libro ale- man en el camino. (6.) La Alemana es de muy gran prud^ncia. (c.) Maria es una muger muy ama- ble. {d.) Los montes son altlsimos. (e.) El caballo es mas litil que el buey. (/.) El sol es el mas brillante de todos los planetas. 593. Spanish to he translated into English. La muger es muy (108) amable. El juez es muy (108) viejo La Francesa es muy vieja. El criado es muy cul- pable. La lengua'^ esparola^ es bella y muy armoniosa. La luna es muy brillante. Las estrellas son muy brillan- tes. Las torr*p son altisimas (108). Las Espa'^oles son m«y soberbios El juez es muy escrupuloso. La cas ' e* altisima (108). El buey es tan (104) fuerte como (1 )4) el caballo. El caballo es tan viejo como el buey. El pi t es mas (106) robusto que (106) el impresor. Las ci la Brillante, brilliant. G^rrulo, garrulous, taikative, Armonioso, Jiarmonious. Benigno, benign. Aleman, Germaiu Sombrero, hat. Leon, lion. Bestia, beast. Torre, (fem.), tower. Monte, mountain. Genio, genius, disposition. En, 172, on. \ found. Los medicos hallaron, the doctors The physician found a German book in the road. The German-woman (100, a) is of very great prudence. Mary is a woman very amiable. The mountains are most high. The horse is more useful than the ox. The sun is the most brilliant of al the planets. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 241 de la Espanola (100, a) son mas garrulas que los criados del Aleman. El sol es mas brillante que la luna. La luna es m^nos (105) brillante que (105) el sol. La hija del medico es menos (105) hermosa que la hija del juez. Las casas no son tan altas como las torres. El sol es un planeta brillantisimo. La Francesa es la mas (109) hermosa de todas las mugeres. Los Inglesas son mas (106) soberbios que los Alemanes. Los pintores son los mas (109) ricos de todos los hombres. Las her- manas del impresor son las menos (109) garrulas de todas las mugeres. La Espanola es de muy gran prudencia. El marido de la Inglesa es un hombre soberbio y muy igno- rante. El leon es el mas fuerte de las bestias. El juez es de genio benignisimo. El amigo del general did al Frances tres libros^ alemanes^ El viejo hallo un tesoro en el camino. Los hijos del pintor hallaron un sombrero^ nuevo^ en el camino. Los hermanas del carpintero escribieron cartas a los jueces^ es- crupulosos^ Los generales del ejercito son culpables. La madre del impresor es muy viejo. Las hijas del carpin- tero tienen hambre. Los buenos (102) aman la verdad. La muger hallo dos cucharas de oro en el camino. El medico tiene tres libros^ franceses^ El juez ama lo (84) bueno. 594. English to he translated into Spanish. The mountain is very (108) high. The male-servant is very (108) old. The Spanish^ language^ is elegant and very harmonious. The sun is most (108) brilliant. The stars are very brilliant. The painter is as (104) proud as (104) the judge. The horse is as (104) strong as (104) the ox. The carpenter is as rich as the printer. The daughters of the German-woman {Alemana) are less (105) culpable than (105) the daughters of the Spanish-woman {Espanola). The stars are less (105) brilliant than the moon. The moon is less brilliant than the sun. The 21 242 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. carpenter is more (106) ignorant than (106) the painter. The lion is stronger* than the horse. The judge is wiser than the physician. The sister of the printer is the most talkative (109) of all the women. The mother of the German is the most (109) proud of all the women. The general is a man of very great (101, a) prudence. The physician is the least (109) ignorant of the judge's friends. The lion is the strongest (most strong) of all the beasts. The judge is the wisest of the men. The German is of [a] disposition most (108) benign. The English^ language^ is not as har monious as the Spanish^ language^ The hat is newer than the book. The book is less new than the hat. The printers are hungry. The male-servant is thirsty. The carpenter found a new^ spoon^ of silver in the road. The judge's daughters found a treasure in the road. The painter's sons love the truth. The (84) good is preferable {preferible) to the (84) beautiful. The mountains are very high. The Englishman gave to the German two French^ books^ The sister of the painter wrote not letters to the sons of the carpenter. The (87) housekeeper is proud and ignorant. SECTION FIFTH. 595. Personal pronouns must always agree with the nouns for which they are substituted, in gender, person, and number. Thus, if it is said, " John lost his pen {jpluma) and Peter found i7," the pronoun " it " must be rendered, in Spanish, by to, because plwnia is feminine. EXERCISE V. 596. Vocabulary. Oonfianza, conjidence. Alguno, some^ any. Hablo, {Tie) spoke. Vio, {he) saw. Vino, (he) came. Para,ybr. Mucho, much^ many. Hablaron, {tfiey) spoke. Hizo, ijie) made, (he) did. Vinieron, {they) came. * That is, as it would be expressed in Spanish, " more stror.^." EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 243 Tii eres, thmi art. Yo voy, Igo^ lam-going, Comprar, {to) buy, Hablar, {to) speak. Pedro, Peter. The judges brought him to- you. I am-going to see her. Bring it to-me (Bring-me-it) Peter saw me. The Frenchman spoke to-me. Yo* soy, / am. Nosutros somos, we arc. Traed, bring {ye). Dar, {to) give. Ver, {to) see. 597. Model sentences. (a.) Losjuecesos le llevaron (115, a). (6.) Yo voy ^ verla (116). (c.) Traedmelo (116). {d.) Pedro me vio (113). (e.) El Frances me hablo (114). 598. Spanish to be translated into English. [The personal pronouns are in Italics.] Pedro me (113, and 114) escribio dos cartas. Ella U ( 1 1 3, and 1 1 4. b) dio un libro. El los{\\ 4, a) hallo. Ella les (1 14, b) escribio algunas cartas. El medico /t;^ (114, b) hablo. Yo soy pobre y viejo. Tu eres muy sabio. El es ignorante. Nosotros somas fuertes y ricos. El pintor ^e (1 14) dio una cuchara de plata. La muger nos (114) vio. El carpiutero ncs hablo. Los Espa Holes h hablaron. El juez h vio. La Fraucesa los (114, a) vio. La Inglesa las vio. El carpintero lo hizo para (1 L"^) el. El impresor tiene mucha confianza en ella (115). Los pintores tienen confianza en el. El Aleman lo hizo para mi. El medico tiene mucha confianza en ellos. El padre del impresor tiene confianza en nosotros. El Frances la vio. El juez las vio. El Americano hallo un sombrero en el camino, y le\ dio al hermano del juez. La muger hallo una cuchara en el camino, y la dio a la hija de Pedro. Pedro hallo tres cucharas, y me Z(2s(115, a) dio. La Espanola hallo dos sombreros, j nos los (115, a) dio. Ellos nos escribieron * For the present, we shall use the nominative personal pronouns with the verb, though it is not in general required. (See 139, a.) t "Z/e" here means "i^," and refers to sombrero, being of the same. ge«der. (See 595.) . . 244 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. algunas cartas. Yo voy a hablarZe (116). Yo voy a verle (116). Yo la (116, a) voy a ver. Pedro tiene muchos libros, y me dio algunos de ellos {[15). El medico vino consigo {ll5j c). La Inglesa vino con^i^o (115, c). Los pintores vinieron conmigo. TraedweZo5 (116). Trsidmele (116). Traedw^ (116) ^na cuchara. Traeo5 (116, b) algu- nas cucharas. Yo voy a darZ^5 (116) tres sombreros. Ella tiene algunos libros ; yo voy a comprar/o5. La muger tiene muchas cucharas de oro ; yo voy a comprarto. Pe- dro OS dio dos sombreros ; yo Jos voy a comprar. 599. In forming a negative sentence, the adverb no must come not only before the verb, but also before personal pronouns of the first-objee- tive case; as, Juan no me la dijoj "John not to-me it said," i. c, "John said it not to-me," or as it would be commonly expressed in English, ' John did not say it to me." 600. Vnid. (pronounced usted) is generally used in common conversa- tion, and though of the third person, is equivalent to the English word "you" (see 110, c) : thus the sentence, "you are rich," if addressed to one person, would be vmd. es rico (" your-worship is rich ") ; if address- ed to more than one person, vms. son ricos (" your- worships are rich"). W^hen females are referred to, the feminine form of the adjective must be used. Vmd. es muy sabio. V7n,d. tiene hambre. Vd. (110, c) me dio un libro. Vm. tiene una casa. Vms. tienen sed. Vms. aman la ver dad. V7ns. no son soberbios. El juez tiene mucha confianza en vd. Pedro le (see 112, II.) dio el libro. El Aleman no le dio dinero. La Alemana no le hablo. La muger no me hablo. El pintor no le vio. El carpintero no los hallo. Yo voy a darZe un libro. V. (110, c) es rico. VV. (110, c) son pobres. Vds. son so- berbios. 601. English to he translated into Spanish. Peter wrote me (113 and 114) two letters. The painter gave him (113 and 114, b) a book. She found them (114, a). He wrote to-them (114, b) some letters. I am old and poor. The judge spoke to-them (114, b). Thou art very rich. He is wise. We are ignorant. They are EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 245 strong and rich. The painter gave thee (114) a silver spoon. The woman saw us (H4). The carpenter spoke to us (114). The Spanish-women spoke to him (114, b). The physician saw him (114, a). The French-woman saw them (masc). The German-woman saw them (fern.). The carpenter made it (Zo) for him (115). The painter has confidence in* her (115). The printers have much confi- dence in him (115). The American made it for me (1 15). The physician has much confidence in them (masc). The mother of the painter has much confidence in us. The Spaniard saw her. The Frenchman saw them. Peter saw him. They spoke to-me (114). The French-woman found two hats, and gave them to Peter. The woman found a book in the road, and gave it (595) to the physician. The American found a spoon in the road, and gave it (595) to the judge's daughter Peter found three spoons, and gave them to-me (1J5, a). They wrote us some letters. They (fem.) spoke to-us (114). I am-going to speak to him (116, and 116, a). I am going to see her (116, and 1 16, a). I her (116, a) am-going to see. The physician came with-him (115, e). Peter has many books, and he-gave {did) me some of them (115). The Frenchman came with-thee (115, c). The carpenters came with-me. Bring me (116) a book. Bring him-to-me (116). Bring-me-them (1^) Bring (1 16, b) yourselves (os) some spoons. I am-going to give-him (116) three books. I am- going to give them (1 16) three hats. She has some books ; I am-going to buy them (116). The judge has many gold spoons (97, a) ; I am-going to buy them. Peter gave you three books ; I them ( 1 1 6, a) am-going to buy. I am-going to see them (masc). I am-going to see them (fern.). E^" The remaining exercises in this section are to be rendered by vmd. and its objective cases, when the second person ^^ you" occurs in English (see 600). Instead of vmd., any of the other abbreviations, F., Vd., Vm. (all pronounced listed), may be used ; and instead of xiiides., the other abbreviations in the plural, FK, Fs., Vms., Vds,, may be used (See no, c). 21* 246 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Yoa gave me a book. You are very wise. You are hungry. You have a house. You (plur.) are thirsty. You (plur.) are not proud. You (plur.) love the truth. The physician has much (confidence in you (115). The judge gave you the book. The American gave you (le) not money. The painter spoke not to-you {le). The woman spoke not to-you (plur.). She spoke not to-me. The paint- er saw thee not. The carpenter found them not. I am- going to give you (le) a book. Peter saw you (le). ' Every sentence in the preceding English eKercises should be carefully written, and the rules for the position of the pronouns well studied. By examining the Spanish exercises, the private learner will be able to know whether or not he renders the personal pronouns in the English sentences correctly in the Spanish. We would recommend to the learner to write and re-write these exercises, as well as the preceding ones, till he becomes perfectly familiar with the rules referred to in trans- lating from one language to the other. SECTION SIXTH. EXERCISE VI. 602. Vocabulary. Calle (fem.), street, Mano (fem.), hand. Sobrino, nephew. Levanto, (he) raised. Duele, {if) pains^ (it) aches. 603. Model sentences. {a.) Las casas son swyos (119, a; 120). (b.) Los sombreros son suyos de el (120, a), (c.) Tu (119) hermana y la mm (121) tienen hambre y sed. (fZ.) Pedro es amigo mio (121, b). (e.) La muger levanto los ojos (122). (/.) Le duele la garganta de Pedro (122, a). Cabeza, head, Garganta, throat, Ojo, eye. Tomo, {he) took. Por, by, through. The houses are his (or hers, or theij's). The hats are his. Thy sister and mine are hungry and thirsty. Peter is a friend of mine. The woman raised her (the) eyes. The throat of Peter pains him,* i, e„ Peter's throat is sore. * Literally, " to-him pains the throat of Peter." EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 247 604. Spanish to he translated into English. Mis (119) amigos hallaron un tesoro en el camino. Un amigo mio (119, a) hallo un sombrero. Tu (119) hijo vio un libro en la calle. El juez hablo a sus (119) amigos. Mi madre tiene hambre. Su (120) criado tiene sed. Su (120) hija tiene tres cucharas. Todos mis libros son tuyos (119, a). Yo voy a su easa. Nuestras criadas son culpa- bles. El libro es mio (119, a). La cucliara es tuya (119, a), Los sombreros son nuestros. Mi padre me vio. Las casas son suyas de el (120, a). Los caballos son suyos do ella (120, a). Las cucharas son suyas de ellos. Las casas son mias. Tu (119) madre y la mia (121) tienen prudencia. Tus hermanos y los mios (121) son muy pobres. Sus (120) hermanas y las nuestras son soberbias. Pedro es sobrino mio y suyo de ella (121, a). El medico es amigo mio y suyo de el (121, a). Una criada mia (121, b) hallo un sombrero en la calle. El dio el libro a un amigo nuestro (121, b). El levanto las (122) manos. Ella levanto los (122) ojos. Pedro levanto la cabeza. El criado tiene un sombrero en la (122) mano. Ella le tomo por la (122) mano. El la tomo por la (122) mano. La (122, a) cabe- za me (122, a) duele. Te (122, a) duele la (122, a) cabe- za.* La cabeza les (122, a) duele. Me (122, a) duele la garganta. La cabeza nos (122, a) duele. La garganta le(122, a) duele. La garganta les duele. El pintor le (122, a) tomo el (122, a) sombrero, y fue a casa del medi- co. La muger les (122, a) tomo los (122, a) sombreros. Mi sobrino levanto la ( 1 22) cabeza. Vmd. tiene su (123) dinero. La muger tieue su (123^, libro. Vmd. escribio algunas cartas a sus (123) amigos. Yms. dieron tres libros a sus criadas. El medico le (123, a) dio a vmd (123, a) muchos libros. Su (123, a) hijo de * " Te duele la cabeza^' means the same as "/a cabeza te, duele,^^ the difference in ccnstruetion not altering the meaning. (.Scj 575.) 248 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. vmd. (123, a) cs muy amable. Sus (123, a) hijas de vmdes, son muy hormosas. Las easas son suyas de Y. (120, a), Los caballos son suyos de VY. (120, a). Sus hermanas de Yd. son amabilisimos. Sus libros de Yms. son buenos. Ym. hallo £u (123) dinero. 605. English to be translated into Spanish. My (119) friend is rich. My (119) mother is poor. My (119) frivmds found a treasure in the road. Thy (119) sister saw a b:>ok in the street. A friend of mine (121, b) found a hat. The physician spoke to his (119) friends. My brother is hungry. His (120) horse is strong. All my books are tMne (119, a). His (120) female-servant is thirsty. I am-going to his (or her) house. Our (118) female-servants are talkative. The book is mine (1 19, a). The spoon is thine (il9, a). The hats are mine (119, a). The houses are mine (119, a). The books are ours. My father saw me (113). The houses are his {suyas de el). The spoons are hers (i?3, s). The horses are theirs (fern. ; 120, a). Thy (119) house and mine {la mia ; 121) are beautiful. Thy mother and mine (121) bcve prudence. Thy brothers and mine (121) are very poor. Thy sisters and ours (121) are proud. Peter is [a] nephow of mine (121, b) and hers ( 12 1, a). The painter is a friend of mine (120; b) and his (120, a; 121, a). A female-servant of mine (121, b; found a hat in the street. He gave the book to a frient . of ours (121, b). She raised her (122) hands. He raisai his (122) eyes. Peter raised his (122) head. She raistv her (122) eyes. The male-servant has a hat on {en) hC' {la; 122) head. He took her by her (122) hand. Sh. took him by his (122) hand. My (122, a) head aches (tbi head to-me aches; 122, a). Thy (122, a) head aehes (ic thee aches the head, 122, a). His (122, a) head acheb Peter's head aches (603, f). My (122, a) throat paiuh me. Thy (122, a) throat is-sore {duele). The physiciiju EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 249 took his (122, a) hat, and went to [the] house of the paint- er. The women took their (122, a) hats. (a ) In the remaining exercises, when the second person (you or ycmr) occurs, it is to be rendered by vmd. and its objective cases and posses- sive pronouns ; thus, " You found your book," vmd. hallo su librOj liter- ally, ^^ your-worship found his book." So, "John gave the book to you" Juan le dio el libro, or Juan le dio a vmd. el libro, literally, " John gave the book to him^" i. c, " to your-worship." The painter has your (123) book. You have your (123) money. You wrote letters to your (123) friends. You gave a book to your father. You (plur.) gave to your male-servants two silver spoons (97, a). The physician gave you (to-him gave to your-worship ; 123, a) many books. Your* (123, a) son is very amiable. Your (123, a) daughters are very beautiful. The houses are yours [suyas de vmd. ; 120, a). The horses are yours (120, a). The oxen are yours. The painter gave you (123, a) three hats. Your (123, a) sons are proud. Your (123, a) sis- ters are most amiable (108). You have not your money. The woman has not your book. You wrote not letters to your friends. Your father is rich. SECTION SEVENTH. EXERCISE VII. 606. Vocabulary, Cuidado, care^ anxiety. Juan, John, Cuarto, room, Ciudad, citj/. Agradable, agreeable^ pleasant, Posible, possible. Sabe, {he) krunos. Hacer, to make, to do. Leer, to read. Dios, God. Maria, Mary, Nombre, name. Sabidurla, wisdom. Desgraciado, unfortunate, unhajjpy. Imposible, impossible. Saben {they) know. Decir, to say. Tomar, to take. * That is, "his son of your voorship,^* su hijo de vmd. (See 123, a). 250 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. My brothers are {they) who saw them. The painters whom you saw, and of whom John spoke, are very rich. The man whose brother is general of the army, found a treasure in the city. She knows what is good. She who has money, has care. 607. Model sentences. (a.) Mis hermanos son quienes (124, a) los vio. [b.) Los pintores d quienes (124, b) vmd. vio, y de los cuales (124, c) Juan hablo, son muy ricos. (c.) El hombre cuyo (124, d) her- mano es general del ejercito, hallo un tesoro en la ciudad, (d.) Ella sabe lo que (125, b) es bueno. (e.) La que (125, c) tiene dinero, tiene cuidado. 608. Spanish to be translated into English. El juez es quien (124, a) vio las cartas que (124, c) vmd. escribio. Las Francesas son quienes (124, a) dieron los libros a Pedro. El hombre a quien (125, a) el Ale- man dio los sombreros, es muy rico e ignorante. Las mugeres a quienes (125, a) el medico escribio las cartas, son muy pobres e ignorantes. El juez dio los libros a un pintor^ ingles^ (100, c) en quien (125, a) el medico tiene mucha confianza. Los mugeres para quienes (125, a) Pe- dro escribio las cartas, son muy hermosas y ricos. La Espanola a quien (124, b) Pedro ama, es muy bermosa. Las Francesas a quienes (124, b) vmd. vio, me (1 13 ; 114) escribieron muchas cartas. Las cucharas que (124, c) Maria tiene, y las cuales (124, c) el Frances hallo, son mias. El caballo que (124, c) Juan vio, y del cual (124, e) Pedro hablo, es robusto y fuerte. Las calles cuyas (124, d) casas son hermosas, son agradables. El criado cuyo (124, d) nombre es Pedro, vino a mi casa. Las casas cuyos (124, d) cuartos son espaciosos, son muy agradables. Juan dio el libro a una muger cuyo nombre es Maria. El pintor y el impresor vinieron a Madrid, en cuya (124, d) ciudad el pintor hallo un tesoro. El hombre que (125) tiene prudencia, es muy sabio. El hombre que tiene dinoro, tiene cuidado. La muger que (125) OS soberbia e igno'^ante, es desgraciada. Los horn- EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 251 bres que (125) tienen dinero, tienen cuidados. Lo que (125, b) es imposible para los (230) hombres, es posible para Dios. Lo que (125, b) es nuevo, no es viejo. El pintor tiene el tesoro que el medico hallo en la calle. Pedro ama lo que (125, b) es bueno. Ella sabe que (125, b) hacef. El hombre no sabe que (125, b) hacer. Pedro sabe lo que es bueno. La Francesa no sabe que decir. Las hijas del juez no saben que comprar. El pintor no sabe que (125, b) libro leer. Los Alemanes no saben cual (125, b) sombrero tomar. Mi hermana no sabe cuales libros leer. La que (125, c) es soberbia, no es amable. Los que (125, c) aman la verdad, son sabios. El que (125, c) tiene sabiduria, tiene prudencia. Mi hermano tiene un tesoro, que (124, c) su criado hallo en la ciudad. El que tiene prudencia, es sabio. Los que nos dieron los libros, son amigos nuestros (121, b). La que no es agradable, es des- graciada. La ciudad en que (126) Juan hallo el tesoro, es grande y hermosa. La muger a quien Maria hablo, es muy amable. El que tiene oro, tiene mucho cuidado. El Aleman dio dos libros al hombre a quien (124, b) Juan vio. El medico dio tres libros a la Francesa en quien mi madre tiene mucha confianza. El pintor fue a Madrid, en cuya (124, d) ciudad las calles son agradables y las casas hermosas. Las criadas no saben que hacer. 609. English to he translated into Spanish. The physician is [he] who (124, a) wrote the letter which (124, c) you {vmd.) saw. The judge is [he] who (124, a) saw the letters which (124, c) you (vmd) wrote. The Spanish-women are [they] who (124, a) gave the books to Peter. The man to whom ( 1 25, a) John gave the hats, is very rich and (587) ignorant. The women to whom (125, a) the judge wrote the letters are very poor and ignorant. The women for whom (125, a) Mary wrote the letters, are very amiable and beautiful. The physician 252 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. gave the spoons to an English^ painter^ (100, c), in whom (125, a) the judge has much confidence. The French- woman whom (124, b) Peter loves, is very beautiful. The German-woman whom (124, b) you (vmd.) saw, wrote me many letters. The spoons which (124, c) Mary has, and which ( 1 24, c) the Frenchman found, are mine. The male- servant who (125) came with me (115, c), is strong and robust. The horse which (124, c) John saw, and of which (del cual ; 124, c) Peter spoke, is strong. The streets whose (124, d) houses are beautiful, are agreeable. The man whose (124, d) name is John came to my house. The woman whose name is Mary gave me three books. The houses whose (124, d) rooms are spacious, are very pleasant. John gave three silver spoons to a woman whose name is Mary. The painter and the printer came to Madrid, in which (124, d) city the painter found a trea- sure. The man who (125) has prudence, is wise. The woman who (125) is proud and ignorant, is unhappy. The men who have money, have cares. That which (125, b) is possible for Peter, is possible for John. What (125, b) is possible for the painter, is not possible for the carpenter. The Frenchman has the treasure that (124, c) the physi- cian found in the street of the city. Peter loves what (125, b) is good. Mary knows what (125, b) is good. The German knows what (125, b) to-do. The painter knows not what (125, b) to-do. The French-woman knows not what to-say. The physician's sister knows not what to- buy. The male -servants know not what to-say. My father knows not what (125, b) book to-read. My brothers know not which (125, b) books to-buy. The Germans know not which (125, b) hat to-take. She knows not what spoon to-take. He that (125, c) has much gold, has much care. She that (125, c) is proud, is not amiable. They who (125, c) love the truth, are wise. He who has wisdom, has pru EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 253 dence. He who has prudence, is wise. My father has a treasure which (124, c) his male-servant found in the city. They who gave us the books, are friends [of J ours (121, b). She who is not agreeable, is unfortunate. Those who are ignorant and impious, are unhappy. The city in which (126) Peter found the books, is large and beautiful. The woman to whom Mary spoke, is very agreeable. The painter went to Madrid, in which (124, d) city the streets are pleasant and the houses handsome. SECTION EIGHTH. 610. In Spanish, all that is necessary to form an interrogatory sen- tence, is to place the interrogation mark before (inverted) and after the sentence. Thus, Juan tiene dinero, means, "John has money," and I Juan tiene dinero? means, "has John money?" It is, however, com- mon (though not necessary) in Spanish, to place the nominative after the verb in interrogations; as, i tiene Pedro dinero? itienen los pintores libros? " has Peter money 7" "have the painters books 7" 611. The auxiliary werhdo is unknown in Spanish (as also in all the languages of Europe except the English), and all such expressions as, ^^ does John speak?" — "c?o they love 7" — "how much do you ask a week T — " did it not snow during my absence 7" — " did they see her 7" — " Peter did speak," must be rendered in Spanish by the simple form of the verb ; as, i hdbla Juan ? — i aman ellos ? — i cudnto pide vd. por semana? — ^no nevO durante mi ausencia? — ila vieron ellos? — Pedro hablo; that is, "speaks John 1" — "tore they 7"— "how much ask you per week 7" — "snowed it hot during my absence 7" — " her saw thev 7" (or, "saw they her 7") " Peter spofce," EXERCISE VIII. 612. VocahvZary. Aziicar, sugar. Manteca, butter. Esp6cie (fem.) species, sort. Seiior, sir. Si, yes. Toma, (he) takes. Dice (he) says. Habla (he) speaks. Quiere (he) wishes, (he) wants. Pan, bread. A'gua, water. Boton, button. Senora, madam, lady. No, no. Dicen, (they) say. Dijo, (he) said. Entiende, (he) understands. Quieren, (ihey) wish, (they) want. 22 254 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 613. Model sequences. (o.) I Q,ui6n tiene aziicar 7 (6.) I Q,uien habla Ingles 7 (c.) I Cual de los dos pin tores iene dinero 1 (d.) I Que dijo la hija del juez'? (e.) I Qu6 libro tiene vra. 7 (/.) ^ De quien es el tesoro 7 (g.) I Quiere su hijo pan^ seiior 1 (A.) No, senor, mi hijo tiene pan. Who has sugar 7 Who speaks English 7 Which of the two painters has money 7 What said the judge's daughter 7 What book have you 7 Whose is the treasure 7 Does your son want bread, sir 7 No, sir, my son has bread. 614. Spanish to be translated into English. 2, Quien (127) es bueno? ^/Q^^^^^s (^2^) son rices? [ De quien (127) son las casas ? i Cuyos ( 127) libros tiene Vmd. ? 2»^ual{127) de los dos hijos del juez hallo un tesoro ? I Que (127) dijo Ymd. ? i Que (127) sombrero tiene vmd. ? i Que tesoros hallo Pedro ? i Que quiere Vm. ? I Que lengua habla el general ? i Para quien (127, a) escribio Maria las cartas? Para el muger (127, a). iK quienes (127, a) dio Juan los libros^ espanoles^ ? A los Alemanes (127, a), j Que (127, b) hombre es Vm. ! i Que (127, b) hermosa muger! ^^ Q^i^^ quiere pan? I Quien quiere azucar ? i Quien habla Espanol ? i Quien entiende el Ingles? ^/Q^i^^ ^^^ ^^ verdad? ^^ Q^i^^ habla el Frances? i Quien entiende lo que (125, b) Juan dice ? I Que especie de botones quiere Vm. ? i Que especie de azucar tiene Pedro? ^^ Que quieren Vms. ? I Que libros quieren los pintores ? i Que dicen los jueces ? I Toma Vmd. agua ? i Que dijo el hermano del medi- co? Senora,, 2, quiere Vmd. manteca? 2,11^^1^ su (123) hijo Espanol^ senor? Si, senor, mi hijo habla Esparlol. ,. Entiende su hija de Vmd. (123, a) el Ingles, senora? ■STo, senor, ella no entiende el Ingles, i Cuyas cucharas tiene la Francesa ? i Cuyos botones tienen los criados ? i, Cuyo sombrero tiene Juan? iQ\xq libros tiene Pedro? [Quien tiene hambre? ^z Q^i^^^^ tienen sed? ^ Que especie de cucharas tienen las hermanas del Americano ? i Que dicen lo- Espanoles ? i Que quieren Pedro y Juan 1 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 255 I Toma el pintor agua ? i Quien entiende lo que Vms. dicen ? i Que dijo el padre del medico ? i Quien tiene pan ? ^ De quien son los libros 1 i Cual de los dos Fran- ceses Labia Espanol? lA quien habla Ym. 1 2, Tiene Ym. dinero? ^^^ienenlos carpinteros muchos amigos? ^^ Tiene Y. muchos libros? ^^ Tiene el libro hojas de oro ? i Tienen los jueces hambre ? ^z ^s Y. Es- panol ? i Son las casas nuevas ? i No son sus amigos ricos? i Sus hermanas 610 no son tan 104 ricas como el? ^ Mis hermanos no son mas 106 ricos que 106 los carpinteros de navio ? i Escribio el criado de juez cartas a las criadas de la Francesa ? ^ Es la muger ama- ble ? I Son los Ingleses mas soberbios que (106) los Ale- manes ? I Hallo el pintor dos libros en la calle de la ciu- dad ? I Tienen los criados hambre ? Si, senor, los criadas tienen hambre. i Tienen las Espanolas sed ? No, senor, las Espanolas no tienen sed. 615. English to be translated into Spanish. Who (127) is wise? Who is rich? Who (127) are good ? Who are culpable ? Who is strong ? Who are robust? Of whom (127, a) speaks John? Of the phy- sician (127, a). Whose (of whom ; 127, a) are the houses ? Peter's (127, a). Whose (127) books has Mary? Whose (127) buttons have the male-servants? Whose spoons have my sisters ? Which (127) of the two sons of the phy- sician found a treasure in the road ? Which of the two men is culpable? What (127) say you ?* (what says your worship ?) What (127) said you ? What does (611) John wish ? (what wishes John ?) What does (611) Peter say ? What do (611) the judges say? What (127) hat have you? What (127) treasures did Peter find ? (what trea- sures found Peter?) What wish you? What language speaks the general ? For whom (127, a) wrote John the * The learner can use rm., vmd., F., Fw., Vcl., orVi'd. in the singu- lar for you. (See remark at the bottom of p. 245.) 256 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. letters? Tor the French-woman (127, a). To whom (plur.) gave John the French^ books^ ? To the daughters of the judge. What a (127, b) woman ! What a (127, b) beautiful city! Who (127) wishes bread? Who wishes sugar ? Who speaks English ? Who understands the Spanish ^ Who speaks the French ? Who understands what (125, b) Mary says? Who understands what the Americans say? What sort of buttons do (611) you want ? What sort of sugar has John ? What sort of spoons do (611) my friends want? What do (611) the women say? Do (611) you take water ? Do you take sugar ? What said the sister of John ? What said the brother of the physician ? Sir, do you want butter ? (sir, wishes your- worship butter?) Does (611) your (123) son speak Span- ish, sir ? (speaks his son Spanish, sir ?) Yes, madam, my son speaks Spanish. Does (611) your (123, a) daughter understand the English, madam ? No, sir, my daughter does (611) not understand the English. Whose spoons has the female-servant ? Whose hat has Peter ? Whose buttons have the painters ? What books has Mary ? What bread have you? Who is thirsty ? (who has thirst?) Who are hungry? What do (611) the Spaniards say? What wish Peter and John ? What sort of spoons has the daughter of the carpenter ? Does the German take water? Who understands what (125, b) you (plur.) say ? What says the father of the painter ? Who has butter ? Whose (of whom) are the books ? Which of the two Spaniards speaks English? To whom do (611) you speak? Have you money? Have the Frenchmen many friends ? Have you many books ? Has the book leaves of gold ? Are the women hungry? Are you [a] Spaniard? (is your worship Spanish ?) Are you [a] Frenchman ? Are you [a] German ? Are the houses new ? Are not his EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 257 friends rich ? Are not his brothers as ( 1 04) rich as ( 1 04) he? My brothers are-they (son) not richer (106) than (106) the judge's sons? Wrote the son of the painter letters to the French-woman ? Is the woman amiable ? Are the Spaniards more proud than the English ? Did the painter find (found the painter) two books in the road ? Are the Germans hungry ? Yes, sir, the Germans are hungry. Are the Spanish- women thirsty ? No,' madam, the Spanish-women are not thirsty. Is John [a] carpen- ter ? Yes, sir, John is [a] carpenter. SECTION NINTH. 616. The English demonstrative pronoun " that" is rendered in Span- ish by the definite article when it refers to something having preceded it and is followed by the preposition "of;" as, "my house and that of my servant," mi casa y la de mi criado;" "his only desire was that of freeing his country from the Saracen yoke ;" su Unico deseo era el de libertar d su patria del yugo sarraceno; " the repose of the poor-man is not a cheerless leisure like that of the rich-man," el descanso delpobre no es un ocio insipido^ como el del rico ; " Saguntum endured a siege equal io-that of Numantia," Sagunto sufrioun sitio iqual al de Numdncia; "the soldiers of General Taylor are as brave as those of General Scott," los soldados del'general Taylor son tan valientes como los del gen- eral Scott. 617. When in cases like those referred to in the preceding rule, the possessive case in English is employed instead of the demonstrative pronoun ^^that" the definite article is used in Spanish ; as, "ray house and my servants" mi casa y la. de mi criado; " I-have my book and my father'' s" tengo mi libro y el de mi padre; "my wine is better than John^s" mi vino es mejor que el de Juan ;" that is, " my house and that of my servant," — "my book and that of my father," — "my wine is bet- ter than that of John." EXERCISE IX. / 618. Vocabulary. Pronunciacion, pronunciation, ' Caballero, gentleman. Lampara, lamp Espejo, looking-glass. Cuchillo, knife. Tenedor, fork. Brisa, breeze. Pluma, pen, feather, Diego, James. Lucia, Lucy. 22* 258 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Panadero, baker. Sombierero, hatter, Librero, bookseller. Posadero, innkeeper. Londres, London. Facil, easy. Pero, but. 619. Model sentences. (a.) Aquellas (128) mugeres tienen prudencia. b.) Aquellos a quienes (129) mi padre hablo, no tienen dinero. J.) Pedro dio una Mmpara ^ aquella (129, b) que hallo su sombrero. {d.) Juan hablo d aquella d quien (129, a) Vm. vio; or, Juan ha- bl6 a la que (129, a) Vm. vi6. (c.) La pronunciacion del* Espa- nol es mucho mas flcil que la del Ingles. (/.) i^Tiene Vm. mi espejo 6 el (617) de Maria'? Zapatero, sfwemaker Zapato, shoe. Cerveza, beer. Vino, wine. Nueva-York, New York. Ancho, wide. O', or. Those women have prudence. Those (or they) to whom my fa- ther spoke, have not money. Peter gave a lamp to her who found his hat. John spoke to her whom you saw. The pronunciation of the Spanish is much more easy than that of the English. Have you my looking-glass, or Mary's ? 620. Spanish to be translated into English. Este (128) hombre es rico. Aquella (128) muger es soberbia. Esos (128) libros son nuevos. Estas (128) cucharas son de oro. Aquellos (128) pintores son pobres. Estas casas son nuestras. Esos sombreros son mios. Este vino es bueno. Esa cerveza no es bueno. i De quienes son aquellas casas ? ^ De quien es esta casa ? i Quien es ese caballero ? i Habla este caballero la lenguaa espaiiolai ? I Habla esa senora la lengua^ inglesa^ ? Esta lampara es nueva. Ese espejo es viejo. Aquel hombre habla Fran- ces. I Son estos mis zapatos ? i Cuyo es este cuchillo ? I Cuyos son esos tenedores ? La Francesa y la EspaHoIa tienen prudencia; esa (128, c) es mas amable que (106) esta. Aquel (129) a quien (129) mi padre escribio las * The masculine article is here used before Espanol and Jngles, be- cause these agree with idioma (idiom, cr language) understood. Idioma Is masculine (see 4 ^4). EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 259 cartas, tiene muclio dinero. Aquellos a quienes (129) Pedro dio los libros, son pobres e ignorantes. Aquella (129) a quien (129) Juan dio un espejo, es muy hermosa. Diego dio los libros a los (129, a) que Ym. vi6. Lucia dio vino a aquella (129, b) que tiene sed. El librero dio dos libros a la (129, b) que le (113) escribio las cartas. Esta casa y la que vmd. vio, son mias. i No es este el hijo del panadero ? i No es esta la hija del zapatero ? I No son estas las hermanas del posadero ? El sombrerero escribio estas cartas. Esos tenedores son suyos de ella (120, a). Estos cuchil^os son suyos de el (120, a). Este espejo es mio. Este hombre es mi amigo. i Quien es esa muger ? i Quien es este caballero ? ^ Es este el libro de su (123, a) hermana de Ym. ? No, senor, este es el libro de mi padre. Esta brisa es agradable. i No es esta brisa agradable ? i Cuya es esta pluma ? Diego hallo mi sombrero y el (129, c) del medico. Las cucharas de Lucia y las (616) de Maria, son de oro. La pronunciacion del Aleman no es tan facil como la (616) del Espa^ol. Juan no tiene mi libro, pero el tiene el (617) de mi hermana. Las calles de Londres son mas anchas que (106) las (616) de Madrid. La ciudad de Nueva-York no es tan grande como la (616) de Londres. Mi cerveza no es tan bueno como la (617) de Diego. Mi casa es alta, pero la (617) de mi hermano es mas alta. I Tiene Ym. mis plumas 6 las (617) de mi padre? i Tiene el sombrerero mi sombrero 6 el (617) de mi amigo? El sombrerero no tiene su sombrero de Ym. (123, a), pero tiene (he-has) el de su amigo de Ym. i Tiene el panadero mi pan 6 el del posadero ? i Tienen los libreros tus espe- jos 6 los de tu madre ? Los libreros no tienen mis espe- jos, pero tienen {they-have) los de mi madre. La cerveza del posadero es tan bueno como la del zapetero. Los za- patos del librero son tan viejos como los del panadero. El vino de Diego es 'an bueno como el de Pedro. Las callea 260 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. de Nueva-York son mas anchas que (106) las de Lon dres. 62 1 . English to he translated into Spanish. This (128) gentleman is good. This (128) woman is rich. That (128) man is rich. That (128) woman is proud. Those (128) spoons are new. Those (128) books are old. Those painters are poor. These spoons are of gold. These houses are loftj. Those hats are ours. This beer is good. That wine is not good. Of whom are those houses 1 Whose (of whom) is this house 1 Who is that gentlemen? Who (plur.) are those gentlemen^ Does (611) that lady [senora) speak the Spanish^ Ian guage^ 1 Does this gentleman speak the French^ lan- guage^ ? This lamp is not new. That looking-glass is not old. That man speaks English. Are these my shoes ? Whose is this hat ? Whose are these knives ? Whose is this fork ? The Spanish-woman and the Eng- lish-woman have prudence; the former (128, c) is more amiable (106) than the latter (128, c). He (129) to whom (129) my mother wrote the letters, has much money. Those to whom (129) James gave the pens, are poor and ignorant. She (129) to whom (129) the hatter gave a looking-glass, is poor and proud. Lucy gave the spoons to them (129, a) whom you saw. James gave the knives to him (129, a) whom John saw. John gave wine to him (129, b) who is thirsty. Mary gave bread to her (129, b) who is hungry. The bookseller gave three books to her (129, b) who wrote him (1 13) the letters. This house and that (la) which you saw, are mine. Is not this the brother of the hatter ? Is not this the daughter of the baker 1 Are not these the sons of the shoemaker? Are not these the sisters of the inn- keeper? Is not this the mother of the bookseller ? Tlie carpenter wrote these letters. Those knives are hers (120, a). These forks are his (120, a). This looking- EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 261 glass is ours. This man is my friend. Who is this lady 1 Who is that woman ? Who is this gentleman ? Is this the book of your (123, a) brother. No, sir, this is my father's book. Whose is this pen ? Whose are those pens? This breeze is agreeable. Is not this breeze agreeable ? Peter found my hat and that ( 1 29, c) of the physician. The spoons of Lucy and those (616) of Mary are of gold. Mary's spoons and Lucy's (617) are of silver. James has not my book, but he has my sister's (617). The streets of New-York are wider than (106) those (616) of Lon- don. The pronunciation of the French is not so easy as that (616) of the Spanish. The city of Madrid is not so large as that of London. My beer is not as good as John's (617). My wine is not as good as James' (617). My house is lofty, but my father's (617) is more lofty. Have you ( Vm.) my pens or my father's (617) ? Has the hatter my hat, or my friend's (617) ? The hatter has not your (123, a) hat, but he-has your (123, a) friend's (617). Has the baker my bread, or the inn-keeper's (617) ? Have the shoemakers my shoes, or those (617) of my brother? The shoemakers have not my shoes, but they-have (tienen) my mother's (617). The inn-keeper's wine is not as good as the shoemaker's. Peter's shoes are as old as John's. The streets of New York are wider than those of Madrid. SECTION TENTH. 622. In Spanish, two negatives serve to strengthen a negation. Thus, este autor no ve nada de honroso en el cardcter de los Espanoles, " this author not sees nothing of honorable in the character of the Spaniards," or, as it would be expressed in good English, " this author sees nothing honorable in the character of the Spaniards." If in a negative sentence only one negative word is usedy it must always come before the verb ; if two ne- gcMve words are used, the adverb of negation mv^t come before the verbf and the other negative word after it ; thus we can say, Diego nada tieney or, Diego no tiene nada, "James nothing has," or, "James nx)l has nxh 262 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. thtjigf" the meaning in English being, " James has nothing The for- mer mode of expression in Spanish is generally considered more elegeint. EXERCISE X. 623. Vocabulary. Obra, word, deed. Merito, merit. Peso, dollar. Aldeano, villager. F aha, fault, deftct. Rosa, rose. Diferente, diff'erent. Doce, twelve Segun, according-to. Seran, {they) shall be, or, will be. Tendrd,- {he) shall-have, or, will- have. Dara, {he) will-give. Aborrece, (^e) hates. Hay, there-is; there-are. 624. Model sentences. {a.) El juez no dijo mal de n^- die(131). (6.) De n^die el juez dij\ (c) Hay una casa en el camino. {d.) Hay muchas casas en el cami- no. (e.) I Q,u6 hay en ese sombrero ? (/.) I No hay medico en la cuidad ? {g.) i^Hay en Madrid doce pin- tores ? Idioma, (masc.) idiom, language, Mal, evilj HI. Cosa, thing. El Senor, the Lord, Sexo, sex. Espina, thorn. Premiado, rewarded. Diez, ten. Sin, withovi. Sea, {he) may-be. De, Qie) may-give. Diga, {he) may-say. Brilla, {it) shines, {it) glitters Comer, to-eat. nal de n^-^ lijo mal. J The judge said evil of nobody. There-is a house on the road. There-are many houses on the road. What is-there in that hnt ? Is-there not a physician in the city ? Are-there in Madrid twelve paint ers7 ' For other model sentences, the learner is referred to the examples under the indefinite pronouns, on pages 52, 53, and 54. 625. Spanish to be translated into English. Las tres mugeres cada uno (131) de ellas. tiene dos espejos. Estos hombres seran premiados, cada cual (131) segun sus obras. Pedro tiene doce libros, cada uno en uii idioma^ diferente^ Todas (133) las mugeres seran premi- adas, cada cual segun sus meritos. Ella y todas (133) sus hijas son robustisimas (108, a). Maria dio libros a oada EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 263 uno de ellos. Uno y otro (131) saben lo it-is necessary. Pequeiio, littUy small, Fie\, faUhfiU, Fe\i2, fortunate^ happy. Prudente, prudent. ^ Barato, cheap. Puntual, punctual. Negligente, negligent. Frugal, frugal, Cr^o, I-believe. Pretende, (he) pretends. . OjaM ! O that I would to God that ! Nunca, never. 635. Model sentences (a.) Somos (158) Alemanas. (6.) Madrid era pequena, pero ahora es grande. (c.) Pedro serd abogado. {d.) Es posible que V. no sea pre- miado. (e.) Si yo fuese rico, no serla so- berbio. (/.) No cr^o que tii s^as mas dili- gente que yo. {g.) i OjaM hubiese yo sido fiel a ^1. {h.) Siendo, como V. es, tan negli- gente, I qui^n le dar^ a V. libros ? 636. Spanish to he translated into English. Soy (158) hijo del juez. Tu eres joven. i Soy yo rico? Yms. son jovenes. La cucbara no es de oro. Pedro es robusto. El azuear (628) es dulce. Este libro es de (97) Maria. Estos tendores son de plata. Estas senoras son Francesas. V. es (243) Espanol. Vms. son Alemanes. Somos Espanoles. Sois Inglesas. Sou Ingleses. Somos Inglesas. Yms. son Ingleses. Soy (243) Aleman. Es Espaiiola.* Eres Inglesa. Somos carpinteros. Sois pin- tores. Eres zapatero. Es (243) medico. Soy librero. Somos jueces. We-are German-women. Madrid was small, but now is large. Peter will-be a lawyer. It-is possible that you may not be rewarded. If I were rich, I-should not be proud. I do not believe that thou mayest- be more diligent than I. 0-that I had been faithful to him ! Being as you are so negligent, who will give you books 7 * Es Espanola, " she-is a Spanish-woman." te a Spanish-man," or " Spaniard." Es Espanol, " he- 272 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Pedro era (158) posadero. Mis hermanos eran somber- eros, pero ahora son carpinteros. Tu padre era (243) pan- adero, y ahora es librero. Eras medico. Yo era abogado. Eran soldados. E'ramos zapateros. * Erais abogados. Vm. era juez. Yms. eran libreros. Eran impresores, pero ahora son carpinteros. Ella no era una hermosura. I No era yo mas robusto que el ? i Eran abogados ? i Mis hermanas no eran tan culpables como ella ? Erais impre- sores. Yo era general. Estas ciudades eran pequenaSj pero ahora son grandes. El (628) hombre fue (158) criado. Fui castigado. Esta carta fue escrita para mi madre. Fuimos castigados. Las cartas fueron escritas para las Francesas. Fuiste castigado. Ymd. fue premiado. Yms. fueron premiados. Fuisteis castigados. i Fui premiado 1 La Espaiiola fue premiada. Fui joven. Mi madre ha sido (158) desgraciada. He sido desgra- ciado. Has sido premiado. Han sido fieles. Hcmos sido castigados. He sido castigado. Habeis sido fieles. Ella ha sido hermosa. El abogado ha sido desgraciado. Yms. han sido premiados. He sido feliz. Ym. ha sido fiel. Mi hermana habia sido (158) imprudente. Habiamos sido imprudentes. Yo habia sido castigado. Y. habia sido premiado. Yms. habian sido imprudentes. Habiais sido castigados. Seran (158) premiados. Juan sera soldado. Mis her- manos seran abogados. Maria sera una hermosura. Sere medico. Sereis soldados. Yms. seran premiados. Seras castigado. Sere rico. Pedro sera mas rico que Juan, pero Juan sera menos ignorante que Pedro. El vino (628) sera barato este ano. La harina (628) sera barata. El azticar sera caro. Nunca seras juez. . No seran premiados segun (623) sus obras. i Los criados seran castigados? Nunca sereis abogados. Los buenos seran premiados. Se (158) fiel. Se bueno. Sed fieles. Sed puntuales. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 273 Se puntual. Seamos buenos y sabios. Sea (309, f ) cl criado pr«miado. Sean (309, f) las criadas castigadas. Sea (309, f ) Juan tan fiel como Pedro. Sean (309, f ) Yms. Mices. S6a Y. muy feliz. Sean los impios castiga- dos. Que (309, e) las cartas sean escritas. Sea el impre- sor premiado. Quiero que* (552, h) Juan sea (158) rico. Quiero que mis amigos sean buenos. Quiero que Y. sea economico. Quiero que seas feliz. Quiero que seals economicos. Es posible que no seas pobre. Muy probable esf que nunca seals ricos. Esf posible que Juan no sea castigado. Muy probable es que estas senoras nunca sean premiadas. Preciso eraj que ella fuese (158) castigada. Preciso era que fuesen puntuales. EraJ preciso que no fuesemos negligentes. Era preciso que los pintores fuesen economi- cos. 2, No seria (158) este librero el mejor de los dos? Si (635, e) yo fuese rmd., yo seria puntual. Si yo fuera rico, yo seria economico. Si fueran ricos, serian sober- bios. No creo (635, f ) que vuestra madre baya jamas (ever) sido (158) linda (585). No creo que Yms. hayan jamas (ever) sido prudentes. j Ojala hubiese yo sido (158) fru- gal ! i Ojala hubiesen sido prudentes ! j Ojala hubieseis sido frugales ! Seras (158) premiado, si fueres (158) dili- gente. Quiero ser (158) prudentes. Quiero ser diligente. El que es mal (101) hijo no puede ser buen (101) padre. El que es impio, no puede ser amable. Pretende no haber sido (158) enganado. Pretende no haber sido castigado. Siendo (158) como (635, h) eres, tan (635, h) imprudente ^quien te dara (623) dinero? Habiendo sido (158) en- ganado por sus amigos, les escribio muchas cartas. * Que, before the subjunctive mood, is generally a conjunction, mean- ing " thai ;" as, quiero que Maria sea buena, " I wish that Mary may-be good." t "£75" is here used as an impersonal verb, and means " it is." t Era^ used impersonally, meaning " U was" 274 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 637. English to be translated into Spanish. I (139, a) am (158) a (243) soldier. Thou (139, a) art (158) a (243) lawyer. They are young. He (139, a) is diligent. I am frugal. Ye are negligent. You (Vmd.) are (161) punctual. They are fortunate. I am small. She is small* and pretty. You ( Vms.) are (161) prudent. I am a (243) son of the judge. Am I imprudent? The spoon is of gold. These forks are of silver. The ladies are French-women. You ( Vmd.) are a (243) Spaniard. Ye are English-women. We are Germans I am an (243) Englishman. She is a Spanish-woman. Thou art a phy- sician. He is a bookseller. Ye are painters. They are shoemakers. [In the following paragraph, the imperfect tense in English is to bo rendered in Spanish by the imperfect of the indicative.] Peter was (158) an (243) innkeeper. My brothers were hatters, but now are carpenters. Thy father was a baker, and now is a bookseller. Thou wast a physician. I was a lawyer. They were soldiers. We were shoemakers. Ye were lawyers. You (Vmd.) were (161) a judge. You (Vms.) were (161) booksellers. They were printers, but now are carpenters. She was not a (una) beauty. Was I not more robust than he ? Were they lawyers ? Were ^ not^ my^ sisters^ as culpable as she ? Ye were printers. I was general. These cities were small, but now they are large (grandes). [In the following paragraph, the Spanish perfect-definite of the indi- cative is to be used.] Man (628) was (158) created. I was punished. This letter was writtenf for my mother. We were punished, f The letters were writtenf for the French-women. Thou * There is no necessity for em ploying, the pronoun " ella" here, as the gender of the adjective terminations indicates the gender of the nomina- tive of the verb, thus, " es pequenay linda.^^ t The participle after neuter verbs must agree in gender and number with the word to which it belongs. (See 300, a.) EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION.^ 275 wast punished. You (Vmd.) was rewarded. You (Vms.) were rewarded. Ye were punished. I was rewarded. I was young. The Spanish-woman was rewarded. My mother has been (158) unfortunate. I have been unfortunate. Thoujjast been rewarded. They have been faithful. We have been punished. I have been punished. Ye have been faithful. She has been beautiful. The lawyer has been unfortunate. You ( Vms.) have been re- warded. I have been fortunate. You (Vm.) have been faithful. My brother had been (158) imprudent. We had been imprudent. I had been punished. You (V.) had been rewarded. You ( Vms.) had been imprudent. Ye had been punished. They shall-be (158) rewarded. John will be a (243) soldier. My brothers will be lawyers. You ( Vms.) will be rewarded. Thou wilt be punished. I will be rich. Peter will be richer than John, but John will be less ig- norant than Peter. Wine (628) will be cheap this year. Flour (628) will be cheap. Sugar (628) will be dear. Never wilt-thou-be a (243) judge. They will not be rewarded according-to (623) their works. WilP the^ male-servants'^ be^ rewarded? Never will-ye-be lawyers. The good shall-be rewarded. Be-thou (158) faithful. Be-thou good. Be-ye faithful. Be-ye punctual. Be-thou punctual. Let-us-be good and wise. May (309, f ) the male-servant be rewarded. Let (309, f ) the female-servants be rewarded. May John be as faithful as Peter. May (309, f) you (Vms.) be happy. May you ( Vm.) be very fortunate. Let the impious be punished. Let (309, e) the letters be written. Let the printer be rewarded. Lwish that {que ; 552, h) John may -be (158) rewarded. I-wish that my friends may be good. I-wish that you ( V. ) may be economical I-wish that thou mayest-be happy, [-wish that yo may be economical It-is {es) possible that 276 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. thou mayest-not be poor. Yery probable it-is that ye may never (622) be rich. It-is possible that John may not be punished. Yery probable it-is that these ladies never may be rewarded. It-was (era) necessary that she sho^ld-be (314) punish- ed. It-was necessary that they should-be (314) punctual. It-was necessary that we should not be (314) negligent. It-was necessary that the painters should-be (314) econom- ical. Would not this bookseller be (315) the better of the two? If (si) I were (should-be; 314) you (Vmd.) I would-be (315) punctual. If I should-be (314) rich. I would be (315) economical If they should-be (316) rich, they would be (315) proud. I do (611) not believe that the physician's mother may have ever (jamas) been (158) pretty (585). I do not be- lieve that you ( Vms.) may-have ever (jamas) been prudent. 0-that I had (should-have) been (318; 314) prudent! 0-thatI had (314) been (318) frugal! 0-that ye had been frugal ! Thou shalt-be rewarded if thou shouldst-be (319) diligent. I-wish to-be (158) prudent. I-wish to-be diligent. He who is a (243) bad (101) son, can not be (ser) at, (243) good (101) father. He who is impious can not be amiable. He-pretends not to-have been deceived. He-pretends not to have been punished. Being (158) as thou art so (ta7i) imprudent, who will-give (628) thee money? Having been (158) deceived by his friends, he wrote them mjany letters. I^* The learner should now write out, for practice, the different per- sons of all the tenses of the various moods of the verb ser (omitting the nominative personal pronouns), as directed in the Remark at the be- ginning of this section. The distinctions between the tenses will be found in a proper place. SECTION TWELFTH. 638. The different persons of the verb estar are generally rendered In English the same as those of the verb ser / but in Spanish these EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 277 verbs are not employed indiscriminately, the one for the other. Ser is used to affirm what a person or thing is naturally (or by nature), as well as habitual qualities, or pervfianent or characteristic properties of an ob- ject. Estar is used to affirm Iww any thing exists at any period of time, or where any thing exists. Thus the sentences, la donceUa es amable, and la doncella esta amable, would each be rendered in English by "the maid is amiable ;" but in Spanish the former means "the maid is amiable " naturally or permanently, i. e., of an amiable disposition ; the latter means " the maid is amiable" for the time being, though her disposition may be far from being amiable. "Mary is beautiful," is ren- dered Maria es hermosa, since it is intended to affirm a natural quality of Mary, or what she is ; and " Mary is sad," is rendered Maria esta triste," since it is intended to affirm a merely accidental or transient quality, or Jimo she is: "Mary is in the country," is rendered Maria esta en el campo, since estar (and not ser) is used to affirm where a thing is. Juanesbueno, means "John is good," affirming what John is; Juan esta bueno, means " John is well," i. e., in good health, affirming how John is. (For a more complete illustration of this subject, see 333—336.) EXERCISE XIII. 639. Vocabulary. ■ Fonda, hotel Inglaterra, England. Campo, country, field. La senora T— , Mrs. T—. Triste, sad, sorrowful. Enfadado, angry. Ocupado, &iwy, occupied. Caliente, warm. Bueno, well, Aqul, here. I Como 7 how ? Siempre, always, i Cuanto 7 how much? Mesa, table. 640. Model sentences. (a.) I COmo est^ vmd. 7 Estoy muy bueno. {b.) Los pintores est^n en el campo. (c.) La senorita T— siempre est^ ocupada. (d)i,D6nde esti mi Ubro? Aqui estd. Los Estados Unidos, the United States. El sefior T— , Mr. T—. La seiiorita T— , Miss T—. Con ten to, contented, pleased. Enfermo, sick, ill. Cansado, weary, tired, Presente, present. Sobre, upon. Alii, there. j,Donde7 where? Luego, soon, immediately. En casa, at home. Con, with. How are you 7 I-ani very well. The painters are in the country. Miss T — is always busy. Where is my book 7 Here it-ia 24 278 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 641. Spanish to he translated into English. El Frances esta (159) en la ciudad. Estoy en la calle. Estamos tristes. Estan contentos. Estais enfadados. Estas enfermo. Esta ocupado. Estoy cansado. El (87) agua esta caliente. Estas en tu casa. Los abogados estan en la fonda. Mi padre esta en la ciudad. i Estais cansa- dos? No estamos cansados. El impresor siempre esta ocupado. Siempre estas ocupado. ^ Donde esta la fonda? Aqui esta. i Donde esta el libro de Juan ? Aqui esta. I D6nde estan mis cucharas, cuchillos y tenedores ? Aqui estan. i Donde esta mi sombrero ? Esta sobre la mesa. I Como esta Y. ? Estoy bueno (335, e). i Como esta la sefiora B — 1 Esta buena. i Como esta la sefiorita B — ? No esta muy buena. i Esta el senor B — en casa ? Esta en casa. i Estan Vms. buenos ? Estamos buenos. i Esta Ymd. cansado ? No estoy cansado. i Esta Pedro en los Estados Unidos ? No, senor, esta en Inglaterra. Diego esta en el campo. El libro esta sobre la mesa. Estaba (159) enfermo. Yo estaba contento. Estaba mos presentes. Estaban cansados. La senora B — esta- ba ocupada. Yms. estaban presentes. Estabas enfermo. Estabais presentes. i No estaba Y. en el campo ? i No estaba mi padre en la calle ? i Estabamos en la ciudad ? Estabas con tu amigo. Estuve (159) triste dos anos. i Estuvisteis alli muchos anos ? I Estuviste alli ? i Estuvo alli ? i Estuvieron tristes? ^^ Estuvo vmd. mucho* tiempo con el juez ? Nunca he estado (159) en Inglaterra. Nunca ban estado en los Estados Unidos. i Cuanto tiempof ha estado Ymd. en los Estados Unidos ? i Cuanto tiempo has estado en Inglaterra ? Nunca hemos estado en Inglaterra. He esta- do muy enfermo. Habiamos estado (159) muy enfermos. * Mucho tiempo, '* much time," equivalent to " long time," or, great while," in English, t CuavAo tiempo, "how much time," meaning "how long." EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 279 Juan estara (159) en su casa. Estare ocupado. Esta- ran con Vmd. luego. Estaras presente. Estaremos en nuestras casas. Estareis presentes. Estare con Yms. luego. Pedro estara con nosotros luego. Estare en Londres luego. Estad (159) contentos. Estemos (309, f) contentos. Esten (309, f ) presentes. Esta contento. Este (309, f ) el agua caliente. Es pdsible que Pedro este (311) en su casa. Es posible que esteis presentes. Probable es que los abogados esten cansados. Si Juan estuviese (314) presente, Maria estuviera (316) contento. No creo que la senora B — haya estado (159) jamas (ever) contento. j Ojala no hubiese yo estado enfermo. j Ojala Y. hubiese estado presente ! Estado enfermo (299) el juez dio su diner a sus bijos. 642. English to be translated iiito Spa7iish. The Spaniard is (159 ; 638) in the city. 1-am (638) in the street. We-are sad. They-are contented. Ye are angry. Thou art ill He-is busy. I am tired. The (87) water is hot. Thou art in thy house. The lawyers are in the hotel. My father is in the city. Are-ye tired ? We- are not tired. The printer always is occupied. Thou-art^ always^ busy. Where is the hotel ? Here it-is. Where is John's book? Here it-is. Where are my spoons, knives, and forks ? Here they-are. Where is my hat ? [t-is upon the table. How are you? (how is your-wor- ship ?) I-am well (335, e). How is Mrs. (233) *B— ? She-is well. How is Miss B — ? She-is not very well Is Mr. B — at home? He-is at home. Are you (Vms.) well? We-are well. Are you ( Fm^.) tired? I-am not tired. Is Peter in the United States ? No, sir, he is in England. James is in the country. The book is upon the table. The buttons are in the hat. The printer is in the hotel. The painter is busy. My brothers are in the country. How are my friends ? They are not very well. 280 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. [The verb in the following paragraph is to be rendered by the imper- fect tense in Spanish.] Ke was (159) ill. I was contented. We-were present. They -were tired. Mrs. B — was busy. You ( Vms.) were present. Thou-wast ill. Ye-were present. Were you ( F) not in the country ? Was not my father in the city ? Were we-not in the street ? Thou-wast with thy friend. I-was (perf def ) sad two years. Were-ye (303) there many years ? Wast-thou there ? Was-he there ? Were- they sad ? Were you ( Vmd.) [a] long (mucho) time with the judge ? Never have-I been in England. Never have- they been in the United States. How long (how much time) have you ( Vmd.) been in the United States ? How long hast-thou been in England ? We-have never (622) been in England., I-have been ill. We-had been (159) very sick. John will-be (159) in his house. I-shall-be busy. They- will-be with you [Vmd.) soon. Thou-wilt-be present. We- shall-be in our houses. Ye-will-be present. I-shall-be with you ( Vms.) soon. Peter will-be with us immediately. I-shall-be in London soon. Be-ye (159) contented. Let-us-be (309, f ) contented. May-they-be (309, f ) present. May-he-be contented. Let the water be warm. It-is possible that Peter may-be (159) in his house. It-is possible that ye-may-be present. It-is p**obable that the lawyers may-be tired. If John should-be (314) present, Mary would-be pleased. I do not believe that Mrs. B — may-have ever [jamas) been content- ed. 0-that I had (314) not been sick ! 0-that you ( V) might-have (31 4) been present ! The^ judge'* being^ (299) ilP, gave his money to his sons. g^" The learner can proceed to write and re-wrile all the parts of this verb {estar)^ continuing the practice till he has committed it to memory and afterward translate the following exercises on sev and eatur. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 281 EXERCISE XIV. 643. Vocabulary. Plomo, lead. M6dia, stocking. Candelero, candlestick. Ciego, blind. Pesado, heavy. 644. Model senteiices. (a.) Mi padre es ciego. (6.) Mi hermana esta ciega de ira. (c.) Juan es enfermizo. {d.) Pedro estd escribiendo. Miel (fern.), honey. Seda, silk. A'grio, sour. Enfermizo, sickly. Escribiendo, writing. My father is blind. My sister is blind with passion. John is sickly. Peter is writing. ' The following promiscuous examples on the use of ser and estar can be readily translated by means of the references. 645. English to he translated into Spanish. Thou art (334) proud. Thou art (335) angry. Death (628) is (334) terrible. We are (335, b) in the street. My father is (334) very rich. My mother is (335)* very sorrowful. Lead (628) is heavy. The milk is (335) sour. Honey (628) is sweet. The honey is (335) warm. I am a (243) German. I am angry. We are (334) imprudent. We are ill. She-is (334) old. She-is (335) contented. My mother is (334) blind. My daughter is (335) blind with [de) anger (ira). Mary is beautiful. Lucy is (335) busy. John is good. John is well (335, e). The spoon is (334, b) of gold. The spoon is (335, b) upon the table. The fork is (334, b) mine. The fork is (335, b) in the house. The stockings are (334, b) of silk. The stockings are (335, b) in the street. The book is for (334, b) Mary. The book is (335, b) in the hotel. The stockings are for Lucy. Here are (335, b) the stockings. I-am (334) young. I-am (335, c) writing. My mother is sickly. My mother is sick. The candlesticks are (334) of gold. The buttons are of silver. The looking-glass . is (334) new. The caodlestick is of silver. They-are (335, c) writing. Sugar (628) is (334) sweet. This hat is for John. 24* 282^ EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. They-are wise. They-are sorrowful. Where is (335, b) my hat ? Here it-is (335, b). My shoes are of silk. SECTION THIRTEENTH. 646. The phrases, " to be hungry" " to be thirsty^" " to be afraid^" " to be cold," "/o be hot" are rendered in Spanish by the verb tener (to have), and the corresponding noun ; as, " to have hunger" " to have thirst" " to 'lavefear" "/o have shame" ^^to have cold" "to have heat" EXERCISE XV. 647. Vocabulary. Manzana, apple. Nuez, nut. Sopa, soup. Calentura, /ercr. Marmol, viarble. Paciencia, patience. Calor, heat. Vergiienza, shame. Silla, chair. Es estrano, it-is strange. Pera, pear. Bota, boot. Aceite, oil. Memoria, memory. Hierro, iron. Suceso, success. Frio, cold, coldness. Temor, fear. Ayer, yesterday. Con, with. That woman has not shame (t. «., is not ashamed). John has heat (i. c, John is hot). Let Peter have money. 648. Model sentences. (a.) Esa muger no tiene vergiien- za. {b.) Juan tiene calor. (c.) Tenga Pedro dinero. . 649. Spanish to he translated into English. 2, Tiene (160) Vmd. manaanas? Tengo (160) manzanas. Tenemos plumas. Tienen peras. Yms. tienen sillas. Ella tiene hambre. Tengo sed (646). Tenemos calor (646). Tienen vergiienza (646). Tengo temor (646). Tenemos frio (646). ^ ^engo yo verguenza? Tienes ver- giienza. Teneis una lampara. i Quien tiene nueees ? I Quienes tienen peras ? Mis hermanos tienen hierro. Tengo manteca. Teneis espejos. Tenemos tenedores. Tienes cuchillos. i Que especie de botones tiene V. ? ^Tenemos marmol? ^ Q^^ especie de azucar tiene el EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION'. 283 aldeano ? Ella no tiene (626) marido. Tengo tres hijos y dos hijas. Te«eis tres hermanos. Tenemos una casa. I Tenemos medias ? i Tiencs candeleros ? No tengo hari- na (626). No teneis leche (626). La rosa tiene espinas. Ymd. tiene memoria (242). Maria tiene mucha confianza en el jucz. ^^ ^ienen Yms. sopa? Tenemos suceso. ^ Teneis paciencia ? El medico tenia (160) confianza en la Espanola. Ella no tenia lampara. Teniamos hambre. Yo tenia una rosa. Tenian dinero; Ymd. tenia una media. Teniais plata. Yms. tenian confianza en mi her- mano. Tenias oro. Ella tenia prudencia. i Tenia yo zapatos ? I Teniamos botas ? i No tenian mesas Tuvo (160) azucar ayer. Tuvieron manteca ayer. Tuve botones ayer. Ella tuvo harina ayer. Tuvisteis dinero. Tuvimos lamparas. Tuviste candeleros. No tuvieron espejos. ^Tuviste una pluma? Tuve una casa. Tuvi- mos medias de seda ayer, Tuvo sillas ayer. El zapatero ha tenido (160) mucho cuidado. He tenido mucho hierro. Has tenido tres hijas. Hemos tenido dos hijos. Maria ha tenido calentura (242). Ella has tenido dos maridos. Han tenido muchos cuidados. Habeis ten- ido mucho dinero. Yo no habia tenido (160) sopa, Tendre (160) una candelero. Ella tendra un tenedor. Tendran aceite. Ymd. tendra hambre. Tendras calor (646). Tendremos sed. Tendran vergiienza (646). Ten- dreis temor (646). Tendre frio (646). Habre tenido (160) dinero. Tened (160) paz con todos los hombres. Ten paz con todos los hijos del medico. Tenga (309, f ) plumas. Ten- gan (309, f ) miel. Tengamos (309, f ) espejos. Tenga (309, f ) Ymd. confianza en el. Quiero que mi madre tenga (160) harina. Es posible que tengas aceite. Probable es que tengan lamparas. Quiero que Maria tenga dinero. Quiero que yo tenga medias de seda. Probable es que tengamos algun (101) 284 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. merito. Es posible que tengais hambre. Quiero que Vms. tengan candeleros. No era estrano que tuviesen (314) peras. No era estra- no que yo tuviese (314) dinero. No era estrano que Ymd. tuviese aceite. Era preciso que no tuviesemos azucar. Si tuvieses (314) betas, yo tendria (315) zapatos. Juan tendria (315) un tenedor. No creo que Pedro haya tenido (160) manteca. j Ojala yo no hubiera tenido (160) estas lamparas ! \ Ojala no hubieran tenido esos libros ! Si yo tuviere paciencia, tendre suceso. Si mis hijos tuvieren pacieneia, tendran suceso. 650. English to he translated into Spanish. They-have (160) pears. Have jovi{Vmd,) apples? I- have apples. We-have pens. They-have pears. You ( Vms.) have chairs. She is hungry (646). I am thirsty (646). We are hot (646). They are ashamed (646). I am afraid (646). We are cold (646). t am ashamed. Thou art ashamed (646). Ye have a lamp. Who has nuts 1 Who have pears ? My brothers have iron. I have butter. Ye have looking-glasses. We have forks. Thou hast knives. What sort of buttons have you ( Vmd.) ? Have-we marble ? What sort of sugar has the villager ? She has no (626) husband. I have three sons and two daughters. Ye have three brothers. We have a house. Have we stockings ? Hast thou candlesticks ? I have no (626) flour. Ye have no (626) milk. The rose has thorns. You {Vmd.) have a (242) memory. Mary has much confidence in the judge. Have you ( Vms.) soup ? We have success. Have ye patience ? The physician had (imperf.) confidence in the Spanisli- woman. She had (imperf) no (626) lamp. We were (im- perf.) hungry. You ( Vms.) had (imperf) confidence in my brother. Had (imperf) we boots ? He had (303) sugar yesterday. They had (303) butter EXERCISES FOli TRANSLATION. 285 yesterday. I had (303) buttons yesterday. We had a (242) fever yesterday. Ye had chairs yesterday. The' shoemaker has had (160) much care. I have had much iron. Thou hast had three daughters. We have had two sons. Mary has had a (242) fever. She has had two husbands. They have had many cares. Ye have had much money. I had not had (305) soup. I shall have (160) a candlestick. She will have a fork. They-will have oil. You ( Vmd.) will be hungry (646). Thou-wilt-be (646) hot. We shall-be (646) thirsty. They will be (646) ashamed. Ye will be (646) afraid. I shall be (646) cold. I will have had (160) money. Have-ye (160) peace with all men (628). Have-thou peace with all the sons of the physician. Let-him-have (309, f) pens. Let-them-have (309, f) honey. Let-us- h&ve looking-glasses. May you ( Vmd.) have confidence in him. I wish that my mother may-have (160) flour. It-is pos- sible that thou-mayest-have oil. Probable it-is that they- may-have lamps. I-wish that Mary may-have money. I- wish that I may -have silk stockings (97, a). Probable it-is that we-may have some (101) merit. It-is possible that ye-may be (646) hungry. I wish that you ( Vms.) may- have candlesticks. It-was {era) not strange that they-should-have (314) pears. It-was not strange that I should have (314) money. It- was not strange that you ( Vmd.) should have oil. It was necessary that we should not have (314) sugar. If thou shouldst have (314) boots. I would-have (315) shoes. John would (315) have a fork. I do not believe that Peter may-have had (160) butter. 0-that I had not had (318) these lamps ! 0-that they-had not had (318) those books! If I shall have (319) patience, I shall have (307) success. If my sons shall have (319) patience, they will have success. 286 EXERCISES Foi TRANSLATlOi^. ' The learner can now write all the persons of the tenses of the verb tener^ as directed at the close of the last two sections. SECTION FOURTEENTH. Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed for practice in tlie conjugations of regular verbs of the three terminations, ar^ er, and ir. Of course, all verbs whose present infinitive ends with ar, are of the first conjugation, and are to be conjugated like amar (168, a) ; those ending with er, are of the second, and to be conjugated like comer (168, b) ; and those ending with ir, of the third, and to be conjugated like vivir (168, c). EXERCISE XVI. 65 1 . Vocabulary. Hablar, to speak. Buscar, to seek. Q,'uedar, to remain. Llevar, to carry. Rehusar, to refuse. Comer, to eat, to dine. Leer, to read. Vivir, to live. Cumplir, to fulfil. Terminar, to terminate^ to close. Reposo, repose, Correo, post^ mail. Deber, duty. Maiiana, to-morrow ^ morning. Cuando, wke^i,. A' las dos, at two o'clock. 652. Model sentences. (a.) El Senor nos (113) ama. (b.) No hemos bedido vino. (c.) I Me permitiri V. escribir dos cartas 7 {d.) Cumplid vuestros deberes. (e.) Hable V. alto. (/.) Viva, Vmd., seiiora, muchos anos. Amar, to love. Hallar, to find. Llorar, to weep. Viajar, to travel. Llegar, to arrive. Beber, to drink. Responder, to reply, to answer. Escribir,* to write. Permitir, to permit. Asunto, business, matter. Palabra, word. Espana, Spain. Favor, yaror. Hasta entunces, till then. Ya, already. A.' las tres, at three o'clock. The liOrd loves us. We have not drunk any wine. Will you permit me to-write tw** letters ? Fulfil-ye your duties. Speak loud. May you live, madam, many years * Escribir is irregular in its past participle, having escriio and nol ejfcribido. (See 222, a.) EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 287 1 653. Spanish to he translated into English. Dios DOS (113) ama. Los pintores la (113) aman. Mi madre busca reposo. Ella no halla reposo. El Aleman ama la verdad. Hablan. Hablas. Lloran. Quedan contentos. Vmd. busca reposo. j Hablan Vms. Espanol ? Hablamos Espanol. Quedas triste. Hablais el Ingles. No hallo reposo. Bebes(168, b) vino. Bebo agua. El Frances no come pan. Mis hermanos no beben vino. Como pan. Juan lee libros. Leen libros. No come V. nada (622). No beben Vms. nada. i No respondes na- da? Bebemos vino. Bebeis agua. El medico vive (168, c) en Londres. Mis bijas viven en los Estados Unidos. Maria escribe cartas. Escribis muchas cartas. Cumples tu palabra. Cumplo mis deberes. Ymd. vive en la ciu- dad. I Como halla Y. este pan ? Llevabamos (168, a) mucho dinero con nosotros. Maria lloraba. Pedro hablaba. Las mugeres lloraban. Las senoras buscaban reposo. Yo lloraba. Yo bebia (168, b) vino. Diego bebia agua. Comiamos pan. Yivian (168, c) en Londres. Yiviais en la ciudad. Yo escribia una carta. Yivias en Madrid. Escribiamos cartas. Yo bus- caba reposo. La Francesa no hallo (168, a) reposo. Yiajo por Es- pana. Yiaje por los Estados Unidos. Yiajamos por In- glaterra. Hallaron un tesoro en el camino. Juan lloro. Lei (168, b) estos libros. Comio pan y manteca. Comi- eron azucar. Bebimos vino y leche. Escribi (168, c) dos cartas. Escribieron doce cartas. Juan no respondio nada. Ymd. vivio en Madrid. Le (113) han rehusado (168, a) ese favor. Juan me ha rehusado ese favor. He hallado mis tesoros. i Ha llega- do el correo? Hemos hallado las cucharas. i Has viaja- do por Espana ? iJjQ habeis rehusado ese favor ? i No ha comido (168, b) V. pan? He comido mucho pan. He cumplido mi palabra. Han cumplido su palabra. 2, Ha 288 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. llegado el juez ? i Han hallado Vms. mis lamparas 7 I Has comido muclia miel ? i Ha viajado V. per los Esta- dos Unidos ? Hasta entonces habiais hablado (168, a) Espanol. Hasta entonces no habiamos terminado nuestros asuntos. Ya babian comido (168, b) cuando llegamos. i No babias vivido (168, c) ya en Londres ? Hasta entonces babian vivido en paz. Cuando hube ballado (168, a) el tesoro, escribi cartas a mis amigos. Cuando hubiste comido (168, b), tu padre Uego. Cuando hubimos bablado, nuestras bermanas llora- ron. Viajare (168, a) por Espana. Vijaremos por Ingla- terra. Hallara un tesoro. Comere (168, b) este pan. Comeran manzanas. Leeras esos libros. Cumpliremos (168, c) nuestras palabras. Escribiran cartas. Mi criado llevara las cartas al correo. Habre comido (168, b) a las dos.* Habran llegado alas tres. El correo babra llegado a las dos. Llorad (168, a) con los que lloran. Comed (168, b) este pan. Cumplid (168, c) vuestras palabras. Bebed agua. Vivid en paz con todos los bombres. Habla alto. Llora tu con los que lloran. Come tu conmigo. Come tu con Pedro. Cumple tus deberes. Hable (309, f ) Juan alto. Lea (309, f ) Maria mis cartas. Lean (309, f ) las senoras esos libros. Cumplan (309, f ) los bombres sus deberes. Lea Ym. (309, f ) esa carta. Hable Ymd. (309, f ) Espa- nol. Coma V. manzanas y peras. Lean Yms. esa carta. No hable (309, a) Y. de eso (128, a). No lea (309, a) Ymd. ese libro. No bebas (309, a) vino. No lloreis (309, a). Respondedme (116). Escribidles (116). Es- cribenos (116). Es posible que balles (168, a) un tesoro. Es posible que lean (168, b) esos libros. Es probable quq^ no cum* * See 280. EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 289 plan (168, c) sus deberes. Probable es que ella no Ic responda. \ Ojala halleis reposo ! Si yo ballase (314) libros, yo los leeria (315). Si Maria llorara (316), Juan lloraria (315). \ Ojala no be- biesen (314) vino! j Ojala no llorase ! j Ojala los hom- bres (628) cumpliesen (314) sus deberes! Preciso era que Maria no hablase alto. [ Es posible que no hayan hallado (168, a; 317) uu tesoro ? Es posible que no haya llegado. \ Ojala yo no hubiese hablado (318)! Era estrano que no hubiesen hallado esos libros. Si Juan no hubiese hablado (318, a) Maria no habria llorado (318, a). Si manana llegare (319) Pedro, te escribire. Si manana hallaren (319) un tesoro, nos escribiran. Si Diego no hubiere llegado (320) mana- na a las tres, le escribiremos una carta. Permitame (116) Y. leer (298) eso libro. ^ Me permi- tira Y. leer esa carta? Era preciso hablarles (116). Juan pretende (634) no haber hablado. Estaban comien- do (299) y bebiendo (299). Habiendo hallado (299) un libro, le lei. Habiendo hallado un tesoro en el camino. le Uevamos en la casa del abogado. 654. English to be translated into Spanish. I-weep (168, a). God loves us (113). The painters love her. My mother seeks repose. She finds not repose. The German loves the truth. They speak. Thou speak- est. They weep. They remain contented (300, a). You ( Vmd.) seek repose. Do you ( Vms.) speak Spanish ? We speak Spanish. Thou remainest sad. Ye speak the En- glish. I find not repose. Thou drinkest (168, b) wine. I drink water. The Frenchman eats not bread. My bro- thers drink not wine. I eat bread. John reads books. They read books. You (vmd.) eat nothing (622). You (Vms.) drink nothing. Repliest-thou nothing? We drink wine. Ye drink water. The physician lives (168, c) in London. My daughters live in the United States. 25 290 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Mary writes letters. Ye write many letters. Thou ful- fillest thy word. I fulfil my duties. You ( Vmd.) live in the city. How do you ( V.) find this bread ? We-were-carrying (168, a) much money with u}>. Mary was-weeping. Peter was-speaking. The women were- weeping. .The ladies were-seeking repose. I was-weep- ing. I was-drinking (163, b) wine. James was-drinking water. We were-eating bread. They were-living (168, c) in London. Ye were-living in the city. I was-writing a letter. Thou wast-living in Madrid. We were-writing letters. The French-woman found (perf def ) no (626) repose. He travelled through Spain (JEspana). I travelled through the United States. We travelled through England. They found a treasure in the road. John wept I read (168, b) these books. I-ate bread and butter. They ate sugar. We drank wine and milk. I wrote ( 1 68, c) two letters. They wrote twelve letters. John answered nothing (622). You ( Vmd.) lived in Madrid. They have refused (168, a) him (113) that favor. John has refused me that favor. I have found my treasures. Has the^ post^ arrived^? We have found the spoons. Hast-thou travelled through Spain ? Have-ye refused him (113) that favor ? Have you ( Vmd.) not eaten bread ? I have eaten much bread. I have kept {cumplido) my word. They have fulfilled their word. Has the^ judge^ arrived^ ? Have you^ ( Vms. ) found^ my lamps ? Hast thou eaten much honey? Have you'^ (7wd) travelled^ through the United States ? Till then ye-had spoken (168, a; 305) Spanish. Till then we-had not terminated (305) our business (plur.). They-had^ already^ eaten^ (168, b; 305) when we arrived. Hadst-thou not already^ lived^ (305) in London? Till then they had lived (305) in peace. When I-had found (306) the treasure, I wrote letters EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 291 to my friends. When thou-hadst (306) dined (306) thy father arrived. When we-had spoken (306) our sisters wept. I-shall-travel (168, a; 307) through Spain. We-shall- travel through England. He-will-find a treasure. I- shall-eat bread. They-will-eat apples. Thou-wilt-read those books. We-shall-fulfil our words. They-will-write letters. My male-servant will-carry the letters to the post. I-shall-have dined (308) at two o'clock (280). They-will-have arrived (308) at three o'clock (280), The post will-have arrived (308) at two o'clock. Weep-ye (309) with those who (125, c) weep. Eat-ye this bread. Fulfil-ye your promises (palabras). Drink-ye water. Live-ye in peace with all men (628). Speak-thou loud (alto). Weep thou with those who weep. Eat thou with me (115, c). Eat thou with Peter. Fulfil thy duties. Let John speak (309, f) loud. Let Mary read (309, f ) my letters. Let the ladies read (309, f) those books. Let men (628) fulfil (309, f ) their duties. Read (309, f ) you ( Vmd.) this letter. Speak (309, f ) Spanish (let your- worship speak Spanish). Eat you ( Vmd.) some (254, c) apples and pears. Read you (Vms.) that letter. Speak not* (309, a) of this (128, a). Read not (309, a) this book. Drink-thou not (309, a) wine. Weep-ye -not (309, a). Answer-ye me (116). Write-ye to them (116). Write- thou to-us (116). It-is possible that thou-mayest-find (168, a; 31 1) a trea- sure. It-is possible that they-may-read (168, b) those books. It-is probable that they-may not fulfil their duties. It-is probable that she may not answer him (113). 0-that ye-may-find repose ! If I should-find (314) books, I would-read (315) them. If Mary should-weep (316), John would-weep (315). 0-that they -would not drink (314) wine! 0-that he- Literally, no hable V. de eao, "not let-speak your-worship of this." 292 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. would not weep (314)! O-that men (628) would-fulfil (314) their duties! It-was (era) necessary that Mary should not speak (314) loud (alto). Is-it possible that they-may not have found (317) a trea- sure ? It-is possible that he-may not have arrived (317). O-that I had not (might not have) spoken (318; 318, a)! It-was (era) strange that they-should not have found (318, a) those books. If John had not (should not have) spoken (318, a), Mary would not have wept (318, a). If Peters should-arrive^ (319) to-morrow,^ I-will-write to-thee (1 13). If they-shall-find^ (S19) a^ treasure^ to-morrow,^ they-will- write to-us. If James shall not have arrived (320) ' to- morrow at three o'clock, we will write him a letter. Permit me (116) to-read (298) that book. Will you (Vmd.) permit me (113) to read that letter? It-was ne- cessary to-speak to-them (116; 114). John pretends (634) not to-have spoken. They-were [estaban) eating (299) and drinking (299). Having found (299) a book, I- readit(113). Remark. — In order to become thoroughly familiar with the conjugation of the regular verbs, the learner should write and re-write all the per- sons of the various moods and tenses (as before directed), until he finds himself able to write them without referring to the model-verbs. He must be careful to remember the changes in orthography sometimes required. (See 165 ; 165, a ; and 166 : 166, a ; 166, b ; 166, c.) 1^^ The following verbs, together with those already given in the vocabulary of this section, will serve as examples for practice : Pagar, ^opay. Tomm', to take. Llamar, to call. Ornar, to adorn. Comprar, \o buy. Juzgar, to judge. Pender, to hang. Creer, to believe. Temer, to fear. Aprender, to learn. Unir, to unite. Abrir, to open. (See 222, a). Asistir, to assist. Escoger, to choose. Veneer, to conquer. Sufrir, to s^ifer. Aiiadir, to add. Admitir, to admit. EXERCISES TOR TRANSLATION. 293 SECTION FIFTEENTH. Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed for practice in reflective verbs and passive verbs. (See 169; 167, a, b; 170; 171 ; 172.) 655. Se and the other personal pronouns of the first-objective case, are often used in Spanish with neuter or active-intransitive verbs, and in such cases seem redundant in English; as V. se burla, "you jest;" mucho me alegro, " I rejoice much ;" se caerd Vmd.y " you will-fall ;" rettrese Vmd.^ " retire ;" no se enoje Vmd.^ " do not be angry." Those verbs designated with a (*) in the vocabulary, are thus used. EXERCISE XVII. 656. Vocabulary. Levantar, to raise, to rise. Portarse,* to behave, to conduct one^s self. Quejarse,* to complain. Acercarse,* to approach, to draw near. Salvar, to save. Alabar, to praise. Armar, to arm. Invierno, winter. A' las seis, at six ci clock, 657. Model sentences. (a) Los amigos se juntaron (169, a) en Londres. (i.) Me hallo (169, a),contento. (c.) Levantaos (116; 116, b). id.) V. se burla (655). Bien, well, properly. Meterse,* to meddle, to interfere. Retirarse, * to retire, to withdraw. Burlarse,* to jest. Alegrarse,* to rejoice. Juntarse,* to assemble. Escondir, to hide. Pais (masc), country, region. Primavera, spring. A' las siete, at seven o'clock. Mai, badly, improperly. The friends assembled themselves in London. I-find myself contented. Raise yourselves. You jest. Do not complain. (e.) No se (655) queje V. 658. Spanish to be translated into English. 2,C6mo se halla (169, a) Ymd. ? Juan se porta bien. Los abogados se portan mal. Te portas bien. Os portais mal. Ellas se juntaron en Madrid. El carpintero se halla contento. Le amas. Pedro se alabo. La muger se escondio. El general se armo. Se alaban mis herma- nas (575). Se salvaron. Me alabo. Te armas. Me es- condi. Nos armamos. Nos escondimos. Se ban portado mal. i Ojala me ballase con ella ! \ Ojala se portasea 25* 294 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. bien ! Tus amigos se juntaran en Londres. Escondete (116). Alabaos (116,.!:)). Salvaos (116, b). Armemo- nos (116, b). Alabese (116) Ymd. (309, f). A^rmese (116)Ymd. Te (655) burks. Me (655) alegro mucho. Se (655) acerca la primavera (575). Se (655) acerca el invierno. Se (655) quejan. V. se (655) burla. Te (655) alegras. Pedro se (655) queja. Se lia levantado Y. (575). i De quien se (655) quejan ? i Me (655) he nietido nuuea (ever) en sus (123, a) asuntos (affairs) de Ymd. ? Siempre me (655) levanto a las seis. Me (655) retirare. i No se (655) retiraria (315) Y. del pais? ^-^o se (655) retirarian (315) del pais? Siempre nos (655) levantamos a las siete. Se (655) alegran. Alegrate (116). Alegraos (116, b). Alegremonos (116, b). Alegrense (116). Le- vantese Y. (309, f). No se (309, d) queje Y. (309, f). No nos (309, d) quejemos (309, f ). No nos (309, d) me- tamos (309, f) en los asuntos del juez. 659. English to he translated into Spanish. How do you (Vmd,) find (169, a) yourself (how finds your-worship himself ) ? Peter behaves himself well. The lawyers conduct themselves badly. Thou behavest thyself well. Ye-behave yourselves badly. They assem- bled themselves in Madrid. The carpenter finds himself contented. Thou-lovest thyself. John praises himself. The woman hid herself. The general armed liimself. My^ brothers* praise^ themselves^ (575). The3^-saved themselves. I-praise myself Thou-armest thyself. I- hid myself. We-arm ourselves. We-hid ourselves. They- have behaved themselves badly. 0-that I-might-find (314) myself with her ! O-that they-would-conduct (314) them- selves well ! Thy friends will-assemble themselves in London. Hide (1 16) thyself. Praise-ye yourselves (1 16, b). Save (116, b) yourselves. Let-us-arm ourselves (116. EXERC.SES FOR TRANSLATION. 295 b). Praise (116) yourself (let your-worship praise him- self, 309, f ). Arm (116) yourself (309, f ). Thou-jestest (655). I-rejoice (655) much. The^ spring^ approaches^ (655). The^ winter^ draws near^ (655). They- complain (655). You ( F.) jest (655). Thou-rejoicest (655). Peter complains (655). You^ ( V.) have^ risen^ (655). Of whom complain-they (655) ? Have-I meddled (655) ever (nunca) in your [de Vmd.; 123., a) affairs (asu?i- tos) ? I always rise (65?) at six o'clock. I-will-retire (655). Would (315) you ( V.) not retire (655) from-the {del) coun- try ? WoulS-they (315) not retire (655) from-the country ? We always rise (655) at seven o'clock. They-rejoice (655). Rejoice thou (655; 116). Rejoice-ye (116, b). Let-us- rejoice (655; 116, b). Let-them-rejoice (655; 116). Rise (655 ; 309, f; let your-worship raise himself ) . Com- plain not (309, d ; let not your-worship complain himself). Let us not complain (309, d ; 309, f ). Let us not meddle (655 ; 309, d) in the affifcirs {asuntos) of the judge. Remark. — The inflections of reflective verbs should now be written in all the moods and tenses of the three regular conjugations. EXERCISE XVIir. 660. Vocabulary. duemar, to hum. Maltratar, to abuse. Calumniar, to calumniate. Generosidad, generosity. Embajador, embassador. / yer, yesterday. 661. Model sentences. (a.) Este libro fu^ escrito* para mis amigos. ih.) Las casas han sido quemadas. Veneer, to conquer^ to surpass. Criar, to create. Presentar, to present. Tierra, the earth. Presidente, president. Abiertamente, openly. This book was written for my friends. The houses have been burned. (c.) Maria es amada (170) de Jos^. ; Mary is loved by Joseph. Escrito is the past participle (irregularly formed) of the verb escriblr. 296 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 662. Spanish to he translated into English. Lucia es amada (170; 171) de (323, b) Diego. La Espanola es amada (170; 171) del Frances. Fuimos ven- cidos(170; 171) en generosidad. La tierra fue criada (170) por (323, b) Dies. Ella fue calumniada (170) abier- tamente. Fueron vencidos en generosidad. Todas las ^(628) cosas (623) fueron criadas por Dios. Esta carta fue escrita (170) para Maria. Esos libros fueron escritos por (323, b) el abogado. He sido (172) maltratado. La ciu- dad fue quemada. La casa fue quemada. Ayer fue^ pre- sentado^ eV embajador^ frances^ al presidente a^ los Esta dos Unidos. Ayer fueron presentadas al presidente las hermanas y bijas del embajador^ espanoP {57b). Las Francesas fueron calumniados abiertamente. Estos caba- lleros ban sido (172) maltrados. Las ciudades ban sido quemadas. La ciudad sera quemada. No seremos venci- dos en generosidad. Ayer fue presentado al presidente el bijo del embajadof^ inglcs.i Ayer fui presentado al presi- dente de los Estados Unidos. 663. English to be translated into Spanish. Mary is loved (170 ; \7\)hj {de; 323, b) James. The Spanish-woman is loved (170) by-the (323, b) Frenchman. We-were(perf def)* conquered (170) in generosity. The earth was (perf def) created (170) by {'por ; 323, b) God. She was (perf def) calumniated openly. They-were con- quered in generosity. All things (628) were created by (323, b) God. This letter was written {escrita) for Mary. Those books were written by (323, b) the lawyer. I-have been abused (172). The city was (perf. def) burned. The house was burned. Yesterday the^ Frenchs ambassador^ was^ presented^ to-the president of the United States. Yesterday were presented to-the president the sisters and daughters of the Spanish^ ambassador.^ The French-wo- See 170, a ; and 323 ; 323, a EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 297 men were calumniated openly. These gentlemen have been (172) abused. The cities have-been burned. The city will-be burned. We shall not be surpassed in gener- osity. Yesterday was presented to the president the son of the English^ ambassador.' Yesterday I-was presented to the president of the United States. RemarJ^ — The inflections of passive verbs should now be written in all the moods and tenses of the three regular conjugations. SECTION SIXTEENTH. Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed to show the man- ner in which the reflective personal pronoun se is employed in Spanish to express passive action. 664. We can say in English, " the man deceives himself," or, " the man is deceived," and each sentence conveys about the same idea ; but in Spanish this manner of expressing a passive act or emotion by means of the reflective pronoun is carried to a far greater extent than in English. Thus it can be said in Spanish, en la Gaceta de JPHladelfia de ayer se leen las slguentes tineas^ " in the Gazette of Philadelphia of yesterday read themselves the following lines," meaning, "in yesterday's Philadelphia Gazette the following lines are (or maij be) read.^^ j, Cumo se entenderd lo que se dice'? "how shall-understand itself that which says itself^^ meaning, "how shall be understood that which is said?" Las ventanas se han cerrado, " the windows have shut themselves," meaning " the win- dows have been shut.'' " It is believed," "it is said," " the book is open- ed," can be rendered in Spanish by the reflective pronoun, thus, se cree; se dice; se abre el libra; literally, "it-believes itself," "it savs itself," " the book opens itself." This peculiar manner of expressing a pasaiva act or emotion must be carefully noted. (See 173 and 173, a). EXERCISE XIX. 665. Vocabulary. Llamar, to call, to name. Doblar, to double, to increase. Usar, to iLse. Creer, to believe, to think. Abrir, to open. Clamor, noise, clamor. Humo, smoke. Profecia, prophecy. Llenar, to Jill. Continuar, to cvntinue, Enganar, to dec aive. Vender, to sell. Botella, bottle. Escuela, school. Puerta, door. Sitio, siege. «i>8 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. Here Spanish is spoken. Ask-ye, and it shall be given to -you. The island was called Melita. The river is (has been) frozen. The meadows have been mowed. 666. Model sentences, (a.) Aqui se3 habla2 Espanol.^ lb.) Pedid, y se2 os3 dara.^ (c.) La isla se llamaba MeUta. {d.) El rio se ha helado. («.) SeS han3 segado^ los^ prados.2* 667. In many of the following sentences the nominative will be found placed after the verb (see 666, e), this being a very common order of con- struction in Spanish, especially in sentences in which se, with the active verb, is used in place of the passive verb. 668. Spanish to be translated into English. Esta muger se llama (664) Maria. Aqui (639) se Labia el Ingles. Se cree. Llamad, y se os abrira. Este vino se vende a (378) tres pesos (623) la (234) botella. Se dobla el clamor. Se enagana Y. i Se usan plumas de oro? i Que libros se usan en esa eseuela? La botella se llenara de (with) vino. Las botellas se llenaran de (399) agua. La casa se llenara de (399) humo. Se lleno toda la cuidad de (399) humo. Se abriran las puertas. Aqui se habla el Frances. Se cumple la profecia. Se abrira la puerte. La cuidad se quemo (660). Las casas se que- maron. Se abrio el libro. Aqui se venden libros. Este vino se vende a (378) dos pesos la (234) botella. Se cumplen las profecias. Se continuara la carta. Este hombre se llama Pedro. Se abrieron todas las puertas. Se continuaran esas cartas. Se doblara el clamor. Se enganan los jueces. Esa profecia se ha cumplido. Se ha enganado Ymd. Se habla de un sitio. Se ha levantado (656) el sitio. i Se usan sombreros de seda ? Las casas se llenaron de (399) humo. 669. English to he translated into Spanish. This woman is called (173 ; 173, a) Mary. Here the * It must be remembered that the literal rendering of these model sen- tences would be, " here speaks itself Spanish ;" " ask-ye, and to-you {os) 'n-sludl give itself;'^ " the island called itself Melita ;" " the river has fro- ze.n itself ' < the meadows have mowed themselves." EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 299 French (667) is spoken. It is-believed (664). Knock (llamdd), and it sball be opened to-you. This wine is sold at (a) three dollars a {la) bottle. The clamor (667) is doubled. You ( V.) are deceived (667). Are gold pens (97, a) used (667)? What books are used in that school? The lottle will be filled with {de) wine. The bottles will be filled with [de) water. The house will be filled with (399) smoke. All the city (667) will be filled with (399) smoke. The doors (667) will be opened. Here the Eng- lish (667) is spoken. The prophecy (667) is fulfilled. The door (667) will be opened. The city is burned (perf. def.). The houses are burned. The book (667) is open- ed (perf. def). Here books (667) are sold (pres.). This wine is sold at (378) two dollars a (234) bottle. The pro- phecies (667) are fulfilled (pres.). The letter (667) will be continued. This man is called Peter. All the gates (667) were opened (perf def). Those letters (667) will be continued. The clamor (667) will be doubled. The judges (667) are deceived. This prophecy has been ful- filled. You ( Vmd. ; 667) have been deceived. It is spoken of a siege.* The siege (667) has been raised (656). Are silk hats (97, a) used (667) ? The houses were filled (perf def) with smoke. Those prophecies have been fulfilled. SECTION SEVENTEENTH. 670. One of the most important rules in Spanish syntax is that by which a noim in the objective case, if it be a person, or inanimate thing personified, and the direct object of a verb, is to be preceded by the pre- position d. Thus, "John loves his brother" would be in Spanish, Juan ama a su hennano,f and not Juan ama su hcrinano ; " Peter slew the barber " would be, Pedro mato al barbero^f and not Pedro maio el * In English, it would be better to say, ' a siege is spoken of." In Spanish it can be said, hablan de un s7tio, " they (i. e., people) speak of a siege." t Literally, "John loves to his broth* r;" "Peter slew to-the barber " 30C EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. barbero ; " I love those who love n.e," would be, amo ^ los que me aman^ and not amo los que me aman. These sentences can be altered in con- struction, as mentioned in paragraph 575, without any change of mean- ing. Of course the preposition is not to be translated in English, but must always be used in Spanish before nouns in the objective case, gov- erned by an active verb, if these nouns express a rational being or per- sonified object.* EXERCISE XX. 67 1 . Vocabulary. Honrar, to honor. Temer, to fear. Robar, to rob. Recompensar, to reward. Deudor, debtor. 672. Model sentences. Sanar, to heal, to cure. Perdonar, to forgive, to pardon. Matar, to slay, to kill. Visitar, to visit. Noche (fem.), nighi. (a.) Ama a nuestra nacion. {b.) Cain mato d su hermano Abel. (c.) Vi a una muger. (d.) A n^die vio. (e.) Le amo como d un hermano. He-loves our nation. Cain slew his brother Abel. I-saw a woman. He saw nobody. I-love him like a brother. 673. Spanish to be translated into English. El padre ama a sus liijos. Honramos a\ juez. El m6- dico Sana a los enfermos. Este juez no teme a Dios. Perdonamos a nuestros dendores. Yo perdono a mis deu- dores. Dios ama a los que son buenos. Llamaron a los pintores. Ella teme a\ Americano. El medico sanara a muchos enfermos. El juez perdono a\ hombre que robo fl^l padre de Pedro. Robaron a la muger a quien (125) recompensamos. Mi criado i^ato a su padre. Honrad a vuestros padres (parents). Perdone a todos mis deudores. Te amo como (like) a un padre. Pedro me ama como a un hermano. Las senoras recompensaran a sus criadas. Visitaremos al presidente esta noche (to-night). Visitare- mos a algunos de mis amigos esta noche. Recompensare a\ que me honra. La madre ama a sus hijas. Juan mato a su amigo. * This rule applies only to rational beings or personified objects ; thus »ve can not say, amo i. la verdad, but amo la verdad, " I love the truth." EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 301 674. English to be translated into Spanish, The mother loves (670) her daughters. We-honor the judge. The physician heals the sick (102). This judge fears not God. We-pardon our debtors. I forgive my debtors. God loves those who are good. They-called the painters. She fears the American. The physician will- heal many sick \_ persons.'] The judge pardoned the man who robbed Peter's father. They robbed the . woman whom (125) we rewarded. My male-servant slew his father. Honor-ye your parents ( padres). T-pardoned all my debtors. I-love thee (113) like {como) a father. Peter loves me like a brother. The ladies will-reward their female-servants. We-will- visit the president this night. We-will-visit some of my friends to-night (esta noche). I will reward him who honors me. The father loves nis sons. John killed his friend. PART V. SPANISH READING LESSONS. FIRST SECTION. Remark. — This section of the Reading Lessons consists of easy sen- tences. The words selected are among those in general use, and should be repeated by the learner till he can recall them and their signification at any moment, and thus be enabled to write the exercises at the close of the section. The verbs are printed in italics. The learner should endeavor to find out what verbs are irregular, and this he can easily do by referring to the alphabetical list (see 221, a) of irregular, defective, and impersonal verbs of the three conjugations.* Every verb not found in this list is regular. The meaning of the words will be found in the vocabulary at the end of the volume. Every word which is varied by inflection is to be sought in its first form ; that is, a noun plural must be reduced to its singular form ; an adjective to its masculine form, or if it be plural and feminine, to its singular, or singular masculine. Thus, if the word be rigutsimas, it will be perceived from tne termination, isimas, that it is a superlative form of the feminine plural of some adjective ; reducing it then to the masculine singular, it will be riquisimo, and then removing its superla- tive ending, and remembering the change which takes place in adjectives that end with co (see 108, b), it will be found that riquisimas is derived from rico. And so with other parts of speech that are subject to inflec- tion. All the persons of verbs used in this First Section will be found in the Vocabulary. Reference will frequently be made to some preceding paragraph of this work, and the pupil being thus obliged to refer to the specific rules so jften, can hardly fail to learn them even without much seeming effort. The learner is expected to begin to translate these Reading Lessons as soon as he shall have proceeded to page 86, in Part II, He can be com- mitting to memory at the same time the irregular verbs. * In this list the learner will find a reierence either to the conjugation of the verb itself, or to the conjugation of one of similar irregularities. Thus the Yerh preferir, to prefer, is irregular, and by seeking it in the list (under the third conjugation, as it ends in ir) it will be seen that it is to be conjugated like sentir (see 209). SPANISH READING LESSONS. 303 \ I. SHORT SENTENCES. El virtuoso^ ama a^ Dies, El mundo abunda en lazes, dificultades y peligros. Dehemos^ sufrir con paciencia las incomodades de esta vida. Los males de esta vida son mo- mentaneos ; los bienes de la otra eternos. La^ ambicion aumenta los muchos trabajos, y disminuye^ los pocos place- res que se hallan^ en el mundo. Las perezosos^ son inutiles a la^ sociedad. Cada uno tiene sus"'' quebaceres. Una ciudad que esta^ puesta sobre un monte, no se^ puede^^ esconder. Nadie es sin pecado. El conocimiento, que ien- emos de Dios en esta vida, es imperfecta. La* sabiduria y la< modestia son tan apreciable como la* locura y la* desfa- chatez son despreciable. Lo que^^ es propio en uno, es im- propio en otro. Dios recompensard a^ los buenos* y casii- gar a a- los malos.* Los manSos^ hercdardn la tierra. El que '2 no es agradecido, no puede^^ ser bueno. Si alguna virtud puede^^ neutralizar los efectos de la* sober- bia, es ciertamente la* humilidad. Cada bora es un paso hacia el tumulo. Lo bueno^^ ^g perferible a lo^^ bermoso. El bombre virtuoso'* es amado de'^ todos.'* Los verdade- ros amigos deben^ amarse y servirse unos a otros.'^ La* paciencia y la* diligencia remueven montanas.. No es oro todo lo que'^ reluce. Nadie puede^^ dar mas de'^ lo que tiene. Todo^*' tiene fin^' en este mundo. Ninguno puede^^ servir 6? dos senores. Todo^^ arbol bueno'* lleva buenos I. — ' See 102. — 2 See 670. — ^Deber, before an infinitive, means " oughts See 316, c; and 326, /.— * See 628.— 5 See 165.— ^ Se hallen, "are found." See 173.— 7 Siis here means "his own."—^ See 335, 6.-9 See 116, a. Esconderse, " to hide itself," or passively, "to be hidden." See 173. — '" Puede, before an infinitive, is to be rendered " can." — 11 See 125, &.— '2 See 125, c— 13 See 263, a.— ^ See 264.-15 See 323, b.—^6Todos, "every body." See 133. — ^'^ Amarse y servirse unos a otros, "to love themselves and serve themselves some to others," that is, " to love and serve one another."— ^^ See 131.— 19 See 270.— 20 Todo, "every thing." See 133.— 2ii^X " an end." See 242.-22 Todo, used with a noun m «ie singular, generally means " every." See 133. 304 SPANISH READING LESSONS. frutos, y el mal*^ arbol lleva malos frutos. El que^^ siembre poco, cogerd poco. Para^* coger^ es necesario sembrar. La^ ira convierte aP hombre en una fiera. Una burla picante^^ es la ponzona de la^ amistad. El momento actuaP^ es el unico^ que nos^ pertenece. El que^^ es^^ mal bijo 6 berma- 110 malevoloj jamas merece el nombre de amigo. Si los malos^ se unen^ para^^ hacer mal,^^ i porque no se reunirdn^ los buenos^ para^* obrar bien ^^ II. SPANISH AND ENGLISH. I Habla^ Y. Espanol ?^ Hablolo^ un poco. i Lo* en tiende^ ese caballero P No lo^ entiende} Algo^ lo^ eniiendo J hablo. Es'^ una lengua muy iitil y hermosa. La pro- nunciacion del Espanol es mucbo mas facil que la^ del In- gles. I Habla Y. Ingles ? Mas en'tiendo de^ lo que habuo. La lengua inglesa es muy dificultosa para los Espanoles. I Me^« habla Y. ? Hable'^ Y. clara^^ j distintamente.^2 -^^y entiendo bien^^ el Espanol. No entiendo lo que^^ Y. dice III. THE WEATHER. I Que taF tiempo^ A<2ce .^'^ J32ice^ un tiempo bermosisimo. I Ha cambiado el viento ?* El viento ha caido. El tiem- po^ amenaza lluvia. El cielo estd^ nublado. i Oye Y. el trueno? Estc^ granizando. Empieza sJ nevar. Hace- mucbo viento. El tiempo*^ se despeja.^ La nieve se der- 23 See 101.— 24 See 326, c— 25 U'nico, ''only one."—^s iVo5, '' to-us:' See 114 and 113.— 27 See 243.— ^^ Mal is here a noun.— 29 See 575.— 30 Bien is here a noun. II. — 1 See 611. — 2 Espanol is an adjective, and agrees with id'ioma (masc.) understood.— 3 See 113, a.—^ See 113 and 117.— 5 See 575.— ^AZ^o, ''somewhat,'' "seme little:'— f Es, "it-is." See 220.— 8 See 616.— 9 See 270.-10 See 114 and 113 ; also 611.— ^ See 309,/.— 12 See 354, a.— 's See 351, 6.— H See 125, b. III. — ^Que tal, "what sort of," "how." See 478, a. — ^Tiempo, " wea iher."—^ See 218, c— 4 See 575.-5 See 335.-6 See 335, c— 7 See 326, a. ^Se despejaf "clears up.' See 284, e. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 305 rite,^ La nieve que cay 6^^ esta manana, ha suavizado mucbo^^ el tiempo. Hace^ buen'^ tiempo.^ Ilace^ maP^ tiempo. Relampaguea}^ Trvena}^ Toda el dia lloverd.^'^ TV, THE SEASONS. La^ primavera es la estacion mas^ agradable. La^ natu- raleza sonrie en primavera. Toda la^ naturaleza se anima.^ La estacion es muy adelantada. Temo que iengamos un verano muy caluroso este afio. La cosecha sera muy abundante. El otono es la estacion do los frutos. Los dias se han acortado^ mucbo.^ Las bojas ama^illean y evi- piezan aP caer. Las mananas. y las tardes son ya frias. Las noches son largas. Se acerca^ el invierno.''' No me gusta^ el inviernoj Este invierno es muy frio. V. THE COUNTRY. Manana^ salgo para^ ir al campo. El campo tiene para mi un atractivo singular.^ Mucho'^ sentiria^ jopasar en la ciudad la estacion mas^ hermosa del ano. \ Cuan^ puro y saludable es el aire del campo ! Ese paseo es muy agraaa- ble. Abora vayamos por este caminito. Sentemonos^ so- bre la yerba. Entremos^ en este bosque. Vamos^^ por este sendero ; es el camino mas® corto para^ volver a casa.^^ Veremos una cascada y un lago. i No oye V. la dulce melodia de las aves ? Estos arboles hacen bella sombra. 9 See 284, e.— lo See 165.—" See 351.— 12 See 101.— 13 See 216. IV.— 1 See 628.-2 See 268.-3 See 173.— 4 See 351.— 5 See 326, a.— 6 See 284, e. — 7 gee 575. — ^ This means literally, " winter pleases me not,'^ and is equivalent to " I do not like winter," in English. See 344 and 485. v.— 1 Manana, ''to-morrow.'"—^ See 326, c— 3 See 264.-4 See 351.— 5 Sentiria yo, ^^ I should-be sorry." See 315 and 526. — ^ See 268. — 7 See 478, a.— 8 See 309, b.—9 See 309, /.— lo See 204.-11 A' casa, ''at home," or " home." See 240. 25* 306 SPANISH READING LESSONS. VI. A JOURNEY. I Que especie de camino ha^^ de aqui a Nueva-York 1 El camino es casi impractable en esta estacion. i Se hal- laiv^ buenas posadas en el camino 1 Son en general muy malas. i Que carruage puedo tomar de aqui a Nueva-York ? Putde Y} ir por el camino de hierro,^ 6 por el barco de vapor.^ Puede Y.^ tomar el correo. Prefiero viajar por el ferro-carril> Prefiero viajar por la diligencia. i Cuanto se faga^ por^ asiento ? No llevare mas que^ una maleta. I Es seguro el camino P Si, senor ; es muy frecuentado. I Cuantos dftis se necesitav}^ para^^ hacer el viaje? i Haif en el camino ciudades notables V^ i Es ancho 6 angosto el camino '?^ YII. MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES. Acostumbrdos^ a^ imitar las acciones de los virtuosos. Nunca envidieis^ la dicha agena.^ Siempre debes^^ aliviar^^ aP infortunado. No levantaras falso testimonio contra tu projimo. Contempla^ a^ esos hombres sublimes^ cuya con- ducta es la mejor^ prueba de la grandeza moraP del genero humane.^ y procura imitarlos} Si puedes cultivar^^ tu inge- nio y no lo^'' haces^faltas 6}^ un deber sagrado.^ En todos tus estudios trata de^^ unir a un discernimiento tranquilo^ una grande penetracion, la^^ paciencia para la^^ analisis y VI.— 1 See 218.— 2 See 173.— 3 See 575.—* El camino de hierro, liter- ally " the road of iron" that is, " the rail-road." " Elferro-carril " also means ^Hhe rail-way" — 5 Barco devajwr, ^^boat of steam" (see 97, a), that is, " steam-boat." Vapor is also often used for " steamer " or " steam- boat." — 6 Scpaga, ^^ is paid," or, "is to be paid." See 173. — 7 See 234, a. — ^ Masque, '■'■ more than" No Tuas que, ^^ no more than," ^^ only." — 8 I Es el camino seguro ? is the order in which these words are to be translated. See 575.— lo See 173.— " See 326, c— 12 See 264. VII.— 1 See 116 and 116, 6.-2 See 326, a.— 3 See 309, a.— 4 See 134, c. — 5 See 670. — ^ Contempla is in the imperative mood, 2d pers. sing.^ 7 See 670.-8 See 264.-9 See 265 and 265, a.— 1° See 287 and 287, a.— " Faltar d, ^' to fail in."- ^2 Tratar de, '^to aim at," "io manage to." SPANISH READING LESSONS. 307 ia^3 constancia en la^^ sintesis. La^^ sociedad seria}^ menos viciosa si cada cual enfrenase^^ su desarreglada ambicion j sus inquietudes. Se^^ liberal en dar^^ todo genero de asis- tencia aP® que la necesita. Si quieres ser^^ justo, no aborrez- cas dJ nadie.^° Remark. — After the learner shall have carefully translated the preced- ing Lessons, and examined the rules of Syntax and construction referred to in the notes, ffe should again translate all the Lessons by writing each sentence in good English, enclosing the references to rules in parenthe- ses. Then, without looking at the Spanish Reading Lessons, he should endeavor to re-translate his English written sentences into Spanish, comparing and correcting only with the Reading Lessons after the whole Section is thus translated and re-translated. The following exercise, taken from sentences in the First Reading Lesson, will indicate the manner in which he should form his English translation. EXERCISE. — To he translated into Spanish. The virtuous man (102) loves God (670). The world abounds in snares, difficulties, and dangers. We ought (note 3, Lesson I.) to (326, f ) suffer with patience the inconveniences of this life. What (125, b) is proper in one is improper in another. Nobody is without sin. The idle (102) are useless to society (628). Every one has his own business {quehaceres). A* city that is (335, b) placed upon a mountain can (puede) not be hid (116, a ; 173). God will reward (670) the good (102) and will punish (670) the wicked (102). Ambition (628) augments the many troubles {trahajos) ; diminishes (165) the few pleasures which are found (173) in the world. The meek (102) shall inherit the earth. Every (132) ' hour is a step towards the tomb. The good (263, a) is preferable to the beautiful (263, a). SECOND SECTION. Remark. — The Reading Lessons in this Section contain sentences somewhat more complicated than those in the former Section. The verbs are printed in italics. The persons of verbs used in this Section will be found in the Vocabulary. Care has been taken to select such reading matter as may be comparatively easy of translation, and at the same time useful in illustrating many idiomatical expressions. 13 See 628.— 14 See 315.— 15 See 314.— is Se, '' be-tJwu.'' See Remark, page 44.— 17 En dav, " in-giving.'' See 298, a, and 327.— is Al que, "to him who.'' See 129, b, and 291, a.— 19 See 326,/.— 20 See 352, a. 308 SPAJCSH READING LESSONS. VIII. GAINING AND LOSING. Un escritor frances^ decia^ que solamente se habia vistas arruinado dos veces'^ en su vida ; la primera fue cuando perdio un pleito, y la segunda cuando gano otro. IX. A GOOD REASON FOR WRITING A LONG LETTER. Escrihio un amigo^ a otro una carta muj^estensa, y al concluir^ le^ decia : " No estranes^ que te escriba^ una carta tan larga, porque no he tenido^ tiempo para hacerlsi' mas corta." X. REWARDING A DULL WRITER. Una rica sefiora que ha muerto^ recientemente en Lon- dres, lego en su testamento miP libras esterlines a un autor ingles,^ para recompensar las horas de sueno que en momentos de desvelo la* habian proforcionado^ sus obras. XI. EARLY RISING. Un yanki ha hecho^ el calculo de lo que vale^ levantarse^ temprano. " En vez* de dormir^ hasta las oclio,"^ dice el calculista, levdniese^ un hombre a las seis^ de la manana, y si durante cuarenta anos hace^ esto mismo,^ ganard viente mil horas, lo cuaP° sera equivalente a un aumento de diez anos de vida, que podria emplear un hombre" en estudios muy importantes. VIII.— 1 See 264.-2 See 302.-3 Se hahm visto, "Ac had seen himself See 284 and 305. — ■* Dos veces, ^^two times^^^ i. e., ^^ twiceJ^ Veces is the plural of xez. See 95, a, IX.— 1 See B7o.—^ Al concluir, ''on closing;'' see 298, b.—^Le, ''to- him.'' See 114, b.—^ See 309 a.—^ See 311.-6 See leO.—THacerla, ''to make it." La refers to carta. See 116. X.— 1 Ha muerto, "has died^'' or in better English, "died."—^ See 248.-3 See 264.-4 /,«, "/jer." See 114, a.— 5 See 305.— « See 575. XI.— 1 Ha hecho, "has made."-^ Vale, "it avails."—^ See 665.—" Kn vez, "instead." — ^ See 327. — 6 See 280. — 1 Lexantese un /lombre, "let a man rise." See 665, and 309,/.— « Hace, " does."—^ Esto mismo, " this same," "the same."—^^ See 124, and 117.— ^^ See 575. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 309 XII. A SINGULAR EDICT. El einperador de todas las Rusias ha mavdado puhlicai recientemente un edicto en el cuaP se exige^ de todos los funcionarios publicos^ que posean^ una fortuna, manijiestan^ esplicitamente de que manera® la^ han ohteiiido. Si esto^ se hiciera^ en todas partes — \ Dios nos asista !^^ XIII. PERIODICALS IN THE UNITED STATES. En ningun^ pais del mundo se publican^ tantos periodicos ni en tantos idiomas distintos^ como en los Estados Uni- dos. Esto es el efecto de la ilimitada libertad que goza la imprenta.^ En esta Bepublica se han publicado^ periodicos nacionales,^ ingleses,^ franceses,^ espanoles,^ italianos,^ ale- manes f y en la actualidad se ha establecida^ un noruego.* XIY. SAGACITY OF A DOG. El perro de un mercader en las inmediaciones de Vera Cruz, recibio dias pasados^ una herida en una oreja. Su dueno le Uevo inmediatamente a casa^ de un quimico que le aylico un remedio, venddndoW en seguida.^ Tres dias^ se repiiio^ la misma operacion, pero el cuarto, viendo el perro^ que su amo tardaba algo mas de lo regular^ en ir^ a Uevarlej se fue solo a la botica, salto sobre el mostrador y ulli estuvo hasta que se le hizo^ la operacion necesaria, y sin aguardar^ mas 6}^ que su amo le acompanase,^^ continuo XII.— 1 See 124.— 2 See 173.— s See 264.-4 See 311, 6.-5 See 314, a. — 6 Dq que rnanera, ^^in what manner.^' — 7 La, "it," referring to for- tuna.—s See 128, a.-9 See 173 and 316.— lo See 309,/ XIII.— 1 See 101.— 2 See 173.— 3 See 264.-4 See 575. XIV. — 1 Dias pasadoSf "in days past," i. e., "some days ago." — 2 See 240. — ^ La refers io oreja. See 116. — ^ En seguida, "in the sequel;" ** afterward." — 5 Tres dias "for three days." The preposition is not generally used in such cases, in Spanish. — ^ See 173. — ^ in translating, the construction would be el perro viendo. — 8 jligo mas de lo regular^ "somewhat more (longer) than what is proper." See 263, a, and 270 9 See 227.-10 See 554.— n See 314. 310 SPANISH READING LESSONS. repitiendo sus visitas al boticario liasta que^^ qioedo complex tamente curado. XY. THALES' SAGE ANSWERS. Thales Milesio^ uno de los siete sabios^ de Grecia, pre- guntado^ cual era la cosa mas antigua,^ respondio que era^ Dios, porque Dios ha siempre sido f — cual era la mas bella,^ respondio que el mundo,^ porque era la obra de Dios ; — cual la mas grande, respondio^ que el espacio,^ que coraprende todo f — cual la mejor ;^° la virtud, dijo el, porque sin ella nada se fuede decir^^ ni hacer de bueno f^ — cual la mas facil ; la^^ de dar^^ consejos a otro ; — cual la mas dificil, la^^ de conocerse^^ a si mismo/® dijo el. XYI. SIMPLICITY OF A CHILI). " Mama, ^ame^ un cuarto," dijo una nifia que enti'o pre- cipidamente en la sala de una casa donde nos halldbamos'^ dias pasados.^ — •• i Para que ?" pregunto la madre.^ — '' Para ^arselo^ a un nino que estd bailando^ alii en la calle mien- tras su padre toca'^ la musica en un cajon." — "^ Como sahes que es su padre el que toca'' ? " — " Lo se^ porque los dos se varecev? mucho.^^ Yen mama, ven al balcon y lo verdsP 12 See 553. XV. — ^ Milcsio, ^Hhe Milesian^ See 237.— ^ Sdbios, ^^wise men.^' ''sages." See 102.— 3 Preguntado, ''being asked.'' See 3U0, c— 4 See 268. — 5 Era^ "it was." — ^ ffa sido, "has been" "has existed." — ^ Bella agrees with cosa understood. — ^ ^jj-a is understood. — » Todo, " every thing." — 10 See 265, a. — ^^ Nada se puede decir ni hacer de bueno, " nothing good can be said nor done." See 116, a; and 173. — ^2 See 134, b. — ^^ La., "that," referring to cosa. See 616. — ^^ De dar, " of giving." See 327. — ^5 Dg conocerse, " of knovdng one's self." See 327. — ^^ See 285, b, and 286. Literally, '* of knowing one's self to himself;" d si mis- mo being redundant in English. XVI.— I Dame, "give me." See 116.— 2 See 284, a.—^ See XIV., note 1. — 4 Sec 575. — ^ Ddrselo, "to give him it." See 116, and 284,/. Se would be considered redundant in English, as the object {a un nino) follows the verb. See 285, c— 6 See 335, c— 7 See 512.— 8 Lo se, " J know it." See 192.— » See 464, and 284.— lo gee 351. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 311 / Salimos a ver al" hombre con su hijo, y era nada menos que un Italiano con su organo y su mono ! XVII. THE KINGS OF FORMER TIMES. Todo^ muda con el tiempo :^ unas cosas para bien y otras para mal. Los Keyes eran en siglos pasados^ muy distin- tos de lo que son ahora. En Aragon, cuando regia el fuero de Sobrarve, al tiempo de irivestirse'^ un monarca con la autoridad real,^ y jurado la observancia de la constitu- cion a^ nombre del pueblo, se le decia^ : " Nos/ que somos mas y vahmos mas que vos,^ os hacemos Hey, si observarede^ nuestras leyes, y si non, non." Ahora es muy distinto, y sin ser^^ rey, ni^^ principe, un simple gobernador de Colo- nias, grita al pueblo desde su coche : " Canalla vil,^ quitd- os'2 el sombrero cuando yo paso^ que^^ soy mejor que todos vosotros y deheis obedecerme y besar al polvo que pisan mis plantas."^^ XVIII. AN irishman's CONJECTURE. Dias pasados^ examinaba un comerciante^ los efectos que acaba de^ recibir, y hallo todo'' en orden y corriente escepto un martillo qaefaltaba en un casco que estaba bien cerrado. Un criado irlandes^ que no sabia a que atribuir la falta, dijo 7'ascdndose la cabeza^ : " Vamos^ ya se yo lo que pnede serJ'' I Que es V replied el comerciante — " Que en la aduana 11 See 325. XVII.— 1 See XV., note 9.-2 See 628.-3 See 264. Also, XIV., note 1. — 4 De investirseun monarca, *' of a monarch'' s being invested.^^ See 327 and 173. — 5 /i^ nombre de, ^Hn the name of.^^ — ^ Sele dccia, ^^ it was said to him." See 173, and 284, d.—^ See 110, a.— 8 See 110, b.— • Ohservaredes, an obsolete form, for observareis. See 224. — ^^ See 327.-11 See 401, d.— 12 Quitdos el sombrero, ^'take-qf to-vou the h-at." i. e., " take-qf your hats." See 116, b, and 122, a.— 13 See 552, 6.— i-i See 575. XVIII.— 1 See XIV., note 1.— 2 See 575.-3 Acaba de recibir, " had fust received:' See 337.-4 Todo, " &o&ry thing."--^ See 264.— s See 122, (i.— 7£?5, «is-£^.» 312 SPANISH READING LESSONS. no^ tendrian martillo para^ abrir el casco y examinarlo, y sacaron uno para desdavar la tapa." XIX. THE FORCE OF SHAME. Una joven irlandesa escribio a su amante pidiendole una cantidad de dinero, y al pie de la carta anadio la siguiente posdata : " Me dd^ tanta vergiienza de pedirte^ este favor, que mande^ al momento^ en busca del criado que llevo la carta al correOj pero mi hermanito^ no pudo alcanzarlo^ para evitar que la echara' en la posta." XX. AN ACCOMMODATING WIFE. Los papeles de Baltimore han hccho graciosos comenta- rios sobre una escena que llamo la atencion general^ en aquella ciudad a principios del presente mes. Un bolan- des compro un barril de barina. y su muger lo^ llevo a cues- tas^ desde el almacen basta su casa, mientras que* el mari(fo iha " muy fresco " detras de eWa, fumando su pipa. XXI. AN INVENTION OF QUESTIONABLE UTILITY. Un yanki acaba de inveniar^ un jabon para afeitar^ con el uso del cual es inneces§.ria la navaja,^ pues asegura que con aplicarlo^ a las barbas caen estas^ al momento.^ La unica dificultad que encuentra un amigo^ del inventor en adopt %r^ para su uso el taF jabon es^ que juntamente con las barbas arranca? el pellejo. 8 gee 626.-9 See 326, c. XIX. — ^ Me dd^ ^^ it gives me." — ^ Depedirte, "to ask thee." See 326, b. — ^ MandSy " I gave orders" — ^ Al momento^ "immediately" — 5 See 256.-6 Lo; see 287, b, and 116.— 7 See 316. XX.— 1 See 264.-2 See 287, b, and 113.-3^' cuestas, "on her back" or "shoulders " — * See 553. XXI.— 1 See 337. — 2 JJn jabon para afeitar^ "asoap for shaving" i. e., " shaving-soap." See 327.-3 See 575.-4 See 327, and 287, b.—^ See XIX., note 4.—^ See 327. — '^ El tal jabon, " the said soap."—^ Arranca^ "it tears off." SPANISH READING LESSONS. 313 liemark.— The Reading Lessons in this Section should now be care- fully translated into English, as directed at the close of the former Sec- tion ; and then afterward re-translated into Spanish. By this method, the words and their meaning, as well as the phrases, idioms, and forms of construction used in Spanish, will become impressed on the memory of the learnef. He should not a^^empt to translate any of the succeed- ing Reading Lessons till he can i jadily translate the preceding Lessona from Spanish into English, and then from English into Spanish. THIRD SECTION. Remark. — If the learner has carefully read and re-read the preceding Lessons, and examined the rules referred to in the notes, he will have already learned so well many of these same rules, that farther reference to them will seldom be necessary in his future reading. Thus, for in- stance, he must now know that in Spanish an adjective more frequently is placed after, than before, the noun which it qualifies ; — that pronouns of the first-objective case are placed after, and joined to, infinitives, im- peratives (when not negative) and gerunds ; that nouns used in a general or absolute sense take the definite article before them; — that active verbs govern the noun which is the object of the action, with the prepo- sition d, if this noun expresses a rational being, or personified object, etc. As the learner is expected, by the time he shall have proceeded thus far, to be able to conjugate the regular, and many of the irregular verbs without diflaculty, only the present infinitive of such verbs as may be used hereafter will be given in the Vocabulary at the end of the work. Reference will be made in the notes to such irregularities of verbs as might occasion any diflBculty on the part of the pupil. All the Lessons of this Section are taken from " Deb£res de los HoMBREs," a work originally written in Italian, by Silvio P^Uico, and translated into Spanish by Manuel Galo de Cu^ndias. XXII. FILIAL AFFfeCTION. Nuestros primeros y raas^ naturales amigos son nuestros padres^ ; ellos^ son los seres'* a quien mas^ debemos^ ; para XXII. — 1 Mas here means " most." The superlative is formed with- out the definite article, when a possessive pronoun precedes 77ias ; thus, es mi mejor amigo, " he is my best friend ;" es nuesiro mas cruel enemi- g^o,'* he is our most cruel enemy." — 3 Padres in the plural means "/?a- rents." — 3 See 283, a, latter clause. — 4 Seres is the plural of the noun ser. — 5 Mas, "most."'^ Debemos, ^^ we owe." ' " 27 314 SPANISH READING LESSONS. con'' ellos estamos obligados^ d(jP modo mas*® sagrado, a^* gratitud, respeto, amor, e indulgencia, y a las mas amorosas demostraciones de estos sentimentos. Nuestra grande^^ intimidad con las personas que nos tocan de mas cerca/^ pitede acostumbrarnos facilmente a tratarl&a con indiferencia y sin procurar^^ hacer su existen- cia agradable : gudrdate^^ de^^ adquirir^^ tamaSo defecto. Si quieres en7ioblecertej con precision^'' has de^^ ornar tus acciones y afectos con aquella elegancia y exactitud de que son susceptibles. , i Triste de aqueP^ que censura la conducta de sus pa- dres'^ ! I Quien compadecerd a^° un hombre que no es cari- tsLtiYOy J falia de indulgencia para con'^ su padre y madre? Sea^^ siempre tu conducta para con'' ellos un modelo de amenidad, un ejemplo de d^lzura ; sirva^^ tu vista para consolarles y reanimar su alegria. No lo dudes; cada acto de indulgencia 6 bondad de tu parte.^^ cada palabra de amor salida de^^ tu boca, es una flor que siembras^^ en su camino hacia la tumba, una bendicion para ti, pues te bendecirdn, y siempre sanciona Dios las bendiciones que Tin padre 6 una madre derraman sobre un hijo recon- ocido. 7 See 402.— 8 See 322, a.— 9 Del modo, " in a manner:'— ^^ See 268.— ^1 The meaning of this passage is, " wUh regard to them we are obligated . in a manner most sacred, to gratitude" etc., that is, " under obligations to sfww gratitude,' ' etc. — ^2 See 101, a. — ^3 Tocar de cerca, means " to concern nearly," " to be nearly related," and this clause is to be rendered ^^with the persons who are most' nearly related to-u^" {nos). — 14 See 327. — 15 When any person of the imperative mood is spelled in the same man- ner as some person of a tense in another mood, care must be taken to judge from the context which mood is meant. Gudrda may be found in the 2d pers. of the imperative, or in the 3d pers. of the present indica- tive. Here it is in the imperative. Gudrdate, " keep thyself." See 284, a. — ^^ De, ^^from." — ^"^ Con precision, "with necessity," "necessa- rUy»— IB See 339.— 19 See 40^.— 20 See 670.— 21 Sea siempre tu conducta, " let thy conduct always be.!' See 309,./*. — ^2 Sirva tu vista, " let thy pres* ence serve." See 309,/.— 23 Oe tu parte, " on thy part ' —24 Siemhraa Irregular from e&mbmr. SPANISH READING LLlSONS. 315 XXIII. RESPECT FOR OLD AGE. AN ANECDOTE. Una de las lejes de la antigua Sparta exigia, que los jovenes cediesen^ el paso a los ancianos, se levantasen^ cuan- do una persona de edad se acercaba^^ y que callasen^ cuando hahlaba un major. ^ Lo que la ley mandaba en Sparta, mdndeW entre nosotros la decencia. Tal es la bellaza moraP de este obsequio, que aun los que no le practican^ sienten'^ dentro de si gran^ respeto por los que acosiumbran 6. pradicarle, y se kalian como forzados a aplaudirlos. Un Ateniense, cubierto de® canas y cargado de® anos, buscaba puesto^" en los juegos olimpicos^ ; pero las gradas del 2in^te2itTO estaban llenas y no le^^ hallaba. Unos joven- zuelos^^ de Atenas le hicieron senas de acercar^e^^ y, el anciano cediendo a su invitacion, llego con gran^ dificultad hasta ellos ; mas^^ estos, en vez de^* acogerlQ cual debie- ran^^^ se hmlarom}^ de^'' el. Empujado de una parte a otra, llego casualmente aP^ sitio ocupado por los Spartanos ; y estos, fieles a las sagradas costumbres de su patria, se levantan^^ respetuosamente y le colocan entre si. Un vivo aplauso se ot/o^^ en todo el anfiteatro ; y los mismos^° Atenienses que poco antes^^ habian escarnecido'^^ la vejez,^^ se hallaron impelidos a estimar a^* sus generosos^^ emulos. El anciano esclamo : '-'" Los Atenienses conocen las^^ buenas acciones ; los Spartanos las practican.''^ XXIII.— 1 See 314.— 2 See 284, e, and 314.— 3 See 284, e.—* See 575. — ^ Mandelo, etc., ^^ let propriety demand it among iis.'' See 309,yi Lo (it) would be redundant in English. — ^ See 264. — ^ Sienten, irregular from sentir.—^ See 101, a.— 9 De, " wUh." See 399.— lo Puesto, "a place,'' "a seat:'—^^Le, ''it,'' referring to puesto.- ^2 See 256, last clause. — 13 Mas here is a conjunction, meaning " but." See 359. — ^^ En vez de, ''instead of." — '^^ Cual debieran, "as they ought." See 104, 6, and 316.— is See 288, c— i? See 330.-18 Al, " at the." See 378.— 19 See 173.— 20 See 286, a.— 21 Poco dntes, "a little whUe before."— ^^ See 305.--23 See 628.— 2^ See 670.— 25 See 264, a. 316 SPANISH READING LESSONS. XXIV. ^FRIENDSHIP. i Bien^ aventurado el hombre feliz^ que halla^ un digno aiiiigo ! Abandonado a sus propias fuerzas, su virtud Jla- queaha^ pero el ejemplo y la aprobacion del amigo \efortifl- can ; solo, desanimado e^ inclinado a miP defectos, ignoraba^ su fuerza desconociendo su merito ; pero el aprecio del amigo le realza a sus propios ojos. MiP veces, avergonzado se- cretamente de no poseer el merito que la indulgencia del amigo le supone, lucha, se vence y llega sJ conseguirle ; el • amigo conoce sus buenas prendas, y su corazon se halla satisfecho ; y he aqui,^ que, gracias^ a la amistad, avanza a pasos^° de gigante hacia la perfeccion^^ un hombre ^^ que, sin ella, estaba y hubiera estado^^ siempre lejos de^"* ser^^ virtuoso. XXV. READING AND STUDY. Si puedes^ cuUivar tu ingenio, y no lo haces^faltas a^ un deber sagrado.^ La instruccion'* te. hard mas capaz, mas digno de honrar^ ^ a^ Dios y de servir^ a® tu patria, mas apto a ser util a tus amigos y parientes. AplicaiQ a apren- der cuanto'' estudies^ lo mas^ profundamente que te^° sea posible y no pierdas^^ de vista que los estudios superficiales no producen mas que^^ hombres de poco merito, que, con- XXIV.— 1 See 351, 6.-2 See 264.-3 See 325, a.— 4 See 226, a.— 5 See 248. — ^ Jgnoraba, *^ he-was-ignorant of." — 7 See 341. — ^ He aqut, "be hold." See 406, a. — 9 Grdcias d la amistad^ ^^ thanks to friendship. "— ^^ A pasos, ''with the steps " or, "a^ the speed" of a giant. See 331. — 11 See 628. — 12 Hombre is nominative to avanza. See 575. — ^3 See 318, and 318, a.—^^ Lejos de, "far from."— ^5 See 327. XXV.— 1 Puedes, irregular from poder. See 189. — 2 Paltar d, means "to fail in "—3 See 264.-4 See 628.-5 See 327.-6 See 325.-7 Cuanto, "as much as" "wJiatever." — ^ See 321, a. — ^ Lo maSj " the most." Lo mas is generally used as the superlative before adverbs. — ^^ Te, etc., "to- ihee may-be possible." — ^^ No pierdas de vista, " do not lose sight." See 309 a. Pierdas is from the irregular verb perder. — 12 jv/oa qiKiy ^vQ' ceded by 7w, means "710 Twore ^fean," "oTiZv.'* SPANISH READING LESSONS. 317 vennidos^^ interiorinente de su nulidad, se reunen con otroa tan^^ despreciables como ellos, para aturdir aP^ mundo griiando que son grandes y que los verdaderamente sabios son pequenos ; de aqui^® nacen las perpetuas guerras del pedante contra el hombre instruido, y del charlatan sofista contra el verdadero filosofo. Si quieres^'^ .que la lectura te deje^^ impresiones durade- ras, dice^^ Seneca, limitate^^ a pocos autores que, llenos de sano juicio, nutran tu inteligencia : eslar en todas partes es como^^ no estar en ninguna,^^ y el hombre que fasa su vida viajando conocerd muchcs posaderos, pero pocos ami- gos. Tal es el caso de^^ los que ken precipitadamente : leen muchos libros, pero no comprenden ninguno.^^ Cualquiera que^^ sea la ciencia 6 arte a que te aficiones gudrdate de^^ un vicio demasiado^^ comun, esto es, de ser^ tan^'' esclusivo que desprecies las^^ que no conoces. Las preocupaciones de ciertos poetas contra la prosa,* las^^ de los prosadores contra la poesia,^ las"* del naturalista contra el metafisico, las^^ del matemaiico contra el filosofo, no son mas que^^ puerilidades. XXYI. SELECTING A PROFESSION. Todos los estados, desde eP ma.i Gublime hasta eP del mas humilde artesano, tienen en si^ cierta^ dulzura y digni- dad ; y basta querer ejercerlos con integrids^d y pradicar las virtudes que cada uno de ellos exige para se? foliz. Cuando hayas escogido^ prudamente UR8^ carrera, no te 13 See 300, c- 14 See 104.— is See 325.— is De aqm, *' .^>^.»r^."— 17 Qui- eres, irregular from querer. — i^ Te deje, ^^ may-have *c-fh0-^^^ — ^^ Dice, irregular from decir. — 20 gee XXII., note 15. — 2i Es conoip^ ef^^r, etc., " Z5 as {the same as) not to be in any,'' — 22 gee 622. — 23 jiig ^'^Wi." — 2^ See 131, and 311, c— 25 De, '\from.''—^^ Demasiado belbrp •*« adjec- tive means ^^ too.'' — 27 See 104, b. — 28 j^^g^ ^^ those," refeningr •*<* «■ '^cias 6 artes.~-^9 See 616. XXVI.— 1 See 616.— 2 En st, ''in themselves." ^^ Se^ 264, ^^- *-f 317. 27* 818 SPANISH HEADING LESSONS. deje^ dominar^ por un vano arrepentimiento ni tengas^ la d^bilidad de^ cambiarla. Todos los caminos de la vida titnen espinas: cuando hayas puesto^ eP° pie en uno^^ vrcsiguele^^ con valor; eP^ mudar es flaqueza. Siempre es bueno persistir escepto en el crimen. ^^ Solo el que sigue^^ su carrera con constancia puede esperar^^ llegar^^ algun^'' dia a senalarse entre los demas^^ hombres. XXVII. OUR AMBITION SHOULD BE RESTRAINED. La sociedad^ seria^ menos viciosa si cada cual enfrenase^ su desarreglada ambicion y sus inquietudes. Empero no por eso^ debemos ser perezosos ni apaticos, no : la ambicion^ \>uede sernos^ util; pero la unica® que le^ es permitido al hombre'' sensato,^ es la que le hace aspirar a cosas nobles, y esta no es interesada ni envidiosa, y se contenia con lo^ necesario. Consuelate^^ con pensar,^^ que, si no llegas a aquel alto grado que ci'eias merecer,^^ aun en el que^^ te hallas, eres el mismo^^ hombre y tienes el mismo^^ merito. Lo^ esencial no es que nuestro merito sea recompensado ; lo mas esencial ^^ es tener merito. XXYIII. REPENTING OF AND ACKNOWLEDGING OUR FAULTS. El hombre que dice ; " mi educacion moraP ya esta 5 No te dejes, " do not suffer thyself^ See 309, a.— « See 327, d. " Suf- fer not thyself to be mastered.^' — 7 Ni tengas^ " nor do-thou have." See 309, a. TengaSj irregular from tener. — ^ De^ " ^o." — ^ Puesto, irregular participle, from poner. See 317. — ^^ See 122. — ^^ Uno refers to camino. — 12 Prosigue, irregular from pi-oseguir. See 116. — ^^ See 251, and 298, b. — 14 See 628.— 15 Sigue, irreg. from seguir.^^^ See 326,/.— i? See 101.— 13 Los demas, " the rest of." XXVII.— 1 See 628.-2 See 315.— 3 See 314.-4 No por eso, ''not on this account J^ — 5 Semos, " be to-us." — ^ Lm Unica ; here ambicion is un- derstood. — 7 Le^ « to-him." Le would be here redundant in English. See 285, b; 285, c— « See 264.-9 See 263, a.— lo Consuelate, ''console thyself" See XXII., note 15. Consuele, irregular from consolar. — n See 327.-12 See 327, c— 13 Aun en el que, " yet in that in vhich."—^'^ S'^e 286, a. — 15 Lo mas esencial, " that which is most esseniial." XXVIII.- 1 Set 264. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 319 hecha^^ mis obras la han corrohorado^^ se engana. Siempre debemos aprender, siempre regularizar nuestras obras ; tan- to^ en lo presente como^ para lo future, nuestra virtud debe ser activa y crear cada dia nuevos actos meritorios.^ Continuamente debemos tener presentes* nuestros faltas y arreperitirnos^ de ellas. Cuando conozcas^ haber covietido^ una falta. repdrahi in- mediatemente y sin rubor ; solamente asi se^ tranquilizard tu coneiencia.® Se^^ pronto en reparar^^ tus culpas si no quieres^^ encadenar tu alma almaP^ con vinculos mas y mas fuertes cada dia y acostumbrarla. a despreciarse.^* i Des- graciado el hombre que llega €}^ despreciarse interior- mente ! j Desgraciado de^® el cuando finge que se estima, y aP'' mismo tiempo siente^^ en el fondo de su conciencia el gus|Lno roedor que le acusa ! XXIX. GRATITUDE. Si nuestro deber es ser corteses^ y beneficos^ con todo el mundo ; si nuestra benevolencia debo ser general ; con cuanta mas razon debemos manifestar estos sentimientos con los que nos^ han dado^ pruebas de compasion. amistad 6 in- dulge ncia. Mucbos se irritan al ver^ que el que los favorecio se' enorgullece, y creen que el envanecimiento del bienhechor basta para dispensaries de^ ser agradecidos. Si tu bien- hechor se^ envancce ; si se alaha de^ haberte hecho favor ; 2 See 322, a. ffecha, irregular participle from hacer. — 3 See 368, b. — 4 Tcner prescnfes, " to have present," " to have before us." — 5 See 284, e. — 6 Conozcas, irreg. from conocer. — 7 See 327, c- ^ See 173. — ^ See 575. — ^^ Se, ''be-thou." See Remark after 117.—" See 298, a.—^^Quieres, irreg. from querer. — ^3 gee 628. — i* Despreciarse, " to despise itself," re- ferring to alma.— ^5 See 341. — i^ See 4T)7. — ^^ jn mismo tiempo, ^^ at the same time." — ^^ Siente, irreg. from sentir. XXIX,— 1 Corteses is in the plural, because it refers to nosotros under- stood.— 2 A^os, ''to us."— ^ Han dado, from dar. See 304.— ^ ilZ ver^ ''on seeing," ''at seeing." See 298, b.—5 See 284, c— 6 De, "from."-- 7 De haberte, etc., "for having done thee a favor." 32Q SPANISH READING LESSONS. si no tiene contigo^ la delicadeza que debiera^ ; si solo fue generoso per interes, no por eso^ te^° es permitido a ti^° eP^ condenarle. No, amigo ; al contrario/^ cubre^^ sus defec- tos con el velo de tu agradecimiento. Acuerdaie^^ deP^ beneficio que de® el recibiste j considera que jamas te^® sera permitido^^ olvidarle,^^ aun cuando para jja^arle/^ le hay as hecho^^ mil.^° XXX. PARDON TO ENEMIES. Si te sucediere^ tener^ enemigos no te^ iurbes. Nadie* hay,^ por® humilde, sincero, e'' inofensivo que sea,^ que este libre de envidiosos. Tal es la envidiosa naturaleza de algunos desgraciados,^ que no pueden vivir sin escarnecer^^^ degradar j acusar^^ falsamente a^^ cualquiera que^^ goze^^ de^^ alguna reputacion. Perdona^^ franca*® y sinceramente*® a** los infelices^ que te hacen 6 quieren^^ hacerte mal: ^' perdonales^^ no siete veces," dice^^ el Salvador, " sino setenta veces siete," esto es, sin fin. Perdonando una ofensa, se puede cambiar^^ en^^ amigo un enemigo, un perverso en^° hombre de bien.^* j Cuan^^ bello, cuan consolador es tamano triunfo ! j Cuan^^ supe- rior en grandeza a todas las horribles victorias de la ven- ganza^^ ! Y ^que perderds aun cuando tu enemigo 8 See 115, c.—^ Debiera, '' he-ought." See 316. See XXVII., note 4.— 10 See 285, 6.— ^ See 298, fe.— 12 Al contrdrio, ''on the contrary."— 13 Cubre, " cover-thou" " conceaUthou." — i^ Acuerdate, " remember." See 284, e.— is See 330.— 16 Te, ''to-thee."—^'r See 322.— is Le, ''it," re- ferring to beneficio. — ^^Hecho, irreg. participle from hacer. See 317. — 20 Sgg 248. This clause means, " thou mayest have donehim a thousand (favors)." XXX. — 1 Si te sucediere, " if it should happen to thee." See 319, and 220.-2 See 325, a.— 3 See 309, a, and 284, a.— 4 See 622.-5 See 218, and 218, a.— 6 See 478.-7 See 226, a.— » See 311, c— 9 See 102.— 10 See 327.-11 See 325.— 12 See 131.-13 See 311, c— 14 See 330.— is See XXII., note 15. — IS See 354, a. — 17 Quieren, irreg. from querer. — i^ Dice, irreg. from c?ccir.— 19 See 116, a.—^° En, "into." See 3S7.—'^^ Hombre de bien, " a man of worth," "an honest man."—^^ See 478, a.— 23 See 628. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 321 fuese^^ irreconciliable ? ^ Fuedes perder algo siendo bueno 1 ^No gozaste^^ la mayor alegria? jNo te^^ conservaste^^ magnanimOj digno de ti y^^ del aprecio de los hombres d« bien?2i FOURTH. SECTION. Remark. — None of the words contained in the Lessons of this Sec- tion will have the marked accent placed over the accented vowel, except such as are usually to be found thus marked in Spanish reading-matter. If the learner should meet with any difficulty about the accentuation, he can turn to the Vocabulary, in which he will find every word with the proper syllable accented. XXXI. ^NO HEREDITARY TITLES IN THE UNITED STATES. En los Estados Unidos no hay distincion de gerarquias ni noblezas que se hacen tan^ chocantes en los paises mo- narquicos.^ En los Estados Unidos es noble todo^ hom- bre^ honrado, laborioso y recto en sus principios, aunque sea el hijo de un zapatero 6 de un labrador. Un hombre de honradez, de probidad, y de sentimientos nobles,^ puede aspirar al primer puesto de la nacion lo mismo^ que a la mano de la primera dama ; mientras que un principe 6 un rey que venga^ a esta Republica, aunque sea el primero deF mundo, con tal que^ no se porie noblemente, seria despreciado por todos y no podria^ ohtener ni el aprecio de lo que se llama^^ una persona de la median la en un pais monarquico.^ En fin/^ en pocas partes del mundo se^^ a/predan ta'n} justamente las buenas cualidades de un hom 24 Fuese, irreg. from ser. See 314, and 321, a.-— 25 See 303.— 26 Te, " thyself:' See 284, a.— 27 Digno de fi, " worthy of thyself" XXXI.— 1 See 104, 6.-2 See 264.-3 See I., note 22.-4 Hombre is nominative to es.—5 See 335, and 335, d.—^ Venga, irreg. from venir.—- 7 Del mundOf "in the world" See 387, and 387, c. — ^ Con tal que, ^^ pro- vided thaty See 321, c. — ^ Podrm, irreg. from poder. Por todos, ^^by every body." — ^^ De lo que se Uama, " with which is regarded." Persona is nominative to Uamn. See 575, and 173.— ^i Enfn, " injine ;" ''fnal- lyy^\2 See 173. 322 SPANISH READING LESSONS. bre conio en los Estados Unidos ; pero tambien en los Es- tados Unidos es^^ donde se senalan^^ mas^^ pronto en pub- lico las faltas^^ 6 las bajezas^® de una persona, sea^^ quien fuere^^ ; desde el Presidente hasta el ultimo jornalero : todos son iguales en ese caso. XXXII. INCREASE OF POPULATION IN THE UNITED STATES. Las diferentes estadisticas de la poblacion de esta Ee-. publica desde 1800 hasta 1848, fresenian curiosos datos, que merecen consignarse^ a la posteridad. Parecerd^ incre- dible que en menos de^ cincuenta anos se^ hay a aumentado^ la poblacion^ casi cinco^ tantos mas de^ lo o^o-era al empe- zar' el presente siglo. En 1800 contaban los Estados Unidos^ con solos 5,305,900. Los que temen no llegar a ver el fin del presente siglo se han ocupado en hacer^ calcu- los de proporcion para averiguar cual jpodrd^ ser el guaris- mo que senalard en 1900 la poblacion de los Estados Uni- dos, J juzgando que haya^^ un aumento semejante, en pro- porcion, al que A^ habido^^ desde 1790 hasta 1840, se cree'^^ que dentro de cincuenta y dos anos contard esta Eepubli- ca^ con 96,000,000 de habitantes. El numero es bastante crecidoj j tal vez^^ no seria dificil llegase^^ a completarse^ pero nadie sabe como^^ estardn arreglados las cosas^ del mundo dentro de cincuenta anos, y cuantas revoluciones y guerras ocurriran que trastornen todos los planes y dividaii la Union Americana en muchos pedazos. Por nuestra 13 Es^ " it is.^^ J^s should here be translated immediately eifter pero. — 14 See 173.— 15 Mas, « mosV'—'^s See 575.— 17 Sea, " let him be." See 309,./*. — 18 Quien fuere, "who he may be." Fuere, irreg. from ser. See 319, and 311, o. XXXII.— 1 See m.-^Parecerd, 'Ht will-appear."— ^ ^ee 270.— * See 317. — 5 gee 575. — ^ Casi cinco tantos mas, " almost Jive times more." —7 See 298, 6.-8 En hacer, " in making." See 298, a.— 9 Podrd, irreg. from poder. — i^ Haya, " there-may-be." See 218, a. — n Ha hahido, " there has been." See 218, and 167. — ^^ Se cree, "it is believed." See . 173.— 13 ToZ vez, "perhaps."— ^^ See 314, a.—^^Camo, "hmo." See 478, a. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 323 parte solamente deseamos que pueda^^ conservarse^ largos anos en harmonia, para que nuestros nietos logren ver tiem- pos mas venturosos de^ los que alcanzaremos nosotros.^ XXXIII. THE MAGNETIC TELEGRAPH. Hace^ mucho tiempo^ que^ habiamos oido^ la especie de que la aplicacion de la electricidad a la telegrafia era in- vencion de un Espanol, pero no habiamos podido^ obtener los datos indispensables, y por este motivo hemos guardado^ silencio hasta ahora que se^ nos^ han facilitadb los porme- nores^ de inas^° importancia. Por ellos vemos pues que Don Francisco Sabra ley 6^'^ a fines ^^ del siglo pasado en la Academia de Ciencias de Barcelona una memoria sobre la aplicacion de la electricidad al telegrafo, y presento al mismo tiempo^^ un telegrafo electrico de su propia^^ in- vencion, el cuaP^ fue ensayado^ con gran exito, por Carlos lY. y Fernando VII. en presencia del Principe de la Paz, quien trato de^® ponerlo en planta, y se anuncio en la Ga- ceta de Madrid ^^ el dia 29 de Noviembre de 1796. Poco tiempo despues se propuso^^ el Infante Don Antonio hacer otro mas^** completo para ponerle en operacion, pero las convulsiones politicas^* le impidieron atender^^ debidamente a ello, y asi quedo el proyecto. hasta que^^ treinta anos despues ha venido^* el Senor Morse^ a tratar el asunto, hacer algunas mejoras, y poner al fin^^ en pratica el invento ensayado en Espana hace^ mas de^^ cincuenta ar5os. ^5 Pueda, '*it-mai/ ;^' from poder ; '^ it,'' referring to la Union. XXXIII.—' See 218, c, and 522.-2 See 522.-3 See 304, 6.-4 See 305. Oido, from oir. — 5 See 305. — ® Hemos guardado, ''we have kept." — 7 See 115, 6, and 173.-8 Nos, ''to its." See 114.— » See 575.— 'o Mas, "most" — •! Leyo, from leer. See 165. — ^^ A'Jines, "at the end." — ^3 Al mismo tiempo, "at the same time." — ^^ Su propia, "his own." — '5 See 124, c. — '6 Tratar demeans "to aim to" "to attempt." — '7 See 173. — 1^ See 391,./". — '^ Propuso, 'meg. from proponer. Se propuso, " propased lo-himself."—^o j[fas, " more."- 2i See 264.-22 See 326,/.— 23 See 553.-^ ■2-1 See 304. — 25 At Jin, "at length."—^ Hace mas de cincuenta anos, "mx>re Ihanffty years ago." See 436 ; also 270. 324 SPANISH READING LESSONS. XXXIV. ^THE FIRST STEAMBOAT. No sabemos por que motivo debe ^arsele^ a Fulton toda la gloria y el honor de haber sido^ el primero que puso^ en movimiento un buque impelido por el vapor. ^ En los archivos publicos^ de Barcelona consta^ por docuraentos fidedignos^ que " el dia 17 de Junio de 1543, Don Blasco de Garay erisayo por'' primera vez en presencia'' del Empe- rador Cdrlos V. en Barcelona, y en la corte de Felipe se- gundo. la aplicacion del vapor^ a un pequeno barco constru- ido^ al efecto." Por los documentos que existen en Barce- lona se ve^ pues que hace mas de*® trecientos anos que** Blasco de Garay hizo^^ el ensayo de mover un buque por \2i'poTj logrando su objeto ; y Fulton que mucho tiempo*' despues puso^ en planta el invento se lleva^* toda la gloria y todo el renombre. Desgraciadamente la Espana ha per- dido el honor de ser la primera en dos grandes invenciones — la aplicacion de la electricidad* al telegrafo, y la*^ del vapor* a la navegacion* — por la poca proteccion que daban los reyes*® a las ciencias en tiempos que*'' lasdemas poten- cias Europeas, envidiosas del brillo y engrandecimiento de Espana, no perdonaban medio alguno*^ para inquietarlB, y tener^^ siempre distraidoa^^ a sus gobernantes.^" XXXY.— WASHINGTON. [Written Feb. 22, 1847.] El dia de hoy* es uno de los que jamas deberan borrarse XXXIV. — 1 Darsele, "to give itself io-him" that is, "to be given to him." See 116, 115, b, and 173; also 285, c.—^De haber side, "of having been" See 327. — 3 Puso, irreg. from poner. — 4 See 628. — 5 See 264. — s Consta, "it is evident" — 7 gee 240. — ^ Construido al efecto^ "built for the purpose." — ^ Se ve, " it is seen." See 173. — ^^ Hace mas de, "it-is more than." See 522, and 270.— ii Que, "since." See 304, c. — 12 Hizo, irreg. from hacer. — 13 Mucho, " long." See 486. — ^^ Se lleva, "gains for himself." — ^5 See 616. — ^^ See 575. — ^"^ Que is here used in the sense of "when."—^^ See 527, and 134, a.— is See 300, 6.— 20 Seo 325. XXXV.— 1 El dia de hoy, " this very day ;" " to-day.' SPANISH READING LESSONS. 325 de^ la memoria de los Norte- Americanos : el 22 de Febre- ro, dia^ memorable por los recuerdos que nos trae; dia^ de Ventura y de regocijo, porque en el vio la primera luz el heroe^ de la libertad Americana ; el padre^ de su patria : el inmortal Washington. Envanezcanse^ en buen hora'' las antiguas naciones^ con sus heroes y sus guerreros, zonvertidos en^ crueles tiranos. Ensalce^^ la orgullosa Francia® a su ambicioso Napoleon ; pero I hay^^ una sola nacion deP^ mundo qu.e haj/a produ- cido^^ un heroe como^^ Jorge Washington? ^^ Dia de bendicion y de ventura fue^^ para los Norte-Americanos aqueP® en que nacio el gran^^ hombre cuyo aniversario recordamos hoy. ; Raro portendo de fidelidad patriotica^^ fue Washington ! A'ngel Salvador ^^ que destino el cielo^® a liber tar deP yugo opresor^^ de la esclavitud^" a^^ unos hombres que gemian bajo el rigor de los mismos^^ que de- bieran protejerlo8. Nacio Washington, y con su nacimiento dio^^ Dios^ a los oprimidos subditos de la Gran Bretana un hermano que les indicase^^ el medio de quebrantar las fuertes cadenas de barbara opresion. Nacio Washington, y ocultdndose para siempre el sol sangriento^^ de la esclavi- tud, aparecio dulce y apacible la brillante aurora de glori- osa libertad. Washington, que desde la edad de veinte anos manifes- taba ya su firmeza y lealtad ; Washington, que durante su vida no ceso de^^ afanars>Q por lograr la felicidad eterna de su amada patria, murio^^ hace ya medio siglo^^ ; pero no 2 De, ''from."—^ See 237.-4 See 575.—^ See 237, a.^s gee 309,/.— 7 En buen hora, "at a proper time." — ^ See 575. — ^ En, "into.'' See 387.— 10 See 309,/.— " Hay, "is-there?" See 218, and 218, a.— 12 Del mundo, "in the world." — 13 See 317, and 311, b.—^^Como, "li^e.^—^^Dia, ^'a day." — ^^ Aquel, which follows, is nominative to ./we. — ^^ See 101, a.— 18 See 264.— 19 See 575 ; also 628.— 20 See 628.— 21' See 670.— 22 Los mismos que, "the very ones who." — 23 [)i^^ irreg. from dar. — 24 See 314. and 314, b. — 25 j}e, "from."—^^ Murio, irreg. from moHr. — 27 fface ya medio sigh, " a half a century ofcoj' See 522 ; also 248. 28 326 SPANISH READING LESSONS. ha muerto^^ ni morird jamas^^ en la memoria de sus hijos y de sus hermanos. En cada corazon amante^® de la ver- dadera libertad tiene erijido^^ un altar donde se^^ venera el nombre glorioso de Jorge "Washington. — E. J. Gomez. XXXVI. PEDRO LOPEZ DE AYALA. Este escritor nacio en noble cuna,j^e senor de Salva- tierra en la provincia de Alava, y descendiente de la nobil- isima easa de Alaro. Ajala,fue canciller mayor de Castilla, y vivid en los reinados de don Pedro el justiciero, llamado el Cruel, de Enrique 11. , Juan I., y Enrique III. Los cuatro reyes que acaho de nombrar^ apreciaron sus talentos como escritor y como politico, y su valor como soldado. Sus talentos se mostraron en la direccion y arreglo de los muchos y dificiles negocios que sus soberanos le confiaron^ y en sus cronicas de Pedro el Cruel, y otros escritos cuya pureza y elegancia pruehan^ su mucho y sano gusto en la cultura de las letras. Y bar to froho su valor en las batallas de Najera y Aljubarrota, en donde fue hecho prisionero. Ayala murio^ en 1407, de edad de setenta y cinco anos, en Calahorra. Los apologistas del rey don Pedro dicen^ falsa la cronica de Ayala, y que estej^e apasionado de^ don En- rique II. Zurita y otros dicen al contrario, que Ayala fue verdadero, desapasionado y sincero historiador. — M. G-alo DE CUENDAS. XXXVII. MIGUEL DE CERVANTES. Nada dire de los escritos ni del merito literario^ de Cer- vantes, Dos siglos y todas las naciones de Europa le han ^ See 352, a, and 352, 6.-29 See 470.— 30 See 300, 6.— 3i See 173. XXXVI. — 1 Acaho de nombrar, " I have just named.^' See 337. — * Pruehan, irreg. from probar. — 3 Murio, irregr. from morir. — ^ Dicen, 'leg. from decir; ^^ call false the chronicles." — 5 See 323, b. XXXVII.— 1 See 264. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 327 juzgado ya. Solo dire cuatro palabras^ de su vida, sus desgracias j su miseria. Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra nacio en Alcala de He- nares^ el 9 de Octubre de 1547, de padres nobles, aunque mal* acomodados en bienes. Fue discipulo^ en letras hu- manas^ del maestro Juan Lopez de Hoyos. Su primera inclinacionyz//e por la poesia,^ en que jamas j^w^o''' sobresalir. Casi muerto de^ hambre en 1563 jpaso a Italia, y se acomodo por^ camarero del cardenal de Aguaviva, y en 1570 se alislo en las banderas del duque de Palliamo, que Pio V. habia nomhrado general de sus tropas. Cervantes se hallo en la desgraciada espedicion de Chipre, y en la batalla de Lepanto que tuvo^^ lugar en 1597 ; en esta ultima perdio la" mano izquierda. Despues de haber dejado el ejercito papal,^ se alisto en las tropas de Napoles, y sirvio^^ con valor en ellas hasta el ano 1575, epoca^^ en que pasando de Napoles a Espana,/2^e hecho cautivo por el famoso corsario argelino^ Arnuante Mami. Mientras cautivo en Argel, did Cervantes^* innumerables y nada equivocas^^ pruebas de su indomito valor, de su heroica paciencia y aun de su inconcevible osadia. JFue en fin^® rescatado en 1580 y 1581, volvio a Espana, en donde^'' de nuevo se obstino en escribir versos, aunque vio el poco 6 ningun suceso de sus tentativas. Casose en Es- quivia con dona Catalina Palacios de Salazar en 1584, y las dificultades de su posicion se aumentaron con este matri- monio. Entonces fue cuando escribio hasta treinta come- 2 Cuatro palabraSf literally ^^four words" meaning "a word or two;'' *^ a few words" — ^ Alcald de Henares, the name of a town in Spain. — * Mai, adverb, ''badly;" "pooWy."— 5 See 243.— « See 62S.—T Pudo, irreg. from poder. — ^ Cast muerto de, " almost dead with." Sec 330, c. — ^ Por, ''for a;" " as a." See 385, and 385,/.— ^o Tuvo lugar, "took place." Tuvo, irreg. from tene}-. — ^^ See 122. — 12 Sirvio, irreg. from ser- vir. — 13 See 244. — ^^ See 575. — ^^ J^ada eqmvocas, "in no degree equivo- cal." Nada is here an adverb. — ^^ En fin, " at length, — ^7 En donde "wherein;" "where." 328 SPANISH READING LESSONS. dias que pudieran llamarse malisimas, si el respeto que se debe^^ al grande ingenio del autor de don Quijote no lo impidiese}^ Pocos anos despues, escribio sus novelas, Per- siles J Sigismunda, y el nunca bastante alabado, leido- y admirado don Quijote de la Mancha. El ilustre autor de don Quijote, hoy tan estimado deP° mundo entero, arr as- tro casi hambrienta vida, hasta el 23 de Abril de 1616 en que murw^^ por Sevilla, Valladolid, y Madrid en donde^'' fallecio. Acaso hubiera muerto^ de^° miseria sin los socor- ros del conde de Lemos y de algunos otros, aunque pocos, protectores. Cervantes fne a la vez^^ la gloria de Espana y el oprobio de su siglo, puesto que^* este le desconocio y aun le insulto. — M. Galo de Cuendas. XXXYIII. EPITOME OF THE HISTOE-Y OF SPAIN. La peninsula, llamada Espana, sola esta contigua al con tinente de Europa por el lado de Francia, de^ que la sepa- ran los montes'^ Pirineos. Es abundante en oro, plata, azogue, hierro, piedras, aguas minerales, ganados de esce- lentes calidades, y pescas tan abundantes como deliciosas. Esta feliz situacion la hizo^ objeto* de la codicia de los Fenicios y otros pueblos. Los Cartagineses, parte^ por dole, parte^ por fuerza, se establecieron en ella .; y los Ro- manes quisieron^ completar su poder y gloria con la conquista de Espana; pero encontraron una resistencia, que parecio tan estrana como terrible a los soberbios duenos de lo restante'' del mundo. Numancia, una sola ciudad, les costo catorce anos de sitio, la perdida de tres ejercitos, y el desdoro de los famosos generales, hasta que reducidos los Numanti- 18 Se debe, ^^ owes itself;^' ^' is due." — ^^ Se6 314. Impidiese, irregular from impedir. — 20 gg^ 323, b. — 21 Murio, irreg. from morir. — 22 See 318, and 318, a. — 23 J[ /^ -p^z, n at times" — 24 Puesto que, "since." XXXVllI.— 1 De, "from."— 2 See 575.-3 ffizo, irreg. from hacer. ^ Objefo, "an object." — ^ Parte, "partly." — ^ Quisieron, irreg. from querer. — 7 See 263, a. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 329 nos^ a la precision de capitular^ 6 morir,^ por la total ruina de la patria, corto numero de vivos/ ° y abundancia de cadaverea* en las calles (sin contar^ los que habian servido de pasto^^ a sus conciudadanos despues de''^ concluidos todos sus viveres^^) incendiaron sus casas, arrojaron sus mujeres, nifios, y ancianos en las llamas, y salieron a morir en el campo raso con las armas en la^^ mano. El grande Esci- pion fue testigo de la ruina de Numancia ; pues no j)ued.e llamarse propiamente conquistador de la ciudad : siendo^^ de notary que Luculo, encargado de^^ levantar^ un ejercito para aquella espedicion, no hallo en la juventud romana reclutas que^^ llevar, hasta que el mismo^'' Escipion se alisto para animarlsi}^ Si los Romanes conocieron el valor de los Espanoles como enemigos, tambien esperimentaron su virtud como aliados. Sagunto sufrio por ellos un sitio igual al de^^ Numancia contra los Cartagineses, y desde entonces for mar on los Ro- manes de los Espanoles el alto concepto que se ve^^ en sus autores, oradores, historiadores, y poetas. Pero la fortuna de Roxpa, superior al valor humane, la hizo^ senora de Es- paiia, como de lo restante'' del mundo, menos^^ algunos montes de Cantabria, cuya total conquista no consta de la historia.^ Largas revoluciones, inutiles de contarse^^ en este paraje, trajerov^^ deP norte enjambres de naciones feroces, codiciosas y guerreras, que se estahlecieron en Es- paiia : pero, con las delicias de este clima, tan diferente deP^ que habian dejado. cayeron^^ en tal grade de afemina- ^ Redudd-os los NumantinoSj "the Numantians being reduced^' See 300, c— 9 See 327.— lo De vivos, " of those alive:'— ^^ De pasto, ''for food." — 12 The meaning is, "after all their provisions being exhausted." - 13 See 122. — ^^ Siendo de notar, "it being proper to note." — ^^De, " with." See 399.— 16 See 326, e.— 17 See 286, a.— is La, "it," referring to e^edi^ don.—^^Al de, "to that of ." See 129, c.—^^Se ve, "is seen." See 173.— 21 See 360.-22 See 628.-23 De contarse, " of being narrated." See 327, and 173.-^4 See 194.-25 Bel, "from that." See 291, a.—^ Seo 165. 28* 330 SPANISH PwEADING LESSONS. eion y flojedad, q'le a su tiem.'po'^'^ fueron esclavos de otroa sonquistadores, venidos^^ deP mediodia. Huyeron^^ los Godos-Espanoles^° hasta los monies de una provincia, hoy llamada Asturias ; y apenas iuvieron^^ tiempo de^^ desechar^ el susto. llorar la perdida de sus casas, y ruina de su reino, euando salieron mandados por Pelayo, uno de los mayores hombres que la naturaleza^ ha producido. Desde aqui se abre^^ un teatro^ de guerras que duraroii cerca de ocho siglos. Varios reinos selevantaron^^ sobre la ruina de la monarquia Goda-Espanola, destruyendo^^ el que querian edificar los Moros^^ en el mismo terreno, regado con mas sangre espanola, romana, cartaginesa, goda y mora de^® cuanto se jpuede fonder ar^^ con horror de la pluma que lo escriba, y de los ojos que lo vean escrito.^^ Pero la poblacion de esta peninsula era tal, que despues de tan largas guerras y tan sangrientas, aun se contaban^^ veinte millones'^ de habitantes en ella. Incorpordronse tantas provincias,^ y tan diferentes en dos coronas, la^^ de Castilla y la^^ de Aragon.; y ambas en el matrimonio de Don Fernando y Dona Isabel, pwncipes que serdn inmor- tales entre cuantos sepan^ ° lo que es gobierno.'^^ La refor- ma de abuses, aumento de ciencias, humillacion de los soberbios, amparo de la agricultura y otras operaciones seme]a.nte?i^ formaron esta monarquia. Ayudoles la natu- raleza'^ con un numero increible de vasallos insignes en letras y armas, y se pudierov}'^ haber lisonjeado de dejar^ a sus sucesores un imperio mayor y mas duradero, que el de^^ Roma antigua, (contando las Americas nuevamente 27 A SU tiempo, ''Hn their turn." — 28 Venidos, ^^ arrived." — 29 See 165, — 30 See 575.— 31 See 160.— 32 De desechar, ''for driving away."—^^ See 173.— 34 See 165.— 35 See 575.--36 The meaning is, " than what can be dwelt upon." See 270.— 37 See 173, 327, d, and 116, a.— 33 Que lo vean escrito, ''which may see it written." See 300, a. — 39 See 129, c— ^o Cuan- tos sepcn, " as many as may know;" "whoever may know." See 321, a, and 19 ^.— 4i Lo que es gobierno, " what government is." — ^2 See 189. — « See 616. SPANISH READING LESSONS, 331 descuhierlas)^ si huhieran logrado^^ dejar su corona a un here- dero varon. iVf^oles^^ el cielo este gozo a trueque de^^ tantos como les habia concedido^ y su cetro paso a la casa de Austria, la cual gasto los tesoros, talentos y sangre de los Espanoles en cosas agenas de Espana, por las continuas guerras, que asi^^ en Alemania, como'*'' en Italia, tuvo que"*^ sostener Carlos Pr-imero^ de Espana, hasta que can- sado de sus mismas^ ® prosperidades, 6 tal vez^ ° conocieiido con prudencia las vicisitudes de las cosas humanas, no quiso^^ esponerse a sus reveses, y dejo el trono a su hijo Don Felipe II Este principe, acusado por la emulacion, por ambicioso^^ y politico como su padre, pero menos afortunado, siguiendo los proyectos de Carlos, no jpudo^^ hallar los mismos suce- sos aun a costa de^^ ejercitos, de armadas, y de caudales. Murio dejando a^^ su pueblo estenuado con las guerras ; afeminado con el oro y plata de America ; disminuido con la poblacion de un mundo nuevo ; disgustado con tantas desgracias, y deseoso de descanso. Paso el cetro'^ por las manos de tres principes menos activos para manejar tan grande monarquia ; y en la muerte de Carlos Segundo no era Espana^ sino el esqueleto de un gigante. — Jose Ca- DALSO. XXXIX— CRITICS. Hay una secta de sabios en la republica literaria,^ que lo^ son a^ poca costa : estos son los criticos. Anos enteros, y muchos, necesita el hombre^ para saber algo de las ciencias humanas, pero en la critical (cuaP se usa) desde el pri- 44 See 318, and 318, a. — 45 See 113, a. — 46 j^ trueque de tantos como, " in, exchange for as many as." — 47 See 368. — 4^ gg^ 340, and 160.— 49 See 286, a.— 50 Tal vez, ''perhaps."— ^^ See 191.— 52 The meaning is, "accused by emulation {by the emulous) as ambitious." See 385, jT. — 63 See 189. — ^4 Acosta de, " at the expense of." — 55 See 325. XXXIX.— 1 See 264.-2 Que lo son, " who are it;" " who are so." See 287, a.— 3 See 378,/.— 4 See 575.-5 La critica, ''criticism," See 623.— * Cual sc usa, " as it is a •^.ployed. See 104, b, and 173. 332 SPANISH READING LESSONS. mer^ dia es uno^ consumado. Sujetarse^ a los lentos pro- gresos del entendimrcnto en las especulaciones matemati- cas, en las espcriencias de la fi'sica, en las confusiones de la jurisprudencia, es no acordarsQ de la cortedad de nuestra vida, que por lo regular^ no 'pasa de^*^ sesenta anos, rebajaii- do de'^ estos los que ocwpa la debilidad^ de la ninez, el de- senfreno de la juventud, y las enfermedades de la vejez. Se humilla mucho nuestro orgullo^ con esta reflexion : el tiempo que he de^'^ vivir^ comjmrado con el que necesito para saber^ es-ifA que apenas fuede llamarse^^ tiempo. j Cuanto mas nos lisongea esta otra determinacion^ ! Si no puedo por el motivo dicho,'^ aprender facultad alguna, persuado al'^ mundo y a'^ si mismo'® que las poseo todas, j pronuncio " ex tripode''' " sobre cuanto*^ oigo,^^ veo, y leo. Pero no crea^^ que en esta clase se'^ comprehenden los verdaderos criticos.'* Los^' hay dignisimos de todo respe- to. I Pues en que se diferencian^ y en que se'"^ han de^^ distinguii^ 1 La regla fija para no confundirlos es esta : los buenos hahlaii poco sobre asuntos determinados y con moderacion ; los otros son como toros, queforman la inten- cion, cierraT^ los^^ ojos, y arremeten a cuanto'^ encuentran por delantCj^® hombre, caballo, perro, aunque se claven la espada hasta el corazon. Si la comparacion te pareciereP baja, por ser^ de un ente racional con un bruto, creeme quo no lo es tanto,^ pues apenas pueden llaviarse^^ hombres los que no cuUivan su razon, y solo se valen de una especie de instinto que les queda para hacer dano a todo cuanto se 7 See 101. — ^ Sujetarse, ^^ to subject one^s self.'''' — ^ Por lo regular, ^^ commonly ;^' ^^usuallt/." — ^^ Pasar de, ^^ to exceed.^' — ^^ De, ^'fromJ'— ^^ Haber de. See 339.— 13 See 173.— i^ Dicho, "said;'' ''aforesaid^ See 200.— 15 See 670.-16 See 286.— 17 Ex tripode, a Latin phrase, mean- ing "authoritatively."' — ^^ Cuanto, "as much as;" " whatever. '^ — 19 S«^; 206.— 20 See 309, a.— 2i Los, « those.'' See 616.-22 See 116, a.— 23 Cier- ran, irreg. from cerrar. — 24 See 122. — 25 Cuanto encuentran, "whomso- ever they may meet ;" or, " any body that they may meet.'" — ^^Por delante, "in front;" "ahead."— ^^ See 319.— 28 Po?- ser, "for being."— '^ No lo a tanfo, "it is not so." SPANISH READING LESSONS. 333 les presente^^ amigo 6 enemigo, debil 6 fuerte, inocente 6 culpado. — Jose Cadalso. XL. — AMERICAN INDEPENDENCE. [Written Julj 4th, 1847.] Han transcurrido ya setenta y un anos desde que^ los Norte- American OS lograron sacudir el yugo de la monar- quia inglesa para hacer^e verdaderamente independientes. Una guerra de siete anos, que costo millares de vidas, esta- blecio al fin^ la libertad de un pais que ha tenido la buena suerte de no ahusar de^ la gloriosa condicion a que se vio al fin^ elevado. Los patrioticos y denodados heroes de 1 776 juraron ser libres 6 morir^ y asi lo cumplieron. Muchos murieron* en la lucha desigual, pe|b al espirar^ vagaba por sus labios una consoladora sonrisa que decia al opresor tira- no : *^ muero^ por® libertar 67 mi patria. y mioero contento !" La primera sangre derramada en la guerra de la inde- pendencia. enrojecio las arenas de Lexington el 19 de Abril de 1775j pero no fue vertida inutilmente. Los ingleses quemaron y destruyeron pueblos y ciudades ; se ligaron con los indios salvages para que^ les ayudaran^ a asesinar sJ los hijos de las colonias que resistian la opresion, y la justicia de Dios did el castigo merecido a la infamia y al despotismo. En medio de^° los conflictos y reveses, el Congreso americano publico el 4 de Julio de 1776 su De- claracion de Independencia. En aquella epoca la Union Americana era una pequena nacion, comptiesta^^ de solos trece Estados; j terminada Isi guerra/^ establecida su inde^endejicia.^^ fue elejido^^ primer 30 See 321, a. XL. — 1 Desde que, " since." Anos is nominative to han transcurrido. See b75.—^AlJin, ''at length.''— ^ See 330.— ^ Irreg. from morir.— 5 See 298, 6.-6 See 326, d.— 7 See 325.-8 Para que, "in order that.''— 9 See 316. — ^^ En medio de, "in the midst of." — ^i Compuesta, irreg. par- ticiple from componer. — ^2 See 300, c. — ^3 Construct su independencia C5- tabledda, "its independence being established." See 300 c— 1^ Eljcn&ral Jorge Washington is nominative lo fue elejido. See 575. 334 SPANISH READING LESSONS. Presidente de los Estados Unidos, en Abril de 789, el jeneraP^ Jorge Washington. Espirado el termino^^ de cuatro anos, volvio a^'' ser elejido casi uuanimemente por todos los americanos hasta que^^ en 1796 pidio^^ permiso para retirarse a la vida privada jft^e electo segundo Presi- dente John Adams, l^n aquella epoca contaba la Union con una poblacion compuesta^^ de cinco millones de habi- tantes. El motivo de esta guerra /^^e indudablemente la mas in- justa agresion, y lo que did origen a ella es lo unico que puede justificar una guerra desastrosa en la presente edad : la independencia nacional. Todo individuo debe odiar la matanza^" y el esterminio,^^ pero al tratarse^^ de la inde- pendencia de una nacionj^e la libertad de sus hijos, de los derechos de la patria ; todo el que^^ tenga^^ sangre en las venas debe correr presuroso a tomar las armas para repeler y ester minar aF enemigo que atenta a destruir la nacionali- dad 6 a usurpar los derechos mas sagrados. Los heroes americanos de 1776 ser an inmortalizados, y en los siglos venideros el nombre glorioso de Jorge Washington sera acatado por las nacionas mas poderosas y bendecido por todo aquel que^^ sepa^^ apreciar la verdadera independen- cia. Washington no /we ambicioso como otros heroes de su siglo 6 de siglos anteriores : su unico deseo era eP^ de libertar a su patria del yugo opresor que se iba haciendo^^ cada dia mas insufrible con su tirania. Rompieronse las cadenas de hierro con que pretendia la Gran Bretana sajuz- gar a'' un pueblo noble y generoso, y lucid para la America un dia de gloria y de felicidad. Setenta y un anos hace hoy que^'' sejirr/io la declaracion ^5 See 233. — ^^ See 300 c. — 17 Volvio d ser elejido, ^^was again elected.^' See 336.— 18 See 553.— 19 Pic^id, irreg. from pedir,—^^ See 628.— 21 ^Z tratarse de, " on attempting^ — 22 T^odo el que, or, iodo aquel que. See 288, a.— 23 Tenga. See 160, and 310, 6.-24 Sepi. See 192, and 310, b. — 25 See 616. — 26 ^q Hjo, haciendo, ^^ went makiig itself " ^^wasbecom ing»^2i See 304, h. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 335 de la independenciaj y vease^^ el efecto que ha proditcido la libertad conquistada. En cincuenta alios se ha esfendido el dominio de la nacion independiente a cinco veoes mas de^® lo que era a fines^° del siglo pasado : en cincuenta alios se ha cuadruplicado su poblacion, y por todas partes se manifiestan^^ los beneficios de las instituciones que cod su independencia plantearon los que lograran romper e yugo de la tirania. — E. J. Gomez. XLI. A VISIT TO THE TOMB OF WASHINGTON. La mafiana del 23 de Junio de 1845 amamcio^ clara ]f Serena. Mansas y tranquilas corrian las aguas del Poto- mac y el vapor Jorge Washington se separaba lentamente del estremo del ferro-carril de Petersburg. La vista del rio era pintoresca y variada : por do quiera^ veianse^ cru zar las pequenas embarcaciones de los pescadores, y sobre ambas riberas se divisaban los estensos saladeros dondi centenares de hombres se ocupaban en sus faenas, frepar a>ndo para embarrilar la pesca de sus compaiieros. Mas todo esto no era suficiente para distraerme por ue minuto entero de* la idea principal que ocupaba mi mente Desde^ mis primeros alios habia leido^ la vida de Jorge Washington, y ya que'' no podia^ conocerle^ al menos^ ansi aba ver el lugar donde el habia nacido, y donde reposaban sus restos mortales. Impaciente dirijia a cada instante mi anteojo de larga vista ^'^ hacia la margen izquierda del rio, buscando ansiosamente un objeto que debia distinguiise a algunas leguas de distancia. Mis ojos buscaban a Mount- Vernon, el punto donde vivid, y donde yace sepultado el 28 Vease el efecto, " the result may he seen." See 173. — 29 See 270.—- ^ Ajines, " at the end." — 3i Mani/iestan, irreg. from manifestar. XLI. — 1 Amanedo, " dawned" — 2 Por do quiera, " every where."— 3 Vezanse, " were seen." See 173. — * De, ^^from." — 5 See 3S6. — ^ Habia Uido, '* I had read." — ''' Ya que, "since that;" "seeing that."—^NopO' dia^ "7 ccndd not." — 9 Al menos, "at least." — ^^ Anteojo de larga m^ia, " spy^glass,** "ideacope." 336 SPANISH READING LESSONS. hombre mas digno de admiracion que ha producido la America. ^^ Tal era mi impaciencia que a cada instante preguniaba a un anciano residente sobre la margen del rio que navega- hamos^ si tardaria muchb^'^ en ver^Q'. con algun^^ descon- suelo supe^* que debiamos aun tardar^^ algunas horas. De pronto ^^ divisamos una ciudad coronada de^'' torres y ele- vades cupulas ; era Alexandria. La detencion del vapor en ese punto me impaciento de tal manera^^ que ni siquiera^^ tuve^^ la curiosidad de ecsaminar el frente de la poblacion : al fin continua7nos nuestro viage. El sol iba inclindndose^^ pausadamente hacia el ocaso, cuando el anciano me advijiio^^ que podria disiinguir los arboles que cubren al Mount-Vernon. Desde este memento no separe de alii mi vista, y cuando la procsimidad mo permitia distinguir aquel lugar sin necesidad del anteojo, lo contemple estasiado^ sumido en un estrano estupor. De pronto^® sefijaron mis ojos sobre las elevadas copas de los verdes arboles, y me parecia distinguir entre sus ramas delineada la figura de Washington con los brazos cruzados y la cabeza descubierta. La semejanza de esta idea con una representacion de Napoleon en Santa Elena, me causo algun disgusto, y baje la vista bacia la habitacion que se distinguia al traves de^^ los arboles. Alii! esclame.^ alii vivio ese hombre que did ser^^ a esta nacion : alli yacen^^ sepuliados tambien sus restos mortales ! Al dia siguiente me hallaba al lado de un sepulcro hu- 11 See 575 and 231. — ^2 gi tardaria mucho en verse, ^Hf it would delay long in seeing itself ^''^ that is, " if it would be long before it could be seen.' See 525, 327, and 173.— 13 See' 101.— 14 See 192.— is Debiamos aun tar dar algunas horas, " we must wait yet some hours.''' Deber, before an infinitive, often is used in the sense of " to have to.'' — i^ De pronto, ^^ siuldenly." — 17 See 272. — 18 De tal manera, ^^to such a degree." — i^ Ni siquiera, ^^ not even." — 20 ggg 159. — 21 ]£i sol iba inclindndose, ^'the sun was-going declining itself," that is, " the sun was declining." — 22 Advirtio, irreg. from advertir.—^^ Al traves de, ^^ amidst;" "throiigh." — 21 g^^ [^ here a noun. — 25 Sce 214. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 337 milde, de ladrillos. Una verja de madera, medio derriba- da, circundaba aquella tumba sencilla. Todo en derredor^^ respiraba tristeza y desconsuelo, pero el aire me parecia animado por un eco debil que murmuraba en tonos apaga- dos. " j Este es el ultimo recinto del inmortal Washing- ton !" Y en efecto : alii, junto a mis plantas, bajo aquel m on ton de ladrillos colocados sin artificio ; destituidos de lujosos marmoles y doradas inscripciones, .... alii yacia lo que quedaba en la tierra del heroe ilustre. Pero su memoria vive^ y vivird por largos siglos. Alii, al lado de su sepulcro, hay mil nombres de distinguidos viajeros que han ido a pagar el ultimo tributo — a consagrar al pie de su propia tumba, un pensamiento, y a dedicaile un recuerdo de admiracion. Por un instante me habia olvidado^^ que ecsistia^ y al volver en mi^^ smti que la fresca brisa banaba suavemente mi encendida frente, y una lagrima de pesar y de venera^ ciGn se habia desprendido de mis ojos cayendo sobre la liumilde tumba de Jorge Washington. — E. J. Gomez. FIFTH SECTION. Remark. — In this Section the verbs will not be distinguished from the other parts of speech by being printed in italics, as the learner is supposed to be able to conjugate the regular and irregular verbs readily. With many rules heretofore referred to in the notes, the learner must now be somewhat familiar, and there will be less need of referring to them hereafter. XLII. THE MAIDEN OF NARNl. Viajando de Locasto a Spoleto, en el aiio de 1826, nos , detuvimos^ en la ciudad de Narni para mandar cab alios y 26 En derredor, ^^ around i^ ^^ round about." — 27 Me habia olvidado, '' I had forgotten." See 284, e. — 2S ^/ volver en ^t, " oti returning to my- self;" " 071 coming to my senses." See 298, b. XLII. — ' DetuvimoSy irreg. from ddener. 29 338 SPANISH READING LESSONS. tomar algun alimento. Confiados en el gran influjc que tenian los estranjeros en aquella epoca en Italia, creimos que no se presentaria dificultad alguna^ ; pero esta vez tuvimos que^ esperar algunas horas antes de que fuesen satisfechos nuestros deseos. Mientras que comiamos, llamo mi atencion un sacerdote que entro silenciosamente en la salle y reconocia cuidadosamente la reunion. Difer- ente a la generalidad de aquella tribu de viajeros, sus mo- dales eran altivos j su aspecto desagradable. Habiendo- nos^ observado por algunos minutes, hablo con el posadero en voz baja, y en seguida^ salio prontamente de la habita- cion. Sentla un temor secreto por los muchos robos y asesinatos que ultimamente habian cometido los bandidos,® particularmente en aquellos alrededores, y me parecia por los modales del sacerdote que nos amenazaba algun peli- gro.^ Comunique'' estas sospechas a mis compafieros que €staban de acuerdo^ conmigo, y empezamos a mirar a nues- tro posadero con temor y desconfianza. Al fin, despues de muchas opiniones sobre el partido que debiamos adoptar, se resolvio que le interrogasemos, y si encontrabamos algun doblez en sus respuestas, no saldriamos^ hasta la maiiana siguiente, en que podiamos contar con^° la protec- cion de una escolta respe table que babiamos dejado en el caminOj y que debia^^ detenerse en el mismo punto que nosotros. Segun los deseos de la reunion me eligieron para taP^ comision, ofreciendo referirles lo que indagara, tan exactamente^^ como me lo^^ permitiera mi memoria.® — I Puedo^^ preguntaros, senor, quien es ese sacerdote con quien os vi^^ conversar durante la comida ? le dije. — I Un sacerdote, senor ! me contesto con un tono que 2 See 134, a.— 3 See 160, and 340.— * See 116.— 5 En seguida, "qfter- tcard."—^ See 575.-7 See 166, a.— 8 De acuerdo, " of one mindJ'—^ See 208.— 10 See 391, e, latter clause.— ^^ Debia^^'was to."—^^ Para tal comi- !fwn"for the said commis&ian.^^—^^ See 32, a.—^^ Lo would be redundant here in English.— ^^^ iPucdo? ''may IT' See 189.— is See 196. SPANISit READING LESSONS. 339 apesar de^'^ demostrar sorpresa, manifestaba sin embargo^® haberle^® confundido mi pregunta. — Si, seiior le anadi fuertemente y con una mirada que le dio a entender sospechaba de^° el; un sacerdote, jse acuerda^i Y. de^^ el? — Oh! si, ciertamente, me acuerdo, el — es un buen hombre — j amigo mio antiguo y de gran valor, que va^^ a Spoleto para hallarse en la fiesta de San Jeronimo, y que se creeria feliz^^ en viajar en vuestra compania. — I Es natural de esta ciudad? le pregunte. — No ; es de las montanas, senor ; fue su respuesta acompanada de una guinada sardonica. — I Y su nombre ? — Borasco. — No me agrada ese hombre,^ le dije. — I Y porque no ? pregunto prontamente, mirandomo como si sus ojos hubieran penetrado mi alma. — Porque los hombres hour ados jamas hablan asi al oidp cuando estan en presencia de otras personas. — lY con quien hablaba de esa manera? dijo el con fiereza. — Con vos, senor ! le conteste tomandole fuertemente el brazo^^ : lie oido^^ hablar de vos ^ntes ; j cuidado^^ como OS burlais^'' de nosotros ! Sabed que no saldremos^ esta noche de Narni. Quedo como muerto al sentir mi apreton, y salio de la habitacion sin responderme. A poco^^ apareci6 por una galeria una joven,^^ y por una serial que me hizo me dio a 17 A pesar de, "in spite of^ — ^^ gi^^i emhargo, " nevertheless ;" " notwith- standing." — 19 This means, "to have confounded him my question " that is, " that my question had confounded him" — 20 g^e 330. — 21 ^ Sq acuerdu V. de el? "do you remember him?" Acuerda, from acordar. — 22 Ya^ from ir. See 204. — 23 g^ creeria feliz, " would deem himself happy." — 24 See 122) a. — 25 This means, " / have heard you spoken of before." — 26 The meaning is, " be cartful hmoyoumake sport ofus."—^"^ See 655. — 28 A pocOi "in a akort time" — 29 Una j6ven^ " a young woman." See 102. 340 SPANISH READING LESSONS. enteuder que deseaba hablar conmigo. Sali del cuarto con precipitacion, y entrando en una larga vina. la vi alii muy ocupada arrancando racimos de uvas. — I Que quereis ? iba yo a preguntarle ; pero me inter- rumpio diciendome en voz baja y continuando su ocupa- cion : * — Silencio. senor, no me hableis ; correis peligro — se- guid, y a la vuelta^" pasad cerca de^^ mi. Lo hice segun ella deseaba, y me dijo entonces en voz muy baja : Armate ; Borasco no as sacerdote,^^ es el afamado Gas- parde. En aquel momento oi^^ cerca de mi^^ el disparo de una carabina seguido de un grito agudo : la pobre joven cayo muerta y ensangrentada a mis pies. Diriji mi vista en direccion de donde vino^^ el ruido, y entro los matorra- les VI la figura de un hombre que se deslizaba rapidamente por el campo como una serpiente. El ruido alarmo a los buespedes, quienes arrojandose al jardin, quedaron sor- prendidos de aquella escena. Entre ellos estaba el per- verso posadero que en lugar de correr bacia el cuerpo de su bija, me senalaba y exclamaba : \ Prendedle ; el es el asesino ! Por un momento permaneci inmovil pero recobrandome prontamente, me arroje sobre el con la ferocidad de un tigre. — j Embustero ! exclame. Tu eres complice del asesino de tu mism^ bija. j Mirad ! no tengo cerca de mi armas de fuego. \ Fue Gaspardo el bandido ! \ Este villano es su caraarada ! \ Prondedle ! y ecbandolo a tierra, en un momento todos cayeron sobre el. — ^ Donde esta? exclamaron todos, j donde esta Gas pardo ? — En esa espesura, esclame ; todos se borrorizaron con 3« A la vuelta, ^'on your return.^' — ^i Cerca de, " near toJ' — 32 See 243. -^ Oi, '' Iheard." See 206.— 34 See 211. SPANISH READING LESS(5NS. 341 solo el pensamiento de^^ que ese sanguinariar bandido estu viera tan eerca; al momento resono un grito agudo, 5 i Alii ! jalli! exclamaron todos. Mire al lugar donde senalaban y sobre la cima de uii collado vecino, estaba Gaspardo, agitando su sombrero, re goeijandose en su triunfo y sin manifestar desconfianza Estaba fuera del alcance de^^ las armas de fuego^^ y toda persecucion hubiera sido inutil y peligrosa. Guilletto (que era el nombre del posadero) no demostraba sentimiento por la perdida de su hija, al contrario parecia recocijarse de^^ que por su buena intencion hubiera perdido la vida y alegrandose de^^ que el bandido se hubiera escapado, Sin embargo/^ Guilletto fue conducido ante el tribunal y hallandole criminal sufrio la pena de muerte. En la causa se probo que habia existido por muchos anos una comunicacion secreta entre el y Gaspardo, dandole aquel noticias cuando por casualidad se detenia en su posada algun viajero rico. De aqui provenian tantos asesinatos que se cometian en aquellos alrededores y que por la tragi- ca ocurrencia que acabamos de referir^^ se consiguio feliz- mente la estirpacion de Gaspardo y de su bando. XLIII. EXTRACTS FROM A " MANIFESTO " OF GENERAL SANTA ANNA. i Conciudadanos ! Con el pesar mas amargo y prufundo OS anuncio, que despues de^ continues y estraordinarios esfuerzos y al cabo de quince horas de continue combate, me VI obligado a abandonar la Capital cuando nuestras filas se habian disminuido tan notablemente, para salvar a ese digno pueblo de los estragos que los proyectiles del enemigo que habia penetrado a nuestros lineas mas cerca- nas, regando el paso con sus cadaveres y con los^ de los 35 See 554. — 35 Puera del alcance de, " out of the reach of.''^ — 37 See 97, a.— 38 See 337. XLIII.— J See 375.-2 See 616. 29* 342 SP<»fISH READING LESSONS. dignos mejicanos que defendian heroicamente palmo i. palmo, el honor y derechos de su patria. Testigos habeis sido, de^ que creando recursos donde no los habia, trabajando dia y noche, prepare las defensas a la ciudad de Mejico, de que forme y reuni un poderoso ejer- cito, a fin de arrancar algun favor a* la fortuna, tan esqui- va para nosotros. La insubordinacion de un general tras- torno todo mi plan de operaciones como ya lo^ sabeis. En el convento y puente de Churubusco, recibio entonces el enemigo duras lecciones, reproducidas dos veces en el fuerte de Chapultepec, tambien en las garitas de Belen y de San Cosme, y ultimamente, en la Ciudadela. Mas el valor de muchos de nuestros soldados de la Guardia y del ejercito no siempre fue secundado ; y si bien^ a fuego y sangre, el enemigo en dia funestisimo para la nacion, se hizo dueno de su capital. Yo he buscado ansioso la muerte'' por todas partes, por- que perdida tan grande escitaba mi mas justo despecho. En Chapultepec recibi una contusion, en Belen, traspasa- ron mi vestido las balas enemigas, y a mi derredor desapa- recieron los mejores soldados de la republica. i Que me puede restar en medio de este duelo y angustia universal ? La esteril satisfaccion de la conciencia, la^ de haber sos- tenido personalmente el combate hasta el ultimo estremo, la^ de haber vendido cara al enemigo su sorprendente vic- toria. El me vio de frente^ en la Angostura, en Cerro Gordo, en Churubusco, en Chapultepec, en Belen, en San Cosme y en la Ciudadela : y me encontrare, yo os lo juro,® do quiera^" fuese^^ util y glorioso combatir Dije antes solemnemente, y repito ahora, que no descon- 3 See 554.-4 See 329, a.— 5 i^ ig here redundant in English.—^ Si bien, "although.'^ — 7 See 628. — ^ De f rente, ^^infrojitJ' ha Angostura is the name of the same battle-ground that is usually in the United States known as Buena- ''sta. — ^ See 115, a. — ^° Doquiera^ '^wherever,'' - 11 Puej^e, from 9e\ SPANISH READING LESSOlS'S. 343 fio jamas de la suerte de mi patria. Si callan las facciones alguna vez para escuchar su voz soberana, si reunimos nuestros votos y nuestros afanes, aun es tiempo de arrojar al enemigo del suelo que mancha con su presencia. Os consta que yo resist! una paz deshonrosa que reducia a la republica 6. la nulidad mas absurda y mas completa. La nacion ha apeteeido y aun apetece la guerra ; continue* mosla pues, con gran denuedo. y mi ejemplo sera el mas fervoroso. Las facciones no me disputaran ya el poder que gustoso abandono ; si me disputaren* el campo de ba- talla. alli me encontraran sereno y firme consagrado como siempre a la mas generosa y santa de las causas. i Que importan las desgracias V El infortunio es el crisol de las naciones; y nunca es mas grande la mejicana^^ que cuando lucha con el destine para arrancarle la victoria que Dios y la justicia le prometen. \ Mejicanos ! treinta y siete anos ha que^^ proclamasteis vuestra independencia entre escarmientos y peligros : sostenedla para siempre. Ciudad de Guadalupe Hidalgo, Set. 16 de 1847. Antonio Lopez de Santa-Anna. XLIV. extracts from another " MANIFESTO " OF SANTA-ANNA. i Mejicanos ! Desde mi regreso a la patria, y en oca- siones diversas, os he dirigido la palabra para daros cuenta de mis operaciones como gefe del ejercito, y como primer magistrado ejerciendo el poder ; mas separado de aquellos destines, ahora le hage con el mas profunde pesar para quejarme^ ante vosetros de la ingratitud cruel de algunos, y de la perfidia de otros, que no contentes con la conducta indiferente y criminal que ban ebservado en les dias del 12 Mejicana refers to nacion. — ^3 Treinta y side anos ha que, ' thirty-seven years since." See 304, 6, and 304, c, XLIV.— I See 655. 344 SPANISH READING LESSONS. gran conflicto, intentan haeer recaer sobre mi solo, la causa de los males ptiblicos a que tanto han contribuido. Proceder semejante'^ no me sorprende, porque un ano hace^ comence a observar en la prensa de la capital, que yo era otra vez^ el bianco^ de las facciones que desgraciada- mente han desgarrado las entrafias de la patria : llegando su audacia hasta presentarme con el caracter de traidor contra una sociedad. testigo^ de mis repetidos servicios por su independencia y libertad, y de los sacrificios que he . impendido para librarla del yugo que la amenaza Como la injuria, que con fin perverso se me infiere,'' es tan atroz, yo la rechazo con toda la energia de mi caractar, y con el valor de la inocencia indignamente ultrajada : reto y convoco a todos mis acusadores a^ que se presenten con sus pruebas, ahora que me hallo sin poder y sin influ- encia : y si asi no lo hicieren® los denuncio como viles calumniadores y enemigos de la nacion. A los generales Taylor y Scott y a todos los individuos de sus ejercitos, yo los^® conjuro a® que por su honor ma- nifiesten : si el general mejicano, que los ha combatido en el Norte y en el Oriente, y en el centre mismo de la repub- lica hasta el dia 10 del mes de la fecha,^^ ha llenado todos sus deberes para con su patria. i Conciudadanos ! La desgracia me ha privado de la incomparable satisfaccion de presentaros una esplendida victoria ; pero nunca la desdicha ha sido traicion : os in- sultan los que tratan de^^ persuadiros, que puede caber tal infamia en un antiguo veterano de la independencia, con honrosas cicatrices adquiridas en defensa de vuestros 2 Proceder semejante '' such a proceef^ingy — ^ Un ano hace, " a year ago." See 436. — ^ Otravez, ^^ again." — ^ El bianco, ^^ the target ;" '^ the mark." — ^ See 244. — 7 Se me injiere, ^^ infers itself to-me" that is, ^'■must by inference be charged upon me." See 173. Infere is from inferir. — « See 554. — 9 See 185. — ^^ Los is here redundant in English. — ^^ F'ccha, ^^ date;" ^'the present date." — ^2 Tratar de, " to aim to" ''to attempt." SPANISH READING LESSONS. 345 derechos, y que ha encanecido sirviendo con amor y lealtad a su patria Si mi conducta merece reproche en los meses citados : si ella debe sujetarse a un examen porque los resultados no ban sido felices, yo estoy muy dispuesto a responder a cualesquiera cargos que por los medios legales e imparcial- mente intenten baeerseme^^; pero entre tanto^^ creo^^ merecer-las consideraciones que el pacto fundamental me otorga, mis servicios demandan y la justicia exige. . . Bien^® sabeis, que no soy yo el unico caudillo a quien se ba presentado esquiva la victoria.^'' Respondan por mi Palo Alto, la.Resaca, Matamoros, Monterey, Nuevo Meji- co, Cbibuabua, Californias, Yeracruz, Tabasco y Padierna. Los soldados mejicanos babremos sido desgraciados, mas ninguno traidor. Habra^^ tambien algunos cobardes : pero esto jamas podra decirse^^ del que ba buscado al onemigo en todas partes, del primero en el peligro, y del unico que ba presentado a la nacion en esta guerra, tro- feos arrancados a^° los batallones enemigos i Mejicanos ! Soy bombre, y tendre defectos : pero nunca be pecado' contra la patria, porque en mi pecbo jamas se ban podido abrigar sentimientos anti-nacionales. Un buen nombre para despues de^\mis dias, es cuanto be ambicionado : be anbelado, pues, todo lo que es grande y glorioso para Mejico, y no be escusado para su logro ni mi propia sangre : vosotros lo sabeis, y me bareis justicia. Tebuacan, Oetubre 22 de 1847. Antonio Lopez de Santa-Anna. ^^ Hacerseme, ^^ to make themselves to-me ;^^ ^^to*be made against Tne/^ See 173, and 116. — ^^ Entre fanto, " in the mean time.'' — ^5 See 327, c. — iS Bien, " rery weli:'—^i See 575.— i^ Habrd, " there ivill 6e." See 218, and 218, a. — ^^ Podrd decirse, " will be able to say itself;'' " ca7i be said." See 173, and 116.— 29 See 329, a.— 21 Para despues de mis dias, ''after my days," that is, " afer I am dead and gtnej^ 346 SPANISH READING LESSONS. XLV. INGRATITUDE. Los mismos que declaman con mayor horror contra esle monstruoso vicio, lo adoptan inuchas veces como a^ su hijo querido, por cuanto^ es^ solo feo por el aspecto que mira aP bienhechor ; asi como^ es agradable por el que mira a* log ingratoSj y la razon es, por que dispensa a^ los favore- oidos de^ la obligacion del reconocimiento que les oprime ; pues, cjjianto^ mayor as el beneficio que se recibe, tanto^ mayor es la esclavitud en que el beneficiado queda consti- tuido ; y como muy pocos gustan arrastrar estas cadenas, se libran de su pesadez con solo un simple olvido. Quien no quisiere vivir con ingratos, ha de'' tener mucho trabajo, ^i ha de'' vivir en el mundo. Infeliz sera el hombre que no esperimente ingratitudes, porque habra hecho muy poco bien a los demas. Por el contrario,^ cuantos^ mas ingra- tos hicieremos,^ tanto^ mas noble es el fin que nos mueve^° a obrar bien. Esta es la condicion del corazon humano. El que hace bien solamente a los agradecidos, comercia ; mas el que lo hace a los ingratos, obra por pura liberalidad. El uno siembra^^ los beneficios, el otro los derrama ; uno precede como hombre, el otro como Dios ; y este siempre tiene el delicado y agradable consuelo de haber obradt) bien, que es el gusto mas deleitable que puede lisongear cl paladar de una alma bien formada. Teodoro de Almeyda. XLV.— 1 See 670.— 2 Pcyr cuanto, 'Hnasmuch a^."— 3 Es, "U is."— * Ast como, "just as." — 5 De, "from." — « Cuanto thus before the first comparative and tanto before the second, may be rendered in EngUsh by the definite article with the comparative ; thus, cuanto mas estudia, tanto mas aprende, " the more he-studies, the more he-learns ; cuanto mar/or es el beneficio, tanto mayor es la obligacion del reconocimiento, "the greater the benefit is, the greater is the obligation of acknowledgment." — ^ See 339.-8 Por el contrario, "on the contrary."—^ See 185.— ^^ See 186.— " Siembra fi-om semhrar. See 181. SPANISH READING LESSONS. 347 XL VI. THE BEAR, THE MONKEY, AND THE HOG. ^A FABLE. I. Un oso con que la vida Ganaba^ un Piamontes,^ La^ no muy bien aprendida Danza^ ensayaba en dos pies. II. Queriendo hacer de* persona, Dijo a una mona: i Que tal?^ Era perita la mona, Y respondiole : Muy mal. III. Yo creo, replico el oso. Que me haces poco favor. I Pues que ?* i mi aire no es garboso ? No hayo'' el paso con primor ? IV. Estaba el cerdo presente, Y dijo ; I Bravo, bien va !® Balarin mas escelente No se ha visto,* ni vera. V. Echo el oso, al oir esto, Sus cuentas alia entre si, Y con ademan modesto Hubo de^° esclamar asi: XL VI. — 1 Ganciha la vida, " was-gainiTig a livelihood." — 2 See 575. — 3 The not very weUleamt dance." — * See 434. — 5 ^ Q^^ ted ? ^^ what sort?" " how is it 7" or, " how do you like it?"-^ i Pues que ? " and why ?"— 7 See 185.-— s Bien va, " it goes well ; " it is well." Va from ir. — 9 No se ha vistOf " has not been seen." See 173. Visto from rer.— 1° See 339. 348 SPANISH READING LESSONS. Cuando me desaprobaba La mona, llegue a^^ dudar : Mas ya que^^ el cerdo me alaba, Muy mal debo de^^ bailar. Vll. Guarde para su regalo Esta sentencia un autor :^ Si el sabio no aprueba/^ j malo ! Si el necio aplaude, \ peor ! T. DE Iriarte. 11 See 341.— 12 Ya gue, '' seeing that f' '' since:' -^^ Debo de bailar, "i Timst danced' Deber before an infinitive is often used in the sense of **io liave to" '^tobe to." — i* Aprueba, from aprobar. YOCABULAEY. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE VOCABULARY. def. art. definite article. indef. art. indefinite article. nm. noun masculine. nf. noun feminine. sing, singular. 'pL plural. m. masculine. f. feminine. •prop, proper noun or name. aug. augmentative. dim. diminutive. adj. adjective. -part, participle. pron. pronoun. pers. pron. personal pronoun. poss. possessive. rel. relative. iTidef. indefinite. dem. demonstrative. V. verb. ta. verb active. vn. verb neuter. vr. verb reflective. irr. V. irregular verb. impers. v. impersonal verb. aiLX. V. auxiliary verb. inf. infinitive mood. ind. indicative " imp. imperative " subj. subjunctive " ger. gerund. pres. present tense impf. imperfect " perf. def. perfect-definite " Ifut. first-future " defec. V. defective verb. 1 s. or 1 p. first person sing., or pi 2 5. or 2 p. second " " " 3*. or 3;). third " " " adv. adverb. prep, preposition. conj. conjunction. inteTy. interjection. interrog. interrogative. num. numeral. F. from. • Adjectives have their feminine termination separated fi-om the mascuUne by a hyphen ; thus, bueno-a; Espanol-a, PART VI. VOCABULARY OF WORDS IN THE READING LESSONS. ACA A', prep.y to, at, on, for, in. Abandonddo-a, part, and adj.^ aban- doned, left. Abandon^r, inf. ra., to abandon, to leave. Aborrec^r, in/I ra., to hate, to de- spise, to abhor. Aborr^zcas, F. Aborrecer, sub. pres. 2 s., thou mayest hate. Abrigdr, irif. ra., to shelter, to har- bor. Abril, nm.i April. Abrir, irif. ra., to open. Absiirdo-a, adj.^ absurd, contrary to reason. Abiinda, F. dbundar, ind. pres. 3 s., abounds. Abund^ncia, rif., abundance, plenty. Abundante, adj-t abundant. Abund^r, irif. m., to abound, to have plenty. Abusar, irif. ra., to abuse, to turn to a bad purpose. Abiiso, nm., abuse, ill-use. Ac^ba, F. acabarf ind. pres. 3 s., , finishes, terminates. Acabdr, inf. ra. and rn., to end, to finish, to die. Academia, ti/*., academy, literary society. Ac^sOj adv., perhaps, perchance. Acatado-a, part., respected, revered. Acatar, inf. va , to respect, to .re- vere. ACT Accion, nfy action, act. Acerca, F. acercar, ind. pres. 3 5., draws near, approaches. Acerc^ba, F. acercar, ind. impf. 3 s. was drawing near, approached. Acerc^r, irf. vn. and rr., to ap- proach, to draw near. Acog^r, inf. ra., to admit into the house, to receive, to protect. Acomodddo-a, adj., accommodated, fit, convenient. Acomod^r, inf. ra., to accommo- date ; rr., to condescend. Acompaii^do-a, part., accompa- nied. Acompandr, inf. ra., to accompany, to attend. Acompanase, F. acompanar, sub. impf. 3 s., might accompany. Acord^r, inf. vn. and rr., to remem- ber, to consider maturely. Acortddo, part., shortened. Acortar, inf. va., to shorten. Acostiimbran, F. acostumbrar, ind. pres. 3 p., are accustomed. Acostumbr^os, F. acostumbrai, imp. 2 p., accustom-yourselves. Acostumbrar, inf. va. and vn., to accustom ; to be accustomed. Actlvo-a, adj., active, diligent. A'cto, nm., act, action. Actual, adj., actual, present. Actualid^d, nf, actualness; pres- ent time, present Btate of things. 352 VOCABULARY. AGE Acu^rdate, F. accordary imp. 2 s.y remember thou. AcuerdOj F. accordar, ind. pres. 1 s., I remember. Acuerdo, nm., consent. De acuer- do, of one mind. Aciisa, F. acusar, ind. pres. 3 s., accuses, charges. Acusado-a, part., accused, charged. Acusador, nm., accuser, impeacher. Acusar, inf. va., to accuse, to im- peach, to charge with crime. Adelantado-a, adj., advanced, for- ward, early. • Ademdn, wm., gesture, look, atti- tude. Admiracion, n/*., admiration. Admirado-a, part., admired. Admirar, irif. va., to admire; to wonder at. Adopter, inf. va., to adopt. Adquirido, part., acquired, gained. Adquirir, inf. va., to acquire, to gain. Adu^na, nf., custom-house. Advertir, i7if. va., to advise, to in- form. Afamado-a, adj.,- famed, notorious. Afan, nm., solicitude,^labor. Afan^r, inf. va. and vr., to toil, to labor, to be very solicitous. A-fecto, nm,, affection. Afeit^r, inf. va., to shave. Afeminacion, nf, effemination, ef- feminateness. Afeminddo-a, part, and adj., effem- inated, effeminate. Afemin^r, inf. va., to effeminate, to enervate, Aficiones, F. afcionar, sub. pres. 2 s., thou mayest affect, thou may- est fancy. Afortunddo-a.ac?;.5 fortunate, lucky. Ag6no-a, adj. or indef. pron., for- ALE eign, another's, of another, of others. Agit^ndo, ger., agitating, waving, shaking. Agradable, adj., agreeable, pleasant. Agradar, iif. va., to please, to grat- ify, to render acceptable. Agradecido-a, adj., thankful, grate- ful. Agradecimiento, wm., gratitude, gratefulness. Agresion, nf., aggression, attack, assault. Agricultiira, nf, agriculture, hus- bandry. A'gua, nf, water. Aguardar, inf. va., to wait for, to expect, to grant time. Aguaviva, n. prop., Aguaviva. Agiido-a, adj., acute, sharp. Ahora, adv.^ now, the present. Aire, nm., air; grace, manner. Al, contraction oi a el or d el, to the, at the, in the, for the ; or, to him, at him. Alaba, F. alabar, ind. pres. 3 s., praises, commends. Alabddo-a, part, and adj., praised, applauded. Alarm dr, inf. va., to alarm. Alaro, n. prop., Alaro. A lava, 71. prop., Alava. Alcala, n. prop., Alcala. Alcance, nm., arm's length, reach. Alcanzar, 17?/! va.j to overtake, to reach, to gain, to obtain. Alegr^r, inf. va. and vr., to rejoice^ ' to be merry, to gladden, to be glad. Alegrla^ nf., mirth, joy, hilarity, gladness. Aleman, n. prop., a German. Alemdn-a, adj., German. Alefh^nia, n. prop., Germany. VOCABULARY. 353 AMB A.lgo, indef. pron., something, a little, anything, aught. A1go, adv., somewhat, a little. Aigun, indef. pron., some, some one. Alguno-a, indef. pron., some, some- body, any, anybody. Aliado, nm., ally. Alimento, nm., nourishment, food, aUment. Alistar, irif. va., to enlist, to enrol. Aliviar, inf. va., to succor, to alle- viate, to solace. Aljubarrota, n. prop., Aljubarrota. Alia, adv., there. Alii, adv., there, at that place. A^lma, rf., soul, courage, spirit. Almacen, nm., storehouse, maga- zine. Alrededor, nm., environ, neighbor- hood. Altar, nm., altar. Altivo-a, adj., haughty, proud, lof- ty. A'lto-a, adj., high, tall, lofty. A'ma, F. amar, ind. pres. 3 s., loves. A'ma, P. amar, imp. 2 s., love thou. Amado-a, part, and adj., loved ; be- loved. Amanecer, inf. impers. v., to dawn, to grow light. Amante, nm., lover, sweetheart. Amante, adj., loving, fond. Amar, inf. va., to love, to regard with affection, to like. Amargo-a, adj., bitter, acrid ; pain- ful. Amarrillean, F. amarrillear, ind. pres. 3 p., to grow yellow. Ambiciun, ??/., ambition. Ambicion^r, inf. va., to crave, to pursue with anxious desire, to covet. 'i ANT Ambicioso-a, adj., ambitious, aspi- ring. A'mbos-as, indef. pron. pi., both. Amenaza, F. amenazar, ind. pres. 3 s., threatens. Amenazar, irf. va., to threaten, to menace. Amenidad, -nf., amenity, pleasant- ness, agreeableness. America, n. prop., America. Americano-a, adj., American. Amigo, nm., friend. Amistad, nf, friendship, amity. A''mo, nm., master, owner. Amor, nm., love, affection, esteem. Amor6so-a, adj., affectionate, lev ing. Amparo, nm., protection, favor. Analisis, ?if., analysis. A^ncho-a,' adj., broad, wide. Anciano-a, adj. and 2i., old; old man ; old woman. Anfite^tro, nm., amphitheatre. A'ngel, nm., angel. Angusto-a, adj., narrow, close. Angostura, nf., narrowness ; a naj row pass. Angiistia, nf, anguish, affiiction. Anhelar, inf. va., to desire anxious ly, to covet, to wish eagerly. Anima, F. animar, ind. pres. 3 «. animates, revives, revivifies. Animado, part., animated. Animar, inf. va., to animate, to re- vivify, to revive. Aniverscirio, nm., anniversary. Ansiar, inf. va., to be anxious for, to ^desire anxiously, to long for. AnsJosamente, adv., anxiously, ear- nestly. Ansioso-a, adj., anxious, eager, un- easy. A'nte,p?'ej>., before ii> th^ presence of. 30* 354 VOCABULARY. APR Anleojo, nm.^ spy-glass ; eye-glass. Anterior, adj., anterior, former. A'ntes, prep, and adv., before. A'ntes de, and A'ntes que, same as dntes. Antiguo-a, adj., ancient, old, anti- quated. Anti-nacion^l, adj., antinational. Antonio, n. prop., Anthony. Anunciar, inf. va., to announce. Aiiadio, F. anadir, ind. perf. dtf. 3 s., added. Aiiadir, inf. va., to add. Ano, nm., year. Apag^do-a, part, and adj., extin- guished, quenched, softened. Aparec^r, irf. va., to appear, to come forth. Apasionado-a, adj., very fond. Apdtico-a, adj., apathetic, indiffer- ent. Ap6nas, adv., scarcely, as soon as, no sooner than. Apetecer, inf. va., to long for, to de- sire earnestly. Aplaudlr, irif. va., to applaud. Aplauso, nm., applause, praise, clap- ping. Aplicacion, application, direction. AplicsCr, irif. va., to apply, to attri- bute. Aplicate, P. aplicar, imp. 2 s., ap- ply thyself. Aplico, F. aplicar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., applied. Apologista, nm., apologist, excuser. Apreciable, adj., appreciable, valua- ble. ^ Apreci^r, inf. va., to appreciate, to value. Apr^cio, nm., value, esteem, esti- mation. Aprend^r, inf. va., to learn, to ac- quire knowledge. ARR Aprendldo-a, part, learnt, under* stood. Apreton, nm., pressure ; earnest- ness, energetic action. Aprobacion, rf., approbation. Aprobar, irf. va., to approve. Apru^ba, F. aprobar ^ ind. pres. 3 s., approves. A'pto-a, adj., apt, fit. Aqu^l, aquella, dem.pron., that, that one, the former; he, she; him, her. Aquello, pron. dem., that, that thing. Aqui, adv., here, in this place. Aragon, n. prop., Arragon. A'rbol, nm., tree. Archives, nm. pi., archives, the place where records are preserv- ed ; records* Ar^na, rf., sand. Arg^l, n. prop., Algiers. Argelino-a, adj., Algerine. A'rma, nf, arm, weapon. Armdda, nf., fleet, squadron. A'rmate, F. armar, imp. 2 s., arm thyself. Arr^nca, F. arrancar, ind. pres. 3 s., plucks out, extirpates, snatches. Arrancando, ger., plucking. Arrancar, inf. va., to pluck, to ex- tirpate, to snatch, to draw out. Arreglado-a, pari, and adj., regu- lated ; well organized. Arreglar, irf. va., to regulate, to re- duce to order, to organize. Arr^glo,7im., regulation, order. Arremet^r, inf.va., to attack, to as- sail with fury. Arrepentimi^nto, nm., repentance. penitence. Arrepentirse, inf. vr., to repent, tu feel sorrow for something said o) done. VOCABULARY. 355 BAJ Arrojdndo, ger.^ running, darting, throwing. Arrojar, inf. va., to throw, to dart, to hurl. Arruinddc-a, part., ruined. A'rte, nm. and nf., art. (It may be either masculine or feminine in the singular ; but feminine only in the plural.) Artesano, nm., artisan, mechanic. Artificio, nm., art or skill with which a thing is made, work- manship, craft. Asegiira, F. asegurar, ind. pres. 3 s., assures. Asesin^r, inf. va., to assassinate, to murder. Asesinato, nm., assassination, mur- der. Asesino, nm., assassin, murderer. Asi, adv., thus, so, in this manner. Asiento, nm., seat, chair. Asista, F. asistar, imp. 3 s., let (him) assist, may (he) assist. .4sistencia, nf, assistance, help, aid. Aspecto, nm., aspect, look, counte- nance, appearance. Aspir^r, inf. vn., to aspire, to aim at, to desire. Astiirias, n. prop., AstUria, a pro- vince in the north of Spain. Asiinto, nm., affair, business, sub- ject. Atenas, n. prop., Athens. Atencion, nf, attention, civility. Atender, inf. vn., to attend, to await. Ateni^nse, n. prop., Athenian. BAJ Atent^r, inf. va., to attempt, to try with circumspection. Atractivo, nm., charm, attraction. Atribuir, inf. va., to attribute, to as- cribe, to impute. Atroz, adj., atrocious, heinous. Aturdir, inf. va., to perturb, to dis- turb, to confuse. Audacia, nf, audacity, boldness, courage. Aumenta, F. aumentar, ind. pres. 3 s., increases, augments, en- larges. .Aumentado-a, part., increased. Aumentar, irf. vn., to augment, to increase, to grow larger. Aumento, nm., increase, enlarge- ment, augmentation. Aun, adv., yet, still ; conj., notwith- standing. Aiinque, conj., though, although, even if. Aurora, rf., the dawn. Austria, n. prop., Austria. Autor, nm., author, inventor. Autoridad, nf, authority. Avanza, F. avanzar, ind. pres. 3 «., advances, goes forward. A've, 71 f., bird, fowl. Aventurddo-a, adj., fortunate. Avergonzado-a, pai-t. and adj.^ shamed, ashamed. Averiguar, inf. va., to investigate, to ascertain, to inquire, to find out. Ayala, n. prop., Ayala. Ayud^r, inf. va., to aid, to help, to favor. Azogue, nm., quicksilver. Bailando, ger., dancing. Bailar, inf. vn., to dance. Bailarln, nm., dancer. Baj^r, inf. va., to lower, to let down, t ) bend downwards. Baj^za, nf, low or mean act, un- worthy action. B^jo-a, adj., low, n^tcan. Bajo, adv. and prep., under, below beneath, underneath. 356 VOCABULAKI. CAB B^la, 7?/., ball, bullet, shot. Balcon, nm., balcony. Bandera, rif., banner, standard ; in- fantry. Bandido, nm., bandit, highwayman, robber. Bdndo, nm., party, band of men. Baiiar, inf. va., to bathe, to bedew. B^rba, nf., beard, chin. Barbaro-a, adj., barbarous. Barco, nm., boat. Sarco de vapor, steamboat. Barril, nm^, barrel, Basta, F. bastar, ind. pres. 3 s., suflSces, is enough; it is suflS.- cient. Bastante, adv., enough, sufl&ciently. Batalla, nf., battle, fight, contest. Batallon, nm., battalion. Belen, n. prop., Belen. Bello-a, adj., beautiful, fine, hand- some. BelMza, nf., beauty. Bendecido-a, part., blessed. Bendeciran, P. bendecir, ind. Ifut. 3 -p., they will l^ess. Bendicion, nf., benediction, bless- ing. Beneficiado-a, jjart., benefitted. Beneficiar, inf. va., to benefit, to do good to. Beneficio, nin., benefit, favor, bene- faction. Benefico-a, adj., beneficent, kind. Benevolencia, nf., benevolence, good- will, kindness. Besar, inf. va., to kiss. *Bien, nm., good, blessing; property. Bienes, goods, property, wealth. CAB Bien, adv. and adj., well, good, very. Bienhechor, nm., benefactor. Blanco, nm., end, aim, object. Boca, nf., mouth. Bondad, nf. goodness, kindness. Borasco, n. prop., Borasco. Borrar, inf. va., to efface, to blot out, to expunge. Bosque, nm., wood, forest, grove. Botica, nf, apothecary's shop. Boticario, nm., apothecary. Bravo ! inter., bravo ! bravely done good ! Brazo, nm., arm. Bretaiia, n. prop., Britain. Brillante, adj., brilliant, splendid. Brillo, nm., splendor, brilliancy Bilsa, nf, breeze. Bruto, nm., brute. Buen,: ac/;., good, fine. Bueno-a, adj., good.; well. Biique, nm., vessel, ship. Biirla, P. burlar, ind. pres. 3 a. jests, jokes, laughs at, ridi- cules. Burlaron, P. burlar, ind. ptrf def 3 p., they ridiculed, they made sport of. Burlarse, inf. vr., to jest, to make sport of, to ridicule. Biisca, nf, search, the act of search- ing. Buscaba, P. buscar, ind. impf. 3 «., was seeking. Busc^do, 'part., sought. Buscando, ger., seeking. Buscar, inf. va., to seek, to search for. C, Caball^ro, nm., cavalier, gentleman, knight, sir. Cab^Uo, nm., horse. Caber, inf. vn., to contain to have room, to be contained to find place. VOCABULARY. 357 CAN Cab^za, ti/*., head. Cabo, nm., end, termination, close. C^da, indcf. pron.^ each, every. Cada cual, indef. pron., each one. Cada lino, indef. pron.y every one, every body. Cadaver, nm., corpse, dead body. Cadena, Jif., chain ; series. Caen, F. caer, ind. pres. 3 p., they fall. Ca^r, inf. vn., to fall, to befall, to decrease. Caldo, part., fallen ; decreased. Cajon, nm., box, chest. Calculo, nm.f calculation, compu- tation. Calculista, nm., calculist ; calcula- tor. Calahorra, n. prop., Calahorra. Callar, inf. vn., to keep silence, to conceal, to be silent. Callasen, F. callar, sub. imp/. 3 p., they should be silent, should keep silence. Calle, n/., street ; road, way. Calumniadur, nm., calumniator, slanderer. Calur6so-a, adj., warm, hot. Camarada, nf., comrade, compan- ion, partner. Camarero, nm,., steward; headman- servant in great houses. Cambiado, part., changed, shifted. Cambicir, inf. va., to change, to al- ter, to shift ; to barter. Camino, nm., road, way. Camino de hierro, rail-road. Oaminito, nm. dem., little road, pati*. Cdmpo, nm., country ; field. Cana, nj"., grey hair. Canalla, nf, rabble, mob; popu- lace. Canciller, nm., chancellor. CAS Cans^do-a, part, and adj., fatigued, wearied, tired. Cantabria, n. prop., Cantabria. Cantidad, nf., quantity, sum. Capaz, adj., able, capable, skilful. Capital, nf, metropolis, chief city of a country, capital Capitular, inf. ra., to capUulate. Cara, see caro. Carabina, ri/!, carbine, a small rifle. Caracter, nm., character, disposi- tion. Cardenal, nm.., cardinal, one hold- ing the ecclesiastical office of Cardinal. Cargado-a, part., loaded, burdened. Cargo, nm., load ; charge ; accusa- tion. Caritativo-a, adj., charitable, kind, friendly, benevolent. Carlos, n. prop., Charles. Caro-a, adj., dear, beloved, high- priced; costly. Carrera, nf., career, course of life, profession; race. Carruage, nm., carriage, vehicle. Carta, nf., letter, epistle. Cartagines, nm. prop., Carthagin- ian. Cartagines-a, adj., Carthaginian. Casa, iif., house ; home. Casar, inf. va., to marry. Cascada, nf, cascade, water-fall. Casco, nm., cask. C^si, adv., almost, very nearly, just. Caso, nm., case, event ; chance. Castig^r, inf. va., to punish, to chastise. Castigara, F. castigar, ind. Ifut. 3 s., will punish. Castigo, nm.., punishment, chas- tisement. Castilla, 7u prop., Castile. 358 VOCABULARl CIE Casualid^d, n/!, casualty, chance, unforeseen event. Casualm^nte, adv.^ casually, acci- dentally. Caturce, num. adj., fourteen. Caudal, nm., treasure, property. Caudillo, nm., commander, chief, leader. Causdr, inf. ra., to cause, to occa- sion, to produce. Cautivo, nm,, captive, slave. Cayendo, ger., falling, tumbling. Cayo, F. caer, ind. per/, def. 3 s., fell. Ceder, inf. ra., to grant, to yield, to cede. Cedi^ndo, ger., yielding. Cediesen, F. ceder j sub. impf. 3. /?., they should yield. Censiira, nf., censure, blame, criti- cism, reproach. Centenar, nm., hundred. C^ntro, nm., centre. Cerca, adv., near, at hand; con- cerning. Cerca de, prep., near, close to. Cerc^no-a, adj., near, adjoining. C^rdo, nm., hog, pig. Cerrddo-a, part., shut, closed. Cerrdr, inf. va., to close, to shut, to lock. C^iTO Gordo, n. prop., Cerro Gordo. Ces^r, inf. va., to cease, to termi- nate, to close. Cetro, nm., sceptre. Charlatan, nm., charlatan, quack. Chipre, n. prop., Cyprus (an island in the Mediterranean sea). Choc^nte, adj., glaring, provoking, disgusting. Cicatriz, nf., the mark remaining after a w^ound, scar. Cielo, nm., heaven; sky, air. Ciencia, nf., science, learning, knowledge. COM Ci^rtamente, adv., certainly, surely. Ci6rto-a, adj., certain, sure, tru3. Clma, nf., summit, top. Cinco, num. adj., five. Cincuenta, num. adj., fifty. Circund^r, inf. va.. to surround, to encircle. Citado-a, part., cited, mentioned. Citar, inf. va., to cite, to mention, to appoint. Ciudad, rif., city. Ciudadela, nf, citadel, a small fort- ress situated so as to defend a city. Claramente, adv., clearly, plainly. Claro-a, adj., clear, bright ; obvious, manifest. Clase, nf., class ; rank, order. Clav^r, inf. va., to nail, to stick, to prick, to pierce. Clima, nm., climate, clime. Cob^rde, nm. and adj., coward, cowardly. Cuche, nm., coach, barouche. Codicia, n/*., cupidity, desire, covet- ousness. Codici6so-a, adj., greedy, covetous. Cog^r, inf. va., to catch, to collect, to gather. Cogera, F. coger, ind. Ifut. 3 s., will gather. ColMdo, nm., hill, small eminence. Colocan, F. colocar^ ind. pres. 3 p., they place. Colocado-a, part., placed, arranged. Colocar, inf. va., to place, to ar- range. Colonia, nf, colony. Comb^te, nm., fight, combat. Combatir, irif. va., to fi^ht, to at* tack, to combat. Comedia, nf, comedy, play. Comence, F. comenzar, ind. perf. d^. I $.,! began, I commenced. VOCABUI ARY. 359 COM Coment^rio, nm.^ comment; com- mentary. Comenzar, inf. vcu and vn.^ to com- mence, to begin. Comer, inf. va., to eat, to dine. Comerci^nte, nm., trader, mer- chant. Comerciar, inf. rm., to trade, to traf- fic, to exercise commerce. Cometer, inf. va., to commit; to entrust, to charge ; to attempt. Cometido, pari., committed. Comida, nf., meal, dinner. Comisiun, rif., commission ; trust. Como, adv., as, like, in what man- ner. iComo? how? why? Compadecerse, inf. vr., to pity, to commiserate, to feel for. Compadecera, F. compadecerse, ind. I fat. 3 s., will pity, will feel com- passion for. Compan^ro, mn., companion, asso- ciate. Compaiila, sf, company. Comparaci6n, nf., comparison. Comparddo, part., compared. Compasion, nf, compassion, pity. Completamente, adv., completely, entirely. Completer, inf. va., to complete, to finish, to consummate. Completo-a, adj., complete, entire, finished. Complice, nm., accomplice, asso- ciate. Componer, inf. va., to compose ; to frame. Comprehend^r, see comprender. Comprende, or comprehende, F. comprender, or comprehende?-, ind. pres. 3 s., comprehends, under- stands. Comprender, inf. va., to compre- hend, to understand, to comprise. CON Compro, F. comprar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., bought, purchased. Compuesto-a, part., F. componer, composed, made up. Comiin, adj., common ; vulgar. Comunicaciun,7j/'., communication, intercourse. Comunicar, iiif. va., to commu- nicate, to inform. Con, prep., with, by, for. Con todo, yet, nevertheless. Conceder, inf. va., to concede, to grant, to allow, to give. Concedido-a, part, conceded, grant- ed, bestowed. Concepto, nm., conception, thought idea. Conciencia, nf, knowledge, con- science. Conciudadano, nm., fellow-citizen, fellow-countrymen. Concluir, nf. va., to conclude, to close. Conde, rvm., Count (a title of rank) Condenar, inf. va., to condemn, tu sentence. Condicion, n/!, condition, situation,- disposition. Conduclr, inf. va., to conduct, to convey. Condiicta, nf, conduct, behavior, deportment. Confiar, inf. va. to confide, to trust in. Gonflicto, nm., conflict, struggle contest. Confundido-a, part., confounded' confused. Confundlr, inf. va., to confound, to perplex, to throw into confusion. Confusion, nf., confusion, disorder. Congreso, mn., congress. Conjurar, inf. va., to conjure, to im- plore. 3G0 VOCABULARY. CON Conmigo, prep, and pron., witfrme. Conocen, F. conocer, ind.pres. 3 p., they know. Conocer, inf. va., to know, to un- derstand. Conociendo, ger., knowing, being acquainted with. Conocimiento, nm., knowledge, learning, acquaintance. Conquista, rif., conquest ; subjuga- tion. Conquistadur,r*m., conqueror, victor. Conquistar, vif. va., to conquer, to subdue. Consagrado-a, part., and adj., con- secrated; sacred, devoted. Consagrar, inf. va., to consecrate, to devote. vonseguir, inf. va., to succeed, to obtain, to attain. Oonsejo, nm., advice, counsel, judg- ment. Oonservar, inf. va., to preserve, to guard. Considera, F. considerar, ind.pres. 3 s. and imp. 2 s., considers ; con- sider thou. Considerar, inf. va., to consider, to reflect, to think. Consignar, inf. va., to consign. Oonsiguiu, F. conseguir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., succeeded, gained. Consigo,prcp. and pron., with him, with you, with themselves. Consolad6r-a, adj., consolatory, tending to give comfort. Consolar, inf. va., to console, to comfort, to assuage. Consta, F. constar, ind. pres. 3 s., it is evident, it appears. Constancia, nf, constancy, steadi- ness. Constar, inf. v. Impers., to be evi- dent, to appear from. CON Constituido-a, part., constituted; bound. Construir, inf. va., to construct, to form, to build. Consuelo, nm., consolation, relief, comfort. Consuinado-a, adj. and /)ar/., con- summate, complete, accompRsh- ed. Contando, ger., counting, reck- oning ; relying, relating. Contar, inf. va., to count, to num- ber ; to relate ; to rely. Contempla, F.contemplar, ind.pres. 3 s., contemplates ; and imp. 2 s., contemplate thou. Contemplar, inf. va., to contem- plate. Contentar, inf. va., to satisfy, to please, to gratify. Contento-a, adj., contented, satis- fied. Contestar, inf. va., to reply, to an- swer, to prove, Contigo, prep, and pron., with thee, with thyself Contlguo-a, adj., contiguous, ad- joining. Continente, nm., continent, main- ^ land. Continuamente, adv., continually, always. Continuando, ger., continuing, last- ing. Continuar, inf. vn., to continue, to last. Continue, F. continuar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., he continued. Contlnuo-a, adj., continual ; inces- sant. Contra, prep., against, contrary to. Contrdrio-a, adj., contrary. A* contrario or por d contrario, on the contrary. VOCABULARY. 861 COS Jontribuido-a, part., contributed. Coniribuir, inf. ra., to contribute, to bear a part. Contusion, ??/*., contusion Convencldo, part., convinced. Conv^ntOj nm., convent. Oonversur, inf. vn., to talk, to con- verse. Convertir, inf. va., to convert, to change. Convi^ite, F. convertir, ind. pres. 3 s., converts. Convocar, inf. va., to convoke, to assemble, to call tog?ther. Convulsion, nf, convulsion. Cupa, nf., cup ; meeting of the branches of trees, bower. Corazon,7im., heart ; spirit, courage. Con'na, nf, crown. Coron.Ir, inf. va., to crown, to or- nament or decorate the top of any thing. Correo, nm., mail, post. Correr, inf. va., to run. Correrpc- llgro, to be in peril or danger. Corridnte, adj., current, marketable, merchantable. Corroborado-a, part., confirmed, corroborated. Corrobor^r, inf. va., to confirm, to corroborate. Cors^rio, nm., corsair, the com- mander of a privateer. Curte, nf, court, capital city, royal residence. Cortediid, nf, shortness, brevity. Cortes, adj., courteous, polite, civil, genteel. CovtO'Q, adj., short; small, concise. Cosa, nf, thing. Cusa de, prep., about, concerning. Cosecha, nf, harvest, crops. Custa, ^f.J cost, expense, charge; coasU 31 CUA Coster, inf. vn., to cost, to be bought for ; to suffer loss. Costumbre, nf., custom, habit, man- ners. Creando, ger., creating, making. Crear, inf. va., to create, to make, to establish. Crecer, inf. vn., to grow, to in- crease, to augment. Crecido-a, part., grown, increased. Cre^r, inf. va., to believe, to think, to credit. Creias, F. creer, ind. impf. 2 s., thou wast believing, thou thoughtest. Crlado, nm., male-servant. Crimen, nm., crime, offence. Criminal, adj., criminal Crisol, nm., crucible. Critica, nf, criticism. Crltico, nm., critic, criticiser. Crunica, nf, chronicle, register ol events. Cruzado-a, part., crossed. Cruzar, inf. va., to cross ; to lay one thing across another. Cuadruplicar, inf. va., to quadrupli- cate, to increase four times. Cual {el or la), pron, ret., which, who, that. Cull 7 pron. inter rag., which ? (of the two.) Cada cual, each one. Cual, adv., as, like. Cualesqui^ra, indef. pron. pi., who- ever, any body who. whatever. Cualidad, nf, quality, qualifica- tion. Cualquier, indef. pron., whoever, whichever, whatever, any. Cualquiera, indef. pron., whoever, whatever, he who, any one. Cu^n, adv., how, how much. Cudndo, adv.i when ; va, case thati 362 VOCABULARY. DEB Cuiinio-a, adj.y as much as, as ma- ny aSj whatever, whoever, all that which, all those who. Cuanto, adv.t the more, how much. Cuar^nta, adj. num., forty. Cuarto, nm., cuarto (a copper coin of which 170 make a dollar) ; a room, apartment. Cuarto-a, adj. num., fourth. Cuatro, adj. num., four. Cubierto-a, pai-L, covered, over- spread. Cubrir, inf. ra., to cover ; to cloak, to mask. Cuenta, n/I, account, narration; . reckoning. Cu^rpo, nm., body. Cuidado, nm., care, anxiety, atten- tion. DEC Cuidado! interj., have i care: be careful ! Cuidadosam^nte, adv carefully, cautiously. Culpa, n/., blame, fault. Culpado-a, adj., blameable, guilty. Cultivar, inf. ra., to cultivate. Cultiira, nf., culture, improvement. Gumplir, inf. va., to fill, to fulfil, to accomplish, to execute. Cilna., nf., cradle, birth-place ; line- age. Cupula, nf., cupola, dome. Curado-a, part., cured, healed. Curiosiddd, nf, curiosity, curious- ness. Curiuso-a, adj., curious, strange. Ciiyo-a, pron. rel.^ whose, of whom, of which. Dd, F. dar, ind. pres. 3 s., gives. Da, F. dar, imp. 2 *., give thou. Daban, F. dar, ind. impf 3 p., they gave, they were-giving. Dado, part.j given, granted. Dado que, {conj.,) provided that. Dando, ger., giving. Danza, jf, dance. D^no, nm.^ damage, mischief, in- jury. Dar, inf. »a., to give, to grant, to bestow. Dito, nm., a fact or truth granted and admitted, datum. Ddtos (pi.), data. De, prep., of, from, with, off, at. D6, F. dar, sub. pres. 1 or 3 s., may give. Debijo, prep., under, below. D6be, F. dehcTy ind. pres. 3 s., ought, must, is to, owes. Debdls, F. deber, ind. pres. 2 p., ye ought, you must ; you owe: Deb^mos, F. deber, ind. pres. 1 p., we ought ; we owe. Deben, F. deber, ind. pres. 3 p.^ they ought, must ; owe. Deber, nm., duty, obligation. Deber, inf. aux. v., ought, should, must ; ra., to owe, to be indebt- ed to. Debes, F. deber, ind. pres. 2 s., thou oughtest ; thou owest. Debidamente, adr., duly, justly, ex- actly. Debiera, F. deber, sub", impf. 3 s., should, ought ; he should owe. Debi^ran, F. deber, sub. impf 3 p., should, ought ; they should owe. Dcbil, adj., weak, feeble. D^bo, F. deber, ind. pres. 1 s., I must, I ought, I owe. Dec^ncia, nf, decency, honesty modesty. Decia, F. decir, ind. impf. 1 or 3 «., said, was saying. VOCABULARY. 363 DEM Dectr, inf. ra., to say, to tell, to speak, to declare. Oeclcinian, F. declamar, ind. pres. 3 p., declaim. Declaraclon, nf., declaration. Dedicar, inf. va., to dedicate, to consecrate. Defecto, nm., defect, error, fault, mistake. Defender, inf. va., to defend, to pro- tect, to resist, to maintain. Defensa, nf, defence, guard, shelter. Degradilr, inf. va., to degrade. Dejiido, part., left, relinquished; permitted. Dejar, inf. va., to leave, to relin- quish ; to permit, to let. Dejar de, to fail to. Dejes, F. d^ar, sub. pres. 2 s., thou- mayest permit. Del, prep, and art., of the, from the, by the, in the. Del, prep, and pron., of him, from him, by him, of that, from tliat, by it. Delante, adv. and prep., before, in the presence of. Delante de, be- fore. Deleit^ble, adj., delectable, pleas- ing, delightful. Dellcad^za, nf., delicacy, tender- ness, refinement. Delicado-a, Mij., delicate, pleasing, nice. Delicia, nf., delight, comfort, satis- faction. DeliciCso-a, adj., delicious, delight- ful. Delineado, part., delineated, de- scribed, sketched. Demandar, inf. va., to demand, to ask, to petition. L/emas, adv. and adj. (It :s nearly dl^ ays used With an article belbrt! DES it,) over and above. Lou dtmda. las demds, the rest, ihe others. Demasiado-a, adj., overmuch, ex- cessive, too much. Demasiado, adv., too, enough, ex- cessively. Demostrar, inf. va., to prove, to show, to demonstrate. Denodado-a, adj., bold, intrepid, daring. Dentro, or, deritro de, prep., in, within. Denuedo, nm., boldness, intrepidi- ty, courage. Denunciar, inf. va., to denounce. Derecho, nm., law, equity, right. Derecho-a, adj., rightful, straight, just, lawful. Derramado a, part., shed, diffused. Derrilman, F. derramar, ind. pres 3 p., shed, diffuse ; bestow. Derrum.tr, inf. va., to shed, to dif- fuse, to spread, to pour forth, to bestow bountifully. DerredCr, nm., circumference, vi- cinity. At derredor. or en derre- dor, around. Denibado-a, part., demolished, ru- ined, ovrivthrown. Derrlte, F. derretir, ^nd. pres. 3 s., melts, thaws. Des:igrad;Ibie, adj., disagreeable, unnleaSiUt. Di3saninu'do-a, part., disheartened, discouraged, dispirited. Desa;3arec6r, inf. vn., to disippear. Des ipas-onado-a, adj., disp issioa- ate, impartial. Desnprobar, inf. va., to di^ipprove, to censure, to condemn. DesarregUdo-a. part, and adj., A\s- o dered, discomposed: immodp- rate, unre?tr lirjixl- Dusastroso-a, a/Jj.^ disastrous. 364 VOCABULARY. DES Descttnso, mn., rest, repose, tran- quillity, rei-ixation. Descondi^nte, nm., descendant. Dtschvilr, inf. ra., to unnail, to draw out nails. Defconoecr, inf. va., to disov/n, to be ignorant of, to be unacquaint- ed. Desconociendo, ger., not knowing, being ignorant of. Desconfianza, nf, distrust, mis- trust, want of confidence, jeal- ousy. Desconfiar, inf. ra., to distrust, to suspect, to have no confidence in. Desconsuelo, nm., atfliction, want of consolation, trouble. Bescubi6rto-a, part, and adj.^ un- covered, discovered, unclosed, open. Ddsde, prep. J from, since, after. Desdlcha, n/"., misfortune, unhappi- ness. Desduro, nm., dishonor, blemish, stain. Desetir, inf. ra., to desire, to wish, to demand. Desechdr, inf. ra., to expel, to drive away. Desenfreno, vim., unruliness, rash- ness, licentiousness. Desdo, nm., desire, wish. D^seCso-a, adj.^ desirous, anxious. Desfichat^", n/l, impudence, ef- frontery. Desgarriido, part., torn, rent. Desgrucia, r?/., misfortune., adver- sty. Desgraciadem^nte, adv., unfortu- nately, unhappily. Desgr.iciudo-a, adj., unfortunate, - unhappy, unlucky. Deshonruso-a, adj.^ dishonorable, disgraceful, indecent* DET Desigudl, adj.t unequal ; unjust. Desliziir, t.?/. ra., to slip, to slide. Despecho, nm.., displeasure, dis- may, despair, indignation. Desp^ja, F.despejar, ind.pres. 3«., to clear awayj to clear up. Despotlsmo, nm., despotism, abso- lute power. Despreciclble, adj., despicable, con- temptible. Despreciado-a, part., despised, scorKed. Despreciar, inf. ra., to despise, to disdain, to depreciate, to con- temn. Desprecies, F. despreciar, sub. pres. 2 s., thou mayest despise. Desprendido, part., loosened, sepa- rated. Despucs, or, despu^s de, prep., af- ter, next to. Despucs que, adv., afterward, after. Destino, nm., destiny, fate, doom, lot. Destituldo-a, part., deprived, strip- ped, being destitute. Destruir, inf. ra., to destroy, to ruin, to lay waste. Destruyendo, ger., destroying, lay- ing waste. Desv^lo, nm., wakefulness, inabili* ty to sleep. DetenclCn, nf, detention, delay stopping. Detencr, inf. ra., to detain, to hin- der, to stop, to keep, to arrest. Determinacion, n/., determination, decision, resolution. Determinido-a, part, and adj., de- termined, resolute, bold. Detrds, prep, and adv., behind. Dttras de, behind. Detuvimos, F". detener, Ind. perj* def» I p., we stopped. VOCABULARY. 365 DIS Dl, F. dar, ind. 'perf. def. 1 s,, I gave. Di, F. decir^ imp, 2 5., say thou, tell thou. Dia, nm.^ day. Dice, P. dccir^ ind. pres. 3 5., says, he says. Dlcha, n/'., happiness, fortune, feli- city. Dicho-a, part., said, mentioned. Diciendo, ger., saying, telling. Diez, num. adj., ten. Diferenciar, inf. va. and rr., to dif- fer, to be unlike. Diferente, adj., different, dissimilar, unlike. Dif tcil, adj., difficult, arduous. Dificultiid, nf., difficulty, embar- rassment, obstacle. Dificultrjso-a, adj., difficult, trouble- some. Dignidad, nm., dignity, excellence, rank, advancement, preferment. Digno-a, adj., worthy, deserving. Dijo, F. decir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., said, he or she said. Diligencia, nf, diligence; stags- coach or diligence. Dinero, nm., money, wealth. Dio, F. dar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., g ive ; he or she gave. Dios, 11. prop., God. Dire, F. decir, ind. ] fut. 1 s., I shall say. '^ Dlrigir, or dirijlr, inf. va., to rule, to direct, to guide, to govern. Discernimi^nto, nm., discernment, judgment, clearsightedness. Discordia, nf., discord, disagree- ment. Discipulo, nm., disdple, pupil, stu- dent. Disgustado-a, part., disgusted, dis- 31* DOR Disgiisto, nm., disgust, loathing, offence. Disminiiye, F. disminuir, ind. pres 3 s., diminishes, lessens, impairs. Disminuido-a, part., diminished, lessened. Dispuro, nm., discharge, explosion. Dispensar, inf. va., to dispense, to excuse, to diffuse. Dispuesto-a, part, and adj., dis- posed : ready. Disputar, inf. va., to dispute, to contend. Distinguir, inf. va., to distinguish, to perceive, to discern. Distinguido-a, part.^ distinguished, noted. Distinciun, rif, distinction DIsiintamente, adv., distinctly. Dis:lnio-a, adj., distinct, different. Distraer, inf. va., to distract, draw off the attention, to perplex. Distraido-a, pari, and adj., distract- ed ; inattentive. Diverso-a, adj., diverse, difJerent, various. Dividir, inf. va., to divide, disjoin, separate. Divisur, iif. va., to descry, to per- ceive. Do, adv., where. See Donde. DoUez, nm., duplicity, double-deal- ing.. Documento,*77i,, document, writing. DClo, nm., fraud, wile, deceit, trick. Dominar, inf. va., to rule, to master. Don, nm., Don (a title of respect). Don nm., gift, a present. Donde, adv., where, in what place. Dona, nf. Lady, Mistress (Mrs.), Madame, (a title of respect ap- pled to ladies.) Dorado-a, adj., gilt, golden. Dormir, infvn., to sleep. 3G6 VOCABrLARY. ELE Dos, num. adj., two. Dudar, inf. va., to doubt, to be un- certain. Diidas, F. dudar, sub. pres. 2 f., thou mayest doubt. Duelo, 71771., affliction, grief; duel. Dueno, nm., owner, proprietor, master. ENO Diilce, adj.. soft, gentle, sweet. Dulziira, sf., sweetness, softness^ gentleness, tenderness. Diique, nm., Duke. Duradero-a, adj., lasting, durable. Durante, prep., during. Durar, inf. vn., to last, to endure, to continue. E. K co7?J., and (used instead of y, be- fore a word beginning with i or hi). Echando, ger., throwing, casting. Echar, inf. va., to throw, to cast ; to apply, to compute. Echara, P. echar, sub. imp/. 3 s., he should throw. E'co, nm., echo. Ecsaminar, see examinar. Ecsistir, see existir. Edad, nf., age. Edi(;to, nm., edict, order. Eiiificar, inf. va., to build, to con- struct, to edify, to instruct. Educaciun, nf., education, instruc- tion. Efecto, n77i., effect, purpose. En efecto, in fact, indeed. Ejempio, 71777., example, precedent. Ejercer, inf. va., to exercise, to practice. Ejerciendo, ger., exercising. Ejercito, nm., army, host. El, def. art., the : el, pers. pron., he, it ; dem. pron., that. Eleato-a, part., elected, chosen. Electricidid, nf, electricity. Electrico-a, adj., electrical. Ek'ggtncia, nf., elegance, graceful- ness. Elegir, inf. va., to elect, to select, to choose. IMejir, or, elijir, see elegir. El^na, n. prop., Ellen, Helen. San- ta Elena, St. Helena (an island of that name). Elijido-a, or elegido-a,7?a/-/., elect- ed. Selected. Eligleron, F. eligir, ind. perf def 3 p., they selected. "E^'Wi, pers. pron. f, she, it; her. E'llo, pers. pron. neuter, it. EmbarcaciCn, rif., vessel, boat. Embargo, 7i77i., embargo, seques- tration. Sin embargo, notwith- standing. Embarrilar, inf. va., to barrel, to put into a barrel. Embustero, nm., liar; hypocrite, impostor. Emperador, nm., emperor, monarch. Emporo, conj., but, however, yet. Empezar, inf. va., to begin, to commence. Empieza, F. empezar, ind. pres. 3 s., begins, it begins. Empiezan, F. empezar, ind. pres. 3 p., they begin. Emplear, inf. va., to occupy, to em- ploy. Empujiido-a, part., pushed, pushed away. E'mulo, nm., rival, competitor. En, prep., in, into, at, on, upon. Encadenar, inf. va., to chain, to en* thral, to fetter. Encanecldo-a, part., grown grey. VOCABULARY. 367 ENT Encargado-a^ part., charged with, entrusted. Encontrar, inf. ra., to meet, to en- counter, to find, to light upon. Encuentra, F. encontrar, ind. pres. 3 s., meets, meets with. Encuentran, F. eni^ontrar, ind. pres. J p., meet, find, they find. Enemlgo, nm., enemy, opponent. Enemlgo-a, adj., inimical, of the enemy. Energia, nf., energy, power, force. ELfermedtLdjn/"., infirmity, sickness. Eiifermo-a, adj., sick, infirm. Enfrenase, F. enfrenar, sub. impf. 3 s., would restrain, would curb. Enganar, inf. va., to deceive, to cheat, to mislead, to hoax. Engrandecimiento, 7im., aggran- dizement. Enjambre, nf., swarm-, crowd. Ennoblecer, inf. va., to ennoble. Enorgullecer, inf. vr., to pride one's self, to be haughty. Enrique, n. prop., Henry. Enrojecer, inf. va., to tinge, to red- den. Ens^lce, F. ensalzar, sub. pres. 3 s., may boast, may extol. Ensalzilr, iif. va., to extol, to boast. Ensangrentado-a, part., stained with blood, covered with blood. Ensayado-a, part., tried, essayed, proved. Ensayar, inf. va., to try, to make trial of, to essay, to examine, to prove. Ensayo, mn., trial, essay; proof, experiment. E'nte, nm., being, entity. Entender, inf. va., to understand, to comprehend. Entendimi^nto, nm., understand- ing, judgment, mind, knowledge. ESC Ent^ro-a, adj., entire, complete, whole. Enticnde, F. entender, ind. pres. 3 s., understands, he understands. Entiendo, F. entender, ind. pres. 1 s., I understand. Entunces, adv., then, at that time. Entrando, ger., entering. Entranas, nf. pi., entrails, internal parts of any thing. Entrar, inf. va., to enter, to go in. E'ntre, prep., among, between. Entremos, F. entrar, imp. 1 p., let us enter. Entro, F. entrar, ind. perf def 3 s., entered, he entered. Envanecer, inf. vn., to make vain, to become proud or haughty. Envanecimiento, nm., haughtiness, vanity. Envanezcan, F. envanecer, imp. 3 p., let (them) pride themselves. EnvidieiSj F. envidiar, sub. pres. 2 p., ye may envy ; imp., envy ye, do ye envy. Envidiijso-a,a gy 374 VOCABULARY. IMP Humildd J, 7?/"., hvmility, meekness. Hurnlldej adj.^ h mble, submissive, meek. HmTiillaciOn, n/, humiliation. Humillar, inf. va.^ to humble, to lower, to subdue. IND Huyeron, F. kuir^ ind. perf, def. 3 p., they flew, fled,' escap- ed. Huyu, F. huir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., fled, flew. f'ba, F. ir, ind. impf 1 or 3 s., went, was going, was. Idea, 7?/., idea, notion, intention. Idioma, «m., language, idiom. rdo, F. i?-, part., gone. Ignorar, inf. va., to be ignorant of, not to know. Igual, adj.f equal, similar. Ilimitado-a, adj., unlimited, unre- strained. Iliistre, adj., illustrious, celebrated, noble. Imitar, inf. va., to imitate. Impaciencia, nf., impatience. Impacient^r, irif. va., to vex, to lose patience, to become impatient. Iinpaciente, adj., impatient. Inip.'ircialmente, adv., impartially. Impedir, inf. va., to hinder, to im- pede, to prevent. Impeler, ijif va., to impel, to excite. Impelldo-a, part., impelled, urged, propelled. [mpendido-a, part., undergone. Imperfecto-a, adj., imperfect. Imperio, nm., empire, command. Importancia, nf., importance, im- port. Imporldnte, adj., important ; useful. Importar, inf. va., to import, to be important, to concern, to matter. Impracticable, adj., impracticable, impassable. Impr^nta, n/I, printing, printing- press. ImpresiCn, n/*., impression ; image. Imprupio-a, adj., improper, unbe* coming. Incendiar, inf. va., to inflame, to enkindle. Inclinaciun, nf, inclination, ten- dency. Inclinado-a, part., inclined, dis- posed. Inclinando, ger., inclining. Incomodid^d, nf., inconvenience, trouble, pains. Incomparable, adj., incomparable, matchless. Inconcevible, adj., inconceivable, incomprehensible. Incorporar, iiif. va., to incorporate, to unite. Increible, adj., incredible. Indagar, inf. va., to investigate, to search into. Independencia, nf., independence. Independiente, adj., independent, free. Indicar, inf. va., to point out, to in- dicate. Indiferencia, nf., indifference, un- concern. Indiferente, adj., indifferent, uncon- cerned. Indignam^nte, adv., unworthily, unjustly. I'ndio, nm., Indian. Indispensable, adj., indispensable. Individuo, nm., individual. Indumiio-a, adj., unconquerable, in* domitable. VOCABULARY. 375 INS Indudablemente, adv.^ undoubtedly, without doubt. Indulg^ncia, 7i/*., indulgence, ten- derness. rnfaniia, nf., infamy, dishonor, meanness. Infeliz, adj.i unhappy, unfortunate. [nferir, inf. va.y to infer, to deduce. Influencia, rif., influence. Infliijo, nm.f influx, a flowing in. Infortun^do-a, arf/., unfortunate, unhappy. Infortunib, nm.j misfortune, ill luck. Ingenio, nm., genius, mental pow- er, mind. Ingles, n. prop., Englishman, the English language. Ingles-a, adj., English. Ingratitiid, nf., ingratitude. Ingrato-a, adj., ungrateful, unkind. Injuria, nf., injury, affront, wrong. Injiisto-a, adj., unjust, wrong, harmful. Inmediacion, nf., neighborhood, confine. Inmediatamente, adv., immediate- ly, directly. fnmortal, adj., immortal. Inmortalizar, in/', va., to immortal- ize. fnmovil, adj., immovable, motion- less. Innecesario-a, adj., unnecessary. Innumerable, adj., innumerable. Inocencia, nf., innocence, purity. Inocente^ adj., innocent, pure, mod- est. Inofensivo-a, ac?;., inoffensive, harm- less. Inquietar, inf. va., to disquiet^ to harass, to molest, to vex. Inquietiid, nf., inquietude, anxi- ety. Iniscripcion, ?i/., inscription. IRL Inslgne, adj., renowned, illustrious, remarkable. Instante, nm„ instant, moment. Instinto, nm., instinct, instigation. Institucion, nf., institution. Instruccion, nf, instruction, infor- mation. Instruido-a, part, instructed, edu- cated. Insubordinaciun, rif., insubordina- tion, disobedience of orders. Insufrible, adj., insufl^erable, intole- rable. Insultar, inf. va., to insult. Integridad, nf, integrity, purity, honesty. Inteligencia, nf, intelligence, un derstanding, knowledge. Intenciun, nf, intention, purpose, design. Intent^r, inf. va., to intend, to at- tempt, to endeavor. Interes, nm., interest. Interes^do-a, adj., interested, self- ish, mercenary. Interiorm^nte, adv., internally, in- wardly. Interrogar, inf. va., to interrogate, to question. Interumplr, irf. va., to interrupt, to hinder. Intimidad, nf, intimacy, familiari- ty- Iniitil, adj., useless, unprofitable. Iniitilmente, adv., uselessly, in vain. Invenc;un,77/!, invention, discovery. Invento, nm., same as invencion, InventOr, nm., inventor; contriver. Invi^rno, nm., winter. InvitaciOn, nf, invitation.. Ir, inf. vn., to go ; to be. I'ra, nf, anger, ire. Irlandes, nm., Irishman. Irland^sa, nfy IrishworaaiL 376 VOCABULARY. LAS Irreconciliible, arf/., irroDoncilable Irritdr, inf, va., to irritate, to exas- perate. Isabel, n.prop.f.y Isabella, or Eliza- beth. LEN Italia, n. prop.f.y Italy. Italiano-a, adj., Italian. Izquierdo-a, adj., left; left-hand- ed. J. Jabon, nm., soap. Jamas, adv., never ; ever. Jardln, nm., garden. Jeneral, nm., same as general. Jeronimo, n. prop, m., Jerome. Jorffe, n.prop, m., George. Jornalero, nm., day-laborer, jour- neyman. JCven, nm. or/., youth, young man or young woman. JCven, adj., young. Jovenzuelo, nm. dim., youngster. Jiian, n. prop, m., John. Juego, Tim., play, game. Julcio, nm., judgment, opinion. Jiiiio, nm., July. Jilnio, nm., June Juntamente, adv., together, jointly. Jiinto-a, adj., joined, near, united, together with. Jurado-a, part., sworn to. Jurar, inf. vn., to swear, to make oath. Jurisprud^ncia, nf., jurisprudence, the science of law. Justamente, adv., justly, just, fair- ly. Justicia, rif., justice. Justiciero, nm., one who rigorously observes justice, one who punish- es crimes with severe justice. Justificar, irif. va., to justify. Jiisto-a, adj., just, upright, faith ful. Juventiid, rif., youth, youthfulness Juzg^do-a, part., judged, passed sentence. Juzgando, ger., judging. Juzgir, 17?/. va., to judge, to pass sentence.. li. La, def. art./., the. La, pron. per. and dem., her, it, she, that. L^bio, nm., lip. Labori6so-a, adj., laborious, indus- trious. Labrador, nm., farmer, laborer. Lado, nm., side. Ladrillo, nm., brick, tile. Lago, nm., lake. L^grima, nf., tear, tear-drop. Ldrgo-a, adj., long, large. Las, def. art.f pi., the. Las, pron. prea, and dcm., those, them, they« L^zo, nm., snare. Le, pron. per., him, it, you ; to hinx to her, to you. Lealt^d, nf, loyalty, fidelity. Leccion, nf, lesson. Lectiira, nf, reading, the act oi reading. Leer, inf. va., to read, to peruse. Leg^l, adj., legal, according to law. Lego, F. legar, ind. perf def 3 a.^ bequeathed. L^gua, nf, league. Leldo-a, part., read. L6J0S, adv., far, far off. L^ngua^ nf^ language ; tongxw. VOCABULARY. 377 LLE Lentani^nte, orfr., slowly tardily. L6nto-a, arf/., slow, lingering, tardy. Lepanto, n. prop., Lepanto. Les, pron. pars. pL, them, those, to them, to you. Letra, ti/"., letter. Levantilr, irif. ra., to raise, to rise, to elevate, to bear. LevantaraS, F. levantar, ind. \ fut. 2 5., thou shalt bear. Levante, F. levantar^ subj. pres. 3 «., may rise. Ley, 7?/*., law. Leyu, F. leer, ind.perf. def. 3 5., he read, perused. Liberal, adj., liberal, generous. Liberaliddd, nf.y liberality, generosi- ty. Liber tad, ri/!, liberty, freedom. Libertdr, ra., to free, to set at liberty. Libra, n/"., found. Librar, inf. ra., to free, to deliver. Libre, adj., free ; exempt. Libro, nm., book. Ligar, inf. va., to league, to ally, to bind. Limitar, wi/I va., to limit, to bound, to confine. Linea, nf., line ; rank or file of sol- diers. Lisonge^r, inf. va., to flatter, to praise. LLE Lisongeado-a,par/., flattered, friend. Literario-a, adj., literary, pertain- ing to letters or literature. Lo, def. art. neuter, the, that which is, what is. Lo, pron. pers. neuter, it, so ; lo qucy that which, what. Locilsto, n. prop., Locasto. Lociira, nf, folly, absurdity, rash- ness. Logrado-a, part., obtained, enjoy- ed, acquired. Logrando, ger., obtaining, enjoy- ing. Lograr, inf. va., to obtain, to en- joy, to acquire, to succeed in. Lugro, nm., accomplishment, at tainment. Londres, n. prop., London. Los, art. def m., the Los, pron.. pers. and dem., them, those, they. LucUlo, n.prop:w., Lucullus. Liicha,?!/'., struggle, strife, contest Luchar, inf. va., to struggle, tr» strive. Lugiir, nm., spot, place, village. En lugar de, in place of, instead of. Lujr)SO-a, adj., fond of show, pro- fuse, showy, luxurious. Luz. nf, light. L,T^, Llama, nf, flame. Llamado-a, pari., called, named. Llam^r, inf. va., to call, to name. LlamOj F. llamar, ind. perf def. 3 s., he or she called. Llegando, ger., arriving, reaching. Llegar, inf. vn., to arrive, to ap- proach, to attain. Llegu, F. llegar, ind. perf. def 3 s., he or she arrived. 32* Llenar, inf. va., to fill, to occupy to fulfil, to perform. Llerio-a, adj., full, filled; com plete. Lleva, F. Ihvar, ind. pres. 3 s. bears, brings, produces, carries. Llevar, inf. va., to carry, to bear, tc produce, to bring, to wear. Llevare, F. llevar, ind. I fut. 1 s., 1 shall bring, I shall carry. 378 VOCABULARY. MAN Llevu, F. Uevar^ ind. per/, def. 3 *., carried, brought, took. Llorar, inf. rn.., to weep, to mourn, tc deplore. MER Llover^, P. Uover, ind. 1 fut. 3 »., it will rain. Lluvia, Tif., rain, shower. M. Madera, rj/., wood, timber. Madre, «/., mother. Madrid, n. prop.f.^ Madrid. Maestro, nm.^ master, teacher, in- structor. Magistrado, nm., magistrate, ma- gistracy. Magnanimo-a, adj., magnanimous, generous. Mai, Tim., evil, harm, disease. Mai, adj., see Malo. Maleta, nf., portmanteau, valise. Malevo!o-a, adj.f malevolent, ma- lignant. Malo-a, adj., wicked, evil, bad ; sick, sore, diseased. Mamd, nf., mamma, mother. Manchar, inf. va., to spot, to stain, to pollute, to corrupt. Mandado-a, part, commanded, or- dered, Mandar, inf. va., to command, to order, to send. Mandd, F. mandar, ind. perf. def. 1 s., I gave orders. Manejar, inf. va., to manage, to carry on, to transact. Manera, nf, manner, custom. De manera, in such a manner. Manifestar, i7if. va,, to manifest, to show, to discover. Manifi^stan, P. manifestar, ind. pres. 3 p., they manifest, they evince. Mdno, nf, hand. M^nso-a, adj., meek, gentle, tame. Manana, nf, morning, morrow. Mauana, ac?r., to-riorrow, I Margen, nm., margin, border, edge. Marmol, nm., marble. Martillo, nm., hammer. Mas, adv., more ; el mas, la mas, lo mas, the most; mas que, or mas de, more than. Mas, conj., but, except. Matanza, nf, slaughter, butchery. Matematico, nm., mathematician. Matematico-a, adj., mathematical. Matorral, nm., a place full of bush- es, brambles or briers. Matrimunio, nm., matrimony, mar- riage. Mayor, adj., greater, larger. El mayor, la mayor, the greatest. Me, pron.pers., me, to me, for me. Mediania. nf, mediocrity, middle state. M^dio, nm., means, way, midst. Medio-a, adj., half. Mediodia, nm., noon, south. Mejicano-a, n. and ad^j., Mexican. Mejico, n. prop., Mexico. MejCr, adj., better. Elmejor, the best. Mejora, nf, improvement, melio- ration. Melodla, nf, melody, sweet music. Memorable, adj., memorable. MemCria, nf, memory, rerpem- brance; memorial, memoir. Menos, adv., less ; except. EL menos, the least. M^nte, nf, mind. Mercad^r, nm., trader, shop-keeper. Mer^ce, F. merecer, ind. pres. 3 «., merits, deserves. V0CABT7LARY. 379 MON Me'eccr, inf. va., to deserve, to merit. Merecldo-a, adj.y meritorious, mer- ited, deserving. Meiito, n?7i., merit, desert. Meriturio-a, adj.^ meritorious. Mes, nm., mouth. Metaf isico, nm., metaphysician. Ml, pron. pers., me. Mi, pron. poss., my. Mientras, adv., w.'iilst, in the mean time. Miguel, n. prop., Michael. Mil, azlj. num., a tliousand. Millar, nm., thousand. MillOn, mn., n.illion. Minerill, n. and adj., mineral. Miniito, nm., minute. Mio-a, pron. pass., my, mine. Mirada, n/., glance, look. Mirando, ger., seeing, looking at, beholding. Mirar, iiif. va., to look, to behold, to observe, to admire, to esteem. Mis, pron. poss. pi., my, Miseria, nf., misery, calamity, mis- fortune, distress. Mismo-a, adj., the same, self, self- same. Modale*?, nm. pL, manners. Modelo, nm., model, copy, exam- ple, pattern. Moderacion, nf., moderation, tem- perance. Modestia, nf, modesty, decency, decorum. Modesto-a, adj., modest, unassum- ing. MCdo, nm., manner, mode. MomentJjineo-a, adj., momentary. Momento, nm., moment ; import- ance. Miina, nf, female monkey or ape. Monar^a, nm.y monarch. Muy Monarquia, n/I, monarchy, king- dom. Monarquico-a, adj., monarchical. Mono, nm., monkey, ape. Monstruuso-a, adj., monstrous, enormous, shocking. Montana, nf, mountain. Munte, nm., mount, hill. Monton, nm., pile, heap. Moral, nm., morality, ethics Moral, adj., moral. Morlr, inf. vn., to die, to perish. M6ro-a, n. and adj.. Moor, Moorish. Mortal, adj., mortal, subject to death. Mostrador, nm., counter of a shop or store. Mostrtir, inf. va., to show, to ex- plain, to exhibit. Motivo, nm., motive, cause, mov- ing power. Mover, irf. va., to move, to put in motion, to excite. Movimiento, nm., movement, mo- tion ; revolt. Miicho-a, adj., much; mikhos-as^ many, several. Miicho, adv., much, very much. Miida, F. mudar, ind. pres. 3 s., changes. Mudar, inf. va., to change, to alter. Mu^.te, nf, death. Muerto-a, adj. and part., dead, died. Muger, nf, woman, wife. Mujer, same as muger. Mundo, nm., world. Muriu, F. morir, ind. perf def 3 «., died, he died. Murmurdr, inf. va , to murmur j to complain of, to censure. Miiro, nm., wall. Milsica, nf, music. Muy, adv., very, very much. 380 VOCABULARY. N. NIN Nacer, inf. rn., to be bom, to rise, to bud, to spring. Nacido-a, part., born, been born, risen. Nacimi^nto, nm., birth, nativity, origin. Naciun, n/*., nation. Nacionjll, adj., national. Naclonalid^d, n/*., nationality, na- tional manners and custoi*js. Nada, n/!, nothing, nonentity, naught. Nida, adv.y in no degree, by no means. Nadie, 'pron, indef., nobody, no one. Niipoles, n. prop., Naples. Natural, n. and adj., native ; natu- ral. Naturaleza, nf., nature, disposition. Naturallsta, vm., naturalist. Nav^ja, nf., razor. Navegacion, nf., navigation, voyaare. Neces^rio-a, adj., necessary, requi- site. Necesidad, nf., necessity, need. Necesitan, F. necesitar, ind. pre.". 3 pL, need, require. Necesitar, inf. va., to want, to need, to require. Necio-a, adj,, foolish, ignorant, stu- pid. Negar, inf. va., to deny, to refuse. Nigo^io, nm,, affair, business, mat- ter. Neutraliz^r, inf. va., to neutralize, to render null. Nevir, inf. v. impers., to snow. Ni, conj., neither, nor. Nieto, nm., grandson. Ni6ve, nf., snow. Ningiin, pron. indef., no, nobody, no one. NUE Ningiino-a, pron. indef., no, nr body, not any. Nina, jif., female child. Ninez, nf, childhood. Nino, nm., cliild. No, adv., not, no; nomas, nothing e!se. Nuble, adj., noble, illustrious, hon- orable. Noblemente, adv., nobly, generous- ly- Nobleza, nf, nobility. Noche, nf, night ; darkness. Nombrado-a, part., called, appoint- ed, nominated. Nombrar, inf. va., to name, to ap- point, to nominate. Numbre, nm., name ; noun. Non, adv., not (antiquated). Norte, nm., north. NCrte- Americano, nm., North A- merican. Noruego-a, adj., Norwegian. Nos, pron. ^ers, pl.j us, to us, for us; we. Nosotros-as, pron. pers. pL, we ; us. Notable, adj., notable, remarkable. Notablem^.ite, adv., notably, in a manner worthy of note, Notar. inf. va., to note, to remark, to observe. Noticia, nf, news, intelligence, in- formation. Nov^'a, nf, novel, fiction. Novi^mbre, nm., November. Nublcldo-a, adj., cloudy. Nuestro-a, pron. pass., our, ours. Nuevamcnte, adv., newly, recent Sy. Nu^va-Yurk, n.prop.. New Yoi;<. Nu6vo-a, adj., new ; de nurro, anew, again. Nu6vo-M4jico, n. prop., New JNIex- ico. VOCABULARY. 381 ocu Nulidid, 71/1, nullity, nothing- ness. Num^ncia, n. prop., Numantia. Numantlno-a, adj.^ Numcintine. ORD Niimero, nm., number. Niinca, adv.^ never. Nutrir, Inf. ra., to nourish, to cul- tivate. O. O', conj.^ or, either. Obedec^r, inf. va., to obey, to yield to. Obj^to, nm., object end, design. Obligaclon, ri/*., obligation, duty, contract. Obl:gtIdo-a, part., bound, indebted. Obligar, iif. ra., to oblige, to bind, to compel. O'bra, nf.j work, deed, labor. Obrar, i7if. ra., to work, to act, to do. Obs^quio, nm., complaisance, civili- ty. Observado-a, part., observed, look- ed at. Observ^ncia, nf., observance. Observar, inf. ra., to observe, to at- tend to, to look at, to main- tain. Observaredes, F. observar, subj. 1 fut. 2 p., ye shall observe. (It is an obsolete form for observaries.) Obstindrse, inf. vr., to be obstinate, to persist. Obten^r, inf. va., to obtain, to gain, to preserve, to maintain. Obtenldo, part., obtained. Ocasion, rf,, occasion, opportunity, motive. Ocaso, nm., the west. O'cho, adj. num., eight. Ocultdndo,^er., hiding, concealing. Octubre, nm., October. Ocupacion, nf, occupation, profes- sion, employment. Ocupido-a, par/, and oc(;., occupied, eppioyed^ busy. Ocupjlr, inf. va., to occupy, to em- ploy, to engage. Ocuirencia, jif, occurrence, inci- dent, event. Ocurrir, inf. va., to occur, to hap- pen. Odiilr, inf. va., to hate, to abhor, to detest. Ofreciendo, ger., offering, present- ing. 01, F. oir, md. perf. def. 1 s., I heard. Oido, nm., ear, the sense of hearing. Oido, part., heard. Oir, inf. ra., to hear; to listen to, to ht'td. O'jo, nm., eye ; s'ght. Oilmpico-a, adj., Olympic. Oividiir, ijf. va., to forget, to neg- Lct. Olvldo, nm., oblivion, forgetfulness. OperaciCn, nf., operation, process, agency. Opinion, nf, opinion, judgment, mental view. Opresiun. nf, oppression, coercion, tyranny. OpresCr. nm., oppressor. O' res6r-a, adj., oppressive, onerous. Opnmldo-a, part., oppressed. Oprimir, inf. va., to oppress, to crush, to bear down upon, to af- flct. Oprubio, nm., opprobrium, infamy, ignominy. Orador, nm., orator; panegyrist. Orden, rj/*., order, command, pre- cept. 382 VOCABULARY. PAR Or^ja, tt/I, ear. Organo, 7im., organ, a musical in- strument. Orgilllo, nm.j pride, haughtiness, arrogance. Orgul'uso-a, adj., proud, haughty, arrogant. Orl^nte, nm., east. Origen, nm., origin, source, mo- tive. Orniir, m/*. va., to adorn, to orna- ment. O'ro, nm., gold ; riches. PEC Os, pron. ptrs., you, yourselves, to you. Osadia, nf., courage, boldness, in- trepidity. O'so, nm., bear. Otono, nm.. Autumn. Otorgar, inf. va., to consent, to agree to. O'tro-a, indef. pron., other, another. O'ye, F. oir, ind. pres. 3 s., hears, he or she hears. Oyo, F. oir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., heard, he, she, or it heard. P. Paciencia, nf., patience. Picto, nm., compact, covenant. Padec^r, inf. va., to suffer, to be li- able to. Padre, nm., father : pMres, parents. Paga, F. pagar, ind. prcs. 3 s., pays, he pays. Pagtir, inf. ta., to pay, to reward, to atone. Pais, nm., country, nation. Pal^bra, nf, word, promise. Palad^r, nm., palate, taste. Palmo, nm., palm, inch; pdlmo a palmo, inch by inch. . Pit o A'lto, n.prop., Palo Alto (high timber) Paf A\, adj., Papal, belonging to the Pope. Psp^l, nm., paper; newspaper. PJra, prep., for, to, towards. Para con, in regard to, as to, concern- ing. Pardje, nm., place ; disposition. Par^cen, F. parecer, ind. pres. 3p , they appear, they resemble, look alike. Parecer, inf. vn. and rr., to appear, to rescm'^ le. Pari^nte, nm., relation, kindred. Parte, nf, part, share. Parte, adv.^ partly. Particularmente, adv., particularly, especially. Partido, nm., party, part, means, measure. Pas^do-a, part., past, passed. Pasando, ger., passing. Pasar, in/, va., to pass, to walk along, to cross, to exceed, to go, to spend. * Pas^o, nm., walk, walking-place. Piiso, nm., step, pass, passage. Paso, F. pasdr, ind. pres. 1 $., I puss. Pasto, nm., food, nourishment, pas- ture. P atria, nf., native country, coun- try. Patriotico-a, adj., patriotic. Paus :dam6nte, adv., slowly, by de- grees. Paz, nf., peace. Pecddo, nm., sin, transgression. Pecildo, part., sinnod, done injus- ti e. Pec^r, to sin, to offend against right. P^cho, 71711., breast, bosom, heart. VOCABULARY. 383 PER Pedinte, nm.i pedant, a man vain of little knowledge. Pedazo, nm., piece, bit, fragment. Pedir, iTif. va., to ask, to petition, to beg, to demand. Pedro, n. prop., Peter. Pelayo, n. prop., Pelayo. Peligro, nm., danger, risk, hazard. Peligroso-a, adj., dangerous, hazard- ous. PelMjo, nm., skin, hide. P^na, n/., punishment, penalty, pain. Penetracion, nf., penetration, dis- cernment. Penetrar, inf. va., to penetrate, to pierce, to force through. Peninsula, nf., peninsula. Pensami^nto, nm., thought, idea, design. Pensdr, inf. va., to think, to be- lieve, to imagine, to intend. Pequeiio-a, adj., small, little, unim- portant. Peur, adj. and adv., worse. Perd^r, inf. va., to lose, to miss, to misspend. Perdida, rif., loss, damage, detri- ment. Perdido-a, part., lost, been deprived of. Perdiu, F. perder, ind.perf. def. 3 s., lost, he lost. Perdonando, ger., pardoning, ex- cusing. Perdon^r, inf. va., to pardon, to for- give, to excuse. Perez6so-a, adj., lazy, indolent, slothful. Perfeccii3n, nf., perfection, excel- lence. Perfldia, nf, perfidy, treachery. Periodico, nm., periodical, newspa- per. PIR Perlto-a, adj., skilful, experienced. Permanec^r, inf. vn., to persist, to remain, to endure. Permiso, nm., permission, leave. Permitldo-a, part., permitted, al- lowed. Permitir, inf. va., to permit, to grant. Pero, conj., but, except, yet. Perpetuo-a, adj., perpetual, continu- al. Perro,^ nm., dog. Persecucion, nf, pursuit, persecu tion. Persistir, inf.vn., to persi.«* to per- severe, to insist. Persona, nf, person, individ'ial. Personalniente, adv,^ persona'ly, in person. Persuadir, inf. va., to persuad*^. to induce. Pertenece, F. pertenecer, ind. p- s, 3 s., belongs. Perverso-a, adj., perverse, wicked, stubborn. Pesadez, nf, weight, heaviness* burden. Pesar, nm., sorrow, grief. A^ ptata^ de, in defiance of, in spite of. Pesca, nm., fish, fishery. Pescadur, nm., fisherman, fish monger. Piamontes, n. prop., Piedmont ese. Picante, adj., stinging, cutting, sar castic. Pidiendo, ger., asking, beggincf. Pie, nm., foot ; bottom. Piedra, nf, stone. Pierdas, F. perder, subj. pres. 2 s . thou mayest lose. Pintor^sco-a, adj., picturesque. Pio, n. prop.. Pins. Pirineos, n. prop. pL, Pyrenees. 8S4 VOCABULARY. POR Plsan, F. -pisar^ ind. pres. 3 p/., tread, trample, step upon. Pisir, inf. ra., to tre^d, to step upon. Plact-r, nm., pleasure, graiificationj enjoyment. Plan, nm., plan, design. Planta, 77/., sole of the foot. PI intear, m/ ra., to pi m, to scheme. Plata, 7i/;, silver ; wealth, money. Pleito, nm., law-suit ; contest. Pliima, nf., pen, feather, quill. Poblaciun, w/., population ; town. Pobre, adj., poor, indigent ; unfor- tunate. Poco, rwi., little. P6ro-a, adj. and adv., little. Pocosy few. Poder, nm., power, might, authori- ty. Poder, inf. vn., to be able, to have power. PoderCso-a, adj., powerful, mighty. Podido, part,, being able, been able. Podra, ¥. poder, ind. 1/u/. 3 s., will be able. Podrla, F. poder, svbj. impf 1 or 3 .9., he might be able, he might. Poesia, fif., postry. Poeta, nm., poet. Politico-a, adj., politic, political. Polvo, nm., dust. Ponderar, inf. va., to ponder, to weigh, to examine. Pon^r, inf. ra,, to place, to put, to impose. Ponzona, nf, poison. Por, prep., by, for, through, on ac- count of, in behalf of, as. Pormenor, nm., detail, particular ac- count. Porque, conj., because, for the rea- son that. Poiqu^, adj.i why, for what reason. PRE Portarse, inf. vr., to conduct, to comport, to behave. Portendo, see poi-lento. Portento, nm., prodigy, wonder. Posada, n/*., inn, tavern, hotel. Posad^ro, nm., inn-keeper. Posdata, nf., postscript. Posean, F. poseer, subj. pres. 3 p., may possess. Poseer, inf. va., to possess, to have. Posible, adj., possible. Posicion, nf, position, situation. PCsta, nf, mail, post-ofiice. Posteridad, nf, posterity. • Potencia, nf., power; kingdom, state. Pidctica, nf, practice. Practicar, inf. va., to practice, ♦.o perform. Precipidamcnte, precipitately, has- t-ly. Precision, ??/., precision, necessity, obligation. Preferible, adj., preferable. Prefiero, F. preferir, ind. pres. 1 *., I prefer. Pregunta, nf, question, inquiry. Preguntddo-a, part., being asked, questioned. Preguntar, inf. va., to ask, to ques- tion. Preguntu, F. preguntar, ind.peif. dcf 3 s., asked, he inquired. Prenda, nf., accomplishment, tal- ent, quality. Prend^r, inf. va., to take, to seize, to catch. Pr^nsa, nf, printing-press, press. Preocupaciun, nf, prejudice. Prepardndo, ger., preparing. Preparar, inf. va., to prepare, to make ready. Pres^ncia, nf^ pre sence. VOCABULART. 385 PRO Presenter, %nf. ra., to present^ to 'loiFer, to make a donation to. Presente, adj.^ present. Presidente, ?j7n., president. Presuroso-a, adj., hasty, quick. Pretender, inf. va., to pretend, to claim, to attempt. Primavera, rif., spring Primer, adj., first. Primero-a, adj., first ; chief. PrimCr, nm., dexterity, nicety. Principal, orf/., principal, noble. Principe, nm., prince; king. Principio, n?M., principle, begin- ning, motive. Prisionero, nm., prisoner, captive. Privado-a, part.^ deprived. ?rivar, irif. va., to deprive, to de- spoil. Probar, inf. va., to try, to prove, to examine. Probidad, n/!, probity, integrity. Proceder, nm., proceeding, manner of proceeding, conduct. Proceder, inf. va., to proceed, to act. Proclam^r, inf. va., to proclaim, to give notice publicly. Procsimidad, nf., proximity, conti- guity. Prociira, F. procurar, imp. 2 s., en- deavor thou. Procurar, inf. va., to endeavor, to manage, to solicit. Prodiicen, F. prodttcir, ind. pros. 3 p., they produce. Producido-a, part., produced. Produclr, inf. va., to produce, to bring fort(j. Profundamente, adv., profoundly. Profiindo-a, adj., profound, deep. Progreso, nm., progress, advance- ment. PrCyimo, nm.| neighbor. ^ 33 PUB Proraeter, inf. va., to promise. Prontamente, adv., quickly, prompt- ly. PrCnto, adv., soon, immediately. Pronunciar, inf. va., to pronounce, to deliver (a speech). Pronunciacion, nf, pronunciation. Propiam^nte, ac^»., properly, appro- priately, regularly. PrCpio-a, adj., proper, own, pecu- liar. Proporciun, ?//., proportion; simi- larity. Proporcionado, part., proportioned, adapted, procured. Propiiso, F . proponer, ind. perf def. 3 s., he or she proposed. Prusa, nf, prose, prose- writings. Prosador, nm., a prose writer, a prosy writer or speaker. Proseguir, inf. va., to continue, to pursue, to follow. Prosperid^d, nf, prosperity, suc- cess. Proteccion, nf, protection, favor, shelter. Protector, nm., protector, patron, supporter. Protej^r, inf. va., to protect, to fa* vor, to patronize. Provenir, inf. va., to arise, to origi- nate. Provincia, nf, province, territory. Proy^ctil, nm., projectile. Proyecto, nm., project, plan, scheme. Prudam^nte, adv., prudently. Prud^ncia, nf, prudence, wisdom. Prueba, nf, proof, evidence. Publicddo-a, part., published. Publican, P. publicar, ind. pres. o pi., they publish. Publicando, ger.j publishing) pro- claiming. 386 VOCABULARY. REA Publicar. inf. ra., to publish, to pro- claim, to manifest. Piiblico-a, adj.^ public ; common. Pudieran, F. poder^ suhj. imp/. 3p., ihey might be able, could. Piido, F. poder^ ind. perf. def. 3 s., was able, could. Pueblo, nm.^ town, people. Puede, F. poder, ind. prcs. 3 s., is able, can, may, he or she can. Pueden, F. poder, ind. pres. 3 p., they are able, they can, may. Pu^des, F. poder^ ind. pres. 2 «., thou art able, thou canst or mayest. REC Puedo, F. poder^ ind. pres. 1 «., I am able, I can or may. ^ Puente, nm. and n/!, bridge. Pueriliddd, nf., puerility, childish- ness, trifle. Pues, or, pu^s que, conj., then, since, because. Puesto, nm.y place, post. Pucsto-a, part., placed, put. Pilnto, nm., point, spot. Pur^za, nf., purity. Piiro-a, adj., pure, unmixed, clear, genuine. a. Q,ue, pron. rel, that, which, who, whom, what. Que, conj., than ; as, since, because, that. Q,uebrant^r, inf. va., to break, to vi- olate. Q.uedar, inf. vn., to stay, to remain, to exist. Q,ued6, F. quedar, ind. -perf. def. 3 5., he remained. Quehac^r, nm., business, occupa- tion. Q,uej^rse, inf. vr., to complain, to lament. Q,uem^r, inf. va., to bum. Q,uerer, iiif. va., to wish, to be willing, to be fond of, to will. Querido-a, adj..^ dear, beloved. Queri^ndo, ger., wishing, desiring, loving. Q,ui^n, pron, rel., who, that, whom, he who. Q,ui6res, F. querer, ind. pres. 2 s., thou art willing, thou wishest. Q,uijute, n. prop., Q,uixote. Quimico, nm., chemist. Q^uince, adj. num., fifteen. Q-uisiere, F. querer, subj. Ifut.^s.; shall be willing. Quita, F. quitarse, imp. 2 5., take them off R. Raclmo, nm., cluster, bunch. Racion^l, adj., rational. Rdmo, nm., branch, shoot. RSpidamente, adv., rapidly. Raro-a, adj., rare, uncommon. Rasc^ndo, ger., scratching. Rdso-a, adj., plain, bare, open. RazoD, n/l, reason, right. Re^i adj.^ xbyal } real. Realz^r, inf. va., to heighten, to elevate. Reanim^r, inf. va., to reanimate, to cheer. Rebaj^ndo, ger.^ lesseWng, dimin- ishing- Reca^r, inf. va., to fall back. Rechaz^r, ir\f» pa., to repel, to con- uadict. V0CABT7LART. 387 REG RecibiG, F. 7 6cifcir, ind. per/, def. 3 s., received, he received. Reciblr, inf. va., to receive, to ac- cept. Recientem^nte, adv., recently, late- ly. Recinto, nm.j precinct. Recliita, nm., recruit. Recobrando, ger., recovering. Recompensado-a, part., recom- pensed, rewarded. Recompensar, irif. va., to reward, to recompense. Recompensara, F. recompensar, ind, I fat. 3 s., will reward. Reconocido-a, part, and adj., ac- knowledged; grateful. Reconocimlento, nm., recognition, acknowledgment, gratitude. Record ar, inf. va., to remind, to re- call. R^cto-a, adj., right, just, straight. Recu^rdo, nrn., remembrance, me- mento, recollection. Reciirso, nm., resource, means, re- course. Reducido-a, part., reduced. Reducir, inf. va., to reduce, to les- sen. Referir, inf. va., to relate, to re- port. Reflexion, nf, reflection, consider- tion. Reforma, nf, reformation, amend- ment. Regado, part., watered. Regalo, nm., convenience, benefit, regalement, pleasure. Regando, ger,, moistening, flood- ing, wetting. Regia, F. regir, ind. impf 3 s., ruled, governed. Ri^gla, n/:, rule, regulation. Regocij^ndo, ger., rejoicing. RES Regocijir, inf. va., to rejoice, to gladden. Regocljo, nm., joy, rejoicing, de- light. Regreso, nm., return. Regular, adj., regular, common, proper. Regularizar, inf. va., to methodize, to regulate, to have or keep regu- lar. Reinado, nm., reign. Reino, nm., kingdom. Relampaguea, F. relampaguear, ind. pres. 3 s., it lightens, ii flashes. Reliice, F. relucir, ind. pres. 3 s. shines, glitters. Remedio, nm., remedy, resource reparation. Remu6ven, F. remover, ind. pres. 3 p., remove. Reparar, inf. va., to repair, to make amends for ; to notice. Repeler, inf. va., to repel, to reject. Replto, F. repeth-f ind. pres. 1 s., I repeat. Repitiendo, ger., repeating. Repltlo, F. repetir, ind. perf def. 3 s., repeated. Keplicar, ivf. va., to reply, to an- swer. Repllco, F. replicar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., replied. Reposar, inf. vn., to repose, to rest. Representaciun, nf, representation, figure, image. ReprCche, r?w., reproach, reproof. Reproducido-a, part., reproduced Repiiblica, nf, republic. Reputacion, nf, reputation, fame, credit. Resdca, n. prop., Resaca (surge, rolhng land). Rescatado-a, part., ransomed. 388 VOCABULARY. SAC Rescat^r, irtf. ra., to ransom. Resid^nte, nm., resident. Resist^ncia, rj/., resistance, opposi- tion. Resister, ivf. va., to resist, to op- pose. Resolver, inf. va., to resolve, to de- termine. Resonar, inf. vn., to resound, to re- echo. Respetable, adj., respectable. Respeto, nni., respect, regard, vene- ration. Respetuosamente, adv., respectful- ly. Respirar, inf. vn., to respire, to breathe. Responder, inf. va., to respond, to answer. Respondiu, F. responder, ind. perf def. 3 s., he responded, repli- ed. Respu^sta, n/*., reply, answer. Restante, adj., remaining, rest. Restar, inf. va., to remain, to be left. Pcesto, ??./n., rest, remaining part. Resfos, remains. Result^do, nm.f result, issue. SAL Ret^r, inf. va., to impeach, to chal* lenge. Retirar, inf. va., to retire, to with- draw. Reunion, 77/., meeting, congrega- tion, party. Reunir, inf. va., to join, to unite, to assemble. Reunir^n, F. reunir, ind. 1 fut. 3 p., will join, will unite. Reves, nm., back part, reverse, ill success. Revolucion, nf, revolution, change, sedition. Rey, nm., king. Ribera, nf, bank, shore. Rico-a, adj., rich, wealthy. Rigor, nm., severity, rigor. Rio, nm., river. Robo, nm., robbery, theft. Roedor, nm., gnawer ; gusano roe' dor, gnawing worm, remorse. Romano-a, n. and adj., Roman. Romper, inf. va., to break, to break through, to transgress. Rubor, nm., blush, shame. Ruido, nm., noise. Ruina, nf, ruin, downfall. Riisia, n. prop., Russia. Saber, hf. va., to know, to under- stand. Sabes, F. saber, ind.pres. 2 s., thou knowest. Sabla, F. saber, ind. impf. 3 s., he knew, was knowing. Sabiduria, nf, wisdom, knowledge. S^bio-a, adj,, wise, learned. Sacaron, F. sacar, ind. perf. def. 3 p., they drew out, took out. Sacerdote, nm., clergyman, priest. Sacriflcio, nm., sacrifice, compli- ance. Sacudir, inf. va., to shake, to shake off. Sagrado-a, adj., sacred, consecrated, holy. Sagilnto, n. prop., Saguntum (now Murviedro). S^la, nf, hall. Saladcro, nm., salting-place, Sdlgo, F. salir, ind. pres. 1 s., I set out, I start. Salido-a, part., gone out, issued. Salimos, F. salir, ind. perf. def, 1 p., we went out. VOCABULARY. 389 SEG Salir, inf. rn., to set out, to go out, to start, to depart. Salle, n/., hull. Salto, F. saltar, ind. per/, def. 3 s., leaped, he jumped. Salud^ble, adj.^ healthful, salubri- ous. Salvador, nm., Saviour, redeemer. Salvage, 72m., savage. Salvar, inf. ra., to save, to spare. San, adj.^ an abbreviation for santo. Sancionar, inf. va., to sanction. Sangre, nf, blood. Sangriento-a, adj., bloody, sangui- nary. Sanguinario-a, adj., sanguinary, bloody. Sano-a, adj., sound, wholesome, healthy. Santo-a, adj., sacred, holy. Sardonico-a, adj., sardonic. Satisfaccion, nf, satisfaction, re- compense, gratification. Satisfecho-a, part., satisfied, con- tented. Se, pron. i-eflec, one's self, himself, herself, itself, themselves; each other ; to him, to her, to you, to it, to them. Se, F. saber, ind. pres. 1 s., I know. Se, F. ser, imp. 2 s., be thou. Sea, F. ser, subj. pres. 3 s., may be, it may he. Secretam^nte, adv., secretly, pri- vately. Secreto-a, adj., secret, hidden, con- cealed. Secund^do-a, part., seconded, sup- ■ ported. Sed, nf, thirst. Seguida, nf., following, succession. De seguida, successively, after- ward. •' • 33* SER Seguldo-a, part., followed, continu- ed. Seguir, inf. va., to follow, to pursue, to prosecute. Segiin, prep., according to, accord- ing as. Segiindo-a, adj., second. Seguro-a, adj., secure, sure, con- stant. Seis, adj. num., six. Sembrar, inf. va., to sow, to plant. S emej ante, ac?;., such, similar, like; equal. Semejanza, nf, similitude, resem- blance. Sencillo-a, adj., simple, neat, plain Sendero, nm., path. Seneca, n. prop., Seneca. Sensato-a, adj., sensible, judicious prudent. Sentemos, F. sentar, imp. 1 p., lei us seat, let us sit. Sentencia, nf, sentence, opinion, judgment. Sentimiento, nm., sentiment, feel- ing. Sentlr, inf. va., to feel, to be sorry for, to perceive, to be moved. Sena, nf., sign, mark. Seiial, nm., sign, signal, symptom. Sen alar, inf. va., to mark, to indi- cate, to point out, to stamp. SefiGr, nm., Lord, gentleman, mas- ter, sir, Mr. Seiiura, nf, lady, madam, mistress, Mrs. Separado-a, part., separated. Separ^r, inf. va., to separate, to di- vide, to part, to withdraw. Sepdlcro, nm., sepulchre, tomb grave. Sepultado-a, part:, buried, interred Ser, nm., being, existeJnce. ' Ser, inf. vn., to be, lb exist. ' 390 VOCABULARY. SIN Sera, F. scr, ind. Ifut. 3«., shall or will be. Ser^no-a, adj., serene, quiet, calm, peaceful. Serla, F. ser, subj. imp/. 3 s., would or should be. Serpiente, n/"., serpent. Servicio, nw., service, use, favor, benefit. Servldo-a, part., served ; pleased. Servir, inf. va. and vr., to serve, to suit, to do a favor, to be pleased, to vouchsafe. Sesdnta, adj. num., sixty. Set^nta, adj. num., seventy. Set., nm., abbreviation for Seiiem- hre, September. SI, pron. pers., himself, herself, it- self, themselves, each other. Si, conj., if, though, whether. Si, adv., yes, yea, truly. Sido, part., been. Si^mbre, F. sembrar, subj.pres. 3 s., may sow, may plant. Siempre, adv., always, ever. Para siempre, for ever. Siendo, ger., being. Siete, adj. num., seven. Slglo, nm., age, century. Siguiendo, ger,, following, prose- cuting. Siguiente, adj., following, succeed- ing. SiMncio, nm., silence. Silenciosam^nte, adv., silently. Simple, adj., simple, plain, pure. Sin, prep., without. Sinceramente, adv., sincerely. Sinc^ro, adj., sincere, real, honest. Singular, adj.t singular, extraordi- nary. Slno, conj. and prep., but, only, ex- cept, unless. SlaCCBifl) r^,, synthesis. SOS Slrva, F. servir, subj, pres. 3 »»t may serve. Sirviendo, ger., serving. Sitio, nm., site, spot, siege, situa- tion. Situacion, 7if., situation, state. Soberano, nm., sovereign. Soberbia, rif., pride, haughtiness, vanity. Soberbio-a, adj., proud, haughty, vain. Subre, prep., on, upon, over; be- Sobresalir, inf. va., to surpass, to excel. Sociedad, rif., society; friendship. Socorro, nm., succor, aid. Sofista, 7im., sophist. Sojuzgar, inf. va., to subjugate, to subdue, to conquer. Sol, nm., sun. Solamente, adv., only, solely. Soldado, nm., soldier. Solemnemente, ac?i7., solemnly. S61o-a, adj., only, alone. Sumbra, nf., shade, shelter. Sombrero, nm., hat. Somos, F. ser, ind. pres, I p., we are. Son, F. ser, ind. pres. 3 p., are, they are. Sonrie, F. sonreir, ind, pres, 3 s., smiles. Sonrlsa, nf., smile. Sorprendente, adj., surprising, won- derful. Sorprender, inf. va,, to surprise, to astonish. Sorprendido-a, part., surprised. Sorpresa, ti/"., surprise, astonish- ment. Sosp^cha, nf., suspicion, mistrust. ^ospech^r, inf. uo*, to suspect, fo mistrust. VOCABULARY. 391 TEM Sosten^r, inf. ra., to sustain, to support, lo maintain. Sostenido-a, part.^ sustained, main- tained. S6y, F. setf ind. pres. 1 5., I am. Spartano, n.prop., Spartan. Su, pron, poss.f its, his, her, their, your. S.uavemente, adv., gently, sweetly, softly, mildly. Siibdito, nm., subject. Sublime, adj., sublime, grand. Suceder, irif. vn., to succeed, to hap- pen. Suceso, nm.j success, event. SucesOr, nm., successor. Su^lo, Tim., soil, ground, floor. Sueno, nm., sleep, dream. Su^rte, nf., lot, fate. TES Sufici^nte, adj., sufficient, enough, able. Sufrir, inf. va., to suffer, to bear. Sujetar, inf. va., to subject, to re- duce. Sumldo-a, par/., plunged, swallow- ed up, absorbed. Sumir, inf. va., to be swallowed up. Superficial, adj., superficial, shal- low. Superior, adj., superior, higher. Suponer, irif. va., to suppose, to imagine. Sus, pron. pass., his, her, its, their, your. Susceptible, adj., susceptible. Siisto, nm., fright, terror. Siiyo-a, pron.poss., his, hers, theirs, yours. Tal, adj., such, similar, equal. TaL i?ez, perhaps. ^Qwc/oZ? howdo you like it 1 what sort ? Tal^nto, nm., talents, genius, abili- ty. Tamaiio-a, adj., sizable, so great, such a kind of. Tambien, adv., also, likewise. Tan, adv., as, so, as much. Tanto-a, adj., so much, as much, so ; tantos-as, so many, as many. Tapa, nf., lid, cover. Tardaba, F. tardar, ind. impf. 3 s., delayed, was tardy. Tardar, inf. rn., to delay, to put off, to tarry, to be long (in time). T^rde, vf, afternoon, evening; late. Te, pron, poss., thee, to .thee. , Teatro, nm., theatre. Telegr^fia, nf, art of telegraphing. Telegrafo, nm., telegi*aph. Temer, inf va,, to fear, to dread, to refverence. Temo, F. iemtr, ind. pres. 1 «., I fear. TemOr, nm., fear, terror, reverence Temprano, ac^'., early. Tendre, F. tener, ind. \fut. 1 s., I shall have. Tendrian, F. tener, suhj. impf. 3 p., they might have, they would have. Tenemos, F. tener, ind. pres. 1 p., we have. Tener, inf va., to have, to possess, to keep, to hold. Tengamos, F. tener, suhj. pres. 1 p., we may have^ Tenido, part., had, held. Tentativa, nf, attempt, trial, essay. Termin^do-a, part., terminated, closed. T^rmino, nrn., termination, limit, term. Terreno, nm., ground, land. Te^it), rcTiu, treasure. 392 VOCABULARY. ULT Testam^nto, nm., will, testament. Tcstigo, nm.f witness, evidence, proof. Testimunio, nm., testimony, wit- ness. Ti, pron. pers.j thee. Ti^mpo, nm., time, weather. Tiene, F. tener^ iiid.pres. 3 «., has. Tidnen, F. tener, ind. pres. 3 p., have, they have. Tienes, F. teneVy ind. pres. 2 s., thou hast. Ti^rra, n/*., the earth, land, soil, country. Tirania, ;i/*., t)rranny, despotism. Tirano, nm., tyrant. Tirano-a, adj.^ tyrannical. TCca, F. tocar, ind. pres. 3 s., touch- es, plays, he plays. Tocar, inf. ra., to touch, to feel, to belong to, to play (on a musical instrument). Todo-a, pron. indef., all, every; ev- ery thing. Tomando, ger.^ taking, assuming. To mar, inf. ra., to take, to assume, to occupy. Tono, nm.f tone, voice ; tune. Toro, nm.y bull. Torre, r?/*., tower, steeple, spire. Total, adj., total, universal. Trabajando, ger.^ laboring, toiling. Trabajo, nm., work, trouble, toil. Traer, inf. ra., to bring, to carry, to bear ; to wear. Tr^gico-a, adj., tragical. Traiciun, ri/*., treason, treachery. Traiddr, nm. and adj., traitor; trai- torous. ULT Tranquilizar, irf. va.y to calm, to tranquilize. Tranquilo-a, adj.j tranquil, calm, quiet. Transcurrldo, part., passed over. Traspasar, irf. va., to pierce. Trastormar, i'f. va., to overthrow, to derange. Trata, F. iratar, ind. pres. 3 «., treats ; airjs at. Tratar, inf. va., to treat, to intend, to have intercourse. Traves, nr/i., bias, traverse. Al travesde, across, through. Trecientos,a£/;.nwm., three hundred. Tr^inta, adj. num., thirty. Tres, adj. r,ur,u.y three. Tribu, nvi. ui/., tribe, class. Tribunal, ivin., tribunal, court. Triste, adj., sad, melancholy. Tristeza, nf, sadness, grief, sorrow. Tridnfo, nm., triumph. TrofSo, nm., trophy. Trono, nm., throne. Tropa, nf, troop, band. Truena, F. trondr, ind. pres. 3 «., it thunders. Tru^que, nm., exchange. Tii, pron. pers., thou (used by pa- rents in addressing children; masters, their servants ; and inti- mate friends, each other). Tu, pron. puss., thy. Tiimba, nf, tomb, sepulchre. Tumulo, nm., tomb. Turb^r, inf. va., to disturb, to trouble. Tus, pron. poss., thy, your. Tiiyo-a, pron. poss., thy, thine. U. U', conj., or, either (used before words beginning with o or ho). U'ltimamente, adj., lastly, lately. U'ltimo-a, adj., last, final. Ultrajado-a, part., outraged, abun^ ed, offended. VOCABULARY. 393 VEN Un, art. or adj., a, an, one. U'na, scQ uno. Unanimemente, adv.^ unanimously. U'nen, F. unir, ind. pres. 3 p., unite, they join, U'nico-a, adj., only, alone, sole, sin- gular. Unido-a, pari., united, joined to- gether. Union, n/*., union. VES Unlr, inf. va., to unite, to join. Universal, adj., universal, general. U'no-a, art., adj. and pron. indef., a, an. one, any one. Uncs-as. some. Usar, inf. va., to use, to employ. U'so, nm., employment, usage. Usurpar, inf. va., to usurp. U'til, adj., useful. U'va, nf, grape. V. (contracted for vsted), your wor- ship, you. VV. {ustedes) your worships, you. Va, P. ir, ind. pres. 3 s., goes. Vagar, inf. va., to rove, to loiter, to play, to linger. Vale, F. valcr, ind. pres. 3 s., is worth, avails. Vale m OS, F. valer, ind. pres. 3 s., we have power. Valer, inf. vn., to be worth, to avail, to have power. Valor, nm., valor, courage, value. Vamos, F. ir, imp, 1 p., let us go, come, come on. Vano-a, adj., vain, arrogant, empty. Vapor, nm., steam, steamer. Vari^do-a, adj., variegated. Vario-a, adj., various, several, changeable. Varon, ?im., man, male. Vasallo, nm., vassal, subject. Vayamos, see vamos. Veces. see vez. Vecino-a, adj., neighboring, near. Vejez, nf, old age. Veinte, adj. num., twenty. V^lo, nf, veil, pretence, curtain. Vemos, F. ver, ind. pres. 1 p., we see. Ven, F. venir, ind. pres. 2 s., come thou, come. V^na, 7if., vein, artery. V^nce, F. veneer, ind. pres. 3 «., conquers. Vendando, ger., bandaging, tying a bandage around. Vendido, part., sold. Veneracion, rf., veneration, respect. Venerar, in/*, va., to venerate, to re- spect. Veng^nza, nf, revenge, vengeance. Venidero-a, adj., coming, future. Venldo, part., come, arrived. Venir, inf. vn., to come, to arrive ; to happen. Ventiira, rf., fortune, success, gooo luck. Ventur6so-a, adj., fortunate, happy, successful. Veo, F, ver, ind. pres. 1 s., I see. Verano, nm., summer. Veras, F. ver, ind. Ifut. 2 s., thou wilt see. Verdaderamente, adv., truly, really. Verdadero-a, adj., true, real, sincere. Verde, adj., green. Veremos, F. r%!lfi^y||>„^^|| 7 ?A\S ,0„ ,0 DUE DATE DUE AS STAMPED BELOW AUTO. DISC » UUL Zl B9 } "a^h t J ^nn fX "^ 5hP 1 4 TDD I UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELE FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 1/83 BERKELEY, CA 94720 a m 0C990 U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES CDD332SaMa 968309 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY m iN^ ^ :m •^•■Wk?*/ mr .'5i ^^.i iri \MtM